free pdf download,
                go: here,
                ... go there,
                for a copy at cost to hold in your hand
        
        
        

        
          New Wine
        
        
        

        
      
foundational essays out of a Science of the Spirit,
in support of the coming
 living metamorphosis of Christianity
          
        
by Joel A. Wendt
social
          philosopher...and occasional fool
        
        
        

        
        
        
contents
          
        
author's brief forward: (p. 2)
          [page numbers are approximate]
        
        
New Wine: the art of the
          sacrament of reason on the altar of
          devotion (p.6)
          
        
The Idea of Mind: a Christian
          meditation
          practitioner considers the problem of consciousness  (p. 8)
          
        
The Quiet Suffering of
          Nature:
           humanity
cannot
          be separated from Nature (p. 36)
          
        
A Matter of Death (p. 59)
          
        
a small meditation on the
          spiritual path pioneered by
          Ralph Waldo Emerson, including a report of some practical
          applications:
        delivered
          on the
          occasion of Emerson's 200 birthday, May 25th, 2003, at the
          Alcott
          School of Philosophy in Concord, Massachusetts (p.63)
          
        
this and that: some thoughts on the
          Four Noble Truths ((p. 70)
          
        
pragmatic moral psychology (p.
          76)
          
        
The Misperception of Cosmic Space As Appears In the Ideas of Modern Astronomy: and as contained in the understandable limited thinking regarding the nature of parallax and red shift. (p. 88)
        
Healing the
              Insanity of Psychiatric Medicines and
              Practice: what
              common sense and a return to the knowledge of soul and
              spirit might
              mean for our mental health system and care
              (p. 163)
              
            
Transcendentalism Comes of
              Age* - the transcendentalist impulse, heretical Christianity and
              American
              Anthroposophy - (p.
              182)
            
              The
                Arcanum of the
                Loom: the
                spiritual meaning
                of the Internet (p. 191)
            
            the next four are
              recently added -
              and can also be found in the published book at Lulu.com
            http://www.lulu.com/product/paperback/new-wine/11927276
              
                The Coming Metamorphosis of Christianity
              
                Sam Harris and Humanity's Moral Future
              
                Saving the Catholic Religion from the Roman Church 
              through deepening
                our understanding of the
                Third Fatima Prophecy
              
                Barack Obama and the reality of the Anii-Christ Spirit
              
        
appendix
two essays published elsewhere, included
here as a help in the introduction to a rational
religious
          impulse, and a religious scientific impulse
          
        
The Meaning of Earth
          Existence in the Age of the
          Consciousness Soul 
          
        
In Joyous Celebration of the
          Soul Art and Music of
          Discipleship 
          
        
**************************
          
        
author's brief forward
          The essays collected in this tiny book were written over a
          period of
          almost two decades, and represent several provisional attempts
          to lay a
          foundation for a more rational Christianity.  These
          essays can be
          read as a preparation for a closer examination of those
          matters to be
          found in my books: the Way of
          the Fool: the conscious
          development of
          our human character, and the future* of Christianity - both to
          be born
          out of the natural union of Faith and Gnosis;
          and, American Anthroposophy: a celebration of the American
          Soul's unique ability to contribute to the future of
          Anthroposophy, and
          to the future of world culture.
          
        
The Way of the Fool is meant to
          be an opening dialog between exoteric Christianity (the Way of
          Faith,
          or of the Shepherds) and esoteric Christianity (the Way of
          Gnosis, or
          of the Kings).  American
          Anthroposophy is meant to be a
          corrective of
          certain errors into which certain aspects of the practice of
          esoteric
          Christianity fell during the latter two-thirds of the 20th
          Century.
           The study of the essays below should provide a sound
          basis for
          later taking up either or both of the above two books.
          
        
I have, in
          reviewing these essays for
          inclusion in this little book, made a few small corrections to
          their
          original text, and as well began this small  book with a
          very
          brief new essay as an introduction.
          
        
As this book is
          introductory, you will
          find that it mentions many other books and writers in the
          individual
          essays.   That is what this little book means to do,
          to
          introduce the reader to a literature and work they may have no
          idea
          exists.   They also may not know that such
          literature and
          work represents nothing less than New Revelation, for a great
          deal of
          this work is fully rooted in a conscious connection to the
          Divine
          Mystery.
          
        
This last needs
          some more explanation.
           The Divine Mystery is living (...in it was life and
          the
          life was the light of the world...).
           It
          is ever new, and when people try to fix such revelation in the
          text of
          a book such as the Bible, they kill this living revelation
          that wants
          to always be able to speak to us in our present.
            People at
          a certain time create these books, selecting what to include
          and what
          to exclude.   They then justify this human activity
          and claim
          for it divine inspiration.  For example, the Roman
          Catholic Church
          over the centuries often deviated from the truth and became
          lost in
          earthly temptations.   At these moments the Mystery
          would
          inspire a corrective in the various Saints and the founders of
          several
          of the religious orders (such as the Franciscans).  Those
          who
          understand this history will realize how little of these
          correctives
          were accepted and became fundamental reform in the
          hierarchical social
          form that was the institutional Church.  The Mystery
          found voices
          to speak through, and while the hierarchical institutional
          structure
          was unable to hear, enough of the laity was able to listen,
          such that
          as time passed, at least a few individuals could deepen their
          religious
          experience in the religious orders.
          
        
Unfortunately,
          even the orders would grow
          old, and fix their rule into dogma.   When you
          couple this
          with the Church's punishment of those who express supposedly
          incorrect
          doctrine, you get a social process where institutional power
          is always
          able to trump the work of the Mystery as it continuously
          inspires
          individuals.  If we examine the institutional Church we
          find it
          lost in legalisms and a vanity of power and authority (instead
          of true
          humility and service).  There is no room in such a
          structure, or
          in the souls of those who adhere to it blindly, for the
          Mystery to
          bring in the living, always modern and to the point, new revelation.
          
        
As the
          scientific age progressed,
          religious doctrine and dogma became more and more rigidly
          held.
            While science on the one hand opposed
          institutional
          Christianity, this same institutional power structure more and
          more
          tried to carve out a field of thought where it could claim
          superior or
          moral authority.   During the advent of science (the
          Copernican revolution), new revelation that was unable to
          enter into
          the institutional Church was punished as heresy, and those who
          disagreed with doctrine were tortured and murdered.
          
        
As a
          consequence, this constant and
          ongoing living stream of wisdom hid itself, in the work of the
          alchemists, the original Rosicrucian's and other similar work
          and
          individuals.  A division was manifesting between Faith
          and Gnosis,
          for while Faith (becoming more and more an arid belief in the
          institutional hierarchy) had potency for many, without ongoing
          revelation (out of Gnosis - that is direct contact with the
          living
          Mystery), the ground underneath Faith more and more began to
          crumble.
          
        
This reached a
          high point in the early
          20th Century, when the work of Rudolf Steiner was offered to
          humanity.
           Here stood a giant of inspired religious revelation,
          able to
          build a bridge between science and religion, writing books and
          giving
          lectures.  Fully Christian in its fundamental nature,
          this new
          revelation (Anthroposophy and Spiritual Science) made no
          effort to
          force itself on the Church or to suggest that it was in itself
          a
          renewed Christianity (to understand a renewed Christianity,
          read the Way of
          the Fool the
          conscious development of our human character, and the future*
          of
          Christianity - both to be born out of the natural union of
          Faith and
          Gnosis, noted above).  The work
          of
          Rudolf Steiner, and his many companions, was in fact the
          return of the
          Kings stream of wisdom, which had been fully recognized in the
          Gospels
          (wise kings from the East).
          
        
Follow the
          Incarnation this ancient
          mystery wisdom and conscious approach to knowledge of the
          Mystery
          stepped into the background for a time, and then in the 20th
          Century
          returned (it had returned once before at Chartres in the 10th
          Century,
          but that is a whole other story).   In the 20th
          Century,
          humanity was now fully under the influence of natural science,
          and
          religion was thought to be incapable of adding anything to
          scientific
          thought.  Yet, with the return of the stream of the Kings
          (especially Rudolf Steiner) science and religion were
          reunited, by a
          process that asked of science that it become religious, and
          asked of
          religion that it become scientific.  The place the two
          met in
          individual souls was art.
          
        
During Rudolf
          Steiner's life, this new
          revelation gave birth to a new kind of education (Waldorf
          Schools), a
          new kind of science (Goethean Science), a new kind of
          agriculture
          (bio-dynamic farming), a new kind of medicine
          (anthroposophical
          medicine) and much more.   All this during the 20th
          Century
          flowed out over humanity, and the institutional Church was not
          asleep
          to this, for it happened right in plain sight in Central
          Europe.
          
        
But the
          institutional Church, as with
          much it had done over the years, turned a conscious blind eye
          to that
          which threatened its assertion of superior moral authority and
          power
          over its members, supposedly Christians all.  This was
          more than a
          tragedy, it was a crime.  New revelation was made
          available to
          humanity in a quite obvious way, but those in authority in the
          Roman
          Catholic institutional hierarchy love their own power and
          privileges
          more than they loved either their own laity, the truth or
          humanity.
          
        
As we enter the
          21st Century, it becomes
          imperative that such treasures do not pass by those who
          suspect that
          science and religion do not have to be opponents.  The
          essays in
          this little book are meant as an introduction to the more
          scientific
          aspects of the new revelation.
          
        
In addition to
          work I have previously
          written, I have also written an essay on the stars just for
          this book,
          given that perhaps one day in the not too distant future, we
          will
          realize that our present image of cosmic space, as a kind of
          near
          three-dimensional endlessness, will be eventually be seen as
          the same
          kind of fundamental flaw that led more ancient peoples to
          conceive of
          the Earth as flat.  Yes, that's right folks, I am going
          to suggest
           that the heavens are in fact a representation of Heaven
          that appears in the physical, and the ancients were right to
          consider
          the Earth the center of the Universe.  At the same time,
          I will
          remain within the rational and the facts - the reader may be
          surprised.
          
        
Given that most
          people will find the
          whole thing quite ludicrous, I hope the more discerning reader
          will
          enjoy that final essay in the wry spirit in which it was
          written.
           That essay is, as was often said in the 1960's: far out - man,
          cosmic.
          
        
***************************
          
        
New Wine:
- the art of
          the sacrament of reason on the altar of devotion -
          
        
The adventure
          of reason into which my
          life took me over 25 years ago, could not have been
          accomplished
          without the inspiration of Rudolf Steiner (1861-1925), on the
          anniversary of whose birthday (Feb 27th, 2008) I write the
          initial
          version of this brief introductory essay.  While my
          earlier life
          grounded me in Faith, circumstances in my biography, beginning
          in my
          31st year, brought it about that it became necessary to add to
          the
          practice of Christian Faith, a scientifically based Christian
          Gnosis,
          following the example of Steiner.
          
        
Christians have
          forgotten that the Birth
          of Christ-Jesus was attended by two groups: Shepherds and
          Kings.
           With Rudolf Steiner's work, the insight of the Wise (the
          Kings)
          has returned to benefit all of humanity.  Steiner was a
          radical
          thinker, who still is hardly at all recognized by the general
          culture
          for the extraordinary genius he presents.  This lack of
          recognition is no doubt connected to the fact that to the
          scientists he
          said that if they wanted their science to really discover the
          truth,
          they had to become religious in their attitudes (the
          laboratory is to
          become an altar).  To the religious he insisted that all
          that was
          of mystery and magic in the practice of religion could not be
          sustained
          unless the devotional practice became scientific and rational
          in its
          core.  Scientific and rational pure thinking, he taught,
          if
          properly carried out could become exactly the modern path to
          authentic
          spiritual experience - the one path that would allow science
          and
          religion to rediscover their true inter-dependence.
          
        
The link
          between the two was, however, to
          be built out of the impulse to Art.  Art, via the
          imagination - or
          the picture creating faculty of the soul, was the natural
          bridge
          between Science and Religion.
          
        
This
          possibility, latent in thinking
          itself, did not actually exist at the time of the Birth 2000
          years ago.
           Humanity's inner life evolves, and this evolution of consciousness has brought us
          to where we are today - in a necessity of tension between
          Science and
          Religion.  Our civilization will fall into terrible decay
          if we do
          not turn inward and discover the potential, latent in pure
          thinking,
          for spiritual experience.  Science must become religious
          and
          Religion scientific.  The balance point is to be found in
          Art, for
          it is only out of the artistic aspect of the soul that a
          proper
          language can be built bridging the other two great cultural
          forces.
           Science, Art, Religion. Truth, Beauty, Goodness.
           Reason,
          Imagination, Devotion.  In the essays below will be found
          details.
          
        
New Thinking
          and New Mysteries for a
          modern age.
          
        
"And John's students
          came up to him and said, "Why is it
          that we and the Pharisees fast a lot, while your students
          don't fast?"
          
        
"And Jesus said to them, "The wedding party can't be in mourning while the groom is with them, can they? There will come days when the groom will be taken away from them, and then they can fast. No one patches an old cloak with a scrap of brand new cloth. It takes away the cloak's completeness, and a worse split results. Nor do they put new wine in old wine skins, because if they do, the skins break and the wine pours out and the skins are ruined; instead, they put new wine in new skins and both are preserved."
           Matthew 9:14-17 translation from the original Greek by
          Andy Gaus, as published in the
          Unvarnished Gospels.
          
        
***************************
          
        
The Idea of Mind
- a Christian meditation practitioner considers the problem of consciousness - (originally written in the early '90's
and slightly
          revised for this book in
          2008)
          
        
For many people, having been raised in modern culture, mind is thought to be something that exists in the brain, and as a byproduct of basically chemical and electrical processes in cells and nerves. This essay considers this problem quite directly and finds that, for all its inventiveness, science has yet to ask and seek the answer to the most important question - "what is mind to itself". When mind considers itself directly, in its own inward environment, then the idea of mind, as a product of the biology of the brain, fails.
introduction
          
        
If laymen were
          not intrigued by the
          mysteries of the world, there would be little interest in the
          constant
          flow of books and magazine articles explaining modern
          cosmology,
          anthropology, paleontology, and so forth. While such
          explanations are
          often fascinating, far too many science writers unnecessarily
          confuse
          the boundaries between fact and speculation. For the layman
          this
          distinction, between what scientists truly know and what they
          speculate
          might be true, is not understood and has engendered in the
          public mind
          a scientific appearing, yet somewhat mythological, world view.
          
        
For example,
          the once unanimous
          acceptance of natural selection as the guiding principle in
          evolutionary biology is slowly eroding in those circles where
          the
          problem is critically considered. Yet this idea, which is not
          supported
          by an honest assessment of the geological facts, remains a
          staple of
          the modern view of our evolutionary past. It is used in
          countless
          places to explain and support other speculations, and will no
          doubt
          continue for some time to be one of the main beliefs we have
          of the
          world. Its truth is not proven, however. The known facts do
          not support
          it.
          
        
In this regard,
          when speaking of natural
          selection, or "Darwinism", I am basically referring to the
          general idea
          which modern humanity is taught, namely that the human being
          developed
          through millions of years as a result of accidental processes
          leading
          from a mineral ocean, through a biological soup, to single
          celled
          organisms, then to invertebrates, vertebrates, mammals and
          man. It is
          this general picture which is not sustainable in the face of
          the actual
          facts, and the genuine pursuit of the truth.
          
        
The fossil
          record reveals that between
          when a geological age begins and when it ends the plants and
          animals
          have remained the same. The paleontologist calls this "stasis"
          - over
          the whole of a geological age there is no observable
          evolutionary
          change, particularly no evidence whatsoever of one species
          being
          transmuted into another. Whatever change does occur, appears
          to happen
          in the interval between ages, which for unknown reasons
          remaining quite
          mysterious, and leaves no trace of its processes.
          
        
An unbiased
          thinking concerning the
          geological record will see that what is presented to our
          understanding
          and imagination is a sequence of transformations which have as
          their
          main characteristic the living process of metamorphosis.  A particular geological period dies into
          a
          condition of formlessness, soon thereafter to be reborn filled
          out with
          entirely new forms of life, totally new ecological systems and
          niches.
           Moreover, when the record is grasped by the imagination
          as a
          single whole (which it quite rationally has to be), it is not
          only not
          discontinuous, but speaks plainly in the language of life that
          the
          Earth is a living organism that has undergone a long unbroken
          chain of
          metamorphic processes.  It is only an analytic thinking,
          that
          concentrates on the parts instead of the whole, that fails to
          perceive
          this synthesis.
          
        
This is an
          objective instance where the
          theoretical speculations of science have not stood the test of
          time,
          yet our ideas of the world, once captured by this speculative
          conception, are unable to disentangle themselves. Natural
          selection is
          such a strongly held article of faith, both within and without
          the
          scientific community, that it will continue to be a dominant
          idea for
          many many years. In human psychology it has more kinship with
          myth then
          it does with truth.
          
        
It is this myth
          making capacity of
          scientifically authored speculations that concerns us. It is
          such a
          powerful force on the ideas we hold about the world, that we
          can fully
          expect, for example, that many readers will not believe what
          has been
          said here about natural selection. Dozens of books and
          articles
          supporting what is said could be cited, yet most people would
          rather
          dismiss these statements as the prejudices of perhaps a
          "creationist",
          then risk their own belief system and actually look into what
          is being
          discussed in those circles where this question is genuinely
          being
          considered. (See for example: Dogma
          and
          Doubt, by Ronald H. Brady
          [http://www.natureinstitute.org/txt/rb/dogma/dogma]).
          
        
Several years
          ago, in a popular critical
          examination of evolutionary biology, Darwin
          On
          Trial, Phillip E. Johnson, (1991,
          Regnery
          Gateway), the whole problem was carefully examined with an eye
          to
          aiding the layman in understanding the difficulties that
          "Darwinism"
          represents. The standard, however, is not to test modern
          evolutionary
          biology against some kind of competing theory, but rather to
          see
          whether it is good science. It is this which "Darwinism" fails
          at. It
          is simply bad science, and as a consequence results in two
          very serious
          and dangerous results.
          
        
The first is
          that it holds still the
          advancement of the biological sciences in that these might
          discover
          important facts upon which a more realistic theory could be
          advanced.
          As long as "Darwinism" is held to, biology is blind when it
          looks to
          the past, trapped in an illusion of its own creation.
          
        
The second
          danger is that this untestable
          theory (see Brady above) is used to support other kinds of
          speculations
          in other realms, most significantly for our purposes, the
          investigation
          of human consciousness. Important questions, which otherwise
          would
          suggest alternative ways of thinking about consciousness,
          cannot be
          asked because "Darwinism" is already presumed to answer them.
          At
          various places, as we proceed with the text, we will encounter
          this
          danger. When this occurs as we run into this speculative and
          myth
          creating impulse, I will endeavor to point it out.
          
        
The Idea of
          Mind
          
        
Recent advances
          in neurophysiology, in
          computer science, and in cognitive science and related
          disciplines,
          have produced numerous books, as well as major television
          series, on
          the workings of the mind. For the most part, when I read these
          books I
          find my morality, my heart-felt concerns, my idealism, my life
          of
          prayer, of meditation and contemplation - all these most
          precious, most
          subtle inner experiences - increasingly explained as mere
          electrochemical phenomena, as products of brain activity in
          the most
          material sense, and nothing else. Here is the speculative myth
          making
          power of science in action. In saying this it should be noted
          that it
          is not so much that I am against science, but rather that
          science has
          only asked one-half of the essential question, namely what is
          consciousness viewed from the outside. The other half of the
          question
          is: What is consciousness viewed from the inside.
          
        
The views put
          forward by the vast
          majority of workers in these fields are materialistic,
          deterministic,
          and ultimately anti-religious, although often not consciously
          so. These
          questions of the ultimate truth of human nature, in so far as
          the mind
          sciences consider them, are being decided without really
          debating them
          in a forum in which the broader implications are considered.
          Neurophysiology, for example, really only asks certain limited
          kinds of
          questions (chemical happenings in brain cells, or how cells
          cooperate
          to apparently accomplish computation), yet appears to assume
          that inner
          states of consciousness are produced exclusively by these cell
          processes.
          
        
"It is old hat to say
          that the brain is responsible for
          mental activity. Such a claim may annoy the likes of Jerry
          Falwell or
          the Ayatollah, but it is more or less the common assumption of
          educated
          people in the twentieth century. Ever since the scientific
          revolution,
          the guiding view of most scientists has been that knowledge
          about the
          brain, its cells and its chemistry will explain mental states.
          However,
          believing that the brain supports behavior is the easy part:
          explaining
          how is quite another." (Mind
Matters:
          How the Mind and Brain interact to Create Our Conscious Lives, Michael S. Grazzanica Ph.D. pp 1, Houghton
          Mifflin,
          Boston 1988).
          
        
For a more
          modern statement of the
          problem, this from an article on the World Science website, in
          2008:
          
        
Trying to
          understand what creates consciousness-the sense of being alive
          and
          aware-is one of the all-time most exasperating problems in
          science. The
          key stumbling block: even if one knew every brain mechanism
          underlying
          consciousness, there would still be no apparent way to see or
          measure
          the actual production of consciousness.
          
        
We should
          perhaps note two things about
          the first quotation above. First the words "common assumption" and "believing", by which
          Grazzanica
          tacitly admits that we are not here dealing with proven facts,
          but
          rather with the "belief system" held in common by some unknown
          portion
          of the scientific community. Secondly, he clearly admits that
          moving
          from facts about brain chemistry and related phenomena to an
          explanation of consciousness, free will, morality etc. is a
          gigantic
          undertaking (still a problem 20 years later - see second
          quote).
          
        
In that portion
          of the scientific
          community supportive of Grazzanica's "common assumption",
          brain and
          mind are considered a single phenomenon, and one popular
          science writer
          even goes so far as to say that the recent advances in
          neuroscience
          establish conclusively that there is no human spirit, and that
          all
          states of consciousness are caused electrochemically. "There will of course
          be a
          certain sadness as the "human spirit" joins the flat earth,
          papal
          infallibility and creationism on the list of widely held but
          obviously
          erroneous convictions." (Molecules
of
          the Mind, Jon Franklin, p 202,
          Atheneum,
          New York, 1987).
          
        
There can be no
          doubt that if a human
          being ingests certain chemical substances, whether for
          recreational
          purposes or as prescribed medicine, the state of consciousness
          is
          altered. Electrical stimulation of the brain also produces
          effects,
          whether it is simple stimulation of certain brain centers to
          cause
          pleasure or to bring out memories, or whether it is the more
          invasive
          electroshock therapy, still urged today for certain
          intractable mental
          disorders. In one part of our society we say free use of
          chemicals to
          alter mental states is a crime and in another part forced use
          is
          advocated in order to control deviant behaviors. (c.f. Deviance
and
          Medicalization: from Badness to Sickness,
          Conrad and Schneider, Merrill Publishing Company, 1985).
          
        
The point of
          this is to realize that we
          are not only dealing with serious questions of truth, of
          whether
          scientists actually know what they claim to believe, but also with
          the social policy consequences of this
          knowledge. The central question remains, however: what is the
          relationship between mind and brain? As we proceed, I would
          like to
          show how to extend our knowledge of human consciousness by
          considering
          what one can come to know from what might be called: Christian
          meditative practice. In such a practice, what one can know
          about mind
          is quite different from what science knows. In such a
          practice, mind is
          explored from the inside rather than from the outside. Even
          though,
          unfortunately, those who have explored mind from the outside
          have
          pretty much concluded: "...it has long been recognized that mind
          does not exist
          somehow apart from brain..." (The
          Mind, Richard M. Restak M.D. pp ll,
          Bantam Books, 1988);
          
        
"My fundamental
          premise about the brain is that its
          workings - what we sometimes call mind - are a consequence of
          it
          anatomy and physiology and nothing more." (The
          Dragons of Eden, Speculations of the Evolution of Human
          Intelligence, Carl Sagan, pp.7,
          Ballantine Books, 1977). [note in the
          above the use of the terms premise and Speculations]
          
        
Quite other
          conclusions are possible, in
          fact, may be said to be mandated, if one takes the trouble to
          examine
          consciousness from the inside, as is possible for anyone with
          a more or
          less intact mental health, and the requisite good will.
          
        
At this point I
          would like to proceed in
          such a manner that it is provisionally allowed to use the
          words spirit
          and soul, but in a way that acknowledges the legitimate
          requirements of
          science for exact, empirical and logically rigorous
          consideration.
          These two words are essential to understanding mind from a
          Christian
          contemplative view and can be put forward in a way free of
          metaphysical
          or mystical implications. The problem is in part confused by
          the fact
          that today, when we use the word mind in normal language
          usage, we mean
          only the brain and as well confine this aspect of our nature
          within the
          boundaries of the skull. Mind (in modern usage) means brain,
          means
          within the head.
          
        
Soul and
          spirit, on the other hand, are
          not thought of this way, and while many people do not even
          think such
          entities exist in the same sense as mind and brain, at least
          these
          words have the advantage of being capable of a usage meaning
          something
          beyond the spatially limited confines of the cranium.
          
        
The problem is
          one of relating personal
          experience through language in a situation in which the
          practices of
          science have tended to already fix the meaning of certain
          words. For
          example, the poet will refer to heart with regard to the
          phenomenon of
          human feeling. Our whole language is filled with related
          expressions
          (heart-felt, warm-hearted etc.). On the other hand, the
          scientific
          community tends to see emotion (feeling) as a function of
          glandular and
          brain chemistry, and therefore as an aspect of the
          mind/brain/body
          nexus. Yet, an electrochemical explanation seems to deny human
          experience, which has produced language implying that the
          center of our
          "feeling" life is not connected to the brain, not located
          specially in
          the head, but rather finds is primary locus in the chest. We
          say, "I
          have a gut feeling", or "my heart got caught in my throat".
          
        
The point of
          this is to notice the denial
          of this imagery (derived from human experience) by the
          processes of
          scientific thinking which have over the last few hundred years
          more and
          more confined the source of these experiences to the head and
          to
          material causes.
          
        
As a general
          trend in science this is
          called reductionism and involves a process which Eddington
          called
          earlier in this century: "Knowing more and more about less and
          less." Our body of knowledge about
          cell chemistry and neural
          networks in the brain grows, but often at a cost to genuine
          human
          understanding (I say this from direct experience, as one who
          has worked
          in a neuropsychiatric unit in a private hospital). Perhaps it
          is time
          to pause and consider whether or not it is necessary to go the
          other
          way for a while, to reintroduce the study of the soul, from
          the inside,
          as it appears to direct human experience.
          
        
This can, I am
          certain, be done with due
          regard for the demand of science for reproducibility. I
          recognize this
          is not the usual approach by religious thinkers, yet in this
          case our
          mutual respect for the truth seems to require it. This ethical
          demand
          of science for reproducibility, namely that whatever is
          asserted here
          concerning mind (soul/spirit) be discoverable by another who
          is willing
          to follow the procedures, the experimental protocols, as it
          were; this
          demand I believe is perfectly justified.
          
        
In "new age"
          circles one hears frequently
          about mind, body and spirit, meaning, I suppose, that these
          are three
          distinguishable human characteristics. In modern mind sciences
          we hear
          of mind and brain. Are these differing perspectives talking
          about the
          same things at all? It will be useful to note in passing that
          when
          Freud's works were translated from German into English the
          words
          "geistes" (spirit) and "seele" (soul) were both translated as
          mind
          (c.£ Bruno Bettelheim's Freud and
          man's soul, A.A.Knopf, 1983), even
          though
          English did have the correct dictionary terms. This really
          only shows
          that for the English consciousness the inner life was already
          thought
          of as mind even though Europe had had a long tradition of
          referring to
          inner life in terms of soul and spirit (Freud thought and
          wrote out of
          that tradition).
          
        
Modern American English still uses these terms as in: soul power, soul brother, soul music, or in noting the distinction between the spirit and the letter of the law.Yet such usage's are more metaphorical, more imaginative, than the exact language usage which science demands, in fact depends upon. Even so, while brain has a very concrete physical existence, mind does not; it is much more ephemeral. It can't be touched, nor can consciousness, or inner life, or feeling, or even idea. Yet, these apparently non - sense perceptible - phenomena are all recognized intuitively. We accept loss of consciousness in sleep and in certain conditions of trauma or illness. We moderns are in love with feelings and their expression, about which have recently been written more books than one can read. The practice of science would get nowhere without ideas and in fact the principle foundation of science's logical rigor is mathematics, which has no sense perceptible existence at all, and is nowhere observable in nature, even with instruments.
That nature is
          organized along
          mathematical lines confirms the utility of mathematical
          insight, but
          the creation of mathematical insight comes first.  The
          mind
          produces these ideas out of its own nature, before they are
          ever
          applied to the natural world.
          
        
Imagine that
          Descartes invented analytic
          geometry while high on dopamine (a neurotransmitter identified
          as a
          factor in drug use and satisfaction). How are we to relate the
          chemical
          state of the brain and the simultaneous ideas? Is one producer
          and one
          product? And, if the productive cause is then questionable,
          can we
          accept the product?
          
        
Descartes has
          recently joined the
          (illustrious?) group of historic personalities to be diagnosed
          has
          having a psychiatric disorder (depression in his case) by a
          psychiatrist who never personally met him. If true would this
          make
          analytic geometry a dubious discovery, or a hallucination
          (i.e.
          unreal)? Our electrical technology is impossible without the
          calculus
          that followed (and its relative differential equations), so
          there is
          something very different about this non - sense perceptible -
          phenomena
          called mathematics. It is somehow part of the world yet only
          knowable
          through mind.
          
        
It is clear
          that accepted scientific
          ideas are not being disputed because their producer has been
          at one
          time categorized as having been either physically or mentally
          ill. Yet,
          one can find in the literature (in the brain sciences) the
          idea that
          so-called mystic states and other kinds of religious
          experiences
          represent, or are caused by, unusual chemical states; i.e. are
          not what
          those who experience them say they are: experiences of God.
          But, how
          can this be?  How can one make such a distinction that
          the
          discovery of a mathematical truth is different from the
          discovery of a
          religious truth, merely on the basis of the possibility that
          chemical
          happenings in the brain can induce hallucinatory states of
          consciousness?
          
        
Now the working
          scientist should have an
          argument here, which is, at first blush, quite reasonable.
          That nature
          conforms to mathematically oriented models at least
          establishes (I
          won't say proves) that this formal relation exists. Granted
          calculus
          can't be seen, but it does allow prediction of physical
          phenomena.
          Nature acts in conformance with mathematical principles. Where
          is the
          evidence it acts according to the principle God - this the
          working
          scientist should ask. After all, this is the habit of mind of
          the
          scientist to form such questions. Or, perhaps to put it
          another way,
          what predicted observation would permit the logical inference
          of the
          entity God?
          
        
Even so, such a
          response has not really
          appreciated the problem as I have been trying to state it. All
          the ideas of
          science are first and foremost mental phenomena.They
          appear in mind as a product of mind, not in sensible nature. I
          don't
          see gravity or even light. I see falling objects and colors. I
          infer
          the law of gravity and the existence of light from these
          experiences
          and, if I am a scientist, I make rigorous my observations
          through
          experimentation and precise instrumentation. But natural
          selection and
          the big bang are in each case mental creations, they proceed
          from the
          act of thinking, not from sense perceptible nature.
          
        
What this means
          to me is that if I am
          going to prefer one kind of mental phenomena over another
          (e.g. the
          idea of accident in the creation of life versus the idea of
          God) then
          I'd better be clear as to why I have such a preference. Yet,
          before I
          can make such choices, I need to understand mind, to
          understand the act
          which makes such a choice. But to understand mind don't I
          first need to
          understand understanding, to think about thinking?
          
        
To the
          philosophically sophisticated
          reader this may seem to be running backward in time. Modern
          academic
          philosophy (linguistic analysis), from Quine to Ayer to
          Wittgenstein is
          no longer thinking about thinking, at least in the way someone
          such as
          Fichte or some other 19th century German philosopher
          approached the
          problem. For the lay person the question might be put this
          way. How can
          I look to current work in linguistic analysis, in
          neurophysiology, in
          cognitive psychology, in order to build up my idea of mind,
          when these
          systems are already products of mind? Is not the cart before
          the horse?
        Don't I first have to have clearly
          before me what
          thinking is to my own experience of it, before I apply it in
          practice?
          I have mind directly before me. What might I understand if I
          investigate the nature of my own experience first?
          
        
This is a
          crucial point. If we were to
          examine each of these disciplines we would find some idea of
          mind,
          either being assumed or derived from the particular work. In
          some cases
          very explicit statements are being made about what thinking
          is, how it
          is caused, how it proceeds, what its potential is and so
          forth. Yet, it
          is thinking which is producing these ideas. How might such
          investigations evolve if first it was clearly before the
          thinker, just
          what thinking was to his own experience?
          
        
There are other
          reasons for making such a
          question the foundational step. Earlier in this century, the
          physicist/novelist C.P. Snow pointed out the existence of two
          cultures,
          the cultures of science and of literature (or the humanities).
          These
          cultures did not speak the same language and did not consider
          the same
          problems. Moreover the scientists seemed to believe that only
          their
          method produced objective truth, and that the humanities only
          produced
          subjective truths. Alan Bloom (in his The
Closing
          of the American Mind) observed how
          the distribution of assets in the modern university reveals
          the
          domination of the sciences today, at least to governments and
          businesses, who provide most of the funds for research. When
          was the
          last time a President convened a panel of poets to help him
          define a
          problem? (This is not to say that this is a bad idea by the
          way. I
          suspect in many instances our poets and troubadours would give
          much
          wiser advice). My own view is that Snow did not go far enough,
          although
          his being a scientist/novelist makes this limitation
          understandable.
          There are, I believe, three cultures (or three constituent
          spheres to
          Culture): a culture of science or Reason, a culture of
          humanities or
          Imagination and a culture of religion or Devotion. Reason,
          Imagination
          and Devotion are related to the older ideas of Truth, Beauty
          and
          Goodness, in that the former are human capacities of the soul
          and the
          latter are the outer expressions of those capacities. Reason
          engenders
          truth, Imagination engenders beauty, and Devotion engenders
          goodness.
          
        
In reality this
          is a complex
          relationship. On a certain level, or from a particular
          viewpoint, these
          soul capacities are also capable of being called powers. The
          romantic
          poet S.T. Coleridge called imagination the "esemplastic power" and felt it was not just an aspect of human
          consciousness, but was a force of Nature as well. Reason, for
          example,
          could be called Truth, as that appears in the soul as a hunger
          first,
          then a question, and finally an answer. Reason is then a
          dynamic
          process which is intimately connect to Truth. In a way they
          are a
          mirror of each other.
          
        
The difficulty
          for both Snow and Bloom is
          that they have no practical depth experience at devotion; they
          didn't
          really understand it or appreciate its role in their own soul,
          or in
          the world. Most Christian contemplatives are cloistered and
          are not
          encouraged to either prove their claims (in fact they make no
          "claims")
          or to exhibit works. Certainly no science curriculum, and few
          humanities curriculums teach the works of St. John of the
          Cross, or St.
          Teresa of Avila. Our secular age is filled with writings and
          teachers
          who believe religion is superstition, but who have never
          tested it on
          its own terms. When Christ Jesus says "No one comes to the
          Father
          except by me." it doesn't seem to
          occur to
          people that knowledge of God might depend upon method just as
          much as
          science does. Perhaps the reason the scientist doesn't find
          God behind
          creation is because he looked in the wrong place. God being
          ephemeral
          (spiritual), perhaps God can only be observed (known) by the
          ephemeral
          in man. Perhaps only to mind in a pure state is the
          supra-sensible, the
          Invisible, apparent.
          
        
I have written
          briefly here of reason,
          imagination and devotion because I wanted us to remember that
          mind
          (soul/spirit) produces much else besides technical wonders. So
          that
          when we think about thinking we will remember all the kinds of
          things
          which flow from mind and appreciate that skill and effort are
          as much
          involved in the discovery of truth as in the creation of
          beauty or in
          traveling on the stony path to goodness. Moreover, there seems
          to be
          evidence that our greatest geniuses are often active in such a
          way that
          combines these qualities. Are not the true scientists and
          artists
          devoted to their calling? Einstein was mathematical, musical
          and
          faithful. Michael Faraday, who was the founding theoretician
          of
          electrical and magnetic phenomena, was a man of special
          religious
          devotion. Teilhard de Chardin is a very obvious case in point,
          and so
          is Goethe, whose scientific work was impeccable, although
          today much
          under appreciated. Here is what Roger Penrose, a major thinker
          on the
          problem of mind and science, had to say in his The
Emperor's
          New Mind, pp. 421, Oxford
          University Press, 1989:
          
        
"It seems clear to me
          that the importance of aesthetic
          criteria applies not only to the instantaneous judgments of
          inspiration, but also to the much more frequent judgments we
          make all
          the time in mathematical (or scientific work) Rigorous
          argument is
          usually the last step! Before that, one has to make many
          guesses, and
          for these, aesthetic convictions are enormously important..."
          
        
And here is
          Karl Popper, whose work on
          scientific method sets the standard (for many at least), in
          his Realism
          and the Aim of Science, pp. 8, Rowan
          and
          Littlefield, 1956:
          
        
"...I think that there
          is only one way to science - or to
          philosophy, for that matter: to meet a problem, to see its
          beauty and
          to fall in love with it;...".
          
        
Or as we might
          add to Mr. Popper's
          thought: "...to meet a problem (reason), to see its beauty
          (imagination) and to fall in love with it (devotion);..."
          
        
I'd like now to
          introduce the ideas of
          Thomas Taylor, as expressed in the introduction to his early
          18th
          century book: The
          Theoretic Arithmetic of the Pythagoreans. He
          observes there an interesting fact and draws from it an
          intriguing
          conclusion. He starts by deploring the increasing emphasis in
          education
          on the practical side of mathematics instead of the
          theoretical side,
          i.e. teaching math only with the idea of enabling people to be
          good
          accountants or engineers. The theoretic side has special
          characteristics for Taylor, which should not be lost to the
          process of
          education. In Nature, says Taylor, we do not find the perfect
          circle or
          the straight line. All the beautiful (or elegant in modern
          mathematical
          parlance) characteristics of mathematics arise not from the
          contemplation of Nature, which is imperfect, but rather are
          products of
          the soul which thereby reveals its perfection.
          
        
Or to restate
          Taylor's observation in our
          terms: mind (soul/spirit) in showing its capacity to think the
          idea of
          the perfect, the elegant, the beautiful, as that appears in
          mathematics, reveals its own nature. Mind could not produce
          the quality
          of these ideas except as that reflects the quality of its own
          condition. Yet, we know that the brain is a physical organ,
          and is no
          less imperfect that any other aspect of material nature. How
          then does
          this electrochemical machine come to the ideas which are
          clearly beyond
          its own structure? While you might say that God is an
          illusion, and
          therefore some kind of mental dream or hallucination, I don't
          think you
          can get very far arguing the same way about the circle, or
          other
          geometric, and algebraic formulations without making a
          complete mockery
          of the scientific and technological achievements which depend
          upon
          these ideas.
          
        
Taylor's
          observation, which I make my own
          as well, is simply this. What the human being produces,
          through his
          soul capacities of reason, imagination and devotion, namely
          truth,
          beauty and goodness, necessarily reveals that the human spirit
          possesses a reality clearly transcendent of a mere brain bound
          existence.
          
        
With this
          background then I would like to
          return to the question of what is thinking, and what the
          answer to that
          question can reveal for us about the nature of mind. I don't
          expect to
          answer this question here in the way it must ultimately be
          answered. No
          written work ever convinces, even scientific papers. The
          reader must
          make his own investigation and draw his own conclusions. This
          is
          fundamentally what truly constitutes proof, even in science.
          My
          obligation to reason is to state clearly my conclusions and
          observations and to explain adequately my methodology in order
          that
          another can test my results. My reader's obligation is to
          honestly
          carry out the instructions, otherwise there can be no
          scientific
          validation or invalidation. This will not be easy, and few
          will even
          try for the truth is that years of effort have gone into the
          understanding I presently have of mind. In fact it is not the
          point of
          this essay to establish or prove the idea of mind that might
          be held by
          a fully modern and scientifically rigorous Christian
          contemplative, but
          rather to expose it, to make it known, and to do so in a way
          which
          accepts as authentic and justifiable the scientific
          requirement for
          reproducibility. That the effort at replication may well be
          beyond the
          will power of those who agree or disagree is a situation over
          which I
          have no control.
          
        
This is not a
          cop out, by the way. That
          it takes years of study and development to be able to
          understand
          "Hilbert space", in no way lessens its mathematical truth.
          Likewise, do
          we have to be able to paint the Mona Lisa in order to
          appreciate its
          beauty? So, as well, we can marvel at the goodness of the idea
          of mind
          as a moral/spiritual act, even though we may lack the ability
          to
          completely engender in practice a full understanding of such a
          condition ourselves.
          
        
On the other
          hand, and if we are willing,
          we can learn fundamental mathematical and scientific truths,
          without
          just having faith in the scientist's teachings. We can, as
          well, take
          up artistic activity and discover our own creative potential;
          and
          certainly we might devote ourselves to prayer and
          contemplative
          thinking in order that we learn to encounter the threshold
          between the
          visible and moral (invisible) worlds.
          
        
For my own
          purposes I now want to put
          aside (for the most part) the word mind and use instead just
          the terms
          soul and spirit. These two words are to mean no more and no
          less than
          what the reader experiences in his own inner life. Such a
          process is
          called introspection or looking within. It is a most ancient
          discipline; the meaning of the Greek admonition: "Know thyself
          ". This
          does not mean, by the way, to know ones subjective individual
          character
          traits as is often thought, but rather to discover the
          universals of
          human nature as they appear inside our own being.  On
          this matter
          Emerson made a cogent observation in his lecture, The
American
          Scholar: "For the instinct is
          sure,
          that prompts him to tell his brother what he thinks.  He
          then
          learns that in going down into the secrets of his own mind he
          has
          descended into the secrets of all minds..."
          
        
Earlier in this
          century there was briefly
          a psychological "school" which sought to discover truths about
          the
          psyche (soul) through introspection, but this work did not
          make much
          headway, did not seem to contribute scientifically. and was
          abandoned.
          Its flaw was to pretend there was no tradition, no previous
          exploration
          of inner life, of psyche (soul) which might offer some
          experienced
          insight into the problems involved. This pretense is
          understandable in
          that invariably those disciplines which actually know
          something
          practical about inner life are spiritual disciplines and the
          general
          trend of scientific thought has been to view spiritual ideas
          about the
          Earth, Cosmos and Man, as mere superstition. It is no wonder
          then that,
          when science seeks to investigate inner life, its
          anti-spiritual
          assumptions and preconceptions become an impediment to the
          discovery of
          just those facts sought after.
          
        
Every human
          being experiences
          consciousness, which includes sense experience (sight,
          hearing, touch,
          taste and smell etc.), varying degrees of well being (health,
          vitality
          and illness), thoughts, dreams, feelings, impulses of will,
          desires,
          sympathies, antipathies, and so forth. Our language is full of
          a
          variety of words for different inner experiences, or states of
          consciousness, and these usages can often be very instructive.
          For
          example, why do we call someone "bright" or speak of "flashes
          of
          insight" or draw cartoons in which having a "bright idea" is
          depicted
          by a light bulb going on over someone's head? We do this
          because we
          instinctively know that certain kinds of thought activity
          (intuitions)
          are accompanied by phenomena of inner light. This is not light
          as seen
          by the physical eye, but light experienced by the "mind's
          eye", the
          individual human spirit.
          
        
In our ordinary
          state of soul
          (consciousness) this experience is not paid attention to
          because we are
          focused outwardly on the problem, whose solution the "flash of
          insight"
          represents. Moreover, the activity by which we produce the
          "in-sight",
          lies below the level of consciousness. It is unconscious. Now
          the fact
          is that within many spiritual disciplines exists the knowledge
          by which
          this unconscious activity can be made conscious, the inner eye
          strengthened and intuitions can be produced more or less at
          will. Even
          so, not all spiritual disciplines are the same, have the same
          world
          view, or the same purposes. It becomes necessary then to say a
          few
          words about this, in particular the differences between
          Buddhist and
          Christian depth meditation practices, the principle paths of
          Eastern
          and Western forms of spiritual life.
          
        
Buddhism today
          enjoys a certain
          ascendancy in America.
          
        
"The Buddhist movement
          has become a regional phenomenon.
          It is pervasive. And it is quietly transforming our North
          American
          culture. This is the golden age of Buddhism. Right here. Right
          now. " (Don Morreale, quoted in
          Masters of the Universe,
          Pamela Weintraub, Omni, March 1990.)
          
        
Examine, for
          example, the book by William
          Irwin Thompson, Imaginary
          Landscape. This is a book straining
          to
          realize ideas about man and the world by combining reason,
          imagination
          and devotion. Thompson is a cultural historian fascinated with
          the
          cutting edge of the new sciences such as chaos research and
          cognitive
          science.Thompson has clearly been influenced by Buddhism
          (apparently
          the Tibetan Llama Choygam Trungpa), and this reveals itself in
          the
          ethereally vague, almost ungrounded character of Thompson's
          prose. If
          you were to follow reading Thompson's book by reading Speakers
          Meaning by Owen Barfield, who is a
          student of
          the Western spiritual teacher, Rudolf Steiner, the different
          effect of
          the style of meditation and related practices on the thinking
          of the
          two writers is clear. There is a mystery here concerning the
          effect of
          meditation styles on cultural life.
          
        
I do not say
          this because I am opposed to
          Buddhism as a spiritual path, but rather as an observer of
          culture and
          the ebbs and flows in the dynamics of a civilization's
          cultural
          existence. Years ago I had a profound experience of Buddhism,
          for which
          I am ever thankful, yet I believe there must arise an effort
          on the
          part of the leaders of both Western and Eastern cultural life
          to work
          together, in mutually supportive ways. There is, I believe,
          hidden in
          the mysteries behind both Christianity and Buddhism, a higher
          unity,
          which ought to sought for; all the while remaining mindful of
          the
          different effects on the soul life of the individual which are
          due to
          the different practices, and the natural consequences these
          must have
          in the life of a culture. Just like political leaders,
          humanities
          spiritual leaders owe the individual certain responsibilities.
          
        
The orientation
          of Buddhist and Christian
          inner disciplines toward the act of thinking is quite
          different. The
          reader who begins to take an objective look at his inner life,
          at his
          soul (which includes all that appears inwardly, both conscious
          and
          unconscious), will find that there is an actor, a self, an
          egoity. To
          this we refer when we think or say "I". Buddhist meditation
          takes the
          view that this "I" is the cause of suffering, the cause of
          life's
          difficulties and that it (the "I") needs to be abandoned,
          eventually to
          disappear into an experience of self merged and lost within
          Self.
          
        
Christian
          meditation sees the "I" as the
          point of creation, as the image of God, which can be redeemed
          from its
          fallen nature, so as to produce the mysterious and paradoxical
          Pauline
          dictum: "Not
          I,
          but Christ in me."
          
        
The Buddhist leaves the act of thinking, the "I"'s spiritual activity, to take its own course, believing that this activity only produces illusions. Christian meditation sees the act of thinking as capable of being metamorphosed, altered through discipline, into a new organ of perception, an organ which can then perceive deeper into the mysteries of creation.
Lest one
          believe this is an
          inconsequential matter, just consider the following as
          reported in the
          Boston Globe newspaper in December of 1990. The story reveals
          that a
          Carthusian priest, a monk in a Catholic contemplative order,
          has just
          completed seven years training in the meditation practices of
          Vipassana
          Buddhism. This priest, Rev. Denys Rackley, is quoted as
          saying: "What
          Western Christians
          need...is practical knowledge...of preparing the mind for the
          spiritual
          experience, something almost entirely unknown in the West." It is understandable why he believes this, but
          it is
          not true. The depth meditative practices with Christian
          understanding
          are not unknown, but one does have to look for them in the
          West, rather
          then look to the East.
          
        
Father Denys is
          also quoted as saying: "...as long as you're
          functioning at the level of the rational thinking mind, you're
          not
          really into the heart of the spiritual life".
          This is the Buddhist view, but one of the purposes of this
          essay is to
          suggest that thinking can in fact lead to direct spiritual
          experience.
          And that for the Christian, to abandon his cognitive
          capacities in the
          manner of Eastern meditative practices is to miss developing "Not I, but Christ in
          me."
          
        
This short
          consideration hardly exhausts
          what would be a proper examination of these differences, nor
          does it
          deal with the complex and difficult relation between modern
          depth
          Christianity and the current theological beliefs of many
          Christian
          churches. I did feel it necessary, however, to note briefly
          these
          themes as part of giving as rounded out a picture of mind
          (soul/spirit), as that exists for the modern, scientifically
          rigorous,
          Christian meditative practitioner.
          
        
The reader may
          then consider the soul to
          be all that appears before him inwardly as his consciousness,
          including
          as well sense experience. While we feel, and have been taught,
          that
          sense experience is caused by outer nature, the actual
          experiencing of
          these so-called stimuli occurs within the soul or conscious
          awareness.
          For example, if one whose normal environment is urban were to
          be
          transported suddenly to a grand vista of nature they would
          experience
          the soul's expansive movement deeper into the senses. Normally
          in urban
          life the soul withdraws as far as possible from its sense
          experiences
          which are so chaotic and immoderate. We tend to hear, see,
          smell,
          taste, feel (as in touch) with less sensitivity while we lead
          an urban
          existence. The opposite is also true. If an urban dweller, who
          has
          spent a month or so in raw nature were to suddenly return to
          downtown
          Manhattan, they would experience a sudden contraction of the
          soul, a
          rapid withdrawal from the senses, and a constriction of the
          diaphragm
          (so as to breathe less deeply the toxic air).
          
        
Soul includes
          as well that which exists
          in the unconscious, and which manifests over time, such as
          mood,
          character, temperament and other like phenomena. Within the
          field of
          soul, within the totality of psychic life, the "I" or spirit
          appears as
          the experiencer, the actor, and the creative or initiating
          cause.
          
        
Now please
          remember that this way of
          describing soul life comes from the process of active
          objective
          introspection. It does not try to infer from outer perception
          as do the
          sciences, but seeks to objectify the direct experiences of the
          observer
          of his own self. Just as science then points to technological
          products
          to validate its views, so can these practices point to
          reproducible
          effects in the inner life brought about by the disciplined
          activity of
          the "I" through self development exercises, such as
          concentration,
          meditation, contemplation and prayer. I would like to put
          forward a
          model here, just as science does, but in this case I want it
          to be
          clear it is only a device by which to convey an idea, a mental
          representation of a real process, which can be known, but
          which can't
          be described by the concepts we are used to.
          
        
Imagine if you
          will that you are holding
          a "stick" between the palms of your hands. If you move your
          left hand
          in such a way as to push the "stick", your right hand will
          move as
          well. Move the right hand and the "stick" will push the left.
          This then
          is the idea I want to suggest for the brain-mind relationship,
          or the
          body/soul/spirit relationship. Brain chemistry can cause
          changes in
          consciousness, but as well the "I", the spirit, can cause
          changes in
          brain chemistry. In Mind
          Matters, Grazzanica, having already
          likened
          brain to a mechanism, then says paradoxically: "A thought can change
          brain
          chemistry, just as a physical event in the brain can change a
          thought". My question for Grazzanica
          is: what does he think
          causes the thought which changes the brain chemistry?
          
        
If I ingest
          substances, food or chemical,
          I alter my state of soul, of consciousness. There is no
          ignoring the
          fact that brain chemistry effects states of mind (soul).
          However, the
          opposite is also true. My active spirit can also effect states
          of soul,
          and in some circumstances brain and body chemistry as well
          (c.f. the
          capacities of Jack Schwartz who is able to control consciously
          a number
          of so-called involuntary bodily processes including blood
          flow.).
          Moreover, any conscious physical movement is initiated by my
          spirit
          which first imagines it. Ordinarily we are not aware of how
          our "I"'s
          will brings about this physical movement. The "stick", as it
          were, is
          hidden deep in the unconscious.
          
        
With regard to
          the act of thinking,
          however, the whole activity lies within the reach of my self
          conscious
          spirit. Thinking takes place in the conscious parts of the
          soul and
          with training one can become aware of and be active in the
          whole
          process.
          
        
Ordinarily we
          experience thinking as an
          inner dialog, a flow of words. This talking to ourselves
          (don't we say,
          "I can't hear myself think") is the end product of unconscious
          processes. In this instance it is the spirit which initiates
          the silent
          wording and the soul which hears. This act of thinking (which
          is
          unconscious ) produces thoughts or trains of thought (the flow
          of
          words) of which we are conscious. The training disciplines of
          a
          specific spiritual practice can, stage by stage, uncover and
          make open
          to experience, and will activity, what remains otherwise
          hidden in the
          unconscious.
          
        
I will now
          describe some of the
          consequences of such a discipline in terms of capacities and
          experiences. This is not meant to be exhaustive, only
          indicative. Later
          we will discuss certain books which have much more to offer in
          this
          line, books which I have used (tested) myself. The stream of
          "words"
          can be brought to a halt. The act of thinking can then be
          focused on a
          single concept. The discovery here is that concept and word
          are two
          different experiences. This is another crucial matter, but its
          main
          difficulty for the reader's understanding is that it cannot be
          put into
          words. It is completely a function of experience.
          
        
Now ordinarily
          we think of concept and
          idea as the same as the word which we experience in our inner
          dialog.
          The true experience of the concept is beyond language. It can
          ultimately be experienced in a way analogous to that in which
          a sense
          object is experienced. The difference is that I am in an
          unusual state
          of consciousness, which can be described as "sense free". Only
          to my
          mind's eye, my spiritual eye, does the concept appear.
          Moreover, as an
          experience it is more vivid, more intense, than sense
          experience. It
          touches, as it were, my whole soul, filling the soul with
          "sensation",
          with image, sound, tactility, engagement (I am pulled toward
          it, it
          seems to rush toward me). In addition the experience can only
          be
          sustained if my "I" is active in a certain way. In the face of
          sense
          experience I can be passive. In the face of the supra-sensible
          experience of the pure concept, I must remain active inwardly.
          
        
Roger Penrose
          in his The
          Emperor's New Mind relates how as a
          mathematician (recall what had been said previously about
          mathematics
          by Taylor) he is beginning to think mathematical truths have
          their own
          independent existence. "...I cannot help feeling that, with
          mathematics the case
          for believing in some kind of ethereal, eternal existence, at
          least for
          the more profound mathematical concepts, is a good deal
          stronger..." (pp. 97). Mathematical
          thinking is a very concentrated
          activity, is good practice for meditation and contemplation
          and can
          easily evolve into the contemplation of the pure concept.
          
        
When we think,
          then, in the ordinary way
          (stream of words), our unconscious thought-creative activity
          is within
          the realm of the pure concept, but our conscious awareness is
          only of
          the words which fall out, as it were, like autumn leaves blown
          free of
          the living tree of our mind.
          
        
As with mathematics, so with music. Consider the poetic intuition out of the imagination of the writer Kim Stanley Robinson in his novel: The Memory of Whiteness:
"A music leads the
          mind through the starry night and the
          brain must expand to contain the flight like a tree growing
          branches at
          the speed of light."
          
        
Thinking cannot only focus on the single concept, it may also suspend itself just before the act which produces the awareness of the concept. Thinking can take up a question, but not proceed all the way to an answer. We can live in the question, in a condition of heightened anticipation. A great deal can be learned from appreciating the qualitative difference of the "I"'s activities of "focus" and "question".
Up to now
          little has been said here of
          the Christian nature of such practices. Consider then that the
          Christian contemplative's practice is to think in a
          concentrated and
          focused way ever and ever again on the Being of God. If
          Penrose has
          begun to suspect that mathematics is derived from an
          experience of
          something that is "there
          already", are we to be surprised
          when the
          contemplative finds God as an experience in his consciousness
          (soul)
          and as a consequence (in part, we will have to avoid
          complicating
          things with the problem of Grace) of the activity of his
          thinking
          (spirit)?  Prayer is another form of question, and by
          combining
          question and focus, or prayer and contemplation, the
          contemplative
          proceeds in an exact, disciplined and rigorous fashion.
          
        
The summa of my
          own investigations (which
          is not by any means to be considered more than the work of a
          beginner)
          is the discipline of sacrifice of thoughts. I have found it
          especially
          important to learn to give up any tendency to fixed ideas.
          Always it is
          necessary to approach the situation ignorant, to sacrifice all
          previous
          ideas. "Blessed
are
          the poor in spirit. " is the
          Beatitude.
          Only in a condition of humility, of not knowing, can I come to
          the more
          subtle, more intimate inner experiences. One of my favorite
          teachers
          calls sacrifice of thoughts: "...learning to think on your knees...".
          
        
This leads us
          to the consideration of the
          core problem, that of morality and conscience.
          
        
Many people
          today think of education and
          character development as having to do with pouring something
          into an
          otherwise empty soul. To my experience this is mistaken.
          Rather it is
          always a question of development, of unfolding. A human being
          becomes.
          True morality then involves the development of a capacity, and
          is not
          merely a matter of instruction. You can get people to conform,
          but real
          morality comes from the inside out and is not a response to
          expectations of right behavior. (This appears to be a new
          condition for
          mankind. Previously, in human development, morality, to a
          great extent,
          was set for the individual by the outside social structure,
          through
          codes of behavior, traditions, and other socially enforced
          expectations.
          
        
Depth
          introspection of the act of
          thinking will discover that the outcome of thinking is
          significantly
          affected by the moral intention of the thinker. Just as the
          act of
          thinking needs to be made conscious, so the moral intention
          connected
          to the object (or the why) of the thinking needs to be fully
          conscious.
          If, for example, I am a business man looking for a solution to
          a
          certain problem, the answers I get will vary according to the
          moral
          intention. Ultimately the practitioner of such thinking will
          come to an
          appreciation of the activity of conscience within his own soul
          life.
          
        
This is a
          special experience. The "voice"
          of conscience needs to be carefully distinguished from the
          more
          subjectively incorporated authority figures. The conscience,
          for
          example, never endlessly nags us, does not make us feel
          inferior.
          Conscience is the experience of the higher element of our
          nature, which
          is normally in the unconscious. In the awakening and the
          development of
          conscience we begin to develop within us this higher element
          (What St.
          Paul calls: "Not I, but Christ.in me."). The conscience does
          cause
          pain, "pricks of conscience", because it forces us to
          recognize the
          true moral consequences of our actions. The truth hurts and
          our voice
          of conscience reminds us of the truth. The conscience,
          however, loves
          us, which is why it makes us conscious of the truth, but does
          not seek
          to destroy our self image or impair our self esteem.
          
        
Now just as one
          can evoke certain kinds
          of inner experiences through various types of thinking
          disciplines, so
          can one evoke the voice of conscience and thereby come to
          certain moral
          knowledge. This understanding of the life of the soul and the
          activity
          of the spirit, this part of the idea of mind, involves the
          most subtle
          inner discrimination; and, since it places morality within the
          realm of
          individual knowledge, it represents a threat to authoritarian
          organizations, religious or otherwise. No one, who eventually
          learns
          this fine discrimination, will ever assert to another that
          they possess
          a more perfect moral knowledge. Each individual must make his
          own
          experiences.
          
        
This does not
          mean that morality is
          subjective, or that it is relative and changeable. The problem
          is more
          subtle and more complicated. The
          conscience
          is an organ of knowledge - of
          understanding the true moral qualities underlying human
          action. Two
          individuals with the same choices, the same life questions to
          balance,
          if they strive for the same depth of understanding, they will
          arrive at
          the same knowledge of what is right. However, the reality is
          that, in
          life, two individuals seldom have to face the same choice. Our
          lives
          are very individual, regardless of superficial similarities.
          What needs
          to be weighed and balanced is unlikely to be the same. So when
          the
          individual problem is presented to the organ of conscience, we
          often
          get an individual result.
          
        
This can be
          very confusing. In part the
          confusion is due to our usually thinking of morality as a set
          of
          immutable principles, and the teaching of most religious
          authorities of
          quite definite rules and codes. For example, to many murder
          and
          abortion are absolutely prohibited. In these instances, to
          suggest, as
          the above seems to suggest, that the individual has some kind
          of free
          choice, is to appear to go against these most obvious and
          traditional
          moral restrictions. Such thinking, however, misses the point.
          
        
First we should
          remember that most of us,
          in many situations, do not follow the indications of our
          conscience, to
          the extent we become aware of them. Conscience gives us
          knowledge; we
          choose to act, or not, upon that knowledge. That we often
          choose to
          ignore conscience in no way takes away the power of conscience
          to know
          what is moral. Secondly, what is often forgotten, is that one
          of the
          most common ways we ignore conscience is in judging other
          people. If we
          put to conscience whether we should judge another's morality,
          what
          answer do you think conscience will give? "He who is without
          sin, let
          him cast the first stone.".
          
        
In the process
          of coming to this
          understanding of the role of conscience, or moral intention,
          and the
          consequences of these acts upon the activity of thinking, we
          also come
          to a practical understanding of many of the lessons of the
          Gospels. The
          teachings of Christ Jesus, in that they have a practical
          psychological
          effect, in that they concern matters of "mind", conform
          exactly to all
          that has been said above. In spite of what religious dogma
          might say,
          this knowledge, which is derived from the direct experience of
          a
          Christian meditant,and which is also representative of a
          community of
          such meditation practitioners, in no way conflicts with true
          Christianity.
          
        
Certain
          implications flow from this idea of mind.
          We might ask the question: where is the "there"
          where
          the "already
          there" is? When the mathematician
          Penrose
          proposes that mathematical ideas are "already there", where is
          this
          "there"? Inside the physical space of my skull? This is our
          habit of
          thought, but does that "habit" have to be true?
          
        
It will help to
          consider a parallel
          problem/question. Which comes first in evolution/creation,
          mind or
          matter? We assume matter, or at least such is the fundamental
          assumption current in science today. The basic belief is that
          at some
          point in evolution the complexity of the nervous system
          reaches a point
          where consciousness arises and ultimately what we know as mind
          (soul/spirit to the Christian meditative experience). We have
          no proof
          of this. It really hasn't even been seriously investigated, if
          it can
          be investigated at all. That mind arises spontaneously, out of
          some
          accidental physical condition, is an axiom (unproven
          assumption) of
          many mainstream scientists.
          
        
Such a supposed
          event, lying as it does
          in the distant past, cannot even be the subject of an
          experiment, or
          any other direct observation. This alleged event must be
          inferred, but
          from what? The fossil record only gives us bones, hardened
          substances.
          The soft tissues are always dissolved. And as to the thoughts?
          
        
We do have a
          picture of stages of
          development, one that we have been indoctrinated in from our
          earliest
          years in school: single cell plant, to multi-cell, to
          invertebrate, to
          vertebrate, to mammal, to man. We have an idea of mind
          (soul/spirit) as
          solely reason, and therefore connect mind and tool making.
          This picture
          itself is an inference. Are we justified in building inference
          upon
          inference. The fact that the majority of scientists believe
          this to be
          the case is of no moment whatsoever. We don't vote facts into
          existence, and at the very least the history of science itself
          reveals,
          not an unbroken advance, but rather a series of "beliefs", a
          series of
          substitutions of ideas often quite at odds with each other
          (c.f. T.
          Kuhn, The Structure of Scientific Revolutions).
          
        
Is there any
          reason for inferring the
          opposite? Is there something which suggests mind preceded
          matter? As a
          matter of fact there is. The discipline of philology, the
          study of
          language as developed by the mind (soul/spirit) of Owen
          Barfield
           reveals that what we call thinking was experienced by
          certain
          ancient peoples as outside them. The whole way they used
          language,
          their references to muses and to genii, shows that they
          experienced
          thoughts as coming into them from the outside. (c.£ Owen
          Barfield's Speaker's Meaning, also his Poetic
          Diction, History
          in
          English Words, and Saving
          the
          Appearances: a Study in Idolatry).
          Barfield's
          investigations, which represent deeply profound and scientific
          studies
          of the history of meaning and the meaning of history, suggest
          unequivocally that modern assumptions regarding the nature of
          consciousness, both historical and prehistorical, must
          certainly be
          rethought; and if that is done, the inferred idea of matter
          proceeding
          mind in evolution will be replaced with its opposite, that
          mind is
          prior. Moreover, this philological research shows that mind
          (soul/spirit) has over the course of history (that is the
          period of
          man's evolution for which we have records) only just finished
          a long
          period of contraction; thinking, having first been outside the
          human
          entelechy, is now inside.
          
        
This is not the
          place in which to give a
          full recapitulation of the relevant trains of thought
          (arguments) which
          Barfield makes, nor to go into the supporting evidence that
          can be
          found in the field of art history (c.f. Art
          and
          Human Consciousness, Gottfried
          Richter,
          Anthroposophic Press, 1985). Rather I wanted to point out the
          question
          and as well to point to work which finds a satisfactory
          answer. Where
          is the "there" where one finds ideas already? It is in the
          great field
          of Mind (Soul/Spirit) which encompasses all of Nature (sense
          perceptible as well as supra-sensible), to which our
          individuality, our
          "I", has access through its own disciplined inner activity.
          Just as it
          is quite unreasonable to expect the imperfect to conceive the
          perfect
          (the material brain to imagine the immaterial and elegant
          truths of
          projective geometry), so it is non-reason to assume that mind
          (soul/spirit) is not born out of its own likeness. Matter
          cannot have
          given birth to consciousness, to thinking, or to certain moral
          knowledge (conscience). Our inwardness (soul/spirit) can only
          be the
          progeny of the Universe's Inwardness.
          
        
How do I know
          this? Because I have
          explored my own inwardness, and found there much more than I
          had been
          lead to assume was "there" by the scientifically oriented
          education of
          my youth. It has become a matter of experience, an empiricism
          of
          inwardness. In fact, such is the nature of this experience
          that the
          idea of mind as solely a product of brain electro-chemistry
          cannot be
          sustained. Moreover, there is a community of practitioners
          which
          replicates (repeats) this experience, the whole activity being
          conducted with the rigor and discipline justifiably required
          in this
          scientific age.
          
        
I would like to
          remind the reader, as we
          draw this exploration to a close, that the intention has never
          been to
          prove an opposite idea of the mind/brain nexus to that one
          currently
          held in science, but rather to give as clear as possible a
          picture of
          the idea of mind which can be held by a Christian meditation
          practitioner. Further, to do this in a way which at least
          offers the
          reader the opportunity of testing for him or herself the truth
          of this
          idea.
          
        
Ultimately, I
          believe it will be most
          healthy for our culture and our civilization, if what is
          understood as
          the powers of reason, be supplemented by the faculties of
          imagination
          and devotion, as well. What is offered then, in this theme, is
          not a
          disagreement with present day mind sciences, but rather an
          attempt to
          extend them, to evolve them by adding to their considerations
          what can
          be discovered about the nature of mind from a disciplined
          investigation
          which proceeds from the inside, from what appears to our
          direct
          experience of mind.
          
        
We need to
          remember that these questions
          are fundamental to the future course of our civilization. It
          is
          crucial, both for the health of our social order, and the
          meaning we
          attribute to our existence, that we have a true idea of human
          nature.
          Our culture is deeply psychologically split, in a quite
          unhealthy way,
          by the confused idea we have of human nature which raises
          Reason above
          the capacities of Imagination and Devotion, and which makes
          so-called
          scientific knowledge the only truth worth considering. This is
          a
          prejudice which grants an illegitimate power to what is really
          far too
          often only another belief system.
          
        
In the hospital
          where I worked for over
          seven years, powerful drugs are routinely administered to
          individuals,
          without sufficient consideration for these individuals
          spiritual nature
          or needs. That their "depression" might instead by caused by a
          life
          crisis with moral and self definitional (spiritual meaning)
          dynamics,
          is not really considered. At the same time, just down the
          hall, in the
          chemical dependency units, where the alcoholics anonymous
          model is
          practiced, meetings frequently end with the Lord's Prayer, and
          spiritual self transformation is considered an absolute
          necessity in
          order to deal with the relevant problems.
          
        
What a picture
          this gives us of the deep
          inconsistencies that exist in our culture!
          
        
We can do no
          better than to begin to end
          our considerations of this theme with these remarks by a
          spirit
          (individual) in whom reason, imagination and devotion were
          maintained
          in the soul in a remarkable balance. From Emerson's essay Nature: "Nature
          is
          the incarnation of a thought, and turns to a thought again, as
          ice
          becomes water and gas. The world is mind precipitated, and the
          volatile
          essence is forever escaping again into the state of free
          thought. "
          
        
Here, with
          remarkable intuitive powers,
          Emerson sees to the heart of what we have been attempting to
          suggest.
          Contrary to the assumptions of the scientific age, namely,
          that there
          is no correlation between human thought and the world, the
          world itself
          is a product of Thought, and the human being, in that he or
          she thinks,
          has directly before him, in the experience of his own mind,
          the like,
          but rudimentary, capacity. We were Thought into being, and we
          also can
          think.
          
        
In the
          preceding, I attempted to show how
          one could begin that exploration which will validate, in a
          scientifically acceptable way, the proposition that human
          consciousness
          and the act of thinking are not the product of material
          happenings in a
          physical brain, but the products of acts of soul and spirit.
          Whether
          critics of such an idea will be willing to struggle with the
          difficult
          work of replication, I cannot say. At the same time I will
          insist that,
          without such an effort, any argument to the contrary need not
          be
          listened to or heeded.
          
        
For those who
          will wish to take this
          challenge seriously, I recommend the following two books: The
Philosophy
          of Freedom, Rudolf Steiner,
          Anthroposophical Press; and Meditations
          on
          the Tarot: a journey into Christian Hemeticism,
          author anonymous, Amity House.
          
        
**********************************
          
        
The Quiet Suffering of
          Nature
          
        
           "And while they were
          eating,
          Jesus took bread, and blessing it, he broke and gave it to
          them and
          said, "Take; this is my body." And taking a cup and giving
          thanks, he
          gave it to them, and they all drank of it; and he said to them
          "This is
          my blood of the new covenant, which is being shed for many..." Mark 14: 22-23
          
        
Where is humanity without the Earth? Without air, water or food we die. What then is the true name of that extraordinary Earth-Being whose nature it is to sacrifice Itself for us, and in whose own living substance we are nurtured from birth until death?
*
          
        
For many people
          today, within the
          environmental movement and without, the treatment of the
          Earth, by much
          of humanity, is understood to be a terrible tragedy. The
          destruction of
          the rain forest, the over fishing of the oceans, the casual
          production
          of toxic wastes, the continuation of atomic testing - the list
          is
          almost endless of the crimes committed against the natural
          world and
          not coincidentally, also against humanity. A central thesis of
          those
          concerned is that these excessive activities are unnecessary;
          those who
          carry them out have alternatives. Yet, if we honestly look at
          what is
          being done, and especially at the conceptual context in which
          these
          deeds are carried out, in most cases we will have to admit,
          that from
          the point of view of the apparent destroyers, their acts are
          necessary.
          The truth is that the conflict is over what these acts mean,
          not over
          the acts themselves.
          
        
Most of the
          time those, who seem to be
          abusing the natural environment, are acting in pursuit of
          their self
          interest. They are business people, whose obligation to their
          corporate
          stockholders is to maximize profits. If they don't act, they
          lose their
          jobs, their livelihood and all that that implies. For example,
          loggers
          and tree lovers collide over national forest policy. One wants
          to use
          in order to continue an existence already set on a certain
          course, the
          other wants to preserve out of an
          appreciation of what will be lost when it all
          is gone. In an odd kind of way both are conservationists. One
          wants to
          conserve and existing way of life,
          the other, a
          rapidly disappearing kind of life. Both are
          expectable moral and human responses to a situation where no
          agreement
          is possible, because the contexts of meaning, in which the
          situation is
          viewed, are opposed. Each, given the quite different
          assumptions under
          which life is pursued, acts forthrightly. At the human level
          both sides
          are right.
          
        
This is not to
          say that there are not
          individuals and/or companies who act immorally or criminally,
          who take
          what they want in defiance of convention or good sense. But
          these
          aberrations are the exception. For the most part, the conflict
          over
          environmental policies owes its existence to opposing life
          paths and
          world conceptions, and not to any intrinsic or objective truth
          about
          what is right and what is wrong. Both sides, being human, can
          be
          understood.
          
        
However, there
          is something missing.
          While one can understand the human elements, how each view is
          appropriate to its adherents, there is something that is not
          understood. Nature is not understood, because neither side
          grants to
          the natural world the same effort at understanding they could
          grant to
          each other.
          
        
It is the
          thesis of this essay that the
          environmental movement, for all its passion and good
          intentions, is
          simply not radical enough in its understanding of the natural
          world.
          Concepts, like ecology and preservation and save this and save
          that,
          are impotent before the truth of Nature. What Nature truly is,
          is quite
          beyond such an incomplete idea as "save the rain forest".
          
        
Nature is more
          than a physical living
          environment which we find necessary for our survival as just
          another
          species. In solemn and sacred truth, Nature has consciousness
          and
          being. As a consequence, the environmental movement will only
          begin to
          do that which is needed, in the face of the terrible tragedy
          befalling
          the natural world, when those who would lead it realize that
          the Nature
          they wish to save is filled with just as much will and
          intention as a
          human being, and is just as much deserving of being treated
          with
          personal dignity and respect. Environmentalists need to find a
          new way
          of approaching Nature; namely to come to Nature as someone,
          rather then
          something. The only relationship which will be effective for
          achieving
          the quite worthy goals of the environmental movement, is the
          relationship of I and thou. For there is an immense unasked
          question: what
          does
          Nature want? And no human being has
          the
          right to impose their personal point of view over that of
          Nature
          Herself.
          
        
We must again
          learn to approach Nature as
          someone with whom one can communicate, and who is better able
          to advise
          us about what to do than we can imagine. We need to begin to
          recognize
          how trapped we are in the confines of the lifeless and
          materialistic
          mental images (conceptions) provided by the one-sided
          scientific
          education of Western culture. Even the Indians, the
          aboriginals, the
          original peoples still living within the bosom of Nature, have
          lost,
          for the most part, that intimate connection and conversation
          by which
          the Spirit of the Natural world is perceived, appreciated,
          understood
          and listened to. What is left, namely tradition, although
          quite
          wonderful in its wise conception of the Earth as our Mother,
          as a
          conscious being, this tradition is itself inadequate for the
          tasks
          which need to be done.
          
        
Moreover, this
          consciousness, this being
          of Nature is not singular, is not simple. The being of Nature
          is
          multiple and complicated, diverse and specialized. What has
          been
          conveyed to us out of the deep past is not superstition.
          Stories and
          tales of the elemental beings, of undines and gnomes and
          fairies and
          sprites, all this seemingly legendary material owes its
          existence to
          the fact that in the past human beings did in fact experience
          more
          directly the world of the spirit, the world which lies
          presently
          separated from humankind by a kind of veil. And recognition of
          these
          Nature beings is just a beginning, for the world of the spirit
          extends
          quite beyond that realm of mere earthly Nature, but to cosmic
          Nature as
          well.
          
        
Even so, this
          bold assertion of the
          consciousness and being of Nature in itself is insufficient.
          The reader
          of this essay is entitled to more. It becomes necessary, then,
          to
          explore not only the sterile quality of the conceptions of the
          natural
          world provided us by the processes of Western science, but
          also to
          suggest the means by which these ideas can be overcome and a
          true
          communion with the Spirit of Nature reestablished.
          
        
The reader
          should be cautioned that in
          this single essay there will no proof of what is asserted.
          Such a task
          would be impossible. What can be done, however, is to show
          briefly how
          it is that science came to such a narrow view of the natural
          world,
          what personalities resisted this process, and how then that
          resistance
          matured so that today one can find once again a way toward an
          intimate
          conversation with Nature. There is already existing much work
          about
          Nature by those who have begun this difficult and much needed
          task.
          
        
*
          
        
Even though
          this essay will endeavor to
          show that the conceptions of modern science have failed to
          find their
          way to the truth of the natural world, this is not to be seen
          as a
          criticism of that science. In the main, scientists follow
          quite
          rigorously and with great diligence a path of seeking which
          shows every
          chance of leading them to the truth. Science stands upon an
          excellent
          moral foundation when it says: anyone who asserts the truth of
          a thing,
          must be able to show others that means necessary for them to
          find this
          truth for themselves. Experiments must be reproducible.
          Theories must
          be testable.
          
        
It is also necessary to be brief, so to the extent the reader may wish for more the author at once apologizes. Many books will be referred to, however, which if read and appreciated will more than satisfy the questing human spirit.
*
          
        
We all will
          perhaps remember from school,
          at least somewhat, what has been called the "Copernican
          revolution",
          the early struggles of science against the doctrines of the
          Catholic
          Church. This often resulted in various practitioners of the
          new
          discipline called natural philosophy (eventually to be called
          science)
          being excommunicated, and in some instances burned at the
          stake as
          heretics. We may think we are past this now, but anyone with
          an ear for
          these things is aware that even today those who espouse views
          sufficiently outside main-stream science (the Church of our
          time) are
          rebuked by their peers, shunned in the communities of their
          specialization, and at risk for having their funding, i.e.
          their
          livelihood, taken away. Some of these "arguments" are more
          public, e.g.
          "cold fusion", creationism vs. Darwinism and so forth. Less
          perceivable
          to the general public is what can happen to someone who looks
          today for
          the spirit in nature, or otherwise seems to think that some
          "superstitions" may have been based upon the truth.
          
        
In the
          beginnings of science the
          problematic philosophic problems were more out in the open.
          But since
          the materialistic ideas won the day, theirs are the views in
          the
          histories of science in which the ordinary person is educated.
          As in
          politics and war, so in science; the winners write the
          histories.
          Several of the "romantics" and the "transcendentalists" had
          grave
          problems with the course science was taking. The poet Goethe
          was a
          vigorous opponent of Newtonian optics. The poet Coleridge had
          a much
          different approach to early biology. Emerson wrote in his
          essay Nature:
          "Nature
          is a
          thought incarnate, and turns to a thought again as ice becomes
          water
          and gas. The world is mind precipitated, and the volatile
          essence is
          forever escaping again into the state of free thought." Kepler, who gave us the fundamental laws of
          planetary
          dynamics was also an astrologer, and warned repeatedly about
          the danger
          of "throwing out the baby with the bath water", i.e.
          abandoning
          whole-sale all the hard won wisdom of the previous ages in the
          rush to
          make everything "scientific". One could go on...Ruskin,
          Howard,
          Faraday, the list is long of those who opposed a completely
          mechanistic
          view of Nature.
          
        
For an
          excellent examination of the whole
          flow introduced into scientific thinking with the idea of
          Nature as a
          mechanism, and related problems, the reader of this essay
          should become
          acquainted with Evolution
          and the New Gnosis: Anti-establishment
          Essays on
          Knowledge, Science, Religion and Causal Logic,
          by
          Don Cruse, with Robert Zimmer.  See also Cruse's website.
          
        
The essential
          thing to realize here, is
          that, as this "war" over what was the true picture of Nature
          was in its
          beginning stages, there were few "pure" scientists. That
          Goethe is
          remembered mainly as a poet is true only because the winners
          wrote the
          histories. He was in fact an extraordinary scientist, as
          anyone will
          realize who studies his Theory of Color. That Kepler and
          Faraday had a
          lot more to say than what is taught in school today is a
          simple fact.
          Faraday gave us the fundamental laws of electricity and
          magnetism, but
          he did so in the context of observations which lead him to
          consider
          that a distinction between "ponderables" and "imponderables"
          in Nature,
          i.e. between matter and spirit, was essential. Both were
          present, both
          were necessary.
          
        
Clearly one
          view won the day. The "why"
          of this is not simple, and cannot be found in the idea that
          one was
          true and one was false. We can perhaps get a slight feel for
          the
          underlying dynamics by realizing that at the time when all
          this was
          happening, the whole of Europe was emerging from a world view
          dominated
          by the ideas of the Roman Church. Thus, for many, to strive
          for a
          spirit-free view of nature was to also strive for freedom from
          a no
          longer desired authority which had for centuries been telling
          people
          what was true and what was not. To find spirit in Nature would
          have
          been to grant power back to an institution many were violently
          struggling to leave behind.
          
        
More crucially,
          scientists were led in
          directions that were determined by the yet unknown nature of
          what they
          discovered. Ultimately, with the discovery of electricity,
          scientists,
          understandably following carefully the trail as it appeared
          before
          them, were led rapidly into what one author has called "a
          country that
          is not ours". As part of this process a concept concerning
          "force"
          arose, which was very different from the way past ages looked
          at the
          problem of causation. This new concept of force was abstract,
          and
          completely divorced from any idea of being
          or consciousness. No longer were the happenings in the natural
          world the
          product of the activity of beings, the
          product of intended
          activity. Thus more and more the possibility, that Nature may
          have a
          spiritual foundation, disappeared.
          
        
For a wonderful examination of the times in which this "battle" was being waged, read Neal Stephenson's three books collected titled: the Baroque Cycle (Quicksilver; the Confusion; and, the System of the World). For a remarkable historical imagination of these issues, read in the System of the World, the chapter Library of Leicester House.
For a deeper
          and more modern examination
          of these problems, read Owen Barfield's fascinating book: Worlds
          Apart.   Barfield creates
          an
          imagined three day conversation in this book, involving what
          he
          describes as: a solicitor with philological interests; a
          professor of
          historical theology and ethics; a young man employed at a
          rocket
          station; a professor of physical science; a retired
          schoolmaster; a
          linguistic philosopher, and a psychiatrist.  What the
          dialog
          reveals is that even these modern men, educated in our
          universities,
          where the scientific paradigm is dominate, can't actually talk
          to each
          other.   The fundamental concepts of each individual
          discipline can't be brought together.
          
        
People today
          think that the argument
          between the creationists and the neo-Darwinian biologists over
          the
          theory of evolution, is the real battleground between an
          interpretation
          of reality over whether there is spirit, or only matter.
            The folks involved in this argument don't even
          actually
          know the history of ideas that is relevant to their discussion
          and most
          of what they say is useless and completely superficial.
          
        
If one wants to
          get into the heart of the
          question of matter versus spirit, the collective genius of
          Stephenson
          and Barfield is the best path.   Only those who work
          with the
          history of ideas can speak to these questions, for the current
          state of
          our understanding of these questions has deep roots that need
          to be
          included if we are ever to resolve these matters and remain
          rational
          and devoted to the truth.
          
        
As everyone is
          aware, it is pretty much
          assumed today that older conceptions of Nature are purely
          superstitious; that a Nature with being and consciousness is
          an
          impossibility. With the arrival of DNA research and genetic
          engineering, the difficult problems in biology are believed to
          be
          mostly solved, and few new conceptions are needed. Physicists
          routinely
          act as if the mind of modern man has little problem forming
          true
          concepts of events billions of years in the past. Zoologists
          accept
          Darwinian evolution as a settled matter, and resent deeply the
          struggles of the "creationists" to suggest otherwise.
          Neuro-physiologists are convinced that the secrets of the mind
          are
          shortly to be theirs. While the clockwork is complicated,
          Nature is
          clearly a mechanism, made up of very small parts acting in
          understandable ways leading from a remote "big bang" through a
          long
          period of evolution to the arrival of life, and ultimately
          consciousness (mind). Unfortunately, they've probably got it
          mostly
          wrong.
          
        
It would be
          possible to make an argument
          about this "wrongness" solely from the history of science
          itself. In
          Thomas Kuhn's The
          Structure of Scientific Revolutions,
          it is
          established that science, rather then being a carefully built
          up
          structure, erected on a sure foundation, is instead a
          succession of
          points of view, the newest one substituting for the preceding,
          rather
          then being built out of it. Science is somewhat like a rat in
          a maze,
          convinced at every point it has solved the puzzle only to
          discover
          another dead end which has to be abandoned. Based merely on
          behavior
          one would have to assume that what is believed to be true now
          about
          these great questions (what is life and consciousness, where
          did they
          come from, how did the universe begin) will, in its own time,
          be found
          false and replaced by other views.
          
        
Or to take
          another tack, one could argue
          that most of what is said, about these big questions (does
          Nature have
          consciousness or mind, and which comes first in evolution,
          mind or
          matter), by modern day science, is itself pseudo-science, i.e.
          a modern
          form of superstition, because the theories are not testable.
          See in
          this regard, Karl Popper's Realism
          and the Aim of Science;  Darwin
          on
          Trial, Phillip E. Johnson, (Regnery
          Gateway,
          1991); and, also, Natural
          Selection, and the Criteria by which a Theory is Judged, by Ronald H. Brady, Systematic Zoology,
          28:600-621,
          1979 (now called Dogma and
          Doubt, it can be found on-line at:
          http://www.natureinstitute.org/txt/rb/dogma/dogmadoubt.htm).
           This
          last is the best by far, for it is deeply informed on the
          history of
          the relevant ideas, and is carefully and subtly thought out.
          
        
While the above discussion has been unnecessarily brief, it should have hints enough so that the reader wanting more can find his own way. It remains then to find some process by which these questions can be answered in ways which satisfies our human desire for testable and reliable truths. What can be said about this, as briefly as possible, will be related next.
*
          
        
We can perhaps
          begin by asking what kind
          of an approach to the spirit would be necessary, what pathway
          to
          finding out the truth about Nature and Spirit, will meet the
          quite
          reasonable demands of science for reproducibility and
          testability. In a
          sense we need a science of the spirit, or perhaps to put it
          another
          way, a spiritual science.
          
        
Those who know
          the foundations of science
          are aware that science stands basically upon two touchstones,
          one being
          a philosophical point of view, which at one time was called
          logical
          positivism, and the other being mathematics, which provides a
          rigor and
          discipline to the practice of science which is very
          beneficial. So we
          can anticipate as well that our spiritual science needs a testable philosophic basis (the
          King of
          the Sciences), and a reproducible mathematical structure (the
          Queen of
          the Sciences), or perhaps better said, skeleton.
          
        
Another aspect of modern science which supports its reliability is the technology which proceeds from it. This suggests then that our spiritual science will have to show some results, will need to have produced observable effects, somehow people will have to have been able to take from this spiritual science and acted upon and changed the world.
Well, that is
          quite a lot, and I believe
          enough. We should now, perhaps, cut this spiritual science a little slack, and not expect some
          other
          things. We ought to allow it to be different in certain ways,
          after all
          that is exactly what it has to be given the basic assumptions.
          Certainly we can't expect it to be widely known or popular;
          for
          mainstream science has to have been constantly resistant to
          such ideas.
          Therefore, we ought to allow it to be young. How could it be
          otherwise,
          or wouldn't we already know of it?
          
        
Certainly we
          have to allow for some
          controversy, after all the ideas it produces will be different
          from the
          mainstream. As well, we should not expect to understand it
          immediately,
          nor expect that we will come to the necessary understanding
          without
          some, in fact perhaps, a great deal of effort. After all we
          have been
          educated into the mainstream. We think those ideas
          automatically, and
          most of our words take their meaning from this quite dominate
          way of
          thinking about the natural world. Let us take a sample
          problem, and see
          if it can help us better appreciate what a spiritual science
          will need,
          how it will be different and the kinds of struggles necessary
          to
          understanding what it might be able to communicate to us about
          the
          natural world. With this problem, by the way, I am not
          attempting to do
          something definitive, but rather to use it to give us a more
          concrete
          sense of what such a science needs to be, and how it might be
          different.
          
        
Consider for
          the moment the idea of
          space. When we think this idea on a very large scale we
          usually think
          of the great universe of stars; and, having been influenced by
          television and films we will have an image of movement between
          stars,
          as if we were a star-ship traveling at light speed across the
          cosmic
          spaces. While the "spacial" world is three dimensional, and
          seemingly
          endless, for the modern physicist, there are certain problems.
          Was
          there "empty space" before the "big bang", before matter
          erupted from
          its supposed birth point and exploded into the evolving
          universe? Or to
          put it another way, was space itself "created"?
          
        
For all of
          humanities history, up until
          the last four or five hundred years, very different ideas of
          cosmic
          space existed. To the naked eye the starry heaven is a
          remarkable
          vista; a place we cannot go, a place of mystery whose rhythms
          and
          movements seemed to announce great and small events in the
          lives of
          peoples and kingdoms. Our ancestors did not have the idea of
          endless
          three dimensional openness; for them the heavens were the
          abode of the
          Gods. But the early natural philosophers thought otherwise,
          and with
          the new tools, first the telescope, and then later the
          spectrometer,
          the computer, and so on almost endlessly, the old vision was
          shattered.
          The theory of parallax gave us distance, red shift gave us
          velocity,
          the universe was expanding and enormous. And we? We were small
          and
          insignificant. The Earth as the Center of the Universe?
          Hogwash!
          
        
Who would dare
          doubt this? To suggest
          otherwise, to some, would be evidence of an unstable mind. To
          believe
          that this endless emptiness might have consciousness and being...get a life,
          better yet,
          go see a psychiatrist.
          
        
One hesitates
          to bring bad news...but...
          First off, most of astronomical-physics, or what is sometimes
          called
          cosmology, is not testable by the ordinary means we have and
          use, say
          in geology or zoology. We can't go to the nearest star and see
          if it is
          in fact made up the way spectrometry suggests. We can't go
          there in
          such a way that confirms whether the distance we develop from
          parallax
          is accurate, nor can we go off to the side, so to speak, and
          measure in
          some other way the velocity to confirm what we think the red
          shift
          tells us.
          
        
Our methods are
          limited. What certainty
          of belief there is comes in large part from the fact that each
          step has
          been rigorously examined by many scientists, and carefully
          repeated
          over and over again, and whenever possible each part was
          worked upon in
          such a way that it could, if possible, be used as a double
          check
          against any other part. If it isn't true, it isn't because our
          best
          efforts haven't been spent working it out. If it isn't true
          it's
          because we missed something, or haven't yet discovered
          something or
          maybe assumed something was a certainty that will later turn
          out not to
          be so.
          
        
The point to
          note is this: our idea of
          space, even to the extent developed by modern cosmology, does
          contain
          speculation (although as sound as humanly possible) and
          elements that
          can't be confirmed directly, but which have to be inferred.
          Anybody got
          a better one?
          
        
At this point
          we should perhaps examine a
          particular aspect of this discussion a little more closely. By
          and
          large for the ordinary person, that cosmic space is a three
          dimensional
          endlessness is an idea, or better yet an imagination created
          through
          education and further developed through the experience of
          films and
          television. We don't have a direct personal experience of this
          seeming
          fact. Our whole culture believes it. We are raised to think
          it.
          
        
In this, it
          (the idea) bears an odd
          relationship to an older idea, that of the flat earth. For the
          naive
          consciousness of the time in which people believed in a flat
          earth it
          was an obvious fact. The earth was observably flat. Yet the
          time came
          when people became convinced the earth was round, and thus a
          different
          belief was taught and became part of the general cultural
          imagination
          of what was real. Only after this did humanity receive the
          gift of
          seeing from space the beautiful blue-white globe of the world.
          
        
Now what we are
          trying to notice here is
          not the particular fact of the three dimensionality of cosmic
          space,
          but rather that we know it as an idea, as part of the general
          cultural
          imagination of the world's reality. We do not know it as an
          experience,
          but rather as one part of a very complex system of ideas in
          which we
          are indoctrinated through education. This complex of ideas, of
          which
          large parts are believed to be absolutely true, constitutes
          for modern
          educated humanity a new myth. Just like the ancients, whose
          myths we
          now call superstitions, we have our world view, our socially
          indoctrinated concepts of what the world is, how it is
          organized, what
          fundamental principles caused it to be, and how those
          principles cause
          it to behave in the present. The most comprehensive name for
          this myth
          is scientific materialism, and even though many scientists
          understand
          the limitations of their work and ideas, for the ordinary
          person, these
          ideas are reality.
          
        
To say that the
          modern scientist is
          similar to the old priests of the ancients is not to overstate
          the
          case. For the ordinary person the protocols and methodologies
          of
          science are a protected mystery. Only after long preparation
          and
          education is one admitted to the sanctuaries of modern science
          as a
          co-worker. And there are secrets, things kept hidden from the
          general
          public. For example, Darwinian evolution (i.e. natural
          selection) is in
          serious trouble, but the "priests" don't want the creationists
          to know
          it. The physicists studying quantum theory are beginning to
          use the
          word "intention" in describing the quantum behavior of certain
          kinds of
          small "particles". No one should be surprised if scientific
          materialism
          is slowly coming apart, because as long as the scientist is
          rigorous in
          his pursuit of the truth he is bound to discover the role of
          spirit in
          Nature. It's there and thus it must be eventually found.
          
        
Hopefully we
          will now have sufficient
          preparation to look at what exists today of another point of
          view,
          another "imagination" of the world that again finds mystery in
          the
          processes of the natural world. Again, this caution. At best
          all this
          essay can do is expose this approach to the natural world to
          the
          reader. Its fundamental works can be cited, its relationship
          to the
          general trends of science noted, and its basic ideas and
          principles
          briefly referred to. Beyond that one cannot go. It remains for
          the
          reader to investigate this ongoing work with an unprejudiced
          eye and an
          open mind, for its is a certainty that nothing new will be
          discovered
          if one already knows the questions and the answers.
          
        
*
          
        
I am going to
          approach the following more
          in the form of a narrative story then as an expository essay.
          This
          personality lived and did this, this other personality did
          that. The
          pictures conveyed will necessarily only be partial. Our
          problem is not
          unlike that of the five blind wise men who chanced to meet an
          elephant.
          One, who touched the tail, thought of it as like a twig. The
          one, who
          touched the ear, believed it was a large leaf. To the one, who
          touched
          the leg, it was a tree, to the one, who touched the side, it
          was a rock
          and to the, one who touched the trunk, it was a...well I can't
          remember
          all the story, but I think you get the point. If you draw
          instant
          conclusions from this article you will not get the
          understanding you
          otherwise might if you instead investigate carefully and
          directly for
          yourself.
          
        
I would also
          like to add a special
          contextual fact, one of which many in the environmental
          movement will
          have some awareness. Many today look to aboriginal peoples for
          an
          example of a healthy relationship to the natural world. Among
          such
          peoples are a number of prophecies, and I would like to direct
          the
          attention of the reader to a particular one: that of the Hopi
          Indians
          of America's Southwest. Part of the Hopi Prophecy is an
          expectation
          that there will arrive someday among them someone or some
          group which
          they call the Pahana, or the True White Brother. This
          individual or
          group is to bring purification, to inaugurate the Day of
          Purification,
          and to provide the "life plan for the future".
          
        
Mankind's loss
          of conscious knowledge of
          the being of nature, as that has occurred over the course of
          our
          history, is also the descent of a kind of darkness. It should
          surpris
          e
          no one, who bothers to think carefully about it, that the
          return of
          such an understanding, a kind of broad social enlightenment,
          must
          necessarily be accompanied by an extended, and cultural-wide
          rite of
          passage - quite aptly named by the Hopi: the Day of
          Purification.".
          Without going into the very complicated details, I would like
          to
          suggest that the following will eventually be understood to be
          part of
          the fulfillment of this ancient prophecy.
          
        
*
          
        
In 1861, while
          the American Civil War was
          just beginning, in Kraljevec, a village on the border between
          Hungary
          and Croatia, a man by the name of Rudolf Steiner was born. By
          the time
          he had died in 1925, he had laid securely the foundations for
          just that
          spiritual science we have imagined must need to exist, if we
          are to
          find our way again to the being of Nature. Among the several
          biographies of Dr. Steiner can be found this one, written by
          A.P.
          Shepard: Scientist of the Invisible, Rudolf Steiner, a biography. To those who know and clearly understand his
          work, this
          is a most apt title.
          
        
We can get an
          early measure of Steiner's
          genius by noting that at the age of 23, he was invited to edit
          and
          write the introduction to Goethe's scientific writings. For
          those of us
          raised in the cultural West, it is difficult to realize what a
          remarkable honor this was, because Goethe has not the same
          significance
          for us that he has for Central European culture. During the
          course of
          this work, Steiner realized that Goethe's views of nature
          depended upon
          a philosophical position quite different from that of main
          stream
          science, and one which Goethe himself had never articulated.
          Steiner
          therefore undertook to remedy this situation and produced in
          1886 a
          remarkable philosophic text: A Theory
          of Knowledge Implicit in Goethe's World Conception.
          
        
In 1894, in a
          more formal way, and also
          fully cognizant of the philosophical ideas and temper of the
          time,
          Steiner produced a deeper philosophic text, which was an
          expression of
          his own personal work and not just the elaboration of
          something implied
          in Goethe's scientific books and papers. Called The
Philosophy
          of Spiritual Activity, it also
          carried the intriguing subtitle, "some results of
          introspective
          observation following the methods of natural science".
          
        
What is
          expressed in these two books it
          would be quite impossible to even summarize. In one sense they
          approach
          the same fundamental question: how do we know what is true?
          The basic
          difference, between modern philosophy and Steiner's, may be
          broadly
          painted this way: For the mainstream, the activity of human
          consciousness, of the mind, is subjective in nature and, in
          combination
          with our senses, is not a reliable way to the truth of the
          world. For
          Steiner, as for Goethe, the opposite is true. The human being
          is so
          designed that our senses, when properly trained, can give us
          all of
          Natures secrets as long as the mind is disciplined as well.
          For the
          human being is of nature, and what appears inwardly to a properly
          trained
          human thinking is the essence of Nature Herself. Here are
          Steiner's own
          words from Theory of Knowledge:
          
        
"It is really the
          genuine, and indeed the truest, form of
          Nature, which comes to manifestation in the human mind,
          whereas for a
          mere sense-being only Nature's external aspect would exist.
          Knowledge
          plays here a role of world significance. It is the conclusion
          of a work
          of creation. What takes place in human consciousness is the
          interpretation of Nature to itself. Thought is the last member
          in a
          series of processes whereby Nature is formed."
          (emphasis
          added).
          
        
The central
          question, these books pose
          and proceed to answer in a quite empirical way, is: what do we
          make of
          human thought? The approach, while expository, if read
          carefully,
          reveals that the reader is challenged at each step to observe
          in his
          own mind those universal processes leading to the production
          of
          thoughts, so that by an empiricism of thinking, and
          observation about
          thinking, the human being finds that in the activity of
          thinking one
          stands upon the threshold to a yet unknown world. An internal
          process,
          which once stood in darkness, and which went on without any
          thought
          given to its nature or meaning, now begins to unfold new
          possibilities.
          When this is pursued fully one comes to realize that the inside of the human
          being is a thing much greater and
          more
          significant than the outside of things as these appear to the senses.
          
        
Let us try to
          work with an analogy.
          Imagine opening up the hood of an automobile. There before one
          is a
          mass of complicated wires, hoses, machines and other strange
          and
          unknown devices. That is for most of us. For the master
          mechanic, the
          view is something else altogether. We both see the same thing,
          but the
          ideas we bring to what we see are quite different. The master
          mechanic's understanding and experience allows him to identify
          and see
          relationships where to most of us there would just be chaos.
          The
          reality and significance of those man made objects is not in
          what
          appears to the senses at all. Only to the mind does the
          essential arise.
          
        
It was Goethe's
          insight to realize that
          something similar was true of our relationship to Nature. With
          this
          very significant difference. Man made objects are created
          according to
          our intentions; we give them purpose. This can itself be
          taught. But
          what is the purpose of a flower; who is to teach us that?
          
        
Over many years
          of work Goethe came to
          realize that one could trust the senses if one did not add
          ideas to
          what was observed. Rather one observed all the manifestations
          of the
          object of study (for example the world of plants), until one
          could
          recreate in ones own imagination the observed processes. For
          example,
          over the course of its birth from seed to its flowering end, a
          bush
          will produce a variety of types of leaves. The early ones
          quite often
          different from the last. What Goethe did was to recreate in
          his
          imagination this process of movement, from the earliest form
          of the
          leaf to the latest. (This is very much an oversimplification
          of his
          work, by the way.) Over time, Goethe began to experience
          something
          which seemed to stand behind the transformations from one form
          of leaf
          to the next, but which did not arise from his own activity. In
          a way
          his mind became a sense organ into another realm. Through the
          discipline of his thought life, and the devotion to what came
          to him
          through the senses, Goethe began to experience inwardly what
          he called
          the Ur-Plant, the spiritual Archetype from which all plants
          are formed.
          
        
In a like
          manner Goethe examined the
          animal kingdom in addition to the kingdom of the plants. He
          found his
          way of working there to be successful as well. He called his
          activity: "learning to read in the Book
          of Nature". What Nature presents to
          the
          senses, if appreciated in a disciplined way, "spoke".
          Even
          so, the history of science passed this work by, and other ways
          of
          thinking became the established methodology.
          
        
It remained
          then for Rudolf Steiner to
          rescue this overlooked work and restore it to its deserved
          place in the
          history of human thought. As a consequence of Steiner's
          activity there
          has come to be born: Goethean Science. Its practitioners are
          few, and
          the number of its published works also small. But in their own
          way
          these works offer the beginning of a whole new way of
          understanding,
          and teaching, about Nature. And when Goethean Science is put
          into
          relationship with Steiner's more mature work, Spiritual
          Science, the
          means to commune with Nature emerges as well.
          
        
Let us at this
          point simply become aware
          of a few of the published works of Goethean Science. Many
          readers of
          the various versions of the Whole Earth Catalog will be aware
          of the
          book: Sensitive Chaos,
        (The
          Creation of Flowing
          Forms in Water & Air), by
          Theodor
          Schwenk, Anthroposophic Press. Here, with beautiful text,
          pictures and
          drawings, some of the basic laws by which form arises in
          Nature are
          uncovered, simply through the careful exploration of how water
          and air
          move. I will say no more here, for those who genuinely want to
          investigate Goethean Science will trouble themselves to become
          acquainted with its basic works.
          
        
About the realm
          of the animals can be
          found this: Man and Mammals, Toward a Biology of Form,
          by Wolfgang Schad, Waldorf Press. Here is expressed one
          of the most profound ideas, first put forward by Steiner, yet
          consistent with Goethe's studies, about the relationship
          between
          function and form which appears everywhere as a threefoldness,
          a
          remarkable law of organization of both the organic and the
          ideal
          according to laws of polarity.
          
        
With the idea
          of polarity we brush up
          against one of the things we noted above as a precondition for
          a new,
          yet spiritual, science, namely an appropriate mathematics. The
          Goethean
          Science movement and its more spiritually complex relative,
          the
          Anthroposophical Movement, have produced many works exploring
          a
          remarkable form of mathematics called Projective Geometry.
          Here are
          just a few of the available texts: Physical
and
          Ethereal Spaces, George Adams,
          Rudolf
          Steiner Press. Projective
          Geometry, Creative Polarities in Space and Time,
          Olive
          Whicher, Rudolf Steiner Press. The Plant Between Sun and
          Earth,
          George Adams and Olive Whicher, Rudolf Steiner Press. The
          Field
          of Form, Lawrence Edwards, Floris
          Books.
          
        
With these and
          other related texts, as
          well as with the two philosophic texts of Steiner noted above,
          our new
          science stands upon all the necessary foundation it needs, as
          we
          indicated earlier - that is an appropriate mathematics and
          philosophy
          of knowledge.
          
        
For those who
          legitimately may need to
          understand how main-stream science took the path it did, and
          what can
          be done about it, there is: Man or
          Matter, Ernst Lehrs, Anthroposophic
          Press.
          The description, in the Anthroposophic Press Catalog about
          this book,
          reads as follows: "Now
          a
          classic, this is the fundamental text for those seeking a
          spiritual
          understanding of nature on the basis of Goethe's method of
          training
          observation and thought. Working out of a detailed history of
          science,
          Lehrs reveals to the reader not only how science has been
          inescapably
          lead to the illusions it holds today, but more importantly,
          how the
          reader may correct in himself these misconceptions brought
          into his
          world view through modern education."
          
        
It remains for
          us then to link up
          Goethean Science, and Rudolf Steiner's Anthroposophy, or
          Spiritual
          Science. This, however, is not so simple, for in really
          considering the
          spiritual we run also into the religious, which for many is
          either a
          grave difficulty or a profound and untouchable belief. If we
          proceed
          carefully, we can nevertheless walk through this potential
          mine-field
          without too much harm. Hopefully these guidelines will help.
          
        
It is not the
          intention of this essay to
          argue for or against any religious belief, including, broadly
          speaking,
          agnosticism or atheism. The point is to remain true to the
          principles
          of modern science which require reproducible experiments and
          testable
          hypotheses. However, when we approach the spiritual we have to
          be
          realistic about what is involved in "reproducing" and
          "testing". In the
          realm of the spirit such matters are more difficult because in
          large
          part they require of the individual a far greater effort and
          self-mastery than ordinary experimental science.
          
        
Consider this
          analogy. If I were to
          attempt to reproduce current work in particle physics, in a
          scientific
          way, I would need access to the appropriate devices
          (regardless of how
          complex and costly). Further I would need an appropriate
          education and
          familiarity with the current work and theories. These are all
          a given.
          So it is with research in the realm of the spirit. One needs
          to develop
          the techniques of the inner capacities and to have mastery of
          the
          ongoing work. Thus, to attempt to dispute or criticize
          spiritual
          science without such effort is to defy the scientific spirit
          of the
          age, and to make a mockery of reasonable human discourse.
          
        
With this
          needed understanding in mind
          let us begin to enter more deeply into the realms of a modern
          spiritual
          science.
          
        
A personality
          not mentioned so far, and,
          in the view of many, certainly Steiner's peer in the science
          of the
          invisible (spiritual research), is one Valentin Tomberg. In
          his
          remarkable lectures published under the title: The
          Four
          Sacrifices of Christ and the Appearance of Christ in the
          Etheric, (Candeur Manuscripts),
          given in Rotterdam in the turn
          of the year 1938 to 1939, we can find the following:
          
        
"You see, the
          transition from all that is most prosaic
          produced by the nineteenth century to what the future holds is
          offered
          by the spiritual manifestation of Goetheanism - Goetheanism
          is, in
          fact, a bridge on which the transition can be made from the
          quantitative thinking of the nineteenth century to a
          qualitative,
          characterizing thinking. Now, where this transition leads is
          to
          Spiritual Science. Here it is not only a matter of being able
          to think
          qualitatively, but of placing the moral element in the
          thinking into
          the foreground. And by way of comparison, one could say that
          Goetheanism is related to Anthroposophy, to Spiritual Science,
          in the
          same way as the organic world is related to the soul world.
          The organic
          calls for qualitative thinking; the soul world, for the
          formation of
          moral concepts.".
          
        
For some
          readers, right at this point
          there will be a difficulty. Having used the word "moral" at
          once we
          encounter all kinds of preconceptions about what that means.
          If there
          is anything which seems to lie outside of the realm of the
          scientific,
          of the objective, it would be the question of what is moral.
          (Although,
          interestingly enough, there are some who think there can be an
          objective "ethics".)
          
        
However, in the
          understanding of Steiner
          and Tomberg and their many students, the core need of modern
          humanity
          is freedom. And not just political liberty, but more
          importantly
          freedom in thought, freedom of spirit. Steiner's The
Philosophy
          of Spiritual Activity is sometimes
          called The Philosophy of Freedom, the
          problem being how to translate from the German, Die
          Philosophie der
          Freiheit. One translator invented a new English word to stand
          in for
          Freiheit: namely Freehood, which is obviously very clumsy and
          unattractive. My poet-self leans toward a freer translation,
          namely The
          Philosophy of Free
          Becoming.
          
        
The key to this
          problem lies in a general
          confusion of our time regarding human inner life and the role
          of
          conscience. An objective introspection of human consciousness
          comes to
          realize that there is an equally objective experience which is
          the
          "voice of conscience". Just as the darkness, which inhibits us
          from
          truly understanding the production of our own thoughts, can be
          lifted,
          so can the darkness which makes dim the "voice of conscience"
          be
          eliminated. "Conscience" is an aspect of our spirit, and it is
          this
          higher element of our nature which knows what in any given
          situation it
          means to be moral. This places morality outside the realm of
          doctrine,
          dogma or rules or anything other then our own higher judgment.
          Steiner's The Philosophy of Spiritual Activity calls this part
          of human
          potential: ethical individualism. Morality then becomes as
          much an act
          of freedom as any other.
          
        
There can be
          difficulties here. Freedom,
          Steiner pointed out, is something different from license. Of
          course we
          can do anything, but whether we should or not is a whole other
          question. In the past the problem has been who is to make the
          judgment
          of what we should or should not do. In Goetheanism and in
          Spiritual
          Science, it is the individual himself who makes that judgment.
          Given
          the gift of "conscience" we have a capacity for certain moral
          knowledge. The difficulty is whether we pay attention or not,
          not
          whether we can know what is moral or not. Conscience can be
          ignored and
          often is. But that is a whole other issue.
          
        
Hopefully this
          discussion will have
          helped some regarding the confusion that can arise when one
          suggests
          that with Goetheanism we leave behind quantitative thinking
          for
          qualitative thinking, and that with Spiritual Science we go
          onward to
          moral thinking. In each case it is a question of what is to be
          the
          object of our search for knowledge. With quantitative thinking
          we gain
          a mastery of the material-mechanical aspects of existence,
          thus our
          civilizations technological successes. With qualitative
          thinking we
          gain a mastery of the living aspects of existence and with
          moral
          thinking we gain a master of the invisible aspects, the
          aspects of soul
          and spirit. In each case we can have an "objective" knowledge,
          because
          we chose a method appropriate to the purpose we pursued, and
          because we
          acted in a disciplined way, so that our investigations
          remained
          "empirical", reproducible and testable.
          
        
It is then with
          Spiritual Science that we
          enter on that path that can lead to a real knowledge of the
          being and
          consciousness of Nature, to a communion with that which lies
          behind the
          veil of the sense world. From one point of view, anthroposophy
          or
          spiritual science, as founded by Steiner, has two main themes.
          The
          first theme is how to attain knowledge of what aboriginal
          peoples might
          call the world of the invisibles. The second theme is the
          results of
          that research. In the literature of both Goetheanism and
          spiritual
          science one finds both these themes well elaborated. Yet, when
          criticism of these disciplines is presented, it is usually
          made by
          ignoring the how and arguing instead with the what, the
          results. This
          is rather easy, because the results very often contradict what
          is
          already thought by the main streams of both science and
          religion.
          
        
A good way to
          appreciate this problem is
          to imagine that what is being experienced today, by the
          arrival of
          these disciplines, Goetheanism and spiritual science, is the
          way of
          thought of the future making its first beginning appearances
          in our
          present. Think what it would have been like to have been a
          contemporary
          of Galileo. What he taught directly contradicted the views of
          the time.
          Think what it is like to change our habits, say ways of
          writing and
          speaking, for example. For most of Galileo's contemporaries to
          change
          their habits of thought is impossible. And not just because
          they are
          habits, but also because of the social pressure. The habits of
          our way
          of thinking and the social dynamic which supports them are
          extremely
          powerful forces. No one, therefore, should expect these new
          disciplines, Goetheanism and spiritual science, to overcome
          the modern
          version of this mental and social inertia very easily.
          
        
These problems
          are made all the more
          complex by the fact that even within those groups which
          struggle with
          spiritual science (such as the Anthroposophical Society) in an
          attempt
          to learn it, there is not a uniform approach. The groups which
          support
          and practice these new disciplines are made up of human beings
          and
          there are many difficulties, disagreements and confusions. I
          point this
          all out, so that those, who might choose to investigate more
          closely
          these disciplines, will approach Goetheanism and spiritual
          science with
          a certain carefulness.
          
        
If what has
          been written so far,
          especially as regards the possibility of learning to commune
          with the
          spiritual realities behind the natural world, has meant
          anything for
          the reader, then I will close with these words of guidance.
          
        
Be methodical and patient. Face the challenge of the philosophical problem contained in the books mentioned concerning it. Do not fear encountering the mathematical aspect, projective geometry. It is usually presented in ways far easier then we can imagine - not by abstract algebraic formulation, but through drawing and visualization. At the same time become acquainted with the practitioners, the people carrying out the various fruits of this work. Remember what was said regarding the need for a new science, a spiritual science, to have produced results, just as materialistic main-stream science has? Have you heard of Waldorf Schools, biodynamic agriculture, Camphill Communities, Eurythmy, anthroposophical medicine, curative education, the Christian Community, astrosophy, psychosophy, rhythmic massage, Werbeck singing, anthroposophical nursing?
Beware skipping
          past Goetheanism. That
          way leads to an illness. Thinking must go through a
          transformation,
          from the quantitative, to the qualitative and then to the
          moral. It is
          a process of inner metamorphosis. Each stage is essential. The
          goal is
          spiritual science, which stands upon the philosophic work and
          the
          mathematical work. Out of this disciplining of the thought
          life, then
          can be grown a disciplining of the sense life, the life of
          perception.
          
        
Expect
          obstacles. The moral thinking
          depends upon that moral training which only arises from the
          life we
          live, the immediate moral challenges of our own personal
          existence.
          There is nothing abstract here. It is all too painfully real.
          
        
Do not become
          confused by and in love
          solely with the results of spiritual research. It is much more
          important to master the how. With the how we are then free to
          choose
          just what we will think about. If we become too involved in
          the what,
          the results, it is possible to become captured by the rich
          conceptual
          world there unveiled, and then to lose sight of the necessity
          of making
          all concepts our own work product. Those, who encounter the
          Anthroposophical Society in their search, will meet many who
          have
          fallen into this error. Remember, the only ground on which we
          can stand
          as a free spiritual being in the world of the material and the
          immaterial is those qualities of being that arise from The Philosophy of
          Free
          Becoming.
          
        
The purpose of
          this essay has been to
          introduce a question into the environmental movement (What
          does
          Nature want?). The secondary purpose
          has
          been to point out an ongoing work which is laying the
          foundation
          (Goetheanism and spiritual science) for answering just that
          question -
          a foundation which does not require the abandoning of the
          principles of
          science. To those who may wish to travel this path, I add
          this: You
          will not travel it alone. Many there are who seek to reunite
          the Circle
          and the Cross. See The Mystery of the True White Brother, on my website.
          
        
Then, as a free
          spirit among other
          spirits we will come to that communion with Nature, which we
          seek and
          desire, a silent Eucharist of the Invisible.
          
        
addendum
          
        
This essay was
          written over 10 years ago,
          and I have become since that time more clear as to certain
          subtle
          distinctions, that I did not know at the time I wrote the
          above.
           Today, I can still stand behind the above, but would (if
          I were
          to rewrite it today) emphasize even more clearly the role and
          importance of Steiner's The
          Philosophy of Freedom.  It is
          in the
          mystery of the new cognition (see the essay In Joyous Celebration
          of the
          Soul Art and Music of Discipleship
          in the
          appendix to this book), that Anthroposophy finds its truly
          scientific
          basis.
          
        
***************************
          
        
 A
          Matter
          of Death
          
        
Recently there
          has been much public
          discussion about the problem of a possible right to die,
          sometimes
          called assisted suicide or euthanasia. This small essay is not
          directed
          to those issues, at least directly. Others have examined these
          questions much better than this writer, who does not consider
          that he
          has anything to add.
          
        
However,...there
          is always a "however".
          
        
In all these
          discussions, I have read
          almost nothing about death itself. The fundamental questions
          always
          were about rights, or mental health, or the role of physicians
          or
          lawyers or legislators, and, of course, about suffering. Yet,
          no one
          seems to be willing to consider just what death is.
          
        
What is being
          avoided? What is being
          embraced? If people are to be assisted, toward what end?
          
        
The failure to examine death is understandable. We have no real knowledge of death, although many beliefs. Even so, to my mind at least, there are facts which can be assembled, and, as is the nature of facts, there are implications. I offer here no argument, no attempt to come to definite conclusions - just facts and their natural consequences.
The essential
          core, of the first set of
          facts I would point to, was suggested to me in an unusual work
          (anonymously written), called Meditations
on
the
          Tarot: a Journey into Christian Hermeticism.
          These facts are nothing more than basic simple physics.
          
        
When a person
          dies, respiration stops and
          blood flow ends. Under these circumstances metabolism ceases,
          and the
          body loses heat (which is just reabsorbed into the general
          ambient
          thermal mixture of the surrounding environment). If we take
          the body of
          the deceased out into nature, as certain native peoples do,
          and leave
          these natural processes to continue, the body will eventually
          dissolve,
          except for the bones which may be eaten.
          
        
Through the
          activity of microbes and
          insects (excluding in this instance those animals that are
          carrion
          eaters) that aspect of physical existence which we call the
          body is
          de-constituted and its smallest parts redistributed throughout
          the
          various cycles of nature.
          
        
Nothing has ceased to exist -
          to be. Due to the operation of the laws of conservation of
          matter and
          energy, all that has disappeared is form; that is the
          particular
          arrangement and interrelationship of matter and energy, which
          we
          recognize as the human body.
          
        
The whole
          difficulty comes when we
          consider that aspect of the human being we call consciousness,
          particularly consciousness of self.
          
        
The matter
          changes form and continues.
          The energy changes form and continues. It seems most likely,
          given
          these uncontroverted facts, that self consciousness also
          merely changes
          form and continues.
          
        
Setting this
          aside for the moment, let us
          take up another thread. The essence of these next observations
          were
          suggested to me in the works of the largely unknown genius,
          Rudolf
          Steiner. Again it is a matter of simple known facts.
          
        
The human
          organism contains a number of
          different kinds of organs and arrangements of matter and
          energy. In
          such a living organism, the most common sub-division is the
          cell, of
          which there are certain various types. One type, the nerve
          cell,
          exhibits unusual properties.
          
        
These unusual
          properties arise when we
          examine nerve cells in association, that is in those organs
          which we
          call nerve bundles, which stream throughout the body and which
          concentrate in one large center (the brain) and two smaller
          centers
          (the spine and the solar plexus).
          
        
Contrary to
          other cell types, which are
          organized in various ways throughout the body, nerve cells do
          not
          repair themselves when damaged. A severed spinal cord will not
          heal
          itself, while a severed muscle sheath or a blood vessel will.
          
        
There is a
          second difference. Our
          consciousness is only associated with the "nervous system". If
          the
          correct nerve bundles to a limb are cut, sensation (i.e.
          consciousness)
          to the limb ceases.
          
        
What is even stranger is the fact that some nerve bundles are necessary for movement, that is conscious directed action, but can be destroyed (as in polio) while sensation remains.
What is implied
          by these facts?
          
        
They suggest
          that whatever life
          is, in a general sense, it is not of the same order or kind as
        consciousness. That is, when the cell/organ complex is capable
          of self
          repair, which is certainly a process filled with life,
          this
          same complex excludes consciousness. While on the other hand,
          when
          the life processes of the organism are reduced (i.e. the
          capacity
          for repair is no longer present) then, and only then, does
          consciousness appear.
          
        
There are two
          other generally reported
          phenomena, which, while anomalous and anecdotal, conform to
          this
          arrangement.
          
        
The first is
          the so-called "phantom limb"
          pain. The matter and energy arrangement, which had been the
          absent
          limb, is completely dissolved, but consciousness, to some
          degree,
          remains.
          
        
The second is
          the many and remarkably
          consistent "near death" experiences, which accompany temporary
          cardiac
          and respiratory failure.
          
        
There are, of
          course, physical
          explanations put forward regarding these two oddities. If you
          read them
          carefully, they are all essentially arguments directed at an
          assumed
          conclusion, and are not an examination of the natural
          implications of
          known facts.
          
        
We have so far
          noticed that consistency
          requires a law of conservation of consciousness to accompany
          those of
          matter and energy. In addition, we have observed that first life
          must withdraw to a significant degree before consciousness
          appears. If
          we extend this last fact in its natural direction, the
          implication is
          that if life recedes even further, even more consciousness
          will
          arise. Death, then, rather then being the extinguishing of
          consciousness, would actually mean its complete expansion, no
          longer
          being inhibited by the effort at maintaining life.
          This
          last is, of course, what all deep spiritual (enlightenment and
          initiation) systems teach.
          
        
To the above
          two general considerations I
          would like to add one more, for which I will have to take
          responsibility; at least in the sense of being the only one I
          know of
          who has observed certain well known facts and yet assessed
          these
          particular conclusions.
          
        
The facts are
          as follows:
          
        
Before the
          moment of birth, the mother
          and the child suffer and labor. After birth the physical pain,
          the
          trauma, has not disappeared, yet when the baby, now cleaned
          up, is
          given to the mother and first put to the breast, powerful
          emotions
          (states of consciousness) cover over the pain with feelings of
          joy and
          contentment.
          
        
There are
          exceptions of course, but, by
          and large, these are uncontroverted facts concerning the door
          into life.
          
        
In the case of
          death there is, as well,
          labor and suffering. Death is often work of an extraordinary
          kind. The
          only reason we do not know, that on the other side of the
          threshold of
          death there is also joy and contentment, is because this
          presently lies
          outside our ability to observe.
          
        
Now one thing
          Nature certainly reveals is
          its tendencies to symmetry, balance and harmonious order
          (beauty).
          Given these clear facts, it seems to me that the much more
          dubious (in
          the sense of the absence of reason) view is to assert that
          consciousness does not survive the death of the body.
          
        
This being the
          case, it is not so
          surprising that all the great religions and myths conceive of
          an after
          life. Rather what is surprising is that many advocates of reason do not.
          
        
*
          
        
The careful
          reader may wonder what side
          this material may fall on in the current controversies around
          the
          suffering of the disabled and dying as that relates to
          assisted suicide
          and euthanasia.
          
        
I can only
          answer in a personal way,
          quite mindful of the many women who take days to deliver, days
          of pain
          and labor, and who resort to drugs to mask this suffering;
          and, as
          well, the work of suffering which precedes death, and the
          quite natural
          desire to be relieved of it when it has gone on for what seems
          like
          such a long period of time.
          
        
I only hope,
          when confronted with the
          suffering accompanying my own demise, to comport myself in a
          manner so
          as to be worthy of the joy and comfort I expect to find beyond
          the gate
          of death. I already know I don't do well with pain, and I have
          no
          desire to be a martyr, but I can't help feel that the labor
          and
          suffering which accompanies the end of life has just as much
          meaning
          and significance as that which accompanies its beginning. The labor preceding
          the gate
          into death is worth enduring, because, like the labor
          preceding the
          gate into birth, it has a purpose.
          
        
************************
          
        
a small meditation on the spiritual path
pioneered by Ralph Waldo Emerson,
including a report of some practical applications
delivered on the occasion of Emerson's 200 birthday,
May 25th, 2003, at the Alcott School of Philosophy
in Concord,
          Massachusetts
          
        
I am not a
          scholar of Emerson, and have
          read only a small part of his works.  Yet, what I have
          read has
          made clear to me that for the last 30 years I have walked in a
          land in
          which he walked before me.  We are forced, mostly by the
          current
          limits of language, to use such words as soul and spirit and
          inner life
          to point toward this land, but none of these words serve as
          more than a
          mere hint of this world, so different in nature and kind from
          the world
          we know through our senses.
          
        
I first became
          aware of this inner
          landscape through the discipline of psychology in the early
          1970's in
          Berkeley California.   Shortly after my initial
          encounter
          with what was literally a magical territory,  I studied
          briefly a
          multitude of various maps to this land, most of them
          traditional in one
          way or another - such as Zen Buddhism, Sufism, Tibetan
          Buddhism, the
          magic path of Franz Bardon, the remarkable teaching stories of
          the
          Plains Indians, coming eventually to the work of a man named
          Rudolf
          Steiner, the founder of what is called Anthroposophy or
          Spiritual
          Science.
          
        
It was through
          Rudolf Steiner that I was
          introduced to an objective study of thinking, principally
          through his
          works on epistemology.   I very much needed this
          practical
          work, because my main interest at that time, and since, has
          been in
          trying to understand the nature of the social and political
          existence
          of humanity, particularly in relationship to our divine
          nature.
           It was already by then clear to me through experience
          that we are
          spiritual beings, living in a material world, and it was
          important to
          me to understand society in relationship to this and yet
          remain within
          the scientific spirit of the age.  Rudolf Steiner set
          before me
          the means to do this, particularly in what he called the
          practice of
          Goetheanism.
          
        
Goetheanism in
          this sense is a kind of
          training of observation and thinking, and has some
          relationship to what
          others call phenomenology.  What is done is that thinking
          remains
          within the appearances, rather than to invent theories or
          seemings
          behind them.  For Nature, this disciplined thinking
          produces a
          remarkable understanding.  What I tried to do was to
          translate
          this same discipline into an examination of the social and
          political.
           I approached the basic phenomena of our shared existence
          as if in
          how it simply was - without adding or subtracting anything -
          this given
          reality was all that I needed to know.
          
        
This work was
          not easily done by the way,
          although much was obvious right from the beginning.  It
          took many
          years to bring to thinking and observing our social existence
          the
          needed discipline, and to eliminate from my own inner life,
          conditions
          of prejudice and assumption that frequently stood like a dark
          cloud in
          between my thinking-observation and the phenomena of social
          reality.
          
        
I was also aware that I kept adjusting what I was doing in directions away from Steiner's work and what I knew of Goethe. I felt comfortable in these adjustments, particularly since I would find confirmation in the improved results of my research. Nonetheless, I made changes away from what I thought of as pure Anthroposophy and Goetheanism.
Let me also be
          honest in another way, for
          this work was produced in many fits and starts.   I
          was not
          an academic, but a family man.  I worked at whatever jobs
          I could
          find, for example, for the last three years I worked in a
          factory, and
          the ten years before that a mental hospital.  I mostly
          raised
          children and lived life with all the successes and failures
          one
          ordinarily finds.
          
        
Now I have had
          the great fortune for the
          last 16 years to become a friend of Stuart Weeks, and through
          him to
          find a connection to the Transcendentalists, particularly
          Emerson.
           At the same time these last 16 years have not been
          scholarship of
          the bookish kind, so I didn't read a lot of Emerson.  I
          mostly
          worked at developing my thinking and my observational skills,
          and at
          gathering what might be called all the basic facts and
          experiences that
          I could.
          
        
I had
          discovered over time that it was
          important to love the object of ones thinking.  I don't
          mean by
          this to become overly sympathetic, but rather to have an
          intention
          willed into the thinking such that we care and honor and trust
          those
          matters which we want to understand.  In this way the
          essence of
          the object of our interest, and our own essence,  these
          two
          essences draw nearer to each other.
          
        
This meant, for
          example, that I watch a
          lot of television, and a lot of movies, and partake of all
          that could
          be called American Culture with a kind of relish.
           Obviously this
          Culture isn't representative of the whole of human social and
          political
          existences, but it was the nearest at hand, and I drank deeply
          of its
          nature.  You might say that I read this Culture in much
          the same
          way one learns to read a book.  And, of course, watching
          television and going to movies wasn't all that I did - its
          just an
          example of where the intention to love can lead someone.
          
        
Now to return to Emerson for a moment, before going on to some of the results of my own work. A couple of years ago I read for the first time his The American Scholar lecture. This was really a wonderful experience, for in this lecture I saw, not only a reflection of Emerson's path to inner discovery, but what was essentially an exact description of my own path. All those ways, in which I had instinctively adjusted what had been initially work that emulated Steiner and Goethe, were here described by Emerson.
Now this is, at
          first blush, a curious
          thing.  Not having studied Emerson, how did I come to
          follow where
          he had gone before.  Well, the explanation is simply
          enough.
           We both read the same instructional text, which is not
          out there
          in the world, but inside ourselves, within our own inner life.
           And because we are both Americans, we share something,
          for
          Peoples are not the same all over the world, but have inner
          differences
          of no little import.
          
        
So when Emerson writes, as he did in The American Scholar, that: "In self trust all virtues are comprehended", I knew this because I had been there and done that. And when he says in his essay Intellect: "You have first an instinct, then an opinion, then knowledge, as the plant has root, bud and fruit. Trust the instinct though you can render no reason. It is vain to hurry it. By trusting to the end it shall ripen into truth and you shall know what you believe." This too I understood, for it was where I had walked.
You might
          recall that I said above: "This
          work was not easily done by the way, although much was obvious
          right in
          the beginning."  Here you see was my instinct, things I
          sensed
          right in the beginning, but to fully realize them I had to
          keep at it
          for a long time, to let it ripen inside, until there it
          finally was -
          as truth.
          
        
Now I'd like to
          speak of my research into
          the social and political.  By the way, there is no
          possibility of
          more than hinting at this work, so that if you want details
          and more,
          you should just do a Google search for my name and this will
          lead you
          to my websites.
          
        
The essential
          aspect of social and
          political existence is not in the stream of events, what we
          tend to
          call history such as the recent war or the current political
          troubles
          in America, but rather in the individual biography.  The
          individual biography is the rooted axis around which all else
          turns,
          because it is only the experiences acquired by the "I am",
          within its
          life path, that endures.
          
        
All the rest
          passes away over time -
          governments, social ideals, legal systems, religions, even
          spiritual
          paths, but the "I am" or spirit endures and during its
          biography
          acquires those transforming experiences that become an aspect
          of its
          Eternal nature.
          
        
Our social life
          does have a great deal of
          order to it, however, but this order comes to it from within
          the
          biography outward.   Our social existence is fully
          determined
          by the individual and common elements of our human nature, not
          unlike
          the way a piece of just melted wax receives an impression from
          a signet
          ring.  Our nature is expressed onto the social organism,
          giving it
          all its essential qualities.  This means that we learn as
          much
          from the study of ourselves as we learn from the study of the
          social.
          
        
You might
          notice that I just used the
          term organism, for that which we ordinarily speak of as social
          existence and form, that is civilizations, kinds of
          governments, types
          of communities, the nature of families, these are all aspects
          of a
          whole which is quite alive.  How could it be otherwise,
          given that
          all the component parts, are individual living human beings?
          
        
It is possible
          then, through a
          disciplined thinking and observation, to learn to see with the
          thinking, how it is that life processes move though our shared
          social
          existence, giving us all the dynamic life conditions, and
          more, that we
          know from biology, such as birth and death, growth,
          development,
          reproduction, and even metamorphosis.  We discover how to
          know
          this  by learning to move the thinking in a way that it
          follows
          inwardly how it is that social form changes over time.
           We don't
          just look at any social condition in its static present state,
          but need
          to learn to think it in terms of its own biography.  For
          example,
          the family has changed considerably since the 14th Century and
          the
          whole of these subtle developing changes have to be thought,
          exactly as
          they unfolded in time.
          
        
Not just that,
          but we also have to think
          any particular stream of changes in such a way that we don't
          take it
          out of its context.  To continue the example, families
          are
          embedded in communities, which in turn are embedded in
          nations, which
          themselves are embedded in languages and cultures, while the
          whole
          ultimately is embedded in something we call Civilizations.
           My
          major work, by the way, a book not yet finished, is called: Strange
Fire:
          the Death, and the Resurrection, of Modern Civilization. [no longer the case as of 2006 ed.]
          
        
Once we can see
          this, then we know that
          part of the difficulty of understanding our own Age, is due to
          the fact
          that we are within a metamorphosis-like social crisis wherein
          Western
          Civilization is passing away, and something is being created
          that will
          replace it.  It is almost impossibly difficult to
          appreciate
          something like this when we are so intimately connected to it
          while it
          unfolds.  Yet, if we want to forge a more human future,
          this is
          the very matter we need most to understand.
          
        
Part of our
          problem is that we can't,
          using the scientific thinking of our Time, take hold of the
          living,
          because this scientific thinking has limited itself to the
          countable
          and the sensible.  The living, whether it is a simple
          biological
          organism, or, to put a crude name to it, the Life Sphere of
          the Social
          Organism, these can't be thought on the basis of what is
          merely seen
          and allows itself to be calculated.
          
        
The driving
          impulses of social existence,
          fear of death, joy in life, - all the virtues and the vices
          that
          inhabit human beings - these are invisible, and none of them
          can be
          reduced to merely physical causes without killing the very
          thing we
          want, and desperately need, to learn to understand.
          
        
Rudolf Steiner,
          in a quite remarkable
          book called: A Theory
          of Knowledge Implicit in Goethe's World Conception, wrote: "What takes place in human consciousness
          is the
          interpretation of Nature to itself.  Thought is the last
          member in
          the series of processes whereby Nature is formed.", while Emerson wrote in his essay Nature:
          "Nature
          is a
          thought incarnate and turns to a thought again as ice becomes
          water and
          gas.  The world is mind precipitated and the volatile
          essence is
          forever escaping into the state of free thought."
          
        
What happens
          when we learn to properly
          discipline our thinking and observing capacities is that the
          Ideas,
          which are the outer garment of the Beings who are the essence
          of what
          we lovingly seek to know, these Ideas - this outer garment -
          appears
          spontaneously within our consciousness as part of a
          cooperative Art in
          which the Creator Being of the World Himself participates.
           We ask
          and seek and knock, after which we are given, and find and all
          is
          opened to us.
          
        
Where this
          leads is to an understanding
          that knows that human social and political existence, which in
          the
          cultural East has often been called Maya, is better understood
          in the
          Cultural West as the Creative Activity of the Word come to
          living
          equilibrium.   As it says in Genesis: "God blessed the
          seventh day
          and made it holy because on it he rested from all his work of
          creation."
          
        
That, my
          friends, is where we live, and
          have lived and will live as long as our Eternal spirit needs
          incarnate
          existence - within the living being of the Seventh Day.
           God has
          rested, having given us a most remarkable gift - not just
          outer Nature,
          but something much much more, of which the heart of it is the
          dynamic
          and enveloping womb of our social and communal existence
           - a
          living and self evolving growth environment for the human
          individuality, Itself ever changing and becoming as our needs
          and wants
          themselves change and grow.
          
        
The human
          biography, with all its ups and
          downs, tragedies and joys, is always held within the loving
          embrace of
          a great and wise Intelligence, and if we pay careful attention
          to our
          own lives, to all that lives and breaths there, we will learn
          to see
          this for ourselves.
          
        
In the
          beginning of such a journey we
          might have to overcome something.  For mostly we tend to
          think in
          this Age along the lines that science has developed, wherein
          all the
          accidents and chance encounters in life are just that -
          moments without
          meaning, happening for no intelligence reason whatsoever.
          
        
Yet, there is a
          counter-image to that, an
          impression that the Ancients spoke of when they used the ideas
          of Fate
          and Destiny and Karma - ideas that still might be true.
           The
          intriguing thing is that we don't have to go backward and
          abandon
          reason to discover the truth here.  Rather we just have
          to
          heighten the degree to which we pay attention - to change the
          quality
          of the nature of our observation.  Then we think about
          it, in our
          own personal Emersonian way, trusting more to our own
          instincts,
           than to what we have been taught and told to think.
           We free
          our thinking from the binding assumptions of culture and
          religion and
          ask ourselves - what is true here?  Is there wisdom
          enfolding my
          life?  What is its nature?  How does it work?
           If I look
          back in my biography, what has been there as a gift that
          helped me
          become who I am today?  What about tomorrow - is there
          some
          surprise of special meaning?  What about this moment,
          right now?
           How do I contribute?  What is the meaning of evil?
           How
          do I understand freedom in this context?
          
        
So many
          wonderful questions - each one
          filled with life, for when we really start to see and think
          here on our
          own, in that same inner land walked years ago by Emerson, all
          the
          mundane ways of past thinking that have blinded us to the
          endless
          treasures of each day start to fall away, and we find once
          again - as
          we did first in childhood - that the world is filled with
          magic and
          with love.   Thank you...
          
        
*************************
          
        
this and that
- some thoughts
          on the Four Noble Truths -
          
        
This is an
          essay on the mind in the light of the Four Noble Truths of the
          Buddha.
            In my own studies of Buddhism, I found more
          satisfaction in
          considering these very basic questions myself than I did in
          any study
          of all the rich literature that follows, whether in Zen or
          Tibetan
          Buddhism, or whatever. I did find it helpful to study these
          questions,
          however, not just for their practical understanding of mind,
          but also
          for how this understanding created a much better possibility
          for
          appreciating the mental processes of the "other", the thou.
            It is this last which is such a ripe fruit of the
          Buddha's
          basic teachings - namely the growing in the own soul of
          Compassion.
          
        
 *
          
        
According to John M. Koller's, Oriental Philosophies, the short version of the Four Noble Truths is as follows: "1. There is suffering; 2. Suffering is caused; 3. Suffering can be extinguished by eliminating the causes of suffering; and 4. The way to extinguish the causes of suffering is to follow the Middle Way constituted by the Noble Eightfold Path."
The same text
          gives these as the supposed
          actual teachings, or words of the Buddha:
          
        
1. "...birth is
          suffering; decay is
          suffering; illness is suffering; death is suffering; presence
          of
          objects we hate is suffering; separation from objects we love
          is
          suffering; not to obtain what we desire is suffering. In
          brief, the
          five aggregates which spring from grasping, they are painful."
          
        
2. Suffering
          "...originates in that
          craving which causes the renewals of becomings, is accompanied
          by
          sensual delight, and seeks satisfaction now here, now there;
          that is to
          say, craving for pleasures, craving for becoming, craving for
          not
          becoming.".
          
        
3.
          "...concerning the Cessation of
          Suffering; verily, it is passionless, cessation without
          remainder of
          this very craving; the laying aside of, the giving up, the
          being free
          from, the harboring no longer of, this craving."
          
        
4. the path
          which leads to the cessation
          of suffering, "...is this Noble Eightfold Path, that is to
          say, right
          views, right intent, right speech, right conduct, right means
          of
          livelihood, right endeavor, right mindfulness, and right
          meditation."
          
        
I would be a
          complete fool to suggest
          that I can add anything to this, or to further suggest that I
          could add
          anything to all that the great teachers of, say, Tibetan or
          Zen
          Buddhism, have said about these fundamental teachings of the
          Buddha.
          
        
Rather, the
          purpose of this essay is
          state simply how these ideas have influenced me, and in what
          way I try
          to order or structure my life, based on my understanding of
          this great
          message.
          
        
*
          
        
Being an
          American means that I tend to
          the pragmatic, the practical. So my approach, when I spent
          some time
          considering these Four Noble Truths, had the tendency to be
          directly
          related to my personal existence. No theories, just what was
          happening
          in my life that these Truths could lead me to understand.
          
        
I was aided in
          this quest by having heard
          some lectures, read several books and known several students
          of Chogyam
          Trungpa, teacher of Tibetan Buddhism, now deceased. My
          favorite book of
          his is: Meditation in Action, Shambhala Publications. In this
          book is a
          statement that has, over time, became my central principle
          when
          considering knowledge: "...and in that sense Buddha was a
          great
          revolutionary in his way of thinking. He even denied the
          existence of
          Brahma, or God, the Creator of the world. He determined to
          accept
          nothing which he had not first discovered for himself." (ibid.
          p 5)
          
        
This became my
          motto, and, as regards the
          Four Noble Truths, I would only understand what I could
          determine for
          myself. The Truths became, in this sense, questions to put to
          myself
          and to life.
          
        
1. There is
          suffering
          
        
This seems
          fairly obvious. Life is
          suffering. Yet, what does that mean? What is suffering and
          what is life
          in this sense? And, I don't mean to approach this by means of
          some
          philosophical definition, but rather simply by observing
          myself and
          life. I did think about animals and other kinds of beings for
          a time,
          which seemed to have life (plants etc.), but since my
          knowledge was
          only of my own consciousness, I eventually decided to confine
          myself to
          the consideration of my own suffering, and that which I could
          observe
          around me in those other human beings with which I came in
          contact.
          
        
There seemed to
          be a lot of it. Friends I
          knew were raped, hurt in cars, lost children, lost the
          capacity to bear
          children, lost jobs, lost loves, needed love and had none.
          Everywhere I
          looked, within myself and outside myself, there were
          experiences of
          pain.
        
        
But the Four
          Noble Truths are not just a
          logical sequence, they are a whole. The meaning of one effects
          the
          meaning of the whole...
          
        
2. Suffering is
          caused
          
        
After a time
          there seemed to me to be two
          kinds of suffering: self caused and caused from the outside,
          by an
          agency (others, fate, god, divine providence, whatever). But
          the more I
          explored self caused suffering the more I realized that to
          think some
          was caused by others was an error. The error arises because of
          this:
          
        
Every event in
          life which came to me from
          the outside, that is what we might call fated suffering,
          rather than
          self induced, had a certain quality to it. This quality of
          fated
          suffering depended upon how I related to the situation. The
          fated
          matter was in itself neutral. If it was experienced as a
          matter of
          suffering, that arose because of how I related to it. It was
          not within
          the fated experience itself.
          
        
Before we get
          confused, let me deal with
          physical pain, such as perhaps results from trauma. Certainly
          physical
          pain seems on the surface to be fated suffering. However, pain
          in such
          a case is not suffering, but increased consciousness. The body
          is
          demanding our attention. When we resist, when we desire to not
          experience the pain, then we have the pain and suffering.
          
        
The point of
          this is to make a
          distinction between the experience of physical pain, and the
          suffering,
          that arises because we are experiencing physical pain. The
          former is an
          inescapable physical reality, and the latter is a relationship
          of the
          mind to that reality.
          
        
Life is
          suffering and suffering is caused
          by the relationship of mind to life.
          
        
3. Suffering
          can be extinguished by
          eliminating the causes of suffering
          
        
How I relate to
          suffering is an act which
          takes place within my own mind, and for which I can be
          responsible. But
          just here we start to get to the tricky part, because we start
          to come
          face to face with the problem of mind, and the problem of the
          I, or the
          Ego.
          
        
Throughout the
          various teachings of
          Buddhism, from Zen to Tibetan, to beyond, here is where the
          nitty
          gritty comes in. To understand this part, there has to arise
          some
          degree of self awareness, some degree of inner awakeness. It
          is my
          belief (and only that, because I don't know the whole of
          Buddhism, only
          a very small corner), that all the commentaries, all the
          Sutras, all
          the koans, and the whole purpose of the various styles of
          meditation,
          have to do with this problem.
          
        
This is tricky
          because to some degree the
          Ego can't take a hold of it. Merely by grasping, by trying to
          find a
          strategy, the Ego steps off the deep end and just repeats what
          it is
          always doing. Desiring not to desire just leads to more
          suffering. This
          is why we find in the various teachings such ideas as
          no-thingness,
          no-mind, mindfulness, instant satori, and hundreds of other
          ways of
          making an idea about something which doesn't have an idea.
          
        
So Buddha, in
          order to help the crossing
          of the threshold of this problem provides the Eightfold Path,
          as a
          means to cut through the confusion.
          
        
4. The way to
          extinguish the causes of
          suffering is to follow the Middle Way constituted by the Noble
          Eightfold Path.
          
        
The Eightfold
          Path has a very interesting
          structure, in that each element is preceded by the word
          "right", as in:
          ..."right views, right intent, right speech, right conduct,
          right means
          of livelihood, right endeavor, right mindfulness, and right
          meditation."
          
        
Now what is
          that? What is meant, in this
          context, by "right"?
          
        
This is where
          we get to the title of this
          modest mediation: "this and that". Mind has certain qualities,
          and one
          of the main ones is what we might call "discrimination", or
          the
          capacity to form distinctions. This is up, that is down. This
          is right,
          that is wrong. This is enlightened, that is unenlightened.
          This is Ego,
          that is not. This is desire, that is not. This is suffering,
          that is
          not. This is my Buddha nature, that is not.
          
        
Of course, you
          don't have to be a
          Buddhist to have this difficulty. This is Christian, that is
          not. This
          is moral, that is not. Or if you are an anthroposophist:
          Steiner said
          this, he didn't say that.
          
        
Same problem.
          
        
This is what I
          have learned as a
          practical matter about this problem - the problem of "this and
          that".
          
        
In any given
          moment, I may not like the
          what is, the this. The this could be myself, my feeling life,
          what
          someone else is doing, my thoughts, what someone is saying,
          the price
          of an object, my lack of health, another driver, my salary,
          the way the
          world is, my son's haircut, my wife's spending habits and so
          forth.
          Against this this, I will imagine a corresponding that, which
          will be
          the what is not.
          
        
Between the
          what is and the what is not
          there arises a tension, namely my desire for this to change
          into that.
          My discriminatory mind by creating the this and the that, also
          at the
          same time necessarily creates the tension, which is the
          suffering. I
          suffer precisely because I conceive, as an act of mind, of the
          this
          (the what is) and its difference from the that (the what is
          not).
          
        
It actually is
          that simple to conceive,
          but the real problem is practice. What do I do about this? How
          do I, if
          that is what I decide to do, eliminate the this and the that?
          Of
          course, just in conceiving the problem this way, I am still in
          the this
          and the that, but with this one change. I am now aware of
          Ego's tricks
          (or at least the most recent ones).
          
        
The practice
          then comes down to coming
          back, ever and again, as a matter of slowly developing
          discipline, to
          the this and living wholly within the this, which does not
          stand still,
          but is rather constantly creative. Trungpa calls it "crazy
          wisdom". The
          reason it is crazy is because it (spontaneousness - the this)
          can't be
          predicted, can't be stratigized, and can't be controlled. It
          is a
          complete intuitive relationship to the this. You could say
          that the Ego
          is constantly going beyond its previous condition, rather then
          remaining stuck in one of its past points of view.
          
        
Of course, we
          should again return to the
          Sutras, the koans, or whatever practices we have discovered in
          Buddhism
          that seem right for us. These practices are the various paths
          by which
          one moves from living this and that, to just living this.
          However, each
          of us must find their individual way/means through to the
          this; so it
          is a great goodness that so much help exists, and in such
          great variety.
          
        
One last
          comment: The this comes not from
          the past, but is born in the future. In any given moment, even
          though
          "I" am (past looking), "I" really am not (unborn, no mind and
          so
          forth). At this level, there really is no difference between
          Buddhism
          and Christianity, in practice: " Matthew 18:3: " ...Verily I
          say unto
          you, Except ye be converted, and become as little children, ye
          shall
          not enter into the kingdom of heaven."
          
        
And this
          is all I have to say about that.
          
        
*****************************
          
        
pragmatic moral psychology
          
        
Many people
          have trouble with the idea
          'moral".   This is understandable given the history
          of
          Christianity (for example), which has included so many
          attempts at
           dominating the moral thinking of others.
            Especially
          in our age we don't like being told what is right to do.
            We
          would rather follow our own judgment.   It will come
          as no
          surprise to many, that the Christian Gospels actually support
          that
          latter view (personal moral  judgment) instead of the
          view that
          allows someone else to tell us what is moral.   But
          this view
          of the Gospels is not appreciated until we have penetrated, in
          practice, the psychological teachings these remarkable Books
          of Wisdom
          contain.   Many so-called Christians have failed to
          live the
          Gospels, and for this reason have never come to understand
          what they
          teach about mind, about soul and spirit in a practical and
          pragmatic
          sense.   This essay is the result of my own
          explorations of
          these Books of Wisdom as they apply to life, to thinking and
          feeling,
          and to how the world is ordered in both its social and moral
          realms.
           For it is here, in such practices that the real facing
          of the
          problem of Evil comes toward us.  It is only in the
          brutal self
          honest examination of how we introduce Evil into the world,
          that we
          learn what we need to know in order to appreciate how Evil
          works in the
          social.  For a deeper examination of this problem, see my
          book The Way of
          the Fool: The conscious
          development of
          our human character, and the future of Christianity - both to
          be born
          out of the natural union of Faith and Gnosis.
          
        
*
          
        
Social morality
          is the highest form of
          art. Remember: the social world is the moral world, and we
          need to move
          from a state of sleep with regard to this, to a state of
          awakeness. The
          material below is offered in support of the reader's struggles
          in this
          regard, and not as a statement of an activity which the reader
          must
          undertake. How one proceeds as regard these matters is very
          personal,
          and the following material, based on the author's own
          experience, is
          given only as an example of how one might proceed; should they
          choose
          to make some efforts in these directions.
          
        
The political or community leader, and certainly the story-teller who wants to encounter the Mystery, should realize that some kind of practice, some kind of personal effort at inner growth, of a kind similar to that described below, is essential to carrying out the responsibilities undertaken. We are not born virtuous, but rather human, with all the normal failings that implies. The author can state, with some surety, which he hopes this book demonstrates, that such practice does bear fruit that can be obtained in no other way. The Mystery draws near that which strives toward goodness.
*
          
        
This is not an
          essay meant for
          psychologists. Nor is it about mental health per se, although its reflections may touch
          related
          problems.
          
        
This essay is
          based on an understanding
          of human inner life that developed out of the necessity of
          solving
          certain real problems of personal experience. It represents
          the fruit
          of many years of practical work derived from a struggle, only
          occasionally successful, to live according to certain
          teachings of
          Jesus Christ. It is the latter aspect which brings in the
          moral element.
          
        
When this work
          was begun, almost
          twenty-five years ago when I was in my early thirties, it
          first
          appeared as an instinctive awakening to certain problems, most
          notably:
          what was the relationship between my own thinking, and the
          world I
          experienced through my senses? A secondary question, more
          subtle, but
          quite definitely related, is what was the role of conscience
          in the
          solving of this problem?
          
        
Over a few
          years investigation and
          practice, I taught myself to: work at bringing discursive
          thinking to a
          halt (no inner dialog); to think with my heart, instead of my
          head;
          and, to think in wholes, or, what I called at that time,
          gestalts.
          
        
Subsequent to
          this, I discovered that
          essentially the same problems had been confronted by the
          genius of a
          man named Rudolf Steiner, in his 1894 book, The
Philosophy
          of Spiritual Activity. When I read
          this book, I found therein, not only a much clearer statement
          of the
          problems I had already been examining, but what turned out to
          be an
          introspection of human consciousness that was in accord with
          the
          methods of natural science; and which was therefore, at the
          same time,
          quite compatible with all those academic characteristics of
          philosophy
          that ordinary people find so confusing.
          
        
A few years
          later I encountered another
          book of Steiner's, The Theory
          of Knowledge Implicit in Goethe's World Conception, which, although again compatible with academic
          philosophic standards, is nevertheless much simpler in its
          language.
          Both books were extremely helpful in making it possible to
          examine
          these questions (the interrelationship of thinking, experience
          and
          conscience), with all their possible subjectivity, in a
          completely
          objective fashion.
          
        
I mention
          Rudolf Steiner, because he has
          had an enormous influence on my thinking, and those readers,
          who may
          wish for a more academic justification for certain themes in
          this book,
          should begin with the above materials. Most people, however,
          will be
          satisfied by their own common sense.
          
        
I use the word
          psychology in the title of
          this essay because this same struggle has also taught me that
          Christ's
          teachings are grounded in a complete understanding of human
          inner life.
          They are, in fact, a moral psychology par excellence; that is,
          an
          understanding of human nature which both fathoms and
          appreciates our
          true moral reality and potential. This is so regardless of
          ones
          conclusions regarding His religious significance.
          
        
Those readers
          who might have some
          discomfort with the religious matters below, should be advised
          that all
          that I can do is reflect my own experience. If the reader, for
          whom
          this may be some kind of problem, is careful, they may be able
          to
          translate the materials below into their own understanding and
          belief
          system. The person of Christian faith, who feels there may be
          matters
          of even deeper significance, is invited to read: Meditations
on
the
          Tarot: a Journey into Christian Hermeticism,
          author anonymous.
          
        
*
          
        
Matthew 7: 3-5:
        Judge not,
          that ye be not
          judged.  For with what judgment ye judge, ye shall be
          judged; and
          with what measure ye mete, it shall be measured to you again.
           And
          why behold-est thou the mote that is in thy brother's eye, but
          consider-est not the beam that is in thine own eye?  Or
          how wilt
          thou say to thy brother, Let me pull out the mote out of thine
          eye;
          and, behold a beam is in thine own eye?  Thou hypocrite,
          first
          cast out the beam out of thine own eye; and then shalt thou
          see clearly
          to cast out the mote out of thy brother's eye.
          
        
The pragmatic
          psychological realities I
          have so far discovered in this teaching are as follows:
          
        
When we meet,
          or interact, with another
          person there may arise, within our own soul life, antipathies,
          feelings
          of disliking. Perhaps we will not like how they look, their
          class, the
          nature of the ideas they present to us or the values they
          express.
          Maybe they are of another race or culture, or believe in
          abortion, or
          believe in choice, or have a selfish political agenda, or a
          thousand
          other categories by which we may define them or weigh their
          moral or
          spiritual qualities.
          
        
In each and
          every instance where we
          experience an antipathetic judgment (or sympathetic for that
          matter),
          we do not perceive the individual before us, but rather only
          that
          classification or label by which we have identified them. This
          is so
          even though it is someone we know well. In fact, those in our
          most
          intimate circles are more likely to be the object of judgments
          we have
          made and continue to make, yet sleep through. These last have
          become
          ingrained habits of thought, a (perhaps too rigid) soul lens
          through
          which we view the world of our daily relationships.
          
        
We also apply
          this judgment to ourselves.
          Just consider how much we do not like about ourselves. It will
          even be
          possible to turn the material in this essay into another
          reason for
          unwarranted self-judgment.
          
        
This judgment is the beam in our own eye. By it we become then blind, confusing our judgment for the "mote" in their eye, the character fault we believe we have identified.
Should it
          actually be possible that we
          could help them, the existence of our beam
          nevertheless disables us. We lack the objectivity (which is
          neither
          antipathetic or sympathetic, but is rather empathic) by which
          we could
          actually understand them.
          
        
In fact the
          Gospel promises us that when
          we can succeed in setting aside the judgment and can instead
          empathize,
          i.e. know them from the inside-out objectively, then we may
          actually be
          able to be of service to them (then shalt thou see clearly to cast out
          the mote out of
          thy brother's eye).
          
        
From Rudolf
          Steiner, I was lead to
          understanding, that the most common types of such judgments
          are in fact
          reflections of our own weaknesses and failings. Our normal
          psychology
          is so ordered that our common antipathies are mirror images of
          our own
          defects. We often most strongly dislike, in others, our own
          worst
          flaws. So Jesus Christ advises us: "Thou hypocrite, first cast
          out the
          beam out of thine own eye..."
          
        
This being the
          case, how do we work with
          this in a practical manner?
          
        
The first step
          is to wake up to it, to
          notice each and every act of judgment. This is painful. A
          wonderful
          help is found in an spiritual exercise Steiner taught, the
          daily
          review. This exercise, which the reader is free to use or not,
          involves
          taking time at the end of the day, and remembering it,
          backwards, from
          the most recent events just before beginning the exercise, to
          those
          events surrounding our awakening early in the morning. In this
          way we
          reflect upon our day, and will begin, after a time, to
          discover matters
          which need our attention. When, for example, we have begun to
          notice
          these judgments, they can become an element of the review.
          They are
          "unfinished" soul business.
          
        
During the
          review feelings of remorse and
          shame are good signs. In these self reflective feelings the
          conscience
          awakens. Out of the impulse of conscience we can utter a brief
          prayer
          to the guardian angel of the one we have judged, so that the
          next time
          we meet, our perception will be more objective. The angel of
          the
          "other" wants to help us do this. Those who doubt such an idea
          are
          simply asked to carry out such activity with full sincerity.
          Practice
          will, itself, establish the truth of these matters.
          
        
In this way we
          slowly refine the impulse
          to judge, and gain thereby (small bit by bit) control of our
          thoughts
          and mastery of our feelings. The soul area, in which these
          unconscious
          antipathies and sympathies have previously tended to pull us,
          can now
          become an ever growing arena of spiritual freedom.
          
        
One of the
          mysteries of our inner life
          that this work, the refining of the judgment, uncovers, is
          that we are
          often captured - enslaved - by these repeated
          thought-judgments. Once
          having made them, our continued repetition of them, or
          habitual use of
          them, becomes then a point of view, a kind of judgmental
          colored glass
          through which we view the world. To refine the judgment in the
          manner
          being described in this essay, is to no longer by possessed by
          it - to
          be inwardly, spiritually, free.
          
        
These pragmatic
          understandings have
          applications in other areas as well. The reader, who works
          patiently
          with these soul-lawful realities, will discover other possible
          uses for
          the skills developed.
          
        
We can in fact
          be glad of those
          personalities who irk us so, who bring out of us these strong
          and
          unredeemed feelings. Their lives are a great gift to us and we
          appear
          to have sought out these relationships just so they could
          awaken us.
          Here is good cause for a prayer of thanks during the review.
          
        
Sympathies
          represent a similar problem to
          antipathies. How often does life teach the tragedy of those
          who fall so
          in love that the excessive sympathies and its resulting (love
          is)
          blindness leads eventually to confusion and terrible pain,
          when clarity
          finally returns.
          
        
To raise
          another up in excessive praise
          is also a beam of great
          proportions. Whenever we do this, we are just
          as blind to an other's real humanity as when we live in
          antipathies.
          Our judgment is not a source of true understanding when it is
          derived
          from unconscious and unredeemed feeling-perceptions.
          
        
In the case where we are turning this unredeemed judgment upon ourselves, this can become another aspect of our search for spiritual freedom. In our inner life, once we become awake there, the voice of the conscience and the voice of the judgment are not the same. Conscience "hurts" because it expresses the truth, and we "wince" inwardly in this perception. The judgment dislikes, or excessively likes, but it is not expressing the truth. Learning to distinguish between these - between truth and dislike - can be very helpful.
 While this
          does not begin to exhaust all
          that could be said about the beam and the mote, nonetheless,
          let us
          take up another thread.
          
        
John 8:5-9: Now Moses in the law
          commanded us, that such should be stoned; but what say est
          thou?
           This they said, tempting him, that they might have to
          accuse him.
          But Jesus stooped down, and with his finger wrote on the
          ground as
          though he heard them not.  So when they continued asking
          him, he
          lifted up himself, and said unto them. He that is without sin
          among
          you, let him first cast a stone at her.  And again he
          stooped down
          and wrote on the ground.  And they which heard it, being
          convicted
          by their own conscience, went out one by one...
          
        
We all know
          this story, but we don't stone
          people anymore; or do we ? Obviously physical violence,
          retribution,
          against criminals continues. We understand these issues, to a
          degree. Is
          there then some more subtle meaning?  This is what I have
          found to
          be true in practice.
          
        
When an
          unredeemed judgment is spoken,
          that is, when it passes from the inner life into the social
          world,
          through speech, it becomes a stone. The
          flesh is not wounded
          by this stone, but the soul surely is. Our ordinary language
          in its
          natural genius recognizes this, for don't we speak of "hurt
          feelings"?
          
        
Yet our
          ordinary personal life is full of
          just these acts of stone throwing. Tired
          and upset
          we throw them at our children and our partners. Believing too
          much in
          our own righteousness we will throw them at work, or at play.
          
        
The pragmatic
          teaching it this. Be
          silent. Remember, Jesus' response in this story is first to
          say
          nothing: "But
          Jesus stooped down and with his finger wrote on the ground, as
          though
          he heard them not". Examine our own
          thoughts
          more rigorously than that of others. Not every thought must be
          spoken.
          An ancient middle-eastern aphorism goes this way. There are
          three gates
          to speech: Is it true? Is it necessary? Is it kind? Any
          thought that
          cannot pass all three gates should not be spoken. And there
          may be even
          other reasons for not speaking those thoughts which otherwise
          could
          pass.
          
        
Further
          questions are these. What is the
          moral purpose for our speech? Why have we said what we have
          said? What
          is the objective? Do we speak to be self important? Or do we
          have the
          possible benefit for others as our purpose? How do we know it
          will be a
          benefit, rather than an interference in their freedom or a
          hurt? Do we
          believe we know the truth, that our knowledge is superior to
          others?
          Hidden here are all the judgments, the consequences of the beam.
          
        
Are we so sure of ourselves, that all our thoughts are worthy of being spoken? Silence is golden is the cliche. In truth, outer silence is just the beginning.
Matthew 5:3 Blessed are the poor
          in
          spirit; for theirs is the kingdom of heaven.
          
        
If my mind is
          not quiet, empty, poor in
          spirit, what can enter there? Inner silence has two valuable
          moral
          consequences.
          
        
The first
          benefit of inner silence is
          that it is essential to listening to someone else speak. If we
          cannot
          quiet our own mind when we are listening, if our whole
          concentration is
          instead on our anticipated response or on what we think, then
          our
          attention is not focused at all on the other person or what
          they are
          saying.
          
        
In some
          lectures published under the
          title: The Inner Aspect of the Social Question, Rudolf Steiner suggests the practice of seeking
          to hear
          the presence, of what he calls "the Christ Impulse", in the
          other's
          thinking. This is very difficult. It is not just listening,
          but a
          feeling-imagining of the heart felt purposes living in the
          speaker.
          What brings them to speak so? What life path has brought them
          to this
          place? Even if they are throwing stones at us, we must still "actively" listen;
          otherwise, there
          will be no understanding of their humanity.
          
        
There is a
          wonderful experience possible
          here, when we have won past our antipathetic judgment and
          actually have
          begun to hear what lives in the other speaker. Each of us has
          learned
          in life some wisdom, and these little jewels lie every where
          around us,
          often in the most improbable places, the most unsuspected
          souls. These
          treasures are often hidden only by the darkness we cast over
          the world
          through our unredeemed thought-judgments.
          
        
The second
          benefit is this. Unless I am
          silent, and empty, that is poor in spirit, how will it be
          possible for
          the Mystery to touch me?
          
        
John 3:8 The wind blows where it wills, and you hear the sound of it, but you do not know whence it comes or whither it goes; so it is with every one who is born of the Spirit
The Mystery
          goes where it wills. If we
          are not listening outwardly, we well may miss it when it
          appears
          through others. An inflated sense of self righteousness will
          certainly
          interfere. How much have we missed in life because we did not
          listen to
          what was being offered? Even a piece of an overheard passing
          conversation on a bus, which seems to jump into our silent
          waiting, may
          have an import just for us. And inwardly? The Mystery is
          silence
          itself, quiet, like an angel's beating wings. How much has
          been offered
          to us just there as well, a barely audible whispering that our
          own
          internal rambling dialog has covered over in its insistent and
          restless
          commentary.
          
        
"It thinks in me" spoke Rudolf
          Steiner. The Mystery has its own will. "It" comes like a
          gentle wind,
          when "it" wills, and we prepare the way by "learning to think on
          our knees", as Valentin Tomberg,
          another passionate seeker I find
          very helpful, has advised. Two acts, only one our own.
          
        
Matthew 11:
          28-30: Come
          unto me, all ye that
          labor and are heavy laden, and I will give you rest.
           Take my yoke
          upon, and learn of me; for I am meek and lowly in heart: and
          ye shall
          find rest unto your souls.n  For my yoke is easy, and my
          burden is
          light.
          
        
Two acts, only
          one our own. Something
          comes to meet us and does not bring weight, but rather eases
          our
          burdens.
          
        
Pragmatic moral
          psychology is not meant
          to be heavy labor. We are working together with the world of
          Mystery.
          We make an offering of what lives within; we offer it up. In
          the
          Celebration of the Mass, the Offertory precedes the Eucharist.
          
        
The soul makes the same rite of gesture, when the unconsciously created judgment is perceived and then let go, after which the empathic understanding is yearned for. When this has been done we are then met by grace, by the work of others. Moreover, this grace is so quiet, so silent, we may not be able to distinguish it from our own yearning thinking.
Since the
          Mystery seeks no gratitude for
          its acts, we should not mind when it has invisibly carried us
          to subtle
          heights, breadths and depths. To expect this, is faith.
          However alone
          we may sometimes feel, we are, in fact, never alone.
          
        
*
          
        
Let us review
          and synthesize, perhaps
          adding a few new thoughts.
          
        
We are born
          into a culture and a
          language, a family and a destiny. In our youth we draw into
          ourselves a
          way of seeing the world, consistent with those who raise us,
          and,
          without which we would have become incapable of being a member
          of
          society.
          
        
Each of us has
          an inborn faculty of
          judgment which finds its center in the feeling life, but which
          leaves
          its most conscious traces in the life of thought. We do not
          want to
          eliminate this faculty, but it does need to be refined if we
          are to
          evolve it into a capacity for perceiving the true, the
          beautiful and
          the good. As the poet Goethe pointed out, particularly in his
          scientific works, it is not the senses which deceive, but
          rather the
          judgment.
          
        
The fundamental quality, latent in judgment and from which its evolution may proceed, is our moral nature, our moral will. Let us consider this in a more practical way.
What do I do
          with antipathies (or with
          excessive sympathies for that matter)? Something enters my
          consciousness and my "reaction" is to not like it. The first
          thing
          (borrowing a term from more recent popular psychology) is to
          own it. It
          is my reaction, it arises in my soul, and it is not (in any
          obvious
          way) in the object to which the reaction attaches. There does
          seem to
          be something, a seed perhaps, that does exist in the judgment
          and that
          does belong to the object of the judgment, but this seed only
          comes to
          flower through processes like those outlined below.
          
        
The
          antipathetic reaction, which is a
          "feeling", then draws concepts toward it, clothes itself in
          thought
          forms, and in this way enters our conscious thinking life,
          usually as a
          stream of inner dialog (discursive thinking: our spirit
          speaks, our
          soul hears). Above, we considered how to become alert to these
          judgments using the daily review, and noted there, as well,
          that to
          feel remorse and shame for having so unconsciously and
          hypocritically
          categorized our fellow human beings, is a sign of an awakening
          conscience.
          
        
Once we have
          become more awake in the
          moment, it is possible to work with this process during the
          day, not
          waiting for the daily review. The antipathy arises, we notice
          it. We
          have learned not to speak it, not to allow it across the
          threshold of
          speech into the social world. We behold it inwardly, this
          thing, our
          judgmental creation. This objective perception of our self
          created
          thought-judgments is an act of spiritual freedom, inner
          freedom before
          the concept.
          
        
There are two
          very practical acts we can
          do in regard to this object within our consciousness. One
          precedes the
          other, and the second is born out of the first. The initial
          act is one
          of sacrifice. Steiner calls this: "sacrifice of thoughts". We not only allow it to die, we participate in
          the
          process of its dying. We give it up, we detach ourselves
          emotionally
          from this no longer desired judgment.
          
        
Doing this has brought our will into play. Using this same will we now engender a new becoming of the act of judgment. Dying has preceded becoming. We actively engage the process of metamorphosis inwardly in the soul life. The caterpillar of our antipathetic judgment can give birth to the butterfly of our empathic understanding. The crucial act is our moral intention. We recreate in the newly freed soul space the object of our judgment as an act of spiritual will. We choose to behold the "other" with the forces of resurrection. We clothe the object of our previous antipathy in a freely chosen word-picture created in the crucible of a struggle to know them empathically. We redeem them in thought.
The most
          essential matter to recognize
          here is that in this activity one is not acting alone. Two
          acts, only
          one our own.
          
        
One last
          thought. In that activity by
          which we transform unconscious judgments into conscious ones,
          we inform
          the world with new meaning. We adorn the world, and the
          individuals
          which inhabit it, with self-created significance. The
          difference is
          that this new meaning-significance is neither arbitrary or
          capricious.
          The world means what we choose it to mean. In this act,
          however, it
          makes a great deal of difference whenever we have invited the
          cooperation of the invisible world.
          
        
With regard to
          this problem of meaning -
          the creation of new meaning - there is much more yet to say,
          as this is
          one of the principle ways for crafting the resurrection of a
          new
          civilization from the decay and debris of the old and dying
          culture.
          
        
Unto the reader
          then, I place these gifts
          of twenty-five years of practice, with all their flaws, for
          whatever
          service they may give.
          
        
**************************
          
        
The Misconception of Cosmic Space* As
Appears In the Ideas of Modern Astronomy
- and as contained in the understandably limited thinking embodied
in the
          conceptions of the nature of parallax and redshift -
          
        
- introduction
          -
          
        
Before entering
          on to the main body of
          this essay, we should consider briefly the nature of thinking
          and of
          the imagination.   In this little book there are a
          number of
          different comments on thinking and on the imagination, coming
          from
          different directions, but here I want to point out some basic
          facts as
          a foundation for the coming work.
          
        
The first is
          that human beings think, and
          that there is no science without the activity of human
          thinking.
            Thinking determines which questions the scientist
          asks,
          what experiments he conducts, and then ultimately how the data
          provided
          by the experiments is interpreted - that is what does this
          scientific
          activity mean.  For this
          essay we are confronted with the
          scientific meaning created by human thinking in relationship
          to some
          considerable portions of the data accumulated by scientific
          work
          centered on questions concerning the stellar world.  We
          are asking
          here in this essay whether what science thinks today of the
          meaning and
          significance of the stars is what we ought to continue to
          think, in the
          future, or even today to assume is still a reasonable
          understanding.
          
        
As part of the
          process of examining the
          underlying questions, we will be using a particular capacity
          of the
          mind, which might be called the imagination, or
          picture-forming
           capacity.   We make all manner of mental
          pictures in
          the normal course of ordinary thinking, and in scientific
          thinking we
          carry out this activity in quite specific directions.
           Certain
          astronomical ideas, for example the idea of parallax, are
          specifically
          grounded in the picture-thinking connected to Euclidean
          geometry.
            While we sometimes use a pencil and paper to work
          out the
          details of this geometric picture thinking, the fact that
          should not be
          ignored (but often is) is that it is the mind of the human
          being that
          contributes the fundamental activity from which our modern
          astronomical
          conceptions arise.  In fact, our interpretation of the
          meaning of
          astronomical data is entirely a result of mental processes, a
          number of
          which are expressly born in the imagination.
          
        
Yes, we
          carefully observe the stellar
          world with all kinds of remarkable instruments.   We
          also use
          a great deal of mathematics in how this material is
          interpreted, but we
          must never, in the process of unfolding this scientific
          investigation
          of the world of the stars, forget the centrality of thinking
          and of the
          imagination to the whole process.   If we take
          thinking and
          the imagination away, there is no science of astronomy.
            Why
          this is so important will hopefully become more clear as this
          essay
          unfolds.
          
        
- main body -
          
        
*"Our Father in the
          skies..."
           are the first words of the Lord's Prayer, as translated
          by Andy
          Gaus in his book The
          Unvarnished Gospels.  I start
          here to
          point out the fact that the people living in ancient
          Palestine, at the
          time of the Incarnation, had a different kind of consciousness
          than we
          do today.   When they looked at the heavens, they
          understood
          (and were taught by their wise elders) that the sky was the
          abode of
          the Divine Mystery.  In fact, they understood the whole
          of
          Creation to be en-souled with Being and Consciousness.   Since that time a different
          conception of
          the heavens and of the earth has come into existence for large
          portions
          of humanity.  How did that original conception change and
          what can
          we learn by observing carefully the nature of that change?
           In
          this last essay in the main body of New
          Wine, we'll look primarily at a
          crucial set of ideas related
          to the field of astronomy that were a significant part of
          these changes.
          
        
Everyone
          understands that if we make even
          the slightest error in the aim of the bow and arrow, by the
          time the
          arrow reaches the end of its journey, it doesn't take much of
          an
          original error to cause the arrow to have completely missed
          the target.
           Human beings are flawed, and science is the activity of
          human
          beings.  In the following essay I am going to concern
          myself with
          clearly amateur* researches and thinking into the problems of
          parallax
          and red shift, as these ideas are used to create for us a
          conception of
          the world of the Stars.
          
        
*[While I am
          not a member of the
          priesthood of the religion of Natural Science, I do know how
          to observe
          carefully and how to think objectively, so just because
          astronomy isn't
          my profession, the reader should not automatically anticipate
          they will
          be misled.  The reader should, however,  themselves
          test the
          themes outlined below in their own careful picture-thinking.
           The
          tendency of scientific thinking has been toward too much
           analysis, and not enough synthesis,
          while the return of
          a focus on the imagination will help us move forward in the
          future
          toward a needed  balance between these two basic gestures
          in
          thinking.]
          
        
The fundamental question is this: the current generally understood idea of cosmic space is that it is essentially a three dimensional endlessness - a very big box, which while it must have some unusual properties as a container, it is nevertheless organized such that everywhere inside it one can expect that the same rules of physics we observe in the laboratory on the Earth, will be true all that way out there...one upon a time in a galaxy far far away. Is this conception of endless three-dimensional space true?
Let us consider
          a rather simple geometric
          thought experiment, which everyone (trained mathematician or
          otherwise)
          can do.
          
        
Make a picture
          of a small perfect sphere
          in your mind.  It has a center and a periphery.
            One
          can use the terms radius, circumference and diameter with
          respect to
          this sphere, but they really don't have any exact meaning
          unless we
          define one of these characteristics by giving it first an
          exact
          measure.  For example, if we said the radius of our
          mental sphere
          was one meter, well understood rules of the geometry of a
          perfect
          sphere would give us diameter and circumference (as well as
          other
          related characteristics, such as the degree of arc of the
          curvature of
          the surface, the area of the surface, etc.).  
          
        
Now keep in
          mind that we don't have to
          conceive of this sphere in terms of measure.  It can just
          exist in
          our mind as a measureless perfect geometric form.  
          
        
Next, we
          imagine the radius line, from
          the center of the sphere to the periphery, increasing.
            We
          again don't have to measure it, we just make the picture in
          our
          thinking of this imaginary sphere as something that is slowly
          growing
          through an elongating radius line.   The radius line
          grows.
           As that line grows all the other characteristics of the
          sphere
          grow as well.
          
        
We could also
          mentally cause the same
          effect by changing any other  properties.  For
          example, if we
          cause with our picture-thinking the area of the surface to
          increase, we
          change at the same time all the other relationships.
          
        
Now lets return
          to the increasing of the
          radius line.   In your imagination now picture that
          intersection between the radius line and the periphery of the
          sphere.
           At this intersection there is a degree of curvature of
          the arc of
          the sphere.   We can notice as we do this thought
          experiment
          that as the radius line grows, the tightness of the curvature
          of the
          surface lessens.
          
        
To help this,
          lets imagine the radius
          line decreasing.   We shrink it, and as we do this
          the
          curvature of the periphery of the sphere gets tighter and
          tighter,
          until we make the radius line zero.   When we make
          the radius
          line zero we have lost the sphere, and it has disappeared into
          a
          dimensionless point.
          
        
Yet, since we
          are working without any
          need for measure, a zero radius sphere is simply a point.
           Once we
          give measure of any amount to the radius line of a zero radius
          line
          sphere (a point), the sphere returns.   A radius
          line of a
          nanometer takes a point and makes it a sphere.
          
        
Seeing this clearly with our geometrical imagination (which is quite exact and precise, by the way), we now do the opposite and complete the earlier exercise by increasing the radius line to infinite length. Instead of a radius line of zero, it is now infinite. What then happens to the curvature of the sphere when the radius becomes infinitely elongated?
Well, if we
          carefully follow out our
          precise and exact geometrical imagination, we will be able to
          observe
          this process unfold.  As the radius line increases in
          length the
          original tightness of the curvature of the surface of the
          sphere
          lessens, until at the moment the radius line is infinite there
          will be
          no curvature at all.  The sphere has disappeared, and
          undergone a
          metamorphosis into a plane.   If we think carefully
          about
          what we have learned here, we will see then that any sphere of
          any
          measure of radius line is always an intermediate geometric
          form arising
          in between a dimensionless point and a plane at infinity.
          
        
This fact is
          already well known in the
          profound mathematical science of projective geometry, and we
          have now
          ourselves discovered what is called there: the Plane at
          Infinity.
           The sphere then is geometrically in between the
          infinitely large
          and the infinitely small, or in between the plane at infinity
          and a
          geometric point (which has no measure at all, unless we put it
          into
          relationship with something else).  A point by itself is
          just that
          - nothing else.  It occupies no space at all.
          
        
Well then, what
          is the point
          of this exercise?
          
        
There are
          several.  First it is
          crucial to realize that we can think geometrically without
          using any
          measure at all.  If one is lucky enough to come upon a
          copy of
          Olive Whicher's Projective
          Geometry:
          creative polarities in space and time*, one
          has the possibility to study this wonderful geometry using
          only a
          pencil, a straight edge and some paper (large sheets are
          easier for
          some constructions).   Measure has been done away
          with, and
          the creators (or discoverers) of this mathematics describe it
          is all
          geometry - meaning by this that
          every single other geometry is a
          special case of projective geometry.
          
        
*[check Waldorf
          Schools or other Rudolf
          Steiner institutions for copies of this book.  At present
          it is
          tragically out of print.]
          
        
The difficulty for Natural Scientists has been how to apply this beautifully symmetric, measure free geometry, to the natural world. Science is rooted in measure, and while the ideas of this geometry are recognized as significant, what could they mean in a world that is already hopelessly entangled in a science which has to use measure for everything?
With this
          riddle in the background, let
          us now examine the history of ideas by which the old view of
          the
          heavens as an abode of the Divine Mystery came to be
          supplanted by a
          view in which space is conceived as a near endless three
          dimensional
          container, punctuated with mass caused curvatures (the
          space-time
          gravity ideas following after Einstein, using the Reinmann
          geometry -
          again a special case of the more general projective geometry).
          
        
Giordano Bruno,
          who was burned at the
          stake as a heretic in 1600, is credited with having first
          suggested the
          idea that a star might be like the sun.  Would that our
          histories
          were more accurate, because what we think of as the sun today,
          and how
          he thought about such matters (he was, among other
          disciplines, a
          deeply thoughtful meta-physician*) is not quite grasped by
          believing
          his idea, that a star and our sun were relatives, in fact
          mirrors in
          anyway our modern conceptions.  For Bruno, the idea that
          a star
          and our sun were related, was a completely different idea than
          we hold
          today. The details of that, however, is a whole other matter.
          
        
*[Meta-physics,
          contrary to modern views
          that it is not a science at all, was really always seen as a
          product of
          a synthesis of ones total understanding.  Modern
          physics comes
          from taking things apart, from analysis.
            Meta-physics always had the task of make the parts
          of all
          human knowledge into a single whole.]
          
        
Bruno did agree
          to a degree with
          Copernicus, and so in those years the ideas being produced by
          natural
          philosophers (the grandfathers of natural science) came to be
          at odds
          with the dogmas of the Roman Catholic Church.  While the
          previous
          age of careful thinkers (the Scholastics), would have
          understood
          (keeping to Aristotle) that there was a difference between quantities and qualities, the
          scientific
          impulse coming to the fore in those years more and more felt
          it could
          only deal with that which could be counted or measured - that
          is quantities.   The various categorical qualities of Aristotelian meta-physics more and more
          dropped away
          from consideration (although this was a long term process and
          many
          thinkers (Kepler and Faraday for example, thought this was an
          error of
          thought to do so).
          
        
In any event,
          pure astronomy slowly freed
          itself from the meta-physics connected to astrology and
          related
          disciplines, by a process in which the qualitative problems were left aside and everything was more
          and
          more rooted in only what could be counted (and measured).
           Kepler,
          it has been forgotten, was an astrologer as well as the
          discoverer of
          the three fundamental laws of planetary motion*.  Not
          only that,
          but Newton was an alchemist.  The tendency has been to
          frame the
          history of these thinkers as if they thought as we do today,
          when
          anyone who actually reads what they wrote discovers they did
          not. (For
          a comprehensive examination of this overlooked history of
          science, read
          Ernst Lehrs' Man or
          Matter:
          Introduction to a Spiritual Understanding of Nature on the
          Basis of
          Goethe's Method of Training Observation and Thought.  Also read Arthur Zajonc's Catching
the
          Light:
          the
          entwined history of Light and Mind.
          
        
*[Kepler believed, for example, that his formula and ideas regarding the Third Law of Planetary Motion was a rediscovery of the ancient's idea of the Harmony of the Spheres]
As this process
          matures, it reaches a
          kind of high point in the 19th Century, and two important
          ideas are
          given birth out of the context of this leaving aside of the
          problem of qualities, and resting
          all theories of the starry world only on
          what can be counted and measured.  These ideas are
           parallax
          and redshift.  Such concepts don't emerge on their own,
          so we have
          to work carefully with them, still keeping in mind how
          dependent they
          are upon measure alone.
          
        
The idea of
          redshift doesn't come by
          itself, for example, for it is really based upon spectroscopy.
           This science is itself not based initially on stellar
          observation, but on work in the laboratory where various
          fundamental
          elements are combusted (burned) in such a way that they
          produce
          "light".  This "light" is measured according to the
          quantitative
          ideas of Newtonian Optics, and so we get the "spectral" lines
          for such
          basic elements as hydrogen.
          
        
As a result
          stellar light phenomena,
          including light phenomena from our sun, are used in such a way
          that it
          is assumed that this light from the stars and our sun is
          produced in
          those places by a burning process similar in kind (but not
          degree) to
          what was done in the laboratory.  If the light from a
          star, or our
          sun, has a certain mathematically accurate vibration
          (frequency), that
          is like or essentially similar to the hydrogen line obtained
          in the
          laboratory, this light frequency is then seen as showing us
          that in
          that star, or our sun, hydrogen is being burned up, which
          combustion
          process gives off that particular light frequency.
          
        
This is so
          important a fact (actually
          assumed to be universal) that in the movie Contact, the frequency used to send the message to Earth
          from
          the fictional stellar civilization is the hydrogen light
          frequency
          times pi.  That is, it is a material constant multiplied
          by a
          geometric constant.
          
        
All the same,
          there was a problem with
          the hydrogen light frequency, for example, from the stars.
            The observed light frequency in the normal range
          for
          hydrogen (assumed to be an exact universal constant) isn't
          actually
          quite so exact to observation.  Various stars' hydrogen
          lines are
          discovered to be a bit off center, so to speak, such that they
          can be
          described (in the assumptions of physical astronomy) to be
          either red
          shifted or blue shifted.  The greatest number of stellar
          objects
          are red shifted (only a very very few are blue shifted).
          
        
Following
          Newton, color is a spectrum of
          light frequencies, with a red end point, where beyond which it
          becomes
          invisible to the eye, or a blue end point (actually violet,
          but
          convention names that end of the spectrum the blue end) where
          beyond
          this end it also becomes invisible to the eye.  We see
          with our
          eyes a normal color Newtonian spectrum (so it is assumed) and
          at the
          edges of this visible spectrum the light is no longer visible,
          although
          it still can be observed and measured with instruments (the
          red end
          becomes infrared or heat, and the blue end becomes
          ultraviolet, leading
          then to such as x-rays).  The wavelength of the frequency
          at the
          red end is longer and longer (elongation), and the wavelength
          of the
          frequency at the blue end is shorter and shorter (compaction).
          
        
These questions
          arise: what does it mean
          that light from the stars is not exactly showing us the
          precise
          hydrogen line we came to know in the laboratory, and what do
          we make of
          the fact that this shift toward the red (the dominant types of
          shift)
          itself varies?   Some stellar objects show small
          redshift and
          other's quite large redshift.
          
        
The original
          dominating idea for the
          meaning of the phenomena of the redshift (elongation) of such
          as the
          hydrogen line frequency was arrived at by creating an analogy
          between
          light waves and sound waves, in 1842.  We all know (or
          experience
          at least) the so-called Doppler effect - the shift in sound of
          a train
          horn as it comes toward us or away from us.  This movement toward or away produces a change in the pitch
          (auditory
          frequency), even though we know that the actual pitch the horn
          is
          making never changes.  The change in pitch is heard
          because of the
        movement of the source of the sound (which compacts or
          elongates
          the frequency, as perceived by the ear,
          which is relatively stationary).
          
        
By analogy
          then, redshift was thought to
          give evidence of the movement of the object away from the
          observer on
          the Earth.  Whatever was going on, most of the stellar
          objects had
          this redshift phenomena (in varying degrees) and from this
          analogy was
          born the idea that the Universe is expanding (which then later
          is
          supposed to logically give us the Big Bang - an explosion
          which creates
          an expanding Universe).   I point out this last to
          urge the
          reader to notice how interwoven are all the ideas we have
          today about
          the physical universe, such that if, for example, redshift
          doesn't
          really mean what we think it means, then this idea of the
          expansion of
          the Universe loses one of its main supports.
          
        
The first
          problem to arise after the more
          or less universal acceptance of this theory, was the
          recognition that
          while light was superficially a wave  phenomena (a
          movement
          propagating in a medium), similar to sound, the analogy didn't
          really
          hold, so a lot of thought went into how to revisit the
          redshift
          phenomena and appreciate it better.   Unfortunately,
          while
          many scientists feel certain older kinds of ideas ought to get
          dropped
          away from any current point of view, some ideas seem quite
          unwilling to
          be abandoned, so the Doppler analogy remains, even though
          contemporary
          physics sometimes sees light as both particle and wave
          simultaneously
          (depending on what questions you ask, and which experiments
          you do).
          
        
One of the
          newer theories as regards
          redshift (moving away from the Doppler analogy) is that it is
          partially
          a consequence of the temperature in the star.  Another
          sees some
          redshift phenomena as reflecting the influence of gravity
          wells.
          
        
I point this
          out only to suggest that
          theories themselves are in constant motion (a kind of social
          Brownian
          motion among different minds).  I am not so much
          interested in the
          current theory here, because it is my view that the resolution
          to the
          fundamental question lies in a quite different direction.
          
        
Let us now
          leave redshift behind, and go
          on to the idea parallax, which arose a few years before
          redshift
          historically (1838, so it says on-line).
          
        
The basic idea
          of parallax is that it
          enables us to measure (remember what was said above about
          measure) how
          far a star (or other stellar phenomena) is from the Earth.
           Basically this is done by coming up with an
          observational angle,
          that can be measured on the Earth, and is made possible in
          large part
          by the orbit of the Earth around the sun.  Since I can't
          put in a
          drawing here (the reader can go on-line if they desire) I'll
          try to do
          this with words.
          
        
Place on the
          grass of a football field,
          in your imagination, two poles.  One pole is at the
          center of the
          goal line, and the next at the center of the 10 yard line
          nearest that
          goal line.   Now go down to the goal line at the
          other end of
          the field, and set up a transit (a device for taking the
          measure of an
           angle of changes in a sight line).   Move the
          transit
          from one side of the field to the other, stopping every yard,
          and make
          observations of the angle of observation between the two poles
          obtained
          by viewing them from the moving transit.
          
        
As we do this
          the angle we are measuring
          changes.  This angle is widest at one side of the field,
          and then
          contracts, until we are right opposite the two poles (at which
          occurrence the near pole occults the other, or stands in front
          of it),
          and then the angle expands again as we move toward the
          opposite side of
          the field.
          
        
Now imagine
          such an activity taking place
          with respect to the light phenomena of stellar objects.
           The
          transit is actually the earth, which moves constantly,
          changing the
          observational "angle" with respect to distant objects.
           As this
          earth-transit moves, some of the distant objects seem to
          occult each
          other, as if one was in front, and the other behind.
          
        
However, since
          these objects are so far
          away (apparently), the angles that are measured are very very
          very
          small (small fractions of seconds of degree of arc).  One
          writer
          suggested that if you took a quarter, and looked at it from a
          distance
          of three miles, measuring the angle between a transit
          observation of
          one side of the quarter, and then the other side - this
          picture
          suggests how small an angle is actually being measured by this
          method
          (parallax) with regard to the nearest star to the earth (for
          stars
          believed to be further away, the "angle" is progressively
          smaller).
          
        
Using this data
          (the angle measurements
          coupled with our knowledge of the diameter of the Earth's
          orbit) we can
          use the basic rules of Euclidean geometry to determine the
          length of
          the sides of the resultant triangle.  This information
          (with a
          couple of other geometric ideas rooted in measure) then gives
          what we
          think to be the distance of the stellar object from the Earth.
          
        
Now since
          redshift is believed to tell us
          that most stellar objects are moving away
          from us, these distances change over time, which then appears
          to give
          us a kind of confirmation of the parallax.  The problem
          is that
          some of these observations came in conflict (an inconsistency
          between
          redshift and parallax).   One of the most obvious of
          these
          was discovered by the astronomer Hal Arp, who as a result for
          a time
          found himself to be seen as a heretic by his fellows, and was
          temporarily shunned (couldn't get telescope time to continue
          his
          research (see his book,  Quasars,
          Redshifts, and Controversies).
          
        
Basically what
          he observed (using
          conventional astronomical ideas and methods), was that Quasars
          (quasi-stellar objects), while they had a very high redshift
          (suggesting they were traveling very fast away from us, and
          since they
          were thought to have been doing this for some time - no
          changes in
          rate of velocity and/or acceleration were assumed, they were
          also thought to be quite far away) the parallax measurement
          seemed to
          imply they were much nearer.  Quasars seemed to occult
          (get in
          front of) much slower (less redshifted) stellar objects).
           The two
          phenomena could not be reconciled.  Were Quasars near or
          far?
          
        
I'll not go
          into what were the
          conventional adjustments made (its all very complicated, and
          unnecessarily so in my view) in order to preserve the basic
          set of
          ideas of modern astronomy, but we can (with
          justification)simply step
          past these ideas.  Why?
          
        
Because
          fundamentally the problem is due
          to the fact that phenomena of redshift and parallax is
          organized in
          accord with Euclidean geometry and the need in science to
          measure.
            In effect, at every point in the development of
          these ideas
          (though scientific thinking and imagination), we exported to
          Cosmic
          Space those conceptions that were true here in the center (the
          Earth),
          and further, we assumed that these conditions were an
          invariable
          constant.
          
        
For example,
          the distance we measure
          using the idea of parallax can't actually be tested
          empirically.
           In essence, we export from our Earth reality the concept
          of
          Euclidean three-dimensional space to the apparently farthest
          reaches of
          the starry world, but at the same time have no way of testing
          the set
          of assumptions behind the activity of exportation of such an
          idea.
           We can't go off to the side of the container in which all stars are held, and measure from
          another
          quarter whether in fact the distance the parallax formulation
          gives us
          is correct.
          
        
For another
          example, we find the hydrogen
          frequency line by a laboratory experiment here on the surface
          of the
          Earth, and then assume that nothing of physics changes at
          cosmic
          distances, and that the universe will obey the same laws way
          out there
          that it obeys here.  Under the influence of these
          assumptions we
          export our earthly picture to cosmic spaces, something that
          really
          isn't justified if science wishes to remain properly
          empirical.
          
        
All our
          observations are made on the
          Earth or from near-earth space.  It is really only in our
          mind
          that we go outward toward cosmic space.   If that is
          the
          case, then we must be very very careful in how we let one
          thought grow
          from the other.   Clearly if there is an error in
          thought
          (remember our arrow to the target analogy at the beginning of
          this
          essay), then the further
          out in space our imagination, of the
          picture
          of the meaning of the data we collect here goes, the more a
          small error in our thought will produce
          a quite large miss in our understanding of the truth.
          
        
While there
          were many small mistakes made
          (such as the assumptions observed regarding the hydrogen
          line), there
          is one single idea that saves the situation as it were.
           We set
          aside Euclidean geometry and substitute for it Projective
          Geometry -
          the fundamental geometry of which all other geometries
          (including
          Euclidean) are a special case.  Let us next then try to
          apply this
          geometry to the image creation aspect of our thinking, because
          after
          all it is the image we are making of cosmic space that is
          important.
           It is the mind that travels to cosmic space, riding the
          ideas we
          have created from the data only empirically observed here.
           We,
          who live today, have traveled far down the historical path of
          one kind
          of mind-created image, and now it is time to perhaps
          deconstruct it and
          create something new.
          
        
Lets recall the older (or current) image first, namely of a three dimensional emptiness, filled with stars which are like our sun, some surrounded by planets like our planet. It is a powerful image. Science fiction, books and films, tell all kinds of tales. If one were to suggest that this might not be correct, most people would think you were crazy.
Return now to
          our earlier work in which
          we expanded the radius line of the sphere to infinity and
          observed how
          the sphere became a plane at infinity (or the reverse, where
          if we
          contract the radius line the sphere disappears into a
          dimensionless
          point).  Also keep in mind that the geometric form never
          changes
          its basic nature - it just transforms at
          the different
          extremes (the infinitely large and the infinitely small radius
          aspect).
          
        
A lot of people
          should have some trouble
          here, because they conceive of infinity as something much
          larger than
          say the multiple light years of measure we have applied to the
          distance
          between the Earth and the stellar objects.  In this
          regard, lets
          look at some apparent facts so far developed under the old
          methodology.
          
        
For example,
          the so-called nearest star,
          Proxima Centuri is thought to be 4.2 light years away (its
          degree of
          arc in parallax is .77233 seconds of arc - which is by the way
          the
          largest degree of arc using parallax measures, for every more
          distant
          object will have a smaller degree of arc).  4.2 light
          years (this
          next is an amateur calculation) is 24 billion miles (that's
          24,000,000,000, or 24 thousand million).   The
          farthest
          distance objects are high multiples of that.  We'll
          return to this
          a bit later.
          
        
Remember, we
          have exported an idea to
          cosmic space which we can't empirically test.  Science,
          tied to
          the idea of counting and measure, has exported to cosmic space
          a
          measure (huge light year distances), which idea can't be
          checked by any
          other means.  As a result, we are quite right to
          challenge this
          exportation of measure to test whether it is a thought that is
          properly
          rigorous.  Since we cannot empirically test the assumed
          measure,
          we are left with the quite definite necessity to even more
          carefully
          and rigorously subject that idea to the tests of logic.
          
        
Here is a very
          important question.
           If at the center of our infinitely small sphere, the
          point, there
          is no actual space, once we have created any measure of radius
          distance
          (a nanometer, for example), we now have three dimensional
          space, then
          what happens at the infinite radius, when the sphere
          disappears and
          becomes the plane at infinity?  Is this transition as
          apparently
          sudden as the one from the point to the very very small
          sphere?
          
        
If we actually
          think very carefully about
          this we will notice (using our geometric imagination) that
          even the
          transition to the very very small is not sudden.  There
          is a lot
          of work on theses themes in mathematics, and you can Google it
          by
          starting with Zeno's paradoxes.   In any event, at
          the
          infinitely small end of the transition, from the sphere to the
          point,
          the process
          itself is likewise smaller and
          smaller in
          nature, while the transition from the very large sphere to the
          plane at
          infinity must be, by virtue of laws of symmetry, larger and
          larger in
          nature.  Keep in mind we are thinking here of the transformational
          process, from one geometric state or
          form to another state or
          form.
          
        
The plane at
          infinity doesn't appear
          suddenly out of nowhere, but as we approach it the nature of
          three-dimensional space is slowly undergoing a metamorphosis.
            Three-dimensional space is becoming plane-like in
          its
          fundamental nature, but not all of a sudden.   Space
          itself
          is changing, and the rules of physics applicable to a purely
          three-dimensional sphere (Earth conditions) will no longer, at
          these
          extremely large distances, apply.
          
        
What are huge
          light year imagined
          measures then (such as the 28 billion light years assumed for
          diameter
          the visible universe - there being thought to exist a greater
          universe
          we cannot yet see even with our instruments)?  They are
          simply a
          fantasy or myth, born in the assumptions of the scientific
          imagination.
           Since we cannot conceive of anything as knowable
          scientifically,
          without measure and counting, we presently are unable to
          conceive of
          the universe without measure either.  Again, an
          assumption that
          causes the arrow to miss the mark.  The question right
          here then
          is whether the current limits of our imagination and thinking
          reflect
          the actual limits of reality.  Confined for a time in the
          limited
          box of Euclidean Geometry, we stand on the cusp of
          transcending those
          limits by applying the more universal Projective Geometry.
          
        
This should not
          surprise anyone, for we
          already know that in particle physics, where the transition of
          matter
          endowed space becomes infinitely small (remember the sphere
          collapsing
          into the point - which has led us into all the paradoxes of
          quantum
          physics) the conditions there are suggestive of all kinds of
          alterations of the rules observed at a more (relatively) macro
          scale of
          matter.  At very small dimensions, the rules of physics
          change, so
          why would we be surprised that at very large dimensions, the
          rules of
          physics will also change.
          
        
In fact, in the
          wonderful movie Mind Walk, the character of the physicist describes matter
          as a
          huge emptiness, punctuated with geometric points, where fields
          of force
          intersect.  In effect, there is nothing there at all in
          terms of
          substance (or what we call matter) but this organism of
          intersections
          of fields of force in various kinds of pure geometric points
          (no
          space).  No space at the infinite periphery, and no space
          in the
          infinitesimal point.  In between, the perfect geometric
          sphere
          mediates between the greatest and the smallest.  "Think on it: how the
          point
          becomes a sphere and yet remains itself.  Hast thou
          understood how
          the infinite sphere may be only a point, and then come again,
          for then
          the Infinite will shine forth for thee in the finite."  Rudolf Steiner.
          
        
Now if this is
          true, then as macro cosmic
          space becomes more plane-like and less like the normal
          physical
          conditions of the Earth, we ought to be able to observe
          phenomena (just
          as we do in the very smallest dimensions revealed by quantum
          experiments) that reveal to us that this condition of space itself has altered.  Space, being no longer
          three
          dimensional at the plane at infinity, must become something
          else.
          
        
Before we
          believe this is a poor idea,
          recall that already we have been taught about the so-called gravity wells (especially near such objects as our Sun).
           Many of
          us have seen images, either on TV or in a page in a magazine,
          which
          suggests that near a massive object, space itself is distorted.  Light, we are told, traveling near this
          imagined
          state of a gravity well, can't travel in a straight line.
           This is
          thought to have been proved by Einstein's predictions
          regarding light
          from Mercury as it passes toward us from the other side of the
          sun
          (when Mercury's orbit causes it to hide (be occulted) behind
          the Sun.
           Using the Reinmann geometry (a special case of
          projective
          geometry) Einstein was able to calculate exactly the amount of
          the
          bending of light by the gravity well our our Sun.
          
        
Since we
          already know how to imagine a distorted near
          space around a massive object like our Sun (recall
          that Bruno thought our Sun and stars were of a similar nature)
          it is
          not too great a leap to imagine a fully  transformed space at the transition from the very large
          sphere to
          the Plane  at Infinity.  In a sense, the image of
          gravity
          wells is already a transformation of our ideas of space
          itself,
          although not going so far as to free itself fully of the need
          to
          measure.  What I am suggesting is that we take our
          spacial
          imagination faculty all the way, and also bring projective
          geometry
          itself all the way into play as descriptive of the natural
          world.
          
        
Which is of
          course exactly what our
          observations of light, and other phenomena of the stellar
          world, can
          tells us if we let them.  Once we overcome the one-sided
          Euclidean
          geometry previously applied in parallax, and substitute
          Projective
          Geometry principles, then all the anomalous problems of
          redshift are
          resolved.   
          
        
The reason the
          hydrogen line is different
          is because it (the light) originates in a kind of space which itself is
          different).  A star isn't a sun
          (unless we change our ideas of our near sun-space - going back
          to
          Bruno, which is entirely justified but a whole other problem).
           Those stellar objects with large redshift
          characteristics (such
          as Quasars) are deeper (a presently necessary poor choice of
          words, for
          it implies a continuation of three dimensions) within the
          transformed
          plane-like space.  In fact, if we make a picture only of
          the
          redshift (disregarding Euclidean parallax) phenomena by itself
          (and
          related other astronomical facts of stellar radiation
          phenomena), a new
          kind of picture emerges.
          
        
Think for a
          moment on all the pictures we
          have been graced with of the starry world from the Hubble
          telescope.
            Everyone has seen these.  Rich colors
          (actually
          computer enhanced far too often, but that is a whole other
          problem).
           Marvelous shapes and forms.  Just looking at the
          redshift
          characteristics we can make a picture of an object that is
          remarkably
          active.  It is not static or at rest in relationship to
          the Earth,
          but dynamic.  Its relationship to other stellar objects
          is more
          fixed (perhaps musically harmonious, because there is a dance
          of such
          objects - including our solar system - all based on the
          projected
          geometric form of the vortex*), but the light phenomena, which
          our
          instruments observe, suggests (since we observe this variation
          of
          redshifts, x-ray stars etc) that stellar objects have dynamic
          properties.  The various kinds of radiation, pouring
          toward the
          earth from the cosmic periphery, are not constant, but rather
          always
          changing and dynamic.
          
        
*[A vortex is,
          in terms of projective
          geometry, a dynamic form.
           That is, it is, in its actual nature, in
          movement.  A tornado funnel cloud is a vortex, and we see
          a vortex
          every time we flush a toilet.  A vortex is also a
          relative of the
          cone of light, which is how we think of what light does when
          it enters
          the eye through the lens.  These cones of light are well
          described
          in all their geometry properties by the rules of projective
          geometry;
          and, a vortex is simply a dynamic (moving) cone-like form in
          nature.]
          
        
Many stellar
          objects are extremely
          dramatic (x-ray and neutron stars, for example).  Keep in
          mind
          that these pictures are created by a thinking which has
          removed all qualities, remaining
          only in quantities.  To better appreciate this lets make a
          little
          analogy.
          
        
Consider a
          flower garden in full late
          summer bloom.  Vivid colors, lots of insect life and
          birds dancing
          and playing.  For some almost violent growth (how fast
          does a sun
          flower grow, on its way to a height of 12 to 14 feet in three
          months
          time).  Of course, to the gardener it makes no sense to
          disregard
          the way such a garden makes us feel (its qualities), but if
          astronomical thinking were applied to a flower garden, all
          that would
          disappear.  We'd end up with a bunch of numbers (how
          many, of
          which kinds, what frequency of light were the colors, what was
          the
          speed of growth etc. etc. etc.).  Our actual experience of the garden is washed away by the process of
          limiting
          our thinking only to the quantitative.
          
        
Now think (if
          you can remember) of a time
          when you were deep in Nature, away from city lights, and lay
          on your
          back in a meadow looking up at midnight at the night sky.
            Thousands upon thousands of stars, and your mind
          naturally
          saw everywhere patterns.   Moreover, we feel awe.
           The
          starry night touches something deep inside us, that can only
          respond
          with marvel and wonder.  We forget this living in our
          cities, and
          we have also forgotten (and losing) even the ability to have
          such a
          view because the atmosphere itself is so polluted that less
          and less of
          the stellar light passes through it to our eye.
          
        
This is what we observe - what we experience. What we think - what is our mental image or picture - having been formed by modern astronomical ideas, is that this endless emptiness is filled with objects like our own planet and solar system. But now we are discovering in this essay the possibility that deep space is not three dimensional at all. Cosmic space is a peripheral plane of light, alive with dynamic processes creating what? What is this new kind of space, the plane at infinity, from which stellar light pours down upon the Earth?
Lets take a
          small side trip here, to
          consider light itself.  The book mentioned above, Catching
the
          Light:
          the
          entwined history of light and mind,
          goes into
          remarkable detail and history.  Keeping our projective
          geometry
          idea in mind, we might then make a relationship between the
          sphere that
          has collapsed into a point, and what is now called light
          quanta or
          photons.  As mentioned above, these quanta exhibit all
          kinds of
          properties that normally spacial (in a three dimensional
          sense) objects
          do not.
          
        
For example,
          the world we see of trees
          and clouds does not reveal the micro world of light quanta and
          the
          other many strange particles known to modern high energy
          physics.
           The scientist doesn't see much of this either, except
          with his
          instruments and the image making powers of his mind.
          
        
We could say
          (from our more naive point
          of view - which has a special validity) that it is as if light
          quanta
          have stepped outside of time and space (this is one way of
          viewing what
          the experiments with light show to us today through quantum
          physics).
           To help here, let me add another idea from projective
          geometry.
          
        
We know in
          Euclidean geometry this
          general rule: parallel lines never meet.  In projective
          geometry
          (of which, remember, Euclidean geometry is a special case)
          parallel
          lines meet at infinity.  To appreciate this better we
          need to
          practice another imagination, for we can with our picture
          thinking
          follow quite easily in thought the wonderful paradox expressed
          here.
          
        
Picture two parallel lines (I can do this here):
_______________.________________
________________________________
          
        
Now imagine the
          top line, in the center
          of which is a point, rotating around that point.
           Picture, for
          example, the top line crossing the bottom line at about a 45
          degree
          angle toward the left side of the page.  As we rotate
          this line
          further to the left, the angle of crossing gets smaller and
          smaller,
          until at infinity it no longer crosses the line.  Yet, if
          we keep
          rotating the line in the same direction of rotation, as soon
          as it goes
          the smallest possible distance further, the top line starts to
          cross
          the bottom line at the farthest distance to the right.
          
        
When we couple
          this idea with our
          appreciation of the plane at infinity, we can with our
          geometric
          imagination feel (picturing it is hard, but logically we can
          feel this
          is right - and all these ideas have been proved by those
          working with
          the rules of projective geometry using algebraic formulas and
          calculations) that these two lines, which could be seen as
          parallel
          lines contained in a sphere, will at infinity arrive at the
          same point
          on the plane at infinity, because as we saw before, when the
          radius
          line of the sphere is infinite it is no longer a
          three-dimensional
          space.  The rounded sphere has become a plane, an all
          encompassing
          plane to be sure, surrounding from the infinite periphery (the
          unseen
          universe imagined by cosmologists) all that was at one time
          interior.
           The surrounding geometric quality remains, but since space itself is transformed,
          it
          accomplishes a kind of paradoxical miracle.
          
        
To travel to
          infinity in one direction
          (in terms of the spherical three-dimensional nature of
          ordinary space)
          means to return from the opposite direction, for once within the plane at infinity, the line that intersected
          the
          ever flattening arc of the sphere is now simultaneously a
          point that is
          everywhere.  The point, in the center dimensionless,
          expands,
          first  becoming a growing measureless sphere until it
          ultimately
          becomes a plane.  Our geometric imagination never has to
          leave the
          proper and logical train of geometrical thought.  Once
          more: "Think
          on it: how the point
          becomes a sphere and yet remains itself.  Hast thou
          understood how
          the infinite sphere may be only a point, and then come again,
          for then
          the Infinite will shine forth for thee in the finite."  Rudolf Steiner.
          
        
If we then
          appreciate that the night sky
          is the plane at infinity, and that the measure we exported
          from our
          earthly perspective is not valid out there in cosmic space,
          then the
          light quanta, existing there outside of time and space,
          radiates toward
          us from this cosmic periphery, only becoming space-bound when within three-dimensional space.  At
          the
          periphery, light quanta are not limited by the so-called speed
          of
          light, but are everywhere at the same time, yet somehow
          differentiated,
          for that is what we see, not just with the eye but with all
          our
          instruments as well.
          
        
Light comes
          towards us from the stellar
          reality.  If that reality is not spacial in the sense
          that we
          previously assumed (rooted in three-dimensionally matter based
          bodies
          like suns and planets), then what is it?   What can
          exist in
          the transitional space in between a true three-dimensional
          sphere, and
          the pure plane at infinity?  If out there is not an  empty space in which three
          dimensional
          matter arises, what does arise there in that space that, like
          the
          infinitesimally small, will not allow itself to conform to
          Earth-like
          physical laws?
          
        
These are the questions that have to be faced if we apply projective geometry to the relationship between our Earth center, and the peripheral plane at infinity. If we look at the stellar phenomena, such as redshift, then what meaning can be attributed to that kind of existence which creates light that violates the rules we know at the Earth center?
Perhaps it
          would be better (disregarding
          the word "deeper" above) to think of these objects as more
          filled with
          Life.  The plane at infinity, as transformed space, reveals a high level of dynamic properties in
          all its
          light radiations.   Could that dynamism be Life? Why
          could we
          think that and remain within reason?
          
        
Something is
          happening out there that
          comes here.  Light is created out there and comes here.
           Our
          science has made all kinds of pictures for us of what is
          happening out
          there, yet these pictures are not empirical, but entirely
          theoretical.
           Moreover, they are entirely material and assume that the
          laws of
          physics at cosmic distances will be the same as they are on
          the Earth,
          which already we have noticed is not justified for the very
          very small.
          
        
If we work from
          the idea of the plane at
          infinity first (for which projective geometry grants us every
          right),
          then we might ask whether or not space
          itself is created out there.
           We see the
          light coming toward us from the cosmos, and we notice its
          dynamic
          properties (all the various intensities of redshift, among
          others -
          Quasars, neutron stars etc).  If we discard measure
          (which
          projective geometry doesn't need), then the plane at infinity,
          with its
          inward radiating light is perhaps creating space itself, not
          from a
          point center (such as the Big Bang), but from the cosmic
          periphery.
          
        
The plane at
          infinity (transcendent of
          matter oriented three dimensionality) creates three dimensional space and time, by radiating
          light
          inwardly from the cosmic periphery.  Redshift is not old
          light
          receding, but its opposite - new light becoming space and
          time.
           This is exactly the idea of a student of Rudolf
          Steiner's, George
          Adams Kaufmann, in his 1933 essay on cosmic theory (rooted in
          projective geometry): Space and
          the Light of Creation, which essay's
          first
          chapter is Radiation
          of
          Space (the second chapter is The Music of Number, and the third and last chapter is The Burden of Earth
          and the
          Sacrifice of Warmth).
          
        
What kind of
          power could create Space
          itself?  Our point centered assumptions, working from
          only
          quantities, have only been able to think of a spiritless
          matter filled
          Universe, born in a Big Bang.  Certainly, working
          inwardly from
          the cosmic periphery (the plane at infinity) which the new
          geometry
          gives us every right to do, what is that which can be out there that rays inwardly the creation of Space itself?
          
        
"...and in it was life
          and the life was the light of the
          world..."  The power
          (fiat lux - let there be light) surrounding the Universe, is
          Life, and
          the Life creates the Light, and the Light rays inwardly
          creating Space
          and Time, in the center of which the Earth of living matter
          and
          substance arises, itself a narrow spherical band, for Earth
          life is
          only on the surface - go too deep and it is fire and there is
          no life,
          go too high and it is airless and again no life.
          
        
From the plane
          at infinity, through the
          inward plane-ward sculpted spheres of light, resting for a
          moment at
          the Earth periphery, where humanity unfolds its evolution,
          then
          eventually still collapsing to smaller and smaller spheres,
          ultimately
          disappearing into pure point centered geometric intersections
          of fields
          of force and the mysterious light quanta we discover in our
          laboratory
          experiments in quantum physics.   But is it light
          quanta that
          is born first in the cosmic periphery, and then flies inward
          ultimately
          dying into very very tiny points from out which are built
          living matter
          and substance?
          
        
Should not,
          according to the laws of
          symmetry so essential to projective geometry, there be both a
          similarity and a difference between the infinitely large and
          the
          infinitesimally small?  If life is created at the cosmic
          periphery, does it die into the very very small, only to be
          reborn
          instantaneously once more in the cosmic periphery?
            Recall
          our imaginative experiment with the parallel lines.  If
          time and
          space rules don't apply to light quanta (photons), this will
          be true
          both at their point of first appearance and then again at
          their point
          of disappearance.
          
        
Yet, something
          not quite right here.
           The measureless sphere exists in between the infinitely
          large and
          the infinitesimally small.  Appearance and disappearance
          are the
          same process in a way.  Here again is Rudolf Steiner: "Think on it: how the
          point
          becomes a sphere and yet remains itself.  Hast thou
          understood how
          the infinite sphere may be only a point, and then come again,
          for then
          the Infinite will shine forth for thee in the finite."
          
        
Created out of
          the uncreated and
          formless, generating space and time, falling then inward
          toward the
          center from the periphery until collapsing into the
          nothingness once
          more of timeless and space-less point centers, before
          returning
          instantaneously again to the cosmic infinite plane of life.
          
        
And, the
          simultaneously opposite:
           Arising out of the uncreated and formless nature of the
          mysterious light quanta, radiating outward from an infinite
          number of
          point centers, spreading out toward the cosmic periphery,
          there to
          disappear into the remarkable spaceless and timeless plane at
          infinity.
          
        
A mystery aptly
          caught in the image of a
          mobile imagination of the gesture in space that creates the
          form we
          know as the lemniscate.
          
        
Moreover, of
          all the mysterious facts
          quantum mechanics has discovered, it seems that it is the mind
          itself
          that determines the nature of the collapse from potential
          becoming
          (probability) into manifestation.  Consciousness is
          crucial.
            Without consciousness there is no manifestation,
          only
          probability.   Could not a Larger more Infinite
          Consciousness
          exist at the Periphery, where time and space themselves are
          first
          manifested?  Then too, if the Great Mind can do that,
          what then is
          involved in the small mind, when it thinks and acts so as to
          unfold its
          own creative imagination and exact picture formation in
          learning of and
          practicing the measureless beauty of projective geometry?
          
        
In the
          Beginning was the Word, and the Word was toward God, and God
          was what
          the Word was.  It was with God in the Beginning.
           All things
          happened through it, and not one thing that happened happened
          without
          out it.  In it was life, and the life was the light of
          the
          world....*
          
        
So Christ
          advises us to pray: "Our Father in the skies..."
          
        
*translation
          from the Greek of a part of
          the prologue to the John Gospel, from the book, The
Unvarnished
          Gospels by Andy Gaus.
          
        
Of course,
          currently Natural Science
          hasn't the capacity to appreciate such a change in their
          understanding
          of the Cosmos.  But this book isn't written for
          scientists, its
          written for those Christians, who might like to have a sense
          that one
          can still be deeply religious and not abandon the rational.
          
        
What we have
          done, by the way, is look at
          the image building processes of the fine minds at work in
          natural
          science, which have created a kind of myth regarding the
          stellar world
          - a myth quite different from that held by more ancient minds
          in ages
          long ago.  We have not returned to those ancient myths so
          much, as
          taken up, out of the advancing progress of natural science
          itself, a
          particular discipline (projective geometry, or all geometry),
          and
          applied it to move past the current astronomical myth to what
          perhaps
          might well be the kind of truth the physicist pursues when he
          chases
          his holy grail of the so-called: Theory of Everything.  
          
        
Most versions
          of the Theory of Everything
          rely on highly abstract mathematical complexities - a kind of
          near-secret symbolic language only useful to the priests of
          Natural
          Science.  Would it be possible to construct a Theory of
          Everything
          using ordinary language?  Can the symbols of words on a
          page and
          simple concepts, understandable by ordinary consciousness,
          produce a
          better Theory of Everything?  May it not be necessary in
          fact to
          reintroduce qualities and mix those with quantities, if we are
          actually
          going to have a true Theory of Everything?  Doesn't such a Theory not only have to
          explain
          consciousness, but our form of consciousness - why we live in
          the world
          in between the very very large and the very very small?
          
        
We have
          constructed this essay in a way
          that makes it possible for the naive consciousness to behold
          in their
          own minds something that so far has been presented to the
          world as a
          secret mystery only knowable to the mathematical adepts of the
          religion
          of natural science.
          
        
We live in a
          time when there are to be no
          more priests, of the religious or the scientific kind.
           No more
          claims that the ordinary and naive mind has to be dependent on
          another
          for their understanding of the world and of the universe.
          
        
The Universe wants to be known, just as we want to be known. "You see, for now we look as if in a mirror, shrouded in mystery; but then we will see face to face. Now I partly discern; but then I will perceive the same way that I was perceived all along. And so we will have faith, hope and love, these three: but the greatest of these is love."*
*[Andy Gaus, Unvarnished
          New
          Testament - end of chapter 13, of
          St.
          Paul's First Letter to the Corinthians.]
          
        
addendum
- many questions remain -
          
        
No reader
          should consider that the above
          has exhausted all the remarkable possibilities of projective
          geometry
          in advancing our understanding of the Nature World as it
          appears to
          both our senses and our scientific instruments.
            All I have
          really done is try bring to light aspects
          of thinking and
          the imagination that many don't yet appreciate.
          
        
Nor is the
          above perfect by any means,
          for it is clearly the work of an amateur.  That fact,
          however,
          should not stop us from going onward and asking all the many
          questions
          that still need to be asked.
          
        
For example,
          does the plane at infinity
          collapse into one point, or into all points?  We can
          think of the
          very smallest, as we observe them in the local conditions of
          the earth
          in our laboratory experiments, as a very huge number of such
          point
          centers.  All matter and substance seems to be built up
          out of
          light quanta, and other oddly named particles.  
          
        
Now a plane,
          which has no measure, is
          infinite in all directions.   It can also be
          constructed,
          under the well known rules of projective geometry, of points.
            There is, in this geometry, a plane of points, a
          plane of
          lines, a point of lines, a point of planes, and a line of
          points and a
          line of planes.  If we recognize that the Plane at
          Infinity is
          made up of all possible points, then what keeps it from
          radiating
          toward our Earth-Center that which becomes all the many point
          centers
          from which matter and substance arise.  Once there, in
          this
          infinite number of point centers, that which has first
          radiated inward,
          returns once more to the periphery.  This our geometric
          imagination can experience.
          
        
A deep study of
          projective geometry
          reveals several kinds of processes which arise according to
          the basic
          relationships of plane, line and point; or, the source or
          origin of
          light (the plane at infinity), light becoming space and time
          (radiation
          of space) and light dying into the source once more through
          its
          collapse into the infinite number of point centers quantum
          physics
          discovers.  To this we add the process of that which
          radiates out
          from point centers towards the periphery.  In the light of
          understanding this, we can come to
          quite new conceptions of how
          crystals grow, and what is happening at the growing point of a
          plant.
           Such work has been done, in fact, by the Goethean
          Scientists
          pointed out in the above essays.
          
        
In addition to
          these questions then we
          are right to ask another: what is the nature of the space
          occupied by the imagination
        itself?  We know this exists, and
          not
          only that it exists, but that we create it.  We consciously create imaginative
          space
          ourselves.  What are we that we can do something that has
          such
          kinship with the space and time creating activity of the
          Mystery at the
          Plane at Infinity?
          
        
"Imagination is more important than knowledge. For knowledge is limited to all we now know and understand, while imagination embraces the entire world, and all there ever will be to know and understand." Albert Einstein [emphasis added, ed.]
- healing materialism -
          
        
The human being
          possesses a remarkable
          power in that he (or she) is able to make images and share
          them with
          others.  Meaning streams from
          one to another upon this product of the
          picture-thinking imagination.  We are taught science out
          of this
          image creation capacity.  We tell the wonderful stories
          of our
          ancestors out of this same image creation capacity.  What
          we
          frequently don't do well, is find a way to be scientific about
          this
          image creating capacity itself.  
          
        
Of all the
          scientific disciplines that
          will enhance this image building capacity, in a logically
          rigorous
          fashion, it is the discipline of projective geometry (as
          taught by such
          as Whicher above) that will be the most fruitful.
            At the
          same time, the human being is more than rationality - much
          more.
          
        
That human
          culture produces art and
          religion, as well as science, ought to give us a significant
          clue.
            Whicher's book takes account of this, to a degree,
          by
          including a number of pictures of art, including religious
          art.
           What is less appreciated is the role of human intention,
          of human
          will, in all this (the will is the
          point center of the
          same consciousness which the quantum physicist recognizes is
          needed for
          the potential to collapse into the real).
          
        
At the end of
          the main body of the essay
          above, I tried to remind the reader that we are part of
          reality.
           Quantum mechanics has seen this, for the potential of
          quantum
          events only collapses into actual space and time when our
          consciousness
          participates.  The genius of Owen Barfield discusses participation in detail, in his book Saving
          the
          Appearances: a study in idolatry.
          
        
In this book,
          through a wonderful
          examination of what the deeper study of human languages can
          reveal,
          Barfield shows us how there is an evolution of consciousness, to go along side the physical evolution so far
          discovered.  For Barfield, the quite ancient times could
          be
          called: original
          participation.  This was a time
          when the
          human consciousness was instinctively one with reality, thus
          giving
          birth to all the ancient myths.
          
        
This original
          participation eventually
          faded away, giving us an intermediate state, called by
          Barfield (and
          others): the on-looker
          separation.   Humanity is
          pushed
          out of the condition of original participation by the Gods
          themselves,
          so that we can by this independence learn to experience our
          freedom and
          our ego (self) consciousness.   The on-looker
          separation is
          itself marked by special changes in language, in art and also
          gives
          rise to natural science.   It is as on-lookers
          (forgetting
          our role as thinking observers) that we build the images of
          the natural
          world, both earthly and cosmic, as only matter and never
          spirit.
          
        
But the natural world will not submit for long to that false view, and so quantum mechanics finds that it must reinsert human consciousness into its concepts of the basic physics of the world. With this now well established basic scientific knowledge, to which we can add the discipline of projective geometry (especially with its understanding of visual cones of light), the path is laid out of science itself toward what Barfield called then: final participation.
        
Quantum
          mechanics tells us that our
          consciousness is needed for the potential to be able to collapse into the real.
           Projective
          Geometry tells us not just rules about the light cone
          of physical space, but as well the light cone of internal
          imaginative
          space.  Rudolf Steiner's introspective science (outlined
          in A Theory
          of Knowledge Implicit in Goethe's World Conception and The
          Philosophy of Freedom) shows us how
          to
          experience the world of image building (organic form) and
          concept
          creation (pure thinking) in a fully mature participatory way.
          
        
At the same
          time, I don't participate
          solely as a rational being, but as a being to whom art and the
          sacred
          have meaning.  If I add these dimensions of my being to
          my imaging
          building and conceptual formulations, what kind of picture of
          the world
          will I paint?  Given this question, I will end with a
          couple of
          stories as a kind of demonstration.
          
        
In the
          mid-seventies I was traveling with
          some friends in Northern California.  We were a group of
          adults
          and children, and during the day a few of the adults were
          designated
          camp-parents, while the others were free to wander farther.
            Thus I found myself, on the evening of the Summer
          Solstice,
          sitting on a beach in Northern California watching the Sun set
          over the
          Pacific Ocean.
          
        
As the Sun set,
          the sky slowly grew
          darker and stars slowly appeared.   This is what I
          observed
          as I continued to watch the horizon where the Sun had set.
            Together, as a group, at the precisely same arc of
          the edge
          of the ocean, there appeared three stars in a somewhat
          vertical line.
            The Sun goes down, and soon thereafter where it
          went down a
          vertical line of three stars appears.
          
        
Now the reader
          should realize that I was
          at that time quite convinced of the spiritual reality of
          things, out of
          my own direct experience.   As a consequence, when I
          observed
          our natural world I perceived it as a teaching.  For example, we can observe that of all
          the many
          inorganic and organic beings that appear in visual space,
          there are a
          variety of forms.   Of this variety of forms, only
          one form,
          one shape, has hands that have been so creatively freed by our
          ability
          to be able to stand upright.
          
        
Moreover, this
        human
          being changes his living environment in profound ways.
           We act
          upon the creation, as if it was within us that the creative
          power
          itself was slowly incarnating.  To my thinking then,
          there existed
          a kind of dialog between the world of the senses and my own
          inner being
          (the teaching).   Here I was on a beach watching the
          Sun,
          itself a very special form (we receive light and heat from it
          that are
          necessary for life - without the Sun we do not live).  As
          this
          form set on the Summer Solstice, the first stars to appear
          (the night
          teachers), were three.
          
        
This then is
          what the teaching sang to me
          on that beach: one becomes three.  So the Mystery of the
          Trinity
          was written right there in the most simple events of the world
          of the
          senses.  One becomes Three.
          
        
The ambient
          light became slightly dimmer,
          and not too soon thereafter, above the three was four, in the
          shape of
          a kind of box, standing on one of its corners above the last
          star of
          the three.  The One becomes Three and then Four is added
          to become
          Seven.  Those who know what is sometimes called the
          occult
          significance of Numbers will recognize here all manner of
          analogies,
          about which nothing more need be said. (for the more
          traditionally
          fixed of mind, the Sun set and in the order described, the
          constellation of the Great Bear emerged, standing on its tail
          above the
          same place on the horizon the Sun had set on the night of that
          particular  Summer Solstice - yet this constellation did
          not
          appear all at once, but in a very definite sequence as the day
          light
          faded and the night lights manifested themselves).
          
        
In this way I
          was initiated more deeply
          into the Mystery of the Night Teachers, and while I wished my
          life
          would have allowed me to study over many decades this teaching
          by which
          we noted not just the starry sky, but when and in what order the stars emerged, I did then realize that those
          who
          observed from such as Stonehenge saw a world of wonder we have
          still
          yet to fully appreciate.
          
        
One more
          similar picture.  If the
          shape of the sense world is from a Creator, and this Creator
          is such
          profound Mystery that we have hardly yet begun to appreciate
          all the He
          has done and is doing, should we be surprised by the manner
          and depth
          of the teaching that awaits us both within and without?
            Consider, sunrise and sunset.
            Something that
          happens all over the world everyday, and has done so for eons.
          
        
If we, as an aspect of final participation, re-ensoul the world of the senses with being and consciousness, might we not then begin to see that when the Sun sets, when the shape representing (in its speaking-teaching) the Highest of the Mystery, recedes from our sight, at that moment the stars, one by one and then in groups, slowly emerge, slowly appear in the dark and by their order of appearing and by the shapes and forms they thereby render, they can be seen as singing praises to this Highest. He sets, and they rise and sing.
Then the night
          ends, the regular
          night-singing has passed, and as the Sun begins to once more
          return to
          shed Its light and warmth and life on humankind, the stars
          recede, and
          kneeling down, in groups and then one by one, they give way to
          that
          which they honor above all else.  Yet, this is not all.
          
        
For the shape
          of time and space, of stars
          and suns and the world of humankind, is also teaching.  We are there too, and what are we, we
          human
          beings, that the Highest and all the Angels look down upon us
          -
          surround us and gift us with such Love we hardly appreciate
          it.
           Not just that but more, for we are not only looked down
          upon from
          Above, but we are also carried through cosmic space by the
          Earth -
          Father Sky and Mother Earth - as the world's oldest peoples
          and
          cultures well know.
          
        
The dark moist
          earth is the Mother, from
          which all that grows and nourishes flows.  The waters
          that give
          life, the very air we need to breath.   There in the
          center
          of all, looked down upon by Father Sky, upheld and nourished
          in the
          Womb of Mother Earth, sits the human being, the upright shape
          with the
          hands and the creative and curious mind.  That is the
          real
          question of final participation: Who
          are
          we?
        
        
recent news concerning Red Shift
Sept. 12, 2008
            
          
Port Angeles, Wa. This
            week, dozens of leading astronomers,
            researchers and other scientists from around the globe met
            for a
            Cosmology conference.[1] The conference provided eight
            panels composed
            of experts in every facet of cosmology including the reality
            of
            expansion, quasars, dark matter, dark energy, “black holes”,
            and the
            true nature of the microwave radiation from space. One
            astronomer made
            his presentation live from Germany using video-link
            technology.
            
          
Organizer Tom Van
            Flandern said “This was a thrilling
            success. We heard and discussed three new mechanisms
            explaining
            redshift and a new equation modifying our understanding of
            gravity. If
            any of the redshift proposals passes experimental tests that
            would mean
            we do not have an expanding Universe; that the Big Bang
            theory would be
            without its strongest foundation.
            
          
Physicist John Hartnett
            from the University of Western
            Australia said “it’s amusing that our conference occurred
            just as they
            fire up the Hadron Collider in Europe. Most of our
            presenters showed
            the deep problems with the Big Bang while a 40 billion
            dollar project
            starts up to trying to find an elusive particle to keep the
            Big Bang
            story from collapsing.”
            
          
Redshift
            in the light from galaxies led to the belief that
            the universe is expanding, and this belief has persisted for
            80 years.
            But modern observational evidence, especially from NASA
            European Space
            Agency space telescopes and satellites, has clouded the
            picture and
            raised many doubts. In 2004, an open letter was published in
            New Scientist magazine,
              and has since been
              signed by over 500 endorsers. It begins: “The big bang
              today relies on
              a growing number of hypothetical entities, things that we
              have never
              observed-- inflation, dark matter and dark energy are the
              most
              prominent examples. Without them, there would be a fatal
              contradiction
              between the observations made by astronomers and the
              predictions of the
              big bang theory. In no other field of physics would this
              continual
              recourse to new hypothetical objects be accepted as a way
              of bridging
              the gap between theory and observation. It would, at the
              least, raise
              serious questions about the validity of the underlying
              theory.” (http://cosmologystatement.org)
            
          
From the many lines of evidence presented at the conference, It now appears that those concerns were justified. Presenters also outlined the principles that a good cosmology should be based on. Chief among them is that it should not require a series of miracles to remain viable.
        
*****************************
        
the Natural Christian
the world is full of people whose heart
is Christian through and through, but who
cannot, with good justification, grant themselves
this name,
            for that name has been stolen by others
            
          
this is for them
            
          
Contents
            
          
introduction:
part one: how may we describe the consciousness of an ordinary human being, in ordinary terms?
part two: what does Science Believe it Knows about Consciousness?
part three: ordinary consciousness studies itself.
part four: Is Science Limited to its Present Methods of Investigation?
part five: the psychology of the moral life of a natural Christian.
part six: the relationship of Natural Science to Thinking.
part seven: the relationship of the natural Christian to thinking.
part eight: culmination and integration: becoming scientific about our own consciousness and self-consciousness.
part nine: arguments with God; a personal view, offered ...
addendum: BICYCLES - a
            Children's
            Christmas Story, which is also for Adults -
            
          
- introduction -
            
          
First ... I
            can't answer all questions
            here, but I'll try to point out some things that might be
            helpful to
            people, especially those who say something like: well, I'm not
            religious, but
            I am spiritual.
            
          
What I have
            in mind here, by the idea of
            a Natural Christian, could even include Sam Harris, the
            author of the End of
            Faith, who believes himself to be
            more of a
            atheist, than a religious person.   The God he
            finds
            described in most religious texts (especially as interpreted
            and
            practiced by modern individuals who consider themselves to
            be believers
            of Christian Faith) seems to him to be completely
            irrational.  I
            think Harris is quite justified in this view.
            
          
The practice
            of religion, by many who
            name themselves Christians, is often irrational, and what is
            often
            worse - even more often hypocritical.  This is not to
            suggest, by
            the way, that anyone who calls themselves Christian is of
            this
            tendency.  The reality is more difficult to apprehend
            and come to
            terms with.   Which is why this essay is being
            written - to
            help anyone who stumbles upon it to perhaps orient their own
            nature and
            life with greater surety of purpose.
            
          
One of the
            peculiarities of the present
            time, especially with connection to those organized
            religious
            institutions that call themselves Christian, is that while
            there are
            many who have beliefs, few actually practice the teachings.
             To
            actually follow the teachings of Christ, as most anyone who
            bothers to
            read the Gospels knows, is rather difficult.   A
            lot is asked
            for.
            
          
As a
            consequence of this difficulty,
            Christianity has become today mostly a system of beliefs,
            with
            different institutions espousing radically different points
            of view,
            from the Roman Catholic Church to the Church of Jesus Christ
            of Latter
            Day Saints (the Mormons).  Holding beliefs is a lot
            easier than
            following those oh so difficult teachings.  Not to say
            there
            weren't a lot of people who tried to follow the teachings,
            it just that
            a lot of them got killed for heresy* by the Roman Church, or
            if they
            agreed (submitted) to correct institutional doctrine, had to
            end up
            living in domiciles for the members of Religious Orders
            (Franciscans,
            Carmelites etc.).
            
          
*See the
            essay the
            Transcendentalist Impulse
            and Heretical  Christianity,
            included
            with this essay in the book: New
            Wine.]
            
          
Since most
            systems of belief became rigid
            (rules and doctrines and dogmas), one could ask whether this
            had any
            value at all.   This question really has
            significance when
            one considers the meaning of Faith in the psychology of a
            human being.
             In the prologue to the Gospel of John, we find these
            lines: "...There was a man sent from
            God, whose name was John.  He came for testimony, to
            bear witness
            to the light, that all might believe through him.
              He was
            not the light, but came to bear witness to the light."  
            
          
Even Christ
            understood this: "Blessed are those who have
            not seen and yet have believed."
              Most religions make a great deal of the idea of
            Faith, but
            perhaps get confused when they insist that it has to be
            Faith in their
            version or system of beliefs.  Even Harris, mentioned
            above,
            called his book, the End of
            Faith, but if you read him
            carefully, he is
            actually highly critical of beliefs.   We could
            say that
            people today don't understand the distinction, or the
            importance given
            to all this by St. Paul in 1 Corinthians 13: "And now these three
            remain:
            faith, hope and love.  But the greatest of these is
            love."  Faith is as much an
            act of trust in the Divine
            Mystery, as it is anything else.  To equate Faith,
            however, with a
            system of beliefs, is to mistake the superficial (beliefs)
            with the
            depths of religious practice (Faith).
            
          
Why can I
            say: that
            people today don't
            understand?
            
          
It is mostly
            a question of the difference
            between reading about something in a book, and learning to
            actually do
            it - to practice it.   Obviously we can recognize
            that a
            person who reads all kinds of books about the martial arts,
            knows a
            great deal less than a person who has become a master of
            their
            practice.   The same is true in religion.
             Reading about
            religion in a book, and actually practicing it for a
            lifetime, are two
            very different things.
            
          
Someone who
            goes to Church on Sunday and
            prays the Lord's Prayer in public (as most Christian
            Churches do)
            doesn't understand the first thing about the Sermon on the
            Mount, which
            very clearly says to say the Our Father in secret.  Out
            loud and
            in secret.  To actually follow Christ's instructions
            (say, for
            example, about the mote and the beam in the Sermon on the
            Mount) leads
            to experiences,
            the same way the practice of martial arts leads to experience.
            
          
No pain, no
            gain is the modern cliche.
              Same is true in religion.  Its easy to have
            a belief
            system.  Its comforting.  It doesn't ask too much.
             You
            hang out with a bunch of folks who all believe the same
            thing.
              Sort of like a club.   Thing is Christ
            didn't say
            join a club.  In fact He said kind of the opposite: He who loves father
            or mother
            more than me is not worthy of me; and he who loves son or
            daughter more
            that me is not worthy of me; and he who does not take his
            cross and
            follow me is not worthy of me.  He who finds his life
            will lose
            it, and he who loses his life for my sake will find it.
             He who
            receives you receives me, and he who receives me receives
            him who sent
            me.
            
          
Then, of
            course, there's the example.
             You know the one.  Preaching what was essentially
            a bunch of
            ideas contrary not only to the dominant local  religion
            of the
            time (according to the Hebrew Priesthood), but also all
            kinds of social
            ideas not exactly in accord with how Rome conducted its
            political
            business.   We know not to talk at dinner about
            religion and
            politics.   Christ didn't seem to know that one.
             He
            thought the truth was more important.  Then they killed
            him.
            
          
Afterwards -
            well in the beginning
            anyway, there were a lot of people running around telling
            the good
            news, telling the story.  Churches were founded (of a
            sort).
             Women were often leaders.   The story didn't
            agree with
            the beliefs of the Hebrew religion.  Disciples were
            martyred, both
            for religious reasons and political.   People,
            ordinary
            people, liked the story.  It was impressive.
              The
            Disciples were impressive.  The Romans were often jerks
            or thugs
            and the Hebrew priests often hypocrites.  
            
          
Then comes
            Emperor Constantine, who
            unites the declining Roman Empire with some of the bishops
            of the emerging Christian Church.
             Institutional politics and institutional religion make
            for good
            authoritarian bed partners, and the teachings of Christ
            starts (had
            already started, but here it gets serious) getting
            re-interpreted.
              For example, the Gospels, in the original Greek,
            don't have
            the word sin (the Greek word means missing the mark, or
            making an
            error).   Where Christ (again in the Greek) says
            you are to
            love God with all your mind and all your heart and all your
          spirit, the Roman Church drops the idea of an
            immortal spirit,
            and substitutes the idea of the soul (you are to love your
            God with all
            your heart and all your mind and all your soul).
              Not
            only that, but the New Testament gets organized,
            leaving out a whole bunch of books that talk about things
            like Gnosis
            (how to have direct experience of the Divine Mystery), as
            well as
            Faith.  I could go on.
            
          
Periodically
            certain personalities try to
            refocus on what Christ actually said and did, and that maybe
            we should
            be worried about living the way he taught, and no so worried
            about
            whether our system of ideas is officially approved by the
            head guy (and
            his cohorts) in Rome (or other places).  The so-called
            Christian
            religion slowly more an more loses its connection with what
            Christ
            actually taught.  Yet...
            
          
These moral
            ideas have become part of the
            general cultural background of Western Civilization.
             When science
            arises, those who want the truth instead of doctrine again
            become
            martyrs to the truth, only this time to the truths of
            science, which in
            the beginning was just another heresy to the Roman Church.
            
          
Are you
            getting the picture yet?
            
          
Now not everyone in an organized Church is a fool, or stupid. Many scientists are quite religious, in all kinds of ways. Kepler was an astrologer. Newton was an alchemist. Faraday was a deeply religious Christian. Einstein, born a Jew, reacted to the probability theory in quantum mechanics by saying: that God doesn't play dice with the universe.
A lot of
            people get turned off to
            organized religion, yet are very concerned about what they
            call ethics.
             The belief systems are weird (as Sam Harris and others
            have
            observed), but even the new atheists are inclined to ethics.
            Some
            scientists are so convinced that people are often moral,
            that they try
            to find a way to explain this using evolutionary psychology
            (which believes something
            got hardwired into the brain in evolution,
            including moral behavior, which has to have a survival
            utility, or so
            it is often assumed).
            
          
If we look at
            what people do, and not
            just at what they believe, we often find that many people
            struggle to
            do the right thing.   While some find the idea of
            the right
            thing as an aspect of their religious beliefs, many others
            want to
            decide for themselves what is right to do.
             Fundamentalists speak
            of moral relativism, and find evil where their particular
            interpretation of morality is violated (mostly biblical -
            that is in a
            so-called holy book, which as we know was very much edited
            by
            institutions with other agendas).  Even though warned
            about the
            mote and the beam, preachers of absolute biblical moral
            truths
             (e.g. all abortions are murder), still don't get
            it.  
            
          
No practice,
            and all beliefs, is not
            following  Christ.  You follow Christ, you get in
            trouble.
             You join a comfortable club, you get to hate everyone
            that isn't
            in it with you.  Apocalyptic end times eschatology
            isn't Christ
            based.  Its human mistrust of the actual world, and a
            vain
            delusion that only the true believer has it all right.
             The rest
            of us can go to hell, literally.
            
          
So are there
            real Christians out there?
             Of course, and many are in organized Churches.
             There's also
            this other group.   People with a personal ethic,
            that if you
            trace the history of their particular ideals, you'll end up
            with the
            influence of Christ's teachings on Western Civilization.
            
          
What's weird
            is that because the
            institutional Churches made a primacy of belief (instead of
            practice),
            the focus of modern critics has been on the irrationality of
            the ideas
            in the beliefs.   The Churches have leaned far too
            long on
            rigid doctrines, and not having actually practiced the
            teachings of
            Christ, don't have a clue where the real meat is.
              Where's the beef?
            said the lady in the commercial.   In the
            practice folks.   Want to know the real meaning of
            what
            Christ taught - follow the teachings.
            
          
In a sense
            there is a considerable
            difference between a world view or a cosmology
            (thus the arguments between creationists and neo-Darwinian
            evolutionists) and the experiences provided by the practice.   Our ideas and beliefs about the
            fundamental
            questions of reality are one thing, while the religious life (the practices) are quite another.
             Modern
            scientists are right to question (as they did 500 years ago
            when
            natural philosophy first appeared), whether the
            world-pictures espoused
            by the Roman Church (and other similar religious
            institutions) are
            true.  What is the truth about human origins is one
            question.
              How do I be a moral person (should I so choose)
            is a
            different question.
            
          
The truly odd
            thing, however, is that if
            one really practices the teachings a new state of being
            arises.
             In the cultural
            East, this is seen as the pursuit
            of enlightenment.  In the cultural West,
            the following of
            the teachings of Christ will lead to a related state of
            being, but one
            which is more appropriately called: initiation.  The John Gospel, for example, is a
            description of
            a path of initiation - a path leading to Gnosis or direct
            personal
            experience of the Mystery (when we are practicing, that is
            being truly
            moral, our life more and more takes on the following
            qualitative
            characteristics:
            washing the feet, the scourging, the crowing with thorns,
            the carrying
            the cross, the crucifixion, the entombment, and the
            resurrection - that is, the true
            moral life becomes a Path or Way).
            
          
In the midst
            of these apparently
            conflicting views over cosmology and the goals of the
            religious life,
            there are the countless biographies of ordinary people,
            whether they
            are living in the East or the West in the wider cultural
            frames of
            reference.   What does all this mean for them?
             Does
            being a member of a church have anything at all to do with
            the moral
            life of the individual heart?
            
          
Hopefully now
            the reader will appreciate
            that there are many questions, some a bit strange, others
            quite down to
            earth and practical.   This essay (and booklet), the
Natural
            Christian, seeks to shed some
            light
            on these questions.  Hopefully this process will
            enlighten the
            reader as well as initiate them into the deeper aspects of
            the true
            Christian religious mysteries, without leaving behind the
            rational
            nature of the human mind.
            
          
In order to
            proceed carefully, and
            logically, it will be necessary to give some order to the
            themes to be
            elaborated.   This book then takes the course of
            trying (one
            can always fail) to proceed by sticking to knowable facts as
            much as
            possible, well all the while not forgetting that even though
            we may be
            involved in very practical aspects of human psychology, we
            will also
            have living in us fundamental questions due to our
            experience of the
            teachings of natural science.
            
          
This then is
            the basic structure - to
            alternate the subject matter of the chapters or parts.
             We will
            start with psychology, of the sort everyone can appreciate,
            and then
            move to the scientific riddles which so enchant us.
             Close
            personal questions and wider questions of meaning and
            significance,
            will then be elaborated in the different parts, in a kind of
            alternating rhythm.
            
          
To make this
            all a little more concrete,
            consider the following:
            
          
We all know,
            in ourselves, that we have
            something we call: mind.  We think,
            and out
            of our thinking we make decisions.   Scientists
            study this,
            as do psychologists.  So one kind of question is very
            personal and
            concerns our own understanding of our own inner life, or
            mind.
              How do we operate our decision making process?  Not
            just what
            do we think (the content), but how do we think?
              Is there somewhere an operating
            manual for the mind, and how do we make moral decisions with
            our own
            mind and remain free?  That would be the theme of the
            one sequence
            of parts.
            
          
The other
            sequence of parts would concern
            the wider questions.  Where does mind come from?
              What
            is the relationship between consciousness and the physical
            brain?
              Are we only matter, or are we also spirit?
              With
            these many questions in mind, let us begin...
            
          
*********************
            
          
part one
How may we describe the consciousness
of an ordinary human being,
in ordinary terms?
            
          
One of the
            interesting things life has
            taught me is that quite often the simplest matters are the
            most
            important.  Not only that, it is frequently the case
            that the
            simplest matters are subjects about which there is sometimes
            the
            greatest confusion.
            
          
For example,
            there is sleeping and
            waking.  This, it would seem, is all very obvious, but
            hopefully
            as we go forward in this first part, the reader will
            discover that
            these obvious and simple matters, when carefully thought
            about, can be
            remarkably instructive.
            
          
When we are
            awake, that is conscious,
            certain processes go on within our minds.   When
            we sleep,
            these process may or may not cease, but at the very least it
            is clear
            that we are unaware of them.   Certain kinds of
            injuries
            cause unconsciousness.   We can also faint from
            not eating
            right, and then experience momentary unconsciousness.
            
          
So we know
            two quite different states.
             Being awake and being unconscious.  Yes, there
            are dreams,
            but keep in mind that dreams have a number of odd
            characteristics.
              In them we are aware, but of what.
              The world of
            dreams is quite unlike the world we know when we are truly
            awake in the
            normal way.
            
          
When we are
            conscious in a normal way, we
            are conscious of some object. We experience through the senses.   We hear
            sounds, see
            things, smell smells and so forth.  We are also aware
            of inner
            states - things others can't see.  Our thoughts for
            example - no
            one (apparently) sees/knows our thoughts, but us.
            
          
We are also
            aware of our self as a
            subject.   We are ourselves, and then there is the
            world that
            is not us.  So there is not only, when we are
            conscious, that
            which we
            experience, but also that which experiences.  Most of us call that which experiences
            our I.
              We say: I saw the cat scratch the dog.  Or,
            I
            experienced a certain idea.
            
          
We also have
            feelings, which also tend to
            be invisible, but sometimes these are so expressive that
            others can
            read them in our face, or in our posture.   Of
            someone we
            know well, we could notice when they are angry or afraid.
             Other
            times we need to speak of our feelings, for others to know
            of them.
            
          
In certain
            times of developing intimate
            relationships, our anxiety over the possibilities will make
            us tongue
            tied.  We have thoughts and feelings of which we are
            conscious,
            but we can't express them.   Our language is full
            of such
            descriptive phrases as tongue tied.
             If, to
            continue the example, we have to hold in our anger we might
            say: I
            had to bite my tongue.
            
          
We could say
            that we have both an outside
            (which others experience through their
            senses) and an inside which only our I experiences.
             Thus the
            wonderful phrases: you can't tell a book by its cover.  Or, beauty is only skin deep.
             Or, still
            waters run deep.
            
          
Now we all
            know these very simple things,
            don't we.  Our whole social life and a great deal of
            our language
            takes account of these very simple observations.
              Where
            things get interesting is when we try for more detail,
            especially when
            we go for more detail about the experience of our inner
            world by our
            own I.
            
          
Some of this
            is also embedded in our
            language, although occasionally in odd kinds of ways.
             We have,
            for example, the word insight.
             We can even
            describe a person as insightful.
             We also speak
            of some people as bright, or that
            someone had a bright idea.  In
            a cartoon, when a character has a bright idea
            the cartoon has a picture of a light bulb going off above the
            person's head.  Then there is the word enlightened.
            
          
We have
            another word: intuition.  We
            also speak of gut feelings.
             Some people today, who a few decades ago would
            have described themselves as a psychic, will now call
            themselves an intuitive.  In a
            recent New Yorker magazine I just read there
            is an article called: The Eureka
            Hunt:
            why do good
            ideas come to us when they do? (by
            Jonah
            Lehrer).
            
          
Of course we
            have such words as:
            thinking, thoughts, ideas, concepts and so forth.  Our
            inside is
            rich, and somewhat mysterious, for while we have learned
            more and more
            about the brain (see the next chapter), the scientists of
            consciousness
            still have to confess that they do not know just quite how
            the material
            brain produces this assumed subjective state known as
            consciousness,
            much less why we have this sense of the I itself (self-consciousness).
             Oh, there are plenty of theories,
            but real accurate scientific knowledge
            is hard to come by.
            
          
Now lets take
            the mystery all the way out
            there, as far as it can go (perhaps), with this quote from
            Christ in
            the Gospel of Luke: "The kingdom of God doesn't come with
            watching like a
            hawk, and they won't say, Here it is, or There it is,
            because you know
            what? the kingdom of God is inside you."
          The
            Unvarnished
            Gospels, by Andy Gaus. [emphasis
            added]
            
          
Of course,
            among scholars of the Gospels
            (and the Bible in general) the version above is disputed
            (what isn't
            disputed in the Bible?).  Recall, however, from the
            introduction,
            the difference I pointed toward with making a distinction
            between
            systems of belief (which has to include any effort at interpretation), and what is learned by practice.  If we
            read the
            writings of the truly religious, as against the writings of
            the true
            believers, what Christ says in Luke above makes a lot more
            sense.
             Serious practitioners of Christ's teachings have experiences via their inside.
            
          
So that we
            may make one fundamental
            question obvious: Do good ideas come from God?
              That would
            be one reasonable question, although there are many many
            more.
              This being the case, perhaps we should now move
            to a short
            part more explicitly on science, since many readers will be
            somewhat
            familiar with those ideas concerning these kinds of
            questions.
            
          
***********************
            
          
part two
What does Science Believe
 it Knows about
            Consciousness?
            
          
The first
            thing we have to recognize is
            two general assumptions common to scientific thinking in
            this field of
            interest.  They are somewhat related.
            
          
1) The world
            only consists of physical
            matter and all phenomena will be discovered to the based
            upon matter
            (no spirit).
            
          
2) The mind
            and consciousness are
            products of the nervous system in the human being,
            particularly the
            physical brain. (although no one presently has a
            satisfactory
            explanation for how the physical brain produces
            consciousness, or
            self-consciousness).
            
          
A lot of
            behavior is also thought to be
            rooted in our evolutionary past.  The general idea here
            is that
            through processes of natural selection, various behaviors
            become hard
            wired in the brain, or are the result of a similar process
            occurring at
            the genetic level.  Again, in these ideas science is
            consistent,
            with the result that solely physical explanations are
            arrived at for
            how and why we act as we do.
            
          
Some
            theorists even go so far to say that
            self-consciousness (our sense of an I) is an illusion
            produced by
            electro-chemical processes in the brain.  We really
            don't have an
            I according to this view, it is just a convenient illusion
            manufactured
            by the brain for the purpose of ... well, here the
            explanations
            (theories) get a bit fuzzy.
            
          
The article
            mentioned above (the Eureka
            Hunt) describes some current
            research, and
            certain aspects of the method used in that work are quite
            common today.
             Various individuals are wired up to EEGs or put in MIR
            tubes (or
            both at the same time), and then images (or other kinds of
            sense
            experience) are shown to them, while the scientist records
            data on
            which parts of the brain show greater activity when
            stimulated in this
            way.  In the essay in the New Yorker they showed their
            subjects
            puzzles, and tried to map what happened in the brain when
            the subject
            had a "aha!" moment when they solved the puzzle.
             Science has also
            worked with people with various defects and injuries, where
            the brain
            seems not to function normally (in part), and thus this data
            adds to
            the total pictures created.
            
          
Basically all
            modern scientific research
            into consciousness takes this same general path.
             Subjects are
            studied and data accumulated.  The scientist approaches
            the
            subject through his own senses, stimulating the subject and
            measuring
            electrical and other physical changes in the brain.
              There
            are of course also purely psychological
            studies conducted
            often in the form of interviews, but again the scientist
            comes to the experiment with a
            certain formal approach.
            
          
We need to keep in mind that research of this kind is held to certain standards (unless it is part of government black operations or similar secret and probably illegal corporate research); and, we also need to keep in mind that in most scientific disciplines funding is needed. A lot of research on the brain is also done by looking at the chemistry. The basic question here is what happens in the nerve cells at this level. The pharmaceutical industry supports, or itself carries out, a lot of this research, especially with regard to developing medications for what we call: mental illness. Multiple motives drive the nature of this research - it is not always purely done for the purposes of seeking the truth.
The totality
            of the work, legitimate and
            otherwise, is extraordinary.  Detailed maps of the
            brain have been
            created.  Left hemisphere, right hemisphere, spacial
            sense, motor
            skills, language areas, what happens when we think, what
            happens when
            we run - the terminology is almost endless.
            
          
Of course,
            the two assumptions mentioned
            above are the overriding ideas determining everything else.
             The
            very tricky problem of causality (what causes what) is not
            well
            understood.   For example:
            
          
"It is old hat to
            say that the brain is responsible for
            mental activity. Such a claim may annoy the likes of Jerry
            Falwell or
            the Ayatollah, but it is more or less the common
            assumption of
            educated people in the twentieth century. Ever since the
            scientific
            revolution, the guiding view of most scientists has been
            that knowledge
            about the brain, its cells and its chemistry will explain
            mental
            states. However, believing that the brain
            supports
            behavior is the easy part: explaining how is quite another." (Mind Matters: How the Mind and Brain
            interact to
            Create Our Conscious Lives, Michael S. Grazzanica Ph.D. pp
            1, Houghton
            Mifflin, Boston 1988). [Emphasis added]
            
          
and, from the
            same book:
            
          
"A thought can
            change brain chemistry, just as a physical
            event in the brain can change a thought."*
            
          
*[pssst,
            Michael, I think you goofed
            here.   If a thought can change brain chemistry,
            what causes
            the thought if not the I?  Oh, yes well, don't actually
            know that
            do you.  We'll come back to this riddle later.]
            
          
Now this book
            quoted above is 20 years
            old, but these problems remain unresolved today.
              20 more
            years of research into consciousness has not rescued natural
            science
            from the mystery of how the brain produces consciousness and
            self-consciousness.  Of course as Grazzanica admits
            above, for the
            working scientist this causal problem is resolved by a common assumption.  Mind and brain are assumed to be one
            thing.
            
          
Perhaps the
            scientist has not yet asked
            the right question, because his assumption stands in the way
            and blinds
            him.
            
          
There is one
            very very big peculiarity in
            modern consciousness research.  The dominant thinking
            (there are
            tiny exceptions) assumes that the present nature of
            scientific method
            will yield results, and further this thinking acts more or
            less as if
            nobody ever studied consciousness before.
            
          
This last is
            a major paradox.
              Human beings have always wondered about their
            minds, and
            any look at the history of human thought, in the cultural
            West and the
            cultural East, finds not just all kinds of philosophical
            examinations
            of mind in great detail, but also rather elaborate
            disciplines where
            the fundamental truth of mind is sought to be known through
            what are
            essentially experiments (practices that teach).
            
          
There is a
            difference, however.
              What the older mind sciences do is something
            quite radical
            in relationship to modern consciousness studies.  Mind,
            in these
            disciplines, is studied from the inside, not from the outside.
             Those who lead
            the consciousness studies in modern natural science look
            upon another
            person as a subject to be studied.   The more
            ancient (and
            far wiser), and some modern disciplines, require of the
            subject that he
            study himself.
            
          
Know thyself
            said the Greeks.   The Zen Master practices
            meditation daily for hours.   The Carmelite Nun
            prays for
            hours every day.  A serious student of Anthroposophy (a
            modern
            Christ-oriented spiritual discipline) spends years thinking
            about
            thinking.   All study their inside, although the methods differ.
            
          
**************************
            
          
part three
ordinary
            consciousness studies itself
            
          
Don't be
            shocked, we already do this.
             Who is more curious about our self than us?  If
            there is a
            limit, it is a bit natural too.  Most of us forget our
            adolescence
            with all its "who
            am I" questions, ambiguities and
            uncertainties.  We are, as we grow psychologically, inventing our self.  We
            participate, as an I, in the construction of
            our personality.  If we can stand the pain of
            remembering this
            time in our psychological development (adolescence), we can
            become
            aware in detail just exactly how we constructed our
            personality - how
            we created a kind of mask by which we lent to the world one
            image of
            who we are, and kept private a great deal of the rest.
             There is a
            lot that shapes this, of which I'll remind the reader soon,
            but lets
            make this first point as clear as possible.
            
          
The natural
            or instinctive elements of
            psychological growth run out of steam in our 20's.
             This is why so
            many adult men and women seem to remain emotional children.
             To a
            degree this is an artifact of culture.  If our cultural
            experiences don't teach us that we can continue to grow and
            psychologically mature, we end up just letting the
            development of our
            personality become fixed - become a set of habits.
            
          
Now culture
            itself grows and develops.
              What we remember as the 1960's was (among much
            else) an
            explosion of ideas whose essential common center (from
            multiple points
            of view) was that we could continue to grow spiritually
            and/or
            psychologically.   We take up meditation.
              We go
            to encounter groups.   We join AA.   We
            enter
            therapy.  The result is that there is a near endless
            list of
            transformative processes in which people can be engaged
            today.
            
          
Many people
            do more than one.
             Sometimes they'll do several at the same time, and
            other times
            they will do them serially - one at a time, but still be
            always
            involved in personal
            growth.  Those who didn't do
            this, would
            often make fun of it.  Stuck in their own
            post-adolescence stasis
            they talked of the me generation, or new agers, or moral
            relativism, or
            family values or culture wars - demonstrating all kinds of
            ways to
            label the natural curiosity to become something more and
            something new,
            possessed by others, as some kind of defect.
            
          
Many people
            are afraid of change, and
            they seek others of a like taste and relationship to life.
             They
            form different kinds of clubs, and these clubs often resist
            the natural
            movement of culture and of human nature.   Many of
            these
            clubs sought to label themselves as Christian, or found in
            certain
            Christian sects a warm safe home.  At a psychological
            level what
            they really were looking for was something fixed, just as
            their
            personality was fixed.   Some even went culturally
            backwards.
              They tried to bring alive in the present
            something of the
            past.  The ambiguities of the 1960's frightened such
            people, and
            they wanted the family to be just like their romantic idea
            (probably
            taken from television) of family life in the 1950's or
            earlier.
            
          
Once you take
            such a view, which is at
            its roots driven from fear of change, it becomes easy to use
            a text
            like the Bible to provide justification for the need.
              So
            our society itself devolves into factions - those moving
            forward, those
            holding still and those trying to run backwards.
            
          
Underneath
            this are fundamental
            questions, which some are willing to face as they mature,
            and which
            others can only find comfort in relationship to, if they
            hold still and
            get answers from the outside.  They don't want to think
            and decide
            their own beliefs, they want to be told what to believe.
            
          
Who am I?
             What am I?  Why do I
            exist?  What do I believe?   How do I find
            love?
              How do I find comfort?  How do I avoid
            pain?
              How do I be moral?
            
          
These
            questions began for many in
            adolescence as our own thinking woke up.   We
            wanted, we
            hungered, we were uncertain.   It was so painful finding our self in the midst of
            all those hormonal changes and inner
            psychological developments.   Our parents wanted
            one thing
            and our teachers another.  So did our friends.
              Everyone around us had an idea of who we were
            supposed to
            be.  But what about me - what did I want?
            
          
Everyone
            knows today that their High
            School experience seriously sucked.  It sucks even
            worse today,
            since we live within a culture with a lot of aspects which
            are decaying
            and dying.   When I was an adolescent (the
            1950's), the world
            wasn't so sexualized or so full of drug temptations.  I
            have
            raised five children through adolescence now, and it always
            amazes me
            what they have had to face - the older ones with less
            troubles of a
            certain kind, the younger with issues I never could have
            imagined
            possible.  The miracle, however, is that they seem
            equipped to
            handle these experiences.  I would not be able to do
            what they do,
            for they endure a much tougher adolescence (rite of passage
            to
            adulthood).
            
          
Social change
            today is accelerated.
             The structure of society is falling apart.  In
            other places
            in my work I write of this time being the end of Western
            Civilization.
              Whether you buy that or not, I don't think many
            people
            today think we live in simple times.   Who we are
            is affected
            by this social context.  The context pushes more
            questions at us.
             If we reflect on this we can see that there seem to be
            laws in
            operation here.
            
          
My self understanding is
            influenced by my cultural experience.
              One of those simple things, that we know in such
            an obvious
            way, is perhaps far more important a fact then we realize.
             We
            will return to this later.
            
          
*******************************
            
          
part four
Is Science Limited to its
Present Methods of
            Investigation?
            
          
Lets move
            away from the direct study of
            consciousness by science, and take a look at modern physics,
            in
            particular quantum theory and mechanics.   If one
            appreciates
            how basic aspects of science advance, physics is generally
            the leading
            edge.   As a general observation we could say that
            it takes
            sometimes as much as 30 or more years before a discipline,
            such as
            microbiology for example, is able to integrate into its
            fundamental
            ideas what the physicists have already learned. 
             
One of the
            more interesting scientists to
            look at this is the mathematician Roger Penrose.  To
            call him a
            mathematician is a bit lame in a way, but he is quite
            skilled at the
            pure and abstract thinking of a leading mathematician.
              He
            takes these skills and tries to integrate knowledge from
            other
            disciplines.   At the same time he is very open
            minded.
             He is more interested in discovering the truth than he
            is a
            proving a favorite theory can't be touched or changed.
            
          
For example, in his book The Emperor's New Mind he wrote (in 1989):
"It seems clear to
            me that the importance of aesthetic
            criteria applies not only to the instantaneous judgments of
            inspiration, but also to the much more frequent judgments we
            make all
            the time in mathematical (or scientific work) Rigorous
            argument is
            usually the last step! Before that, one has to make many
            guesses, and
            for these, aesthetic convictions are enormously important..."
            
          
and:
            
          
"...I cannot help
            feeling that, with mathematics the case
            for believing in some kind of ethereal, eternal existence,
            at least for
            the more profound mathematical concepts, is a good deal
            stronger..."
            
          
A very open
            mind indeed...
            
          
Following
            this early book, which was
            rather popular, Penrose began to speculate that what goes on
            in the
            brain, if connected to ideas about quantum states of matter,
            might
            begin to explain consciousness.  These were
            controversial themes,
            but lets look a little at quantum theory to see what it says
            about
            substance or matter, for after all the brain is matter and
            the
            assumption of science is that consciousness arises from
            matter.
            
          
What is
            matter to modern physics?
             If you've never run into these ideas, don' worry.
             However,
            they are a bit strange if you are not familiar with them.
             All the
            same we need to dip into the past a little bit, for a lot of
            ideas grow
            out of earlier ideas.
            
          
For example,
            it used to be thought that
            at the fundamental smallest level of matter there was a
            thing.  An
            object.   Very tiny yes, but you could with
            instruments
            perhaps see it.   Some scientists even did (or
            thought they
            did).  But then the idea of fields came into play (Faraday).   You
            know, like the
            magnetic field that organizes a bunch of iron filings.
              There is no tiny thing there, in the field.
              But
            anything that enters the field is affected by it.
            
          
The next idea
            was that when we spoke of a
            particle (like the kinds of particles that are smaller than
            atoms, and
            from which atoms are made) this particle was a result of the
            intersection of various fields.  Where the fields
            intersected,
            this point in space (which was not fixed, but moved)
            resisted being
            penetrated.  So while a rock, for example, seems very
            dense and
            full of what it is made of, in reality it is mostly empty
            space
            punctuated by intersections of fields of force.
              A
            sub-atomic particle began to be more and more conceived of
            as no longer
            a thing occupying space, but as a dynamic (moving and
            changing)
            point center created by intersecting fields of force.
            
          
It gets
            worse.
            
          
Experiments
            with photons (split beam
            experiments and the like) suggested some very odd ideas.
             Indeterminacy theory emerges, and theorists decide you
            can't
            predict anything at this level anymore.   Its all
            probabilities.  (Thus Einstein's comment that God
            doesn't play
            dice with the Universe - he couldn't believe these ideas).
             Not
            only is matter mostly empty space (that is there is no there
            there),
            but even worse, whatever it is, it only exists as a
            potential, as a
            probability.  It might be here, it might be there.
             It
            definitely isn't yet.   Something has to intervene
            before the
            probability collapses into definiteness.  For something
            to
            actually be, and to have a there (mass
            or being-ness and position
          or there-ness) consciousness has to influence
            it.
            
          
Did he really
            write that?!?!?
              Want your mind to start to fray at its edges?
             Google
            "consciousness and quantum mechanics" and start trying to
            read that
            stuff.   Is this a problem?  Not really.
             In my
            view it is better understood as a limit.
            
          
Science has
            followed carefully the
            examination of smaller and smaller conditions of matter
            until matter
            disappeared, first into the interactions of fields of
            mysterious forces, and then
            finally into conditions of indeterminacy.  Of potential.  Of not yet.
             Of a
            constant state of becoming, in which the I or self-consciousness of
            the experimenter was the final contributing factor.
              The fall
            from potential into manifestation only arises when the
            experimenter
            goes looking for either the being-ness (position) or the
            there-ness
            (movement) of an object, which to his mind has none of those
          qualities* until he acts).
            
          
*[Physics, in
            spite of its efforts to
            deal only with data that could be counted and measured, that
            is with
            only quantities (but never qualities),
            has been unable to
            fully abandon qualities (being-ness
            and there-ness).   In spite of
            generations of effort to eliminate the subjectivity of the
            observer as
            well, physics has ended up discovering that this very
            subjectivity is
            essential to maintain its present line of experiments.
             This
            subject we'll take up in more detail later.]
            
          
One thing is
            certain, if you read what
            these physics writers try to say about consciousness.
              They
            don't know much about it.   They mostly live in
            the same
            assumptions as those scientists studying consciousness
            directly from
            the outside - which is that at some point we must figure out
            how to
            show consciousness emerging from the matter (which
            simultaneously
            doesn't become determined without consciousness?).  Did
            you get
            that?
            
          
At a
            fundamental level there is a huge
            circular system of reasoning (a tautology) at the root
            intersections of
            modern quantum physics and theories about how the brain
            produces
            consciousness.   We study the brain, but can't
            figure out how
            it makes consciousness from matter.  We study matter
            and observe
            that it needs consciousness to become determined.  Yet,
            of
            consciousness itself we are very very ignorant.  
            
          
We know
            consciousness directly, but we
            never study what is right before us in our own minds.
             We study it
            indirectly, using others as subjects, but avoid our own
            mind.
              Perhaps there is a reason for that.
            
          
*******************
            
          
part five
the psychology of the moral life
of a natural
            Christian
            
          
A main
            difficulty for those engaging in
            the self study of their own mind is those nasty moral
            questions.
             Right at the beginning of such a study we already know
            the own
            dark within.   That is, if we have what is called:
            a
            conscience (some folks don't appear to have one).
              This fear
            of facing the own shadow is what keeps many from being
            willing to look
            within.
            
          
This is
            partially why Alcoholics
            Anonymous has the forces for true  change it has.
             The Twelve
            Steps help you take that journey of facing the dark inside.
              Hitting bottom is a life experience that tends
            to wake
            people up and confront them with a choice.  Do I take
            my life
            (particularly my inner life) in hand,
            or do I just continue to let it spiral
            out of control, destroying all those I love in its wake.
             Those
            are powerful moral questions, and the process of AA's Twelve
            Steps
            walks you through this minefield in a very healthy way.
            
          
The fact is
            that AA is universally valid
            as a Path, and need not be confined to just people with
            obvious
            addictions and flaws.   Everyone is flawed,
            everyone.  A
            lot of so-called Christians, for example, are addicted
            (selfishly in
            love with and hooked on certain systems of belief, by which
            activity
            many others are harmed).  There could well be a
            recovery group for
            former fake Christians.  Lets look at the Twelve Steps
            a bit and
            see if we can appreciate their deeper nature.
            
          
Twelve Steps,
            twelve Disciples, twelve
            Signs of the Zodiac.  One Sun in the Center, shedding
            light and
            warmth on All.
            
          
From a
            certain point of view, the Twelve
            Steps can be conceived of as three processes, through which
            the soul is
            mastered (its dark and its light integrated - healed and
            made whole).
             These three processes elevate the spirit for the
            mastery of the
            soul.  The self-consciousness (the spirit) becomes awake in
            the
            consciousness (the soul).  What was fallen in the soul
            is
            redeemed, by the forces of the own I.
            
          
The first stage of this total process is surrender.
1. We admitted we were powerless over alcohol -- that our lives had become unmanageable.
2. Came to believe that a Power greater than ourselves could restore us to sanity.
3. Made a decision to turn our will and our lives over to the care of God as we understood Him.
4. Made a
            searching and fearless moral inventory of ourselves.
            
          
The first
            part of surrender is directed
            at our egotistical idea that we can, out of the present
            state of being
            of our own I, rule our life of soul, in particular its
            shadow elements.
              The second part of surrender is to recognize
            that something
            other than our own I can help us.   The third part
            of
            surrender is to choose to include this other-ness consciously as a force within.  The
            fourth part is
            to surrender the I's defenses of its own dark truths about
            itself.
             In a way the 4th Step and the 1st form a circle.
            
          
In the
            surrender phase (and keep in mind
            people don't always get it the first time or the tenth time)
            we circle
            around ourselves, trying to create a true attitude of
            surrender to the
            truth.  Admitted powerlessness, sought help from
            something
            greater, let this something greater have more influence over
            our self
            than our own egotism, and began the work of understanding
            that egotism
            (too much I, not enough Thou) in brutally self-honest
            detail.
            
          
5. Admitted to God, to ourselves, and to another human being the exact nature of our wrongs.
6. Were entirely ready to have God remove all these defects of character.
7. Humbly asked Him to remove our shortcomings.
8. Made a
            list of all persons we had harmed, and became willing to
            make amends to
            them all.
            
          
Having
            learned surrender, we now move
            away from egotism toward the Thou, via the higher nature of
            our I.
              In this process surrender becomes confession and
            contrition.  We include others - we confess to
            ourselves, to
            another and to God as we understand him (maintaining our
            freedom to
            think for ourselves).  We ask for help.  And, we
            get ready to
            face our responsibilities.   This is the central
            process, and
            it takes us away from our self as the egotistic center of
            our life, and
            involves us in community.   Confession and
            contrition makes
            us better social beings.   AA is a social process
            - we don't
            do it alone, but as part of something greater.
            
          
In a certain
            way this gesture of movement
            away from self and toward community is the heart of the
            Twelve Steps.
             It is clearly, to those who actually become able to
            experience
            it, the hardest step of all, and the one most difficult to
            maintain.
              We don't get perfect.   We don't
            recover.
              We continue to have a dark inside, as well as a
            light.
             Yet, to help us maintain (continue one day at a time
            our
            recovery), we have the process of the last four Steps.
            
          
9. Made direct amends to such people wherever possible, except when to do so would injure them or others.
10. Continued to take personal inventory and when we were wrong promptly admitted it.
11. Sought through prayer and meditation to improve our conscious contact with God as we understood Him, praying only for knowledge of His will for us and the power to carry that out.
12. Having
            had a spiritual awakening as the result of these Steps, we
            tried to
            carry this message to others, and to practice these
            principles in all
            our affairs.
            
          
The process
            of the last four Steps is:
            practice leading to service.   We need a daily
            practice, just
            as a monk or nun, or meditating Zen student needs.  One
            day at a
            time, - but to do that we have a form as it were - a Way of Life.
             The beginner in AA is encourage to do 90
            in 90, that is to make 90 meetings in 90 days.  A lot
            of those
            well into their recovery and able to help others go
            everyday.  If
            things get tough, you go more than once a day.
              If things
            get really tough in the dark of the night, you call your
            confessor,
            your sponsor and they will come and sit with you.
            
          
We don't have
            to be alone in our trials.
            
          
We redeem the
            past, and as there is
            always more past as we walk into our future, and as we are
            in recovery
            and not recovered, we will continue to screw up.
              We never
            stop making amends, we just get used to being occasionally
            idiotic
            (making mistakes and missteps) and learn how to deal with
            it.
            
          
So, three
            processes.  Surrender.  Confession and
            Contrition
            (social acts as part of a community).
             Practice
            and Service.  If you re-read
            the steps you will see that 4 and
            5 together meditate between those two processes, while 8 and
            9 also
            mediate between those two processes.
            
          
Everyone has
            a Way, everyone.
              We think of it as our routine.  A prisoner
            has a
            routine as does his jailer.  The wonderful movie Groundhog
            Day is a beautiful modern fable of
            what can
            be done if we take the right attitude to the Day.
              This
            movie understands that we do wake up everyday the same
            person, and that
            there is no change or development (growth past the end of
            adolescence)
            unless we use each given Day to move, one step at a time,
            forward on our Way.
            
          
part six
the relationship of Natural Science
to Thinking
            
          
Recall Grazzanica above:
"A thought can
            change brain chemistry, just as a physical
            event in the brain can change a thought."
            
          
We now need to explore more carefully the paradox observed here by a leading neurophysiologist, as that might illuminate the problem of causality in our thinking.
The scientist
            of consciousness studies
            the brain by stimulating this physical organ in another
            human being
            through the vehicle of the senses (although sometimes
            directly by
            electrical stimulation of parts of the brain - a course of
            action I
            find a bit reprehensible).  This is done in part
            because of the
            idea the scientist has about his own subjectivity.
             Scientific
            method, with its experiments, seeks to overcome human
            subjectivity by
            designing experiments that can be repeated and requiring
            that all
            conclusions be open to argument and logical reasoning by
            peers in the
            scientific community.  In a sense, the scientist
            surrenders his
            own subjectivity to the community activity of peer review,
            and through
            this process hopes to discover objective truths.
            
          
The
            scientist's relationship to this
            method is his belief system.  He believes he will more
            and more
            approximate the truth (he confesses a limit to his
            knowledge, when
            forced to so confess).
            
          
The
            scientists in the Eureka experiments noted previously, stimulates the
            puzzle
            solving ability of the brain (his assumption) and tries to
            measure in
            which part of the brain there is increased measurable
            activity when the
            puzzle is solved.  The scientist's subjectivity asks
            something of
            the subjectivity of the experimental subject.  He
            says (essentially): I am going
            to give you
            a puzzle to solve, and then I am going
            to measure what
            happens in your brain when you solve it.
            
          
Notice the pronouns above, which are essential in order to communicate his ideas about his experiment to the ego of the subject. The scientist makes a kind of appeal, from his I to the Thou of the subject: please cooperate with my experiment by helping me, through your trying your hardest to solve this puzzle. Even a scientist convinced (theoretically) that there is no self-consciousness never actually uses language in such a way, or probably even thinks in such a way. Ask yourself this: can he even think about his own brain or your brain, without a subjective pronoun? Nobody can do this. Nobody can form a thought that does not contain the subjective pronouns in some variation of I and Thou.
The activity
            of mind cannot think
            discursively (more in a minute) and at the same time deny
            its own
            subjective nature.  There is no social speech without
            pronouns,
            all of which parts of speech are rooted in the commonly
            shared obvious
            truth of the existence of self-consciousness.
            
          
In a way it
            is impossible for the
            self-consciousness of any thinker to deny that
            self-consciousness,
            because once we become awake to this during our
            psychological
            development, the existence of an independent self as against
            a world of
            others is, as the Founders of the American Experiment said:
          self
            evident.  "We hold these truths to be self
            evident", they said.
            
          
At the same
            time, and during the same
            period of history that gave birth to the American
            Experiment, natural
            scientists recognized the existence of flaws in the
            subjectivity of the
            human being, including themselves.  All the arguments
            in which
            they engaged are silly unless they are based on the
            recognition of the limits of human
            thinking in relationship to the discovery of
            the truth.  Out of this emerges scientific method, so
            that at
            least there is a community of discipline (surrender,
            community and
            practice) among seekers of the truth (scientists).
            
          
As we have
            seen so far, however,
            consciousness and self-consciousness retain a degree of
            mystery, both
            for the researcher on brain function and processes, and on
            the
            researcher into the real nature of matter (of which the
            brain is
            supposedly composed).   Grazzanica above
            recognized the
            fundamental paradox, for if the researcher asks of his
            subject that he
            undertake certain kinds of inner activity, this thinking activity will
            produces measurable effects to the instruments
            observing the brain.  Different kinds of thoughts give
            rise to
            effects in different parts of the brain.  Memory in one
            place,
            language in another, puzzle solving in a third and so on.
            
          
The
            subjectivity of the research subject
            is often a necessary and needed participant in the
            experiment.  It
            is the subjectivity of the research subject that lets
            Grazzanica write:
            "A
            thought can
            change brain chemistry, just as a physical event in the
            brain can
            change a thought."
            
          
In both this
            realm and the realm of
            quantum experiments, the subjectivity - the self-consciousness -
            of someone present (the experimenter in
            physics and the experimental subject in brain studies) is an
            essential
            part.  Also in both case thinking activity plays a role.
             The experimenter must choose
            to seek either
            knowledge of mass or position, thus bringing about by his
            intervention
            in the experimental process, the collapse of potential into
            actuality.
              While in the other case, the experimental
            subject must choose some
            inner activity (such as to solve a puzzle) in order
            for the observer to have something to measure.
            
          
As we
            observed previously, the thinking
            subject, even if they believe there is no
            self-consciousness, can't
            actually engage in discursive thinking (the inner dialog we
            all
            recognize as the first stage of conscious thought) without
            using
            pronouns, which by their very nature have to be based in a
            conception
            of the subjectivity of I and Thou.  Some scientific
            thinkers as
            noted above, will put forward their view that the I is an
            illusion of
            the matter based material processes in the brain, while at
            the same
            time be incapable of using language (either in thought or in
            speech and
            writing) that is able to divorce itself from personal
            pronouns.
            
          
In fact, by
            asserting the ability of the
            brain to create an illusion of self-consciousness (a
            fundamental
            operation of the brain, apparently), they open all thought
            into
            question, including their own.  If self-consciousness
            is an
            illusion, could not everything the scientist thinks be an
            illusion?
            
          
Perhaps there
            is here not an illusion, be
            a delusion.  In the face of illusion we are perhaps
            more passive,
            but a delusion is more actively created.  Why do some
            scientists
            want to get ride of the self-evident fact of
            self-consciousness?
             Why does it trouble them?  Is it perhaps that
            they
            instinctively recognize that self-consciousness (the
            presence of a real
            subjectivity within the human being), suggests that
            something other
            than matter is involved?
            
          
Recall once
            more Grazzanica's remarks: "A thought can change brain
            chemistry, just as a physical event in the brain can change
            a thought."
            
          
What causes
            the thought that changes the
            brain chemistry?  In this problem of causality, which
            is
            everywhere present in many studies of brain activity (the
            subject has
            to be a participating actor), the paradox of imagining that
            there is
            only matter and no spirit more and more manifests itself.
              The thinking of the scientist of the brain is
            running into
            the same problem (but from a different direction) that the
            quantum
            physicist did.  The brain researcher can't figure out
            how matter
            produces consciousness, and since a large part of his
            experimental
            process includes him having to ask a subject for participating
            mental activity (puzzle solving
            for example), the researcher confronts
            his own inconsistency.  If it is only matter that makes
            a human
            being, why does he need to require its cooperation?
             Would you ask
            a rock to move and expect it to do so?  A plant?
             Animals can
            be trained (domesticated), but everyone knows the difference
            between
            cats and dogs.  The cat is indifferent to our commands,
            unless its
            own instinctive self interest is involved.  The dog
            lives for our
            attention, and readily obeys (when so trained).
              We have the
            wonderful expression noting how much some human beings are
            like cats.
             We say:  To get this group of people to cooperate is
            like trying
            to herd cats.
            
          
            part seven
the relationship of the natural
Christian to
            thinking
            
          
When we try
            to practice Our Way each Day
            in Life, we run into moral and ethical dilemmas more or less
            constantly.   Some are very ordinary, such as if
            we are given
            too much change at the store do we return the overpayment?
             Some
            are potentially catastrophic, such as do I start an affair
            with my best
            friends spouse. 
             
Further, we
            know we are inconsistent.
             In one mood we are more generous and naturally ethical
            and more;
            and, in another mood we are downright dangerous and
            propelled toward
            risks almost without any control of our emotions at all by
            our I.
             That inner dialog I have called discursive thinking
            (we talk
            inside our own minds to ourselves - that is our
            self-consciousness
            speaks into our consciousness) is often in forced flight,
            and seldom
            calm and collected.  Life-demands propel us through the
            day: wake
            to the alarm, feed the children and get them to school, go
            to the job,
            hassle with the boss, come home, argue with the spouse and
            on and on
            and on.
            
          
So much seems
            out of our control,
            especially in the present times of seemingly more and more
            social chaos
            world-wide.  It really is not surprising that some
            groups just
            want to check out of the world, and form communities of zero
            change or
            even try to enliven past social forms and realities.
             Other
            individuals can't find a club, unless it is the club of
            checking out
            into one kind of addiction or another.  For some it is
            shopping,
            for others overwork.   Even madness beckons to a
            few - they
            hide inside their own minds and become completely
            disconnected from
            social reality.
            
          
At the same
            time, everyone thinks or has
            thoughts.  Sometimes thoughts are intrusive and even
            illusory.
              The whole field of mental health, and as well
            criminal
            justice, deals with social and individual problems that
            manifest out of
            something whose causal reality is within the own inside -
            the
            consciousness we see that others do not.
            
          
We worry.
             We get depressed.
             We get high, we use downers.  We zone out on TV.
             We
            escape into books or sex.
            
          
Yet, for most
            of us, there are a few
            simple facts (remember those I talked about in the very
            beginning of
            this little book) worthy of noting.  Our thoughts have
            a content,
            which we sometimes call ideas or concepts or mental pictures
            or
            whatever.  The activity of the self-consciousness
            produces a
            mental or conceptual product via the discursive thinking.
             We know
            these are our thoughts, and we often guard them quite
            carefully.
             They are very personal, and rare is the other - the
            Thou - with
            whom we will share.
            
          
Oh, we do
            have all kinds of glib chatter.
             Hello,
            how
            are you, how's your sister and so forth.
              Most of the time we don't expect the truth, and
            often are
            shocked if we get it.  Actually screw you and I'm going crazy
            and I just killed
            my sister.  
            
          
A lot of the
            content is culturally
            produced.   We suckle it in in childhood simply by
            learning
            our native language.   We are raised in families
            and churches
            and schools, all of which try to forge our beliefs and the
            content of
            our thoughts.  As noted previously, in pre-adolescence
            and
            adolescence proper we start to free our thoughts from these
            influences,
            and sometimes can't do this until we leave home, and move
            far far away.
             Our self-consciousness wants freedom in this most
            intimate aspect
            of our consciousness - our thoughts.  Don't we say: I'm entitled to my
            opinion!
            
          
At the same
            time, even as adults our
            social environment often requires conformance of thoughts.
             The
            work place, in spite of our being in a so-called country
            with free
            speech, is not a place we can afford to speak freely.
              Remember above where we noted the phrase: I had to bite my
            tongue.  Spontaneous speech,
            while often a true
            representation of our thoughts and feelings, just as often
            can get us
            in a lot of trouble.
            
          
What happens
            when our boss (or a close
            relative) requires of us an action we know (to our own view
            of things)
            is not ethical or moral?
            
          
Now the point
            of this is not so much that
            these obvious things go on all the time, but rather that
            they go on all
            the time for all of us.  Each individual human being,
            as a
            thinker, is born into a world of concepts and values, from
            which they
            may or may not emerge into some kind of personal or
            ethical/moral
            freedom.   What is especially odd, is how often we
            forget
            that all of us have values, and ethical and moral rules that
            are
            different.
            
          
We easily
            become angered when someone
            doesn't act like we would act.  We know what is right
            to do, don't
            we?   Shouldn't they know this too?
            
          
We normally
            don't think carefully about
            this particular fact, which is so important (see my little
            story Bicycles in
            the appendix) to understanding the world in which we
            live.  When we do, however, (and many do) there is a
            shift in our
            relationship to other people.  Usually we call this:
            tolerance.
              We accept that others necessarily think
            differently, and in
            our own thinking we find a way to live with this when we
            can.
            
          
Sam Harris's
            book The End of
            Faith (noted at the beginning)
            makes a big
            deal of this.   He finds the tolerance of moderate
            Christians
            of the irrationality of so-called extremist Christians, a
            worse moral
            failure than the irrationality he describes.  He
            doesn't tolerate
            this, so why should they?
            
          
Mr. Harris,
            who is a natural scientist of
            a sort, doesn't yet know what to do with human social facts
            he doesn't
            like.  He seems to believe that there are purely
            rational ethical
            principles (in this he is not alone) that are so soundly
            reasoned that
            everyone ought to agree.  His difficulty is one typical
            to us all,
            and which we noted above on our way to looking at the Twelve
            Steps.
            
          
We all have a
            dark inside, all of us.
             If you pretend you don't, you'll make false
            assumptions, often
            hypocritical ones.  If Our Way doesn't include some
            confession of
            the own dark inside, as well as the light, we will make
            missteps along
            the Way.  Christ in the Sermon on the Mount called it
            the problem
            of the Mote and the Beam, and while a lot of these teachings
            are
            present everywhere as ideas in Western Civilization, not all
            of them
            are practiced.   Remember: surrender, confession
            and
            contrition in community and practice.
            
          
At the least,
            we should recognize that
            while many of us are natural Christians, because we
            have taken in certain fundamental values that are sourced
            out of
            Christ's parables and teachings, we are not finished yet.
             Life
            growth can stop or can go on, and this too is a moral or
            ethical choice
            that belongs to our own freedom to decide.
            
          
There is a
            kind of a trick here, or
            perhaps a puzzle that needs to be perceived and then worked
            with.
              This puzzle is with our own thinking.  
            
          
We think
            instinctively.   That
            is we don't generally think about thinking, or study our
            internal life
            as a puzzle, we just do it.   We swim in the sea
            of our mind,
            not paying much attention at all to the content, mostly
            because life
            makes so many demands we just don't have time to be
            reflective or
            introspective.  
            
          
That a lot of
            people don't think the same
            thoughts, we already know.  That is pretty obvious.
             What is
            less obvious (except perhaps to professional educators or
            others who
            work with people intimately) is that not only is the content clearly different, but how
            people think is sometimes also radically different.
              There
            are a lot of different ways in which this has been observed,
            depending
            on the context and the discipline making the observations.
            
          
It is most
            obvious to those teachers in
            the field of special education, however.   The
            ADHD student,
            or the dyslexic student or the autistic student or the
            aspergers
            student - all these children have a different how
            of thinking.  Artists tend to think differently as
            well.  A
            couple of examples: the emotional relationship to color is
            for one most
            important, while for another it will be the tactile
            relationship - how
            their medium of art feels to the sense of touch.
            
          
A lot of
            people end up in jobs where
            their naturally different how of
            thinking finds a place.
             A highly disciplined abstract thinker (who lives only
            in
            conceptions, and hardly in their senses at all) might become
            a
            mathematician.   Someone who thinks with their
            limbs might
            become a dancer.  Someone who thinks with their hands
            might become
            a carpenter, or other kind of craftsman.
            
          
If you walk
            through your own life, asking
            this question: what
            ways
            or way does this person think and feel that are different
            from my
            own? - a whole other world within
            the social
            environment will light up before your own thinking.  In
            a way, you
            are letting what you can observe about their outside (not just how they look but how they act and
            in what
            kind of environment have they come to live), show you a way
            to see
            deeper into their inside.  With
            this kind of question (and its variations)
            you will begin to understand (in practice) how to come awake
            to the
            Mote and the Beam.  It is our semi-conscious reaction to the outside that comes from the own Beam, while our
            self-conscious seeking
            after
            the inside takes us much nearer
            the Mote.
            
          
part eight
culmination and integration:
becoming scientific about our own
consciousness and
            self-consciousness
            
          
Lets first
            look at something we passed by
            above, namely our recognition that our life pushes our consciousness and self-consciousness all
            the time.
             Life makes demands.  Life is suffering is the
            first Noble
            Truth of the Buddha.  People get martyred on a cross of
            truth all
            the time, sometimes not so obviously, but all the same, they
            get fired
            from jobs and/or are left by a spouse.
            
          
The wise
            cliche is that god never gives us more than
            we can handle, but a lot of people
            who check
            out certainly don't seem to be handling life at all.
            
          
Wasn't there
            a Country and Western song
            about giving someone an attitude adjustment?  A
            lot of us recognize the importance of attitude.  When we form our personality we take on
            a costume
            of attitude
          (or what an acquaintance of mine
            Catherine MacCoun, in
            her book called On
            Becoming an Alchemist called style.
             Everyone
            has a style or attitude (a personality), that originates
            in the self-consciousness (which some call our: immortal
            spirit).
            
          
These are all
            individual and unique in
            their formation, but often imitative in the presentation.
             Right
            from the start our personal biography pushes at us, and as
            we grow we
            create this response: the attitude or style we present to
            the world.
             We don't expose all, except in very significant
            personal
            relationships, because we are taught by life that such
            exposure often
            leads to pain (we get hurt). 
            
            
          
Natural
            Science hardly talks at all about
            this.  Hard to quantify a hurt, or a style or an
            attitude.  When Natural
            Science did
            approach this it first did so in the soft sciences (as
            against the hard
            sciences such as physics or chemistry), such as psychology
            or history
            or sociology.  In recent years such disciplines as
            evolutionary
            psychology have tried to imagine that they can think
            reasonably to the
            roots of human behavior, inner and outer, by supposing some
            kind of
            adaptive mechanism, sometimes getting all the way into the
            DNA.
             The brain and the genetic code adapt
            to evolutionary pressures (the pushes of life).  A lot of
            work wants to compare us to the higher mammals, and
            certainly we have
            the idea of the human
            animal.
            
          
That last
            phrase, while common in our
            language, is a kind of very subtle  oxymoron (a figure
            of speech
            that combines into a more or less contradictory set of
            terms).
             What's the point of the word human in that phrase: human animal?   We often use the terms quite
            separately and
            everyone understands in those uses the distinction.  We
            also have
            the variation: humane.  Would
            we ever call an animal humane and
            have such a sentence mean anything?
            
          
Animals, for
            example, aren't moral.
             They are instinctive.  They don't create art or
            language.
             We can project on them human qualities (and often do
            this to our
            pets), but no one is every going to call a tiger in the wild
          humane.  The confusion between the human and the
            animal is
            just a result of very sloppy thinking.
            
          
Now human
            beings can forget their
            humanity.  We even have a phrase recognizing this: man's inhumanity to
            man.  Or, he was such an
            animal.  In
            the latter case, the term animal is more of a metaphor than
            it is a
            rational judgment.  But Natural Science seems to be
            committed to
            this idea, and finds rationale for it in such well know
            facts that the
            difference in the nature of the DNA between a higher order
            mammal and a
            man is slight.
            
          
Remember,
            however, that this train of
            thought is completely based on the assumption that only the physical is real.
             Hopefully, in the
            above parts, we have somewhat deconstructed this idea in our
            examination of consciousness and self-consciousness.
             This problem
            then leads us to something that is a kind of socially sloppy
            disagreement: Intelligence Design vs. Random Evolutionary
            Processes.
             I say sloppy, because most of those involved in these
            arguments
            haven't bothered to look at the history of the development
            of science.
              In that history this issue was originally
            everywhere, and
            it has never gone away.  Its just gotten buried under
            more and
            more assumptions as time went on, and as Natural Science
            seemed more
            and more to occupy an intellectual territory that was
            increasingly
            abandoned by orthodox religions, as they lost themselves in
            the vanity
            of their belief systems, at the expense of the actual
            practice of their
            teachings.
            
          
Another
            acquaintance of mine, Don Cruse,
            writes about the development of ideas that have led to the
            conceptions
            of Darwinian Evolution: random processes and so forth.
             He has a
            web site and a book: Evolution
            and the New Gnosis: anti-establishment essays on
            knowledge, science, religion
            and causal logic.  On the web
            there is a
            wonderful essay Dogma and
            Doubt by Ronald Brady
            [http://www.natureinstitute.org/txt/rb/dogma/dogmadoubt.htm]
            that
            thoroughly unzips the basis of evolutionary biology as a
            rational
            system of thought.
            
          
Cruse puts
            the whole thing quite simply.
             For long time in the history of science, the
            scientists used
            metaphorical language to communicate their understanding,
            such: as mechanism.
             Nature was a randomly created mechanism.  The problem, says Cruse, is that that
            word, mechanism, means only one thing, something created.
             Human
            beings make mechanisms, and to
            export, from our understanding of the creative
            activity by which a clock is made, to nature the idea that
            nature is a mechanism is to
            define it as designed and created.  He
            actually challenges them, in his book and in letters to
            scientists, to
            forgo (if they can) the use of such metaphors to describe
            what they
            observe.  Create, he insists, a language that isn't
            based on an
            analogy to human creativity, but which truly describes
            evolution as a
            random accidental process.   They can't do it.
            
          
Whenever they
            stop the process of
            analysis to take up the task of synthesis (making a whole of
            the data
            or parts discovered in experiments), they always use
            metaphors rooted
            in one way or another in human intentionality.  The hand
            of natural selection.  Even the term selection involves a meaning of human intentionality.
             A
            truly random process can't select
            anything.  It
            doesn't - it can't - make choices.
            
          
Hopefully the
            reader will now see that
            Science has reached limits.  It has very definite views
            (assumptions and ideas), but in the brain biology (the study
            of
            consciousness) and in quantum physics (the question of what
            actually is
            matter), and even in evolutionary theory, some element of
            human
            intention - participation - can't be gotten rid of.  If
            then,
            self-consciousness is spirit - the I is spirit, and
            consciousness is
            soul, then the need to use the idea of some kind of
            intention in
            explaining the facts of evolutionary theory leads only to
            one place: a
            Divine Mystery.  Moreover, the story of Christ's
            teachings in the
            Gospels, when practiced, lead to the same place.
            
          
If one goes
            to what is described in other
            essays of mine (and in books), and studies there either
            Anthroposophy
            or Goethean Science, then it is clear that New Revelation
            was poured
            over humanity in the 20th Century.  How?  Why?
             Good
            questions, not all of which can be answered here.
            
          
part nine
arguments with God;
a personal view,
            offered
            
          
Among the
            ideas that reality teaches is
            that the human being is being born more and more into a
            co-creative
            role with the Divine Mystery.   In fact, something
            of the
            Divine Mystery itself lives in the ego or I of the human
            being, and to
            be co-creative, as Owen Barfield suggested in his book Saving
            the
            Appearances: a study in idolatry,
            is to
            engage in final
            participation.  In Ages Past
            the human
            being was more passive and less free (original
            participation).  Now we are
            more free and more potentially
            active.  This, to my experience, has brought certain
            consequences.
            
          
One of these
            is quite odd, and I was
            surprised to discover this mood of soul.  The more I
            understood
            the design of the creation (at least this present part - see
            my book the Way of
            the Fool), and even more and more
            appreciated
            it, the more certain aspects of it bothered me.  These
            next
            paragraphs then come from such a mood.   I start
            by
            recognizing my antipathy towards certain elements of the
            what some
            might call: Gods Design.  In effect I recognize that
            Lucifer was
            not entirely wrong to go through a period of rebellion, and
            I have
            begun to think that part of developing fully the Divine
            Mystery of the
            own I is to (on occasion and quite deliberately) approach
            our
            observations of the design with a critical faculty.
            
          
We are, after
            all, quite intimately
            involved in this situation.  To just sort of roll over
            like a good
            dog and always love everything the Master does and did, is
            to loose
            something that is part of being human.   Like a
            child
            becoming truly free and responsible, I am finding that part
            of the
            separation, that has to precede the choice and pursuit of
            reintegration, must include taking the attitude of whether
            we find
            everything just perfect.  
            
          
Some urge
            upon us the idea that the Gods
            make no errors, and this is becoming more and more to me one
            of those
            truths that paradoxically can be seen from a totally
            different
            direction to be false.  In point of fact, a fair
            reading of Rudolf
            Steiner's researches into the supersensible worlds will come
            upon many
            comments where it is clear that the communities of spiritual
            beings
            that have led the way so far were not in agreement on all
            aspects of
            the Creation.
            
          
We could actually say that our critical examination of the design is quite necessary if we are to ultimately become responsible for many of its future aspects. In the light of this I want to share an odd thought that has come to me many times now, and which I confess I find to be more and more true. Let us call this: the mobius strip incarnation idea.
First call to
            mind what a mobius strip
            is.  If I have a belt-like form, and make it into a
            circle by
            joining the two ends, I have two surfaces and two edges that
            don't
            exactly connect.  If before I join the two ends
            together, I give a
            half twist to the form, I end up with one continuous surface
            and one
            continuous edge.   If I make the form
            geometrically perfect,
            by having the edge be without measure - that is it is zero
            in
            thickness, I can still have a geometric form that is
            plane-like, and
            circular, while at the same time endless - that is without
            two sides.
            
          
Now lets
            apply this idea to the Creation,
            to repeated earth lives, to reincarnation, and to what
            appears to be
            the separation from God which ancient ideas of the cultural
            East often
            considered to be an illusion.  Some readers will have
            noticed the
            goal of ego-lessness, which is urged by teachers from the
            cultural
            East.   They say things like there is no ego,
            there
            is no I, there is no am.
              In the cultural
            West we have the opposite idea (in a way).  Here in the
            West we
            say there is an ego, the I-am is what God named Himself in
            the ancient
            texts, and that in that the individual human being has an I,
            another
            name for it would be: immortal spirit.
            
          
In different
            words: we all come from the
            same Source and to that Source we will return.
              With the
            Mobius Strip Incarnation Idea, I mean to suggest that the
            truth is that
            both East and West see the same reality from different (and
            necessary
            directions) and that for developmental purposes the idea of
            each of us
            having a separate ego is important for some purposes and not
            so
            important for others.  I mean to suggest here that
            there is just
            One Ego, and as it enters Time and Space (the Creation) it
            separates
            into distinct parts in order to learn.   And, that
            if we
            followed each part in Time we would
            find that like the Mobius Strip there
            is only one continuous surface.
            
          
I am you.
             You are me.
              We are Christ and the Buddha and the Holy
            Mother.  But
            in Time and Space we are sequential, like the Mobius Strip.
              We are to live all these apparently separate
            points of view
            in Time and Space in order to become at the end of Time and
            Space, when on the other side of the Last Judgment we all
            unite in
            Eternity - in timelessness and spacelessness, something that
            only
            arises because of this becoming and
            that was
            impossible before the Creation.  Through this process
            of
            sequential becomings, the Father Principle and the Mother
            Principle
            will not only have become something they were not before,
            but they will
            also have lived all the lives, of all the parts, from the
            human part to
            the dog part to the tree part to the atom part to the gluon
            part and on
            and on and on.
            
          
Thus Christ
            says: Whatsoever
            ye do to the least
            of these my brethren, ye do so also unto me.
            
          
In the
            meantime, in order to fully
            separate from the Divine Mystery (from a human perspective),
            arguing
            with God about the design is a natural and necessary act.
             This
            necessary spiritually adolescent attitude is in fact
            everywhere already
            (what after all is scientific materialism and atheism).
              This has often led at various times to so much
            fear in
            certain egos, egos that imagined themselves as superior
            religious and
            moral authorities, that they murdered and tortured heretics
            (non-believers in their doctrines).  Sam Harris, and
            those of like
            mind, are right to see such an attitude as the height of
            irrationality.
             These new atheists, however, just don't get it that
            that guy over
            there that is making (to them) so much trouble has a quite
            valid
            aspects of his point of view and an equally valid state of
            being.
             (Love
            God
            with all your heart and all your mind and all your spirit, and
            love
            your neighbor as yourself.)
             Getting the picture yet?
            
          
"I am he as you are
            he as you are me and we are all
            together.", sang the Beatles in I
            am the
            Walrus (Lennon/McCartney - Lennon,
            according
            to Wikipedia got the idea while on a acid trip).
            
          
But who is
            this I that is we?  Our
            discovery of this I goes through it, that is through
            individuality.
             Developing our I fully is how we come to any deep
            spiritual
            realization.   The Narrow Gate.  Where
            people, who want
            to put down new age and other religious ideas outside their
            own limited
            vision Christian beliefs get confused, is where they think
            you arrive
            at the goal by being saved.  And then, by saving others
            by
            teaching them to give themselves to God.  Not a bad
            idea, were
            they just the opening bars of the song of development.
             Thing is
            most fake Christians stop there.   They cherry
            pick the
            Gospels for what serves their own ideology, and either feel
            the rest is
            superfluous, or too hard.
            
          
Beliefs are
            assumed superior to practice
            (not by works alone).  This would make sense if all
            fake
            Christians had the same beliefs, but the very fact of their
            constant
            bickering over these matters, sometimes leading to horrible
            wars and
            other crimes, pretty much ruins such an idea as anything
            reasonable at
            all.  But the idea of not by works alone also doesn't
            say being
            saved alone.  Belief, in the form of true Faith (trust)
            belongs
            together with practice.   Ora et labora is the Latin for prayer and labor.  Prayer is the main practice of Faith,
            and
            meditation in action the main faith of Practice.
              Meditation
            in action is another way of saying prayer in action, or
            acting from the
            center of our heart, or acting out of moral grace.  It
            is my
            prayerfulness (meditative inner attitude) that enables me to
            know the
            Good, and to act on that knowledge.
            
          
But this is a
            bit more complicated and
            has to be read elsewhere: The
            Meaning of Earth Existence in the Age of the Consciousness
            Soul; and, In
            Joyous
            Contemplation of the Soul Art and Music of Discipleship.
            
          
In this essay (booklet) I just wanted to walk the reader through some basic questions and ideas, as a help to prepare them for discovering their Own Way.
Blessings and good luck.
            addendum
            
          
           BICYCLES
            
          
                       - a Children's
            Christmas
            Story, which is also for Adults -
            
          
                     This
            story is
            dedicated to Gabriella, Catherine Rose, Ross Gregory, and
            Adam, who
            were on my mind Christmas Eve, 1996, as their fathers (of
            which I must
            confess I was one) were absent from home for the Season. It
            was written
            the following Christmas Morning.
            
          
*
            
          
              There once was a girl, who
            found herself weeping in the dark, alone in her room.
            
          
This is nothing unusual. Many people, not just children, can be found weeping, alone with their pain in the dark of the night.
                       But
there
            was a difference. Although it was not a difference as
            infrequent
            as we might imagine.
            
          
                       And
the
            difference was this. While she was weeping an Angel
            appeared,
            sitting quietly at the end of her bed.
            
          
It was quite a while before the girl noticed the Angel. Yet, this did not bother the Angel, who had been, if we do not mind, created out of patience and joy.
                       After
a
            time the girl stopped weeping, and the two simply looked at
            each
            other for a while.
            
          
                       Finally
the
Angel
            reached out and touched the girl on the shoulder, and asked:
            "What is troubling you child?".
            
          
Now it is true that the Angel already knew the answer to this question, but the Angel also knew that the girl needed to talk about her grief.
                       This
was
            the girl's answer.
            
          
                       "It
is
            Christmas Eve." she said, "My father and mother have
            quarreled and
            my father is not here. I don't even know when, or if, he is
            coming
            home."
            
          
At this the girl, who was at that very awkward age between being a child and being a young woman, began to weep again, even more deeply then before.
                       After
a
            while she stopped, looked at the Angel and asked: "Why?"
            and, then
            began weeping some more.
            
          
                       Now
you
            may wonder why the girl wasn't troubled or confused by
            someone
            being in her room at night. The fact is that when you meet
            an Angel
            there is no question about what is happening. No doubt, no
            confusion.
            Angels aren't like anything else except Angels.
            
          
                       This
is
            how the Angel answered the girl.
            
          
                       "Are
you
            ever bad?" asked the Angel.
            
          
                       "Yes",
she
said,
            a bit hesitantly.
            
          
                       "Are
you
            ever bad on purpose, knowing you are being bad?"
            
          
                       "Yes",
she
said,
            almost whispering now.
            
          
                       "Are
you
            ever bad by accident, not having thought about what might
            happen?"
            
          
                       "Yes",
she
said,
            a little more confident.
            
          
                       "Do
bad
            things ever sometimes happen even though you were trying as
            hard as
            possible to do something good?"
            
          
                       "Yes",
she
said,
            back to herself finally.
            
          
                       Then
they
            sat together for a while. She was thinking and the Angel
            just was.
            
          
                       "O.K.",
she
eventually
            said. "Mother and father aren't trying to hurt me, and I
            didn't do something wrong."
            
          
                       "Right",
said
the
            Angel.
            
          
                       "But",
she
said,
            having just reinvented philosophy, "Why is the world such a
            terrible place?"
            
          
                       After
a
            very long pause the Angel said, "It's because of the
            bicycles."
            
          
                       Now
this
            was said with a straight face, as much as an Angel can be
            said to
            have a straight face, their normal countenance being filled
            with
            patient joy.
            
          
                       Even
so,
            the girl's dark mood broke and she laughed, and then caught
            in this
            odd feeling she tried to stop and ended up almost falling
            out of bed
            because she was giggling so much.
            
          
Again there was a passage of time, so that the girl could ask her next question without breaking up. It actually took several attempts before she could get the question out.
                       "What
do
            you mean by "it's the bicycles"?" she said, pulling up the
            hem of
            her nightgown, as much to distract herself as to dry the
            tears of both
            suffering and mirth.
            
          
                       "Well",
said
the
            Angel, "As you have guessed the bicycles are invisible,
            being
            made out of ideas and dreams, hope and despair, all stuck
            together with
            bits of conscience and just plain stubbornness.
            
          
                       "Everyday
people
wake
            up and ride around on their invisible bicycles, forgetting
            the bicycles are there and then because they have forgotten
            them,
            people just keep banging into each other.
            
          
                       "Soon
all
            the bicycles are in great disrepair. Some with flat tires,
            some
            with crooked wheels, and some without even handlebars to
            steer by.
            
          
                       "It
takes
            a great deal of courage for people, for mothers and fathers,
            to
            get up in the morning and ride their bicycles out into life
            each day. A
            great deal of courage."
            
          
                       Then
the
            Angel was quiet again and so was the girl.
            
          
                       After
a
            while the girl, having graduated from philosophy to
            theology, asked:
            "Why does God let this go on? Why doesn't he fix the
            bicycles or make
            people learn how to ride them without banging into each
            other?"
            
          
                       "Hmmm."
said
the
            Angel
            
          
                       Now
before
            you imagine the Angel is pausing to think, I should tell you
            that is not what was happening. Angels do think, but when
            they do
            something happens. For Angels thinking creates. The reason
            the Angel
            said "Hmmm" was so the girl would first reflect a little
            about what she
            had said, before the Angel answered her.
            
          
                       "Do
you
            ever talk to God?" asked the Angel.
            
          
                       "I
think
            so," said the girl, tentative again, and rightly so.
            
          
                       "You
should
            you know.", said the Angel. "You can't interrupt him, or
            bother
            him when he's doing something else. He always listens.
            Always. And when
            you talk to him he never interrupts you, never tells you
            he's heard it
            before or done it himself or knows more than you. You
            couldn't ask for
            a better listener. And when you're done he doesn't give
            advice, or tell
            you what to do, or criticize what you've done or tell you,
            you aren't
            adequate. He just listens, and accepts you and loves you,
            whatever you
            have to say."
            
          
                       Then
the
            Angel asked another question.
            
          
                       "Do
you
            ever get angry at God?"
            
          
                       "What!"
exclaimed
the
            girl. "Get angry at God !?!"
            
          
                       "Of
course."
            said the Angel. "God loves you and wants your love. People
            who
            love each other get to be angry with each other. It's a way
            to care.
            God doesn't mind your anger. Now your indifference? That's
            another
            matter."
            
          
                       "O.K."
said
the
            girl, now a little more in touch with her own frustration.
            "But you still haven't said anything about repairing the
            bicycles or
            giving lessons on riding them."
            
          
                       'Didn't
need
to"
            said the Angel. "All kinds of excellent repair and riding
            manuals already out there. There's the Bible, and the Vedas,
            and the
            Torah, and the Koran, and the Sutras, and the..."
            
          
                       "O.K..
I
get
            it." she said, interrupting the Angel, who didn't mind at
            all.
            Then she paused and thought a little.
            
          
                       "All
right."
            she said. "This is what you've said. The reason the world is
            so
            difficult is because we all have our own ideas and dreams
            and
            conscience and stubbornness, and when we go out and ride
            these
            "bicycles" in life we bang into each other, or ride over
            each others
            feet, because we have forgotten about these invisible
            things. But if we
            want riding lessons and repair instruction, that information
            is already
            there. We just have to use it. Right?"
            
          
                       "Right."
said
the
            Angel.
            
          
                       "O.K."
said
the
            girl, after a very deep sigh, "Just one more question."
            
          
                       "Granted
God
is
            the best listener in the world, always available and never
            critical. But how come he never answers me?"
            
          
                       This
last
            was spoken with a great deal of anguish, as only the very
            young
            can feel at the impossible burdens they sense when they
            contemplate
            growing up and being really free and responsible for
            themselves.
            
          
                       Again
the
            Angel waited for a while, as silent and beautiful as a
            starry
            winter night.
            
          
                       "How
well
            do you listen?" the Angel answered. "He always answers you,
            always. You just don't always hear him. He answers in many
            ways. With
            the continued breath of life, or with a fading sunset. With
            the touch
            of a breeze on the cheek or a crash of thunder. In the most
            quite place
            inside yourself he whispers to you. More softly then the
            endless beat
            of your heart he sings to you in the voice of the dancing
            colors that
            delight the eye. You eat his answers for breakfast and when
            you walk
            barefoot through the dew wet grass his answers touch your
            feet.
            
          
                       "Do
you
            have eyes, ears? Or if not even these, you have the thoughts
            you
            choose. You believe or not. Is that not a great gift itself?
             To
            have faith or not, hope or not, charity or not, according to
            your own
            will. God does answer. With life, with freedom. And yes,
            with sorrow
            and with pain. Are these not gifts as well?"
            
          
                       Again
there
            was a harmony of silence between the two of them. Then the
            girl
            smiled and looked mischievously at the Angel.
            
          
                       "Do
you
            have a bicycle?" she asked.
            
          
Then the Angel laughed. And outside the girl's window the birds sang to greet with joy the first hints of dawn on Christmas morning.
        
***********************************************************
        
        
Healing the Insanity of
Psychiatric
              Medicines and Practice
              
            
It is
              one thesis of this small paper that
              common sense thinking, applied to the question of the efficacy of
              modern
              anti-psychotics and similar medicines, will reveal
              that such drugs cannot generally be healthy
              for either the mental or physical health of the human
              being.  They only seem to work, and then only
              if you
              define the goal of the application of such medicine in a
              quite limited, and anti-human, fashion (behavioral modification
              instead of healing).
              
            
This
              is not to say no good at all comes
              from the lifetimes of effort put out by many professionals
              in these
              fields, but rather that the picture we have of this work
              is spun, just
              as politicians spin their versions of the truth.
               Spin is not the
              truth, and in this essay we are trying to come nearer to
              the social
              reality represented by our institutional mental health
              systems.
                They are mostly not about mental health (those
              problems of the mind are not being adequately
              researched or solved), but rather about power, wealth and
              social
              control.
              
            
It may
              help some possible confusion in
              the reader to distinguish the psychiatric profession, from
              the
              psychological profession.  Most psychiatrists no
              longer
              participate in talk therapy (classical analysis on the
              couch), but by
              and large engage in the practice of diagnosis of mental
              illnesses
              according to the DSM* V (a system of labeling various
              symptoms into a
              name that can be recognized by the mental health system
              for purposes of
              insurance payments and other institutional processes).
               Following
              such a diagnosis the psychiatrist (being also an MD)
              prescribes
              medications designed to adjust the behavior of the
              patient.  More
              will be said about this later.
              
            
*[Diagnostic
              and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders V,
              for interesting details look it up on Wikipedia.]
              
            
Psychologists
              almost universally engage
              is some form of talk therapy, although often in connection
              to some kind
              of prescription medicine, and as well often using the same
              classification system as the DSM V.
              
            
The
              important point above concerns the general
              method of thinking involved in
              the practice of this discipline (psychiatry), for that is
              where the
              failure begins and ends.
               It is not so
              much the individual thinking, but rather the institutional
              thinking -
              the generalized paradigm which serves as the context and
              background to
              all the rest.  Let us begin
              the examination of
              this method of thinking, by first looking at something with which most
              of us today
              are quite familiar: the movement toward organic food.
               Some history ...
              
            
In the 19th Century natural science reached a kind of
              pinnacle of
              sorts.  Great
              advances in knowledge were seen everywhere, and technical
              devices of all kinds were being created in
              the hope of solving any number of humanity's pressing
              problems.  The industrial
              revolution was a seeming success, and not a week went by without some scientist
              somewhere
              announcing another
              breakthrough, in
              either
              pure knowledge or in some practical art.
              
            
In
              agriculture the plant had been studied in the laboratory
              very
              carefully, and
              how it was composed of basic elements, such as
              carbon, hydrogen, oxygen and nitrogen
              (plus a few trace elements) was
              now assumed to be quite clear.  Farms as a
              result
              started to become more and more modeled after factories, where what is
              now called
              mono-culture started to flourish.
               Machines planted the
              seeds, watered the plants and artificial fertilizers
              were added
              to the soil to make up for any missing elements such as
              are related to
              the plant's need for clay, silicon or calcium.
              
            
Large
              corporations grew into existence, many of them chemical
              factories creating pure and ofttimes synthetic substances
              that were
              applied at the farm or then later during procedures by
              which food was
              processed, manufactured
              and
              distributed to consumers via grocery stores.
               Needs of commerce became
              important and shelf life required new chemical methods of
              preservation.  Foods were enhanced, adulterated, preserved,  and supposedly purified.  Flour was
              bleached.  Sugar was too (keep in mind you wouldn't, yourself, directly
              drink bleach). 
              
              
            
In
              many places, however, things were not coming out so well.  Large farms
              using
              mono-culture and artificial fertilizers found themselves
              more and more
              attacked by insect life (nature, sensing something dead or dying or ill, sends its
              littlest
              workers to take it apart, and return it to the whole).  This
              required the application of poisons to kill the
              insects, and
              also to kill any weeds (unwanted plants).  The farm became essentially a chemical
              factory siting
              astride the land.  Ordinary farmers couldn't compete, and the whole
              of
              agriculture, as
              a
              way of life, changed
              radically.
              
            
Eventually, people began
              to question whether this was sane.  After some
              time organic
              farming (which is
              really only a return to the pre-industrial farm)
            became important, as ordinary
              common sense was applied by ordinary people
              to examine the assumptions of mono-culture and corporate
              industrial
              food processing and practices.
              
            
This
              is a brief, but I believe quite worthwhile picture.  What is the
              nature of
              the thinking that produced this history of farming
              practices that
              ultimately have failed on such a huge scale to provide
              healthy food?
              
            
The
              first step was in natural science
              itself, which
              has followed primarily a method of analysis (taking things
              apart).  For example, the plant was
              burned in the laboratory to produce ash.  Then the ash
              was
              analyzed to see what were the basic elements of which it
              was made (the burning only eliminated
              the water from the harvested plant - although that
              is not precisely true, for the combustion
              process creates many products such as light and heat, but which
              come from where - the burning takes something
              less quantifiable away from the once living plant.).
               In any event, the modern
              scientist looks at plant biology on the farm
              as a process by which the plant was created by the DNA of
              the seed out
              of certain basic elements available in the soil.   Already, before DNA, if the soil
              was lacking
              something, these
              could
              be added later  (fertilizers etc.).
              
            
This
              turning of the farm into a chemistry
              factory was before the need for ecological or holistic
              thinking was understood.  Pure analysis needs to
              be followed by wise synthesis.
               After you take something
              apart, you have to know how to put it back together, in order to
              prove you
              actually learned something.
               The later discovered flaws
              of mono-culture have pretty
              much proved that  the original thinking about plants
              and foods was
              in error. 
              
            
To
              this analytical thinking was added the
              thinking involved in mass production.  Machines
              were seen as useful replacements for physical
              labor and the farm became large and mechanized
              (leading to mono-culture or
              farms sowing and
              reaping only one plant, such as wheat or corn).  The profit
              motive was added to the search for scientific
              facts, with
              the whole thing becoming a bit distorted because as
              agricultural
              colleges grew in size (and developed more research capacity),
               a great deal of the
              funding for
              research in these schools was provided by business (and sometimes
              government), neither of which had pure agendas and
              motives.
              
            
Ultimately, regulatory
              bodies such  as the Food and Drug Administration became
              less the
              defenders of the public interest, and more the creatures of the lobbyists for
              big
              agricultural and chemical corporations. 
              
            
Everyone
              today is more or less aware of
              these facts and tendencies.
              
            
As
              common sense was applied, it became clear that the
              earth in which plants were grown was itself alive with
              microorganisms
              and worms etc.  The
              more
              chemical fertilizers and anti-weed and insect poisons were
              added
              to the farm, the
              more “dead” the soil became.   A kind
              of vicious
              cycle arose, which
              required
              more and more chemicals on the farm,
              that has since resulted in more
              and more a
              denaturing of the food itself.
               We could try to look for
              laboratory evidence for this, but since it was the
              human population itself upon which the experiment (denatured and
              processed food) was conducted, we need only look at
              people to see the results.
              
            
Now it
              is not usual to relate to this
              certain other facts, but it is clear to a holistic thinking that
              modern
              diseases of the heart, and many cancers began to arise at the same
              time as
              changes in farming.  In fact, the so-called obesity epidemic in America is
              clearly
              related as well.  True experts in nutrition realize that the
              real reason so
              many people are fat is because there is no actual
              nutrition in the food
              you get at the grocery store.
               As a consequence the body
              keeps telling people to eat
              more, but the
              only thing in the food is empty calories which the body
              then stores (converts the excess of sugars
              into fats) if one
              has a certain body-type (an endomorph).  Other body types burn all the calories, but need
              stimulants such
              as caffeine and cigarettes in order to function at work
              and in home.
              
            
What
              is worse is that many today in the
              medical field want to castigate the consumer, and leave
              aside or ignore the responsibility of the
              producer of the food, as well as the role of the government (or absence of a
              role, might be a better way to
              phrase it).  Wealthy corporations and
              corrupt government officials get a free ride, but the fat
              person has to take the whole blame for his
              choices.  Somehow
              we
              are to be able to overcome corporate and
               government power, and the
              influence of
              advertising, while
              at
              the same time raising the children and creating through
              our work all
              the wealth.
              
            
So to
              the flawed excess of analysis
              without synthesis, and the flawed excess of corporate greed, we must now
              add the
              flawed reasoning which wants to blame the consumer for
              buying products
              that should never have been sold to him in the first
              place.
              
            
Now
              why did we bother to look at this, in an article
              partly on
              problems with mental health medications.
               The reason should be clear
              to the
              reader with common sense: the same flawed thinking that debased the
              food supply has
              come alive in the realm of soul-healing, and  is currently
              debasing the physical and mental health of
              millions.
              
            
Natural
              science remains locked in an
              excess of analysis, and an absence of wise synthesis.
               Corporate greed in the
              creation of
              pharmaceuticals has led to a need to force the sale
              through
               advertising of products after products whose side
              effects kill
              and injure.  If these so-called medicines were truly
              healing,
              there would be no need to sell them - they would sell themselves.
              
            
Government
              has become corrupted, as are
              many universities and hospitals where research is
              conducted.  In
              the absence of holistic thinking, suffering is produced
              directly on
              many minds.  Lets look at some examples.
              
            
The
              writer of this essay has 18 years experience in the
              trenches of the mental health field, including ten
              years as a mental health worker in a
              for-profit psychiatric hospital in Nashua, New
              Hampshire.  I could tell a lot of stories, but I'll just
              tell one, after making a few basic observations.
              
            
First
              of all it was clear, to my observation and
              experience, that
              psychiatrists
              working at the hospital were basically poorly supervised
              experimenters.  I
              seldom
              saw a diagnosis made at the beginning of an admission
              remain the
              same over the whole course of treatment (unless the
              patient had been in the system for years).
               It was routine to order
              one medication (or more) in the beginning, and then change that as
              treatment went forward.
                The goal, of course, was not to
              heal the patient, but to modify behavior.  The
              diagnosis defined certain behavior as socially
              undesirable, and
              then
              the psychiatrist experimented using various medications
              until the
              desired behavioral result was reached.
              
            
During
              this process the subjective inner
              life of the patient was often not a factor, although many
              patients came seeking help with their inner
              states of being.  Of course, such inner states often led to deviant social
              behaviors, such that people would
              come recommended by various agencies (social services, the police, the family
              etc.).  The new
              patient would have a complaint, of sorts, but the social matrix
              surrounding this person would also have its own separate
              complaint.
              
            
The
              patient was worried about their state
              of mind, and
              the family or job was worried about their behavior.   What
              we did was
              modify behavior, often by what was essentially a chemical
              restraint on
              some aspect of the patients subjective state of mind.  We pressed
              down the
              personality with drugs in order to make them more easily
              fit into their social
              environment.  Obviously
              there
              went with this process a number of side-effects
              (physical and mental
              collateral damage is probably a more accurate term), some of which
              were more or less permanent (such as tardive dyskinesia).
              
            
Now in
              appreciating what I write here
              about the psychiatrist as an experimenter, the reader
              should be clear that I am pointing out a great
              deal of ignorance and some degree of arrogance
              (just as was done to the farms
              we need for the food we eat).
               At the same time it is the
              institutional system of mental health that perpetuates
              these problems, because these flaws are
              well known and are everywhere criticized, although
              unsuccessfully
                  (Google: psychiatric
              polypharmacy; psychiatric and organic
              reductionism; ecology
              of
              mind; and
              anti-psychiatry, for example).  Psychiatry is a “soft” science, not a “hard”
            science.
               It is more art than
              science, and a lot of people practicing it clearly
              don't have any
              talent.
              
            
Lets
              do the horror story now ....
              
            
The
              hospital where I worked had a Chief
              of Psychiatry (a
              different job than the business head of the facility).
               He was also paid outside
              money by
              various pharmaceutical companies to manage research
              projects.  When a new experimental
              drug had to be tested, we were one place such tests were done.   This
              process costs
              a lot of money (the
              drug company paid the full admission costs of all patients
              in the study
              as well as additional staff time needed to support the
              study, such as through frequent
              blood tests, physicals
              etc.).
              
            
The
              Chief of Psychiatry maintained “professional” relationships with the
              Nashua community, and was in fact already the “doctor” for a number of
              individuals with chronic mental health
              issues.  All
              these individuals were provided living support through
              local social
              services agencies, as they couldn't work and often needed help
              just with
              basic living skills.   
              
            
A new
              drug for schizophrenia was to be
              tested, and
              shortly thereafter a number of regular patients of the
              Chief of
              Psychiatry were admitted to the hospital to participate in
              the study.   They were not in
              crisis, but
              were admitted solely for the study.  Because the
              study was a double-blind study, some would get a placebo, instead of
              the
              experimental drug.
              
            
One
              patient, clearly receiving a placebo, began in a
              couple of weeks to show severe symptoms.  He had been
              taken off
              the medication that helped him live (with aid) in the
              community, and brought into the hospital for the study.  He was, in the jargon
              we used, decompensating.
              
            
He
              began to be awake for 50 hours at a time, and then crash for about 16 hours and
              then be awake
              again (I
              know this
              because I was the one who went carefully through his chart
              to develop
              these and other facts in order to confront the Chief of
              Psychiatry with
              the torture of this individual).  He wasn't eating and existed mostly on coffee
              and
              cigarettes.  His
              behavior
              was erratic, and
              his speech pressured (speedy and incoherent).  He pestered
              staff and other patients constantly.   Fortunately
              he was
              not violent, just
              a
              terrific nuisance to others, and of course miserable inside himself (for which his “madness” - as it were - offers him no
              understanding).
               We forget, or ignore, that the
              world seen from inside such a mind is not the
              same world we see at all.
              
            
Lets
              look at what happen here - the reality.  People with known mental
              health issues were brought into the hospital to suit the
              convenience of
              the Chief of Psychiatry and the drug company, and used as
              guinea pigs.  This is not only shameful, but it ought
              to scare us that such callous and
              indifferent impulses fill in the structural nature of the
              mental health
              system, such
              that no one objects on an institutional level.
               Of course, the
              professionals put a good face on all such activity, because as
              anyone knows, we can with our thinking
              justify anything.
              
            
Even
              today in the food industry, that system still lives
              in denial of what has been done
              (and is being done that is worse)
            to the food supply.
               The same attitude is
              rampant in the
              field of mental health.  Natural science does not understand what it
              is doing.  Commercial interests
              mine this field of confusion for profit making purposes.  And, the human
              beings, the patients and their
              families (as well
              as society) are
              not being well served.
              
            
One
              really doesn't need to be an expert, but just use
              common sense; and, in fact recognize that the expert has his own
              agenda, which is often the
              preservation of his status and his income.
               The only way to stop the
              insanity of
              the mental health institutional system is for public
              opinion to marshal
              its common sense, and ask of their representatives in
              legislative bodies to
              use their common sense as well.
              
            
Human
              beings shouldn't be the subject of
              experiments by psychiatrists no longer interested in their
              subjective
              inner well being, but only in changing the behavior, all supported
              by a
              pharmaceutical industry which has proven it will lie and
              cheat in order
              to make money.  There
              are
              alternatives as everyone who looks at this question knows.
              
            
To
              come at this from another direction ...
              
            
There
              is a field of science that is called (or was called) coal tar
              chemistry.  Basically this field
              (and its related industries) took something
              that was
              already quite dead (petroleum in the ground) and killed it some more (took it apart on
              a massive scale).  Those smelly gasoline making plants you drive
              by were at
              one time called “cracking
              plants” because
              what they do is heat the oil to very high temperatures, while keeping
              it under
              pressure (crack the
              petroleum coal tar into pieces that don't exist in nature) and then as the
              various
              vapors rise, they
              cool
              them and make gasoline, kerosene etc. (a kind of distillation
              process).  From this same chemistry
              we have ingredients for plastics, cosmetics and even
               medicines.  These are
              all synthetic, which among other things means nature didn't
              make them, man did (with all his selfish motives, and his
              ignorance and
              arrogance).
              
            
We are
              aware today of all those allergies
              that comes with the proliferation of these products
              throughout human
              society.  Cigarettes
              are
              full of this stuff.  It has a lot of uses, of which one
              is that it makes some people a lot of money.  Lets make a
              synthesis, a common sense picture.
              
            
As
              science matures in knowledge, human impulses everywhere
              look for personal advantage.
               The industrial revolution includes a
              chemical or synthetic revolution where all kinds of
              substances are created that never before existed in
              nature.  Human beings now swim in
              a sea of synthetic (artificial) chemistry, for which their bodies
              were never originally adapted.
               Nature made us, we made
              synthetics and synthetics are ruining our food, changing the
              climate and
              torturing mental patients.
              
            
Seen
              as a whole social process, we've essentially
              conducted a huge set of experiments on the human
              population of the
              world.  That's
              right, we are
              the experimental subject of a lot of badly thought out
              theories, acting in collusion with
              profit making industries.
              
            
We played with the world in ignorance and arrogance and now must reap the consequences. Yes, a lot of the time we were trying to solve problems and meet genuine human needs. But at the same time we were not humble. We believed we could try anything and fix any mistake. We were childish, and as all of us learn growing up, when you are impulsive and childish, you screw up, and sometimes ruin the rest of your life. Humanity, as a group, has been doing the same thing on a very large scale for some time.
Here's
              the rule that is frequently
              violated: Just because you can do a thing, does not mean
              you should do a thing.
              
            
At the
              beginning of this small paper I
              made an off-hand remark regarding modern psychiatric
              medicine, which now needs some
              elaboration.  I
              said: “They only seem to
              work, and then only if
              you define
              the goal of the application of such medicine in a quite
              limited, and anti-human, fashion.”
              
            
I have
              watched all kinds of people
              receive all kinds of medications over my 18 years
              personal experience in the trenches of the field of
              mental health.  By “trenches” I mean direct patient care (the psychiatrists
              see their patients briefly, sometimes not
              even daily).
               It  is people
              like me who see them all day long and talk to
              them as one human being to another (instead of as
              treating doctor to insane patient). 
              
            
What
              we call “mental patients” are individuals of great personal courage, who suffer
              inwardly in
              ways few of us can imagine.
               They live in an Age where
              they are not understood.  They are often lucky to
              have caregivers (nurses
              and
              mental health workers) who treat them as human beings - with
              sympathy
              and compassion.  The mental health system treats them
              as things and as numbers on summary sheets.  If they are
              really lucky
              they sometimes get compassionate doctors, but these
              doctors are themselves caught up in the
              institutional system, which has a quite distinct life of its own.
              
            
Years
              ago an acute observer of the
              business world (Peter
              Drucker) put
              forward something called “the Peter principle”, which
              stated
              that: in a hierarchy
              people
              naturally rise to level of their incompetence.
              
            
A
              truism for sure, but certainly not always
              true.  Sometimes
              people
              are competent, but
              the nature of that competence can often be solely for
              their own benefit.  The present-day financial crisis in America
              is an example
              of that truism.  Our mental health institutional systems, and their
              related
              pharmaceutical allies, are full of folks not very good at anything
              but serving
              their own interests.  We really shouldn't expect them to produce
              something that
              helps mental patients - that's
              not
              the agenda under which they operate.
              
            
John
              Maynard Keynes wrote this about our
              economic system: “Capitalism is the
              extraordinary belief that the nastiest of men, for the nastiest
              of reasons, will somehow work for the
              benefit of us all.”  A similar statement can be said about the
              mental health
              system.  But we (patients, and families of patients, and Society, and state and
              federal
              law-makers) fool
              ourselves if we expect the institutional mental health
              system to
              benefit those unique individuals we label "the mentally
              ill".  The evidence showing
              this failure is overwhelming.
               Hopefully this paper will
              reveal that even common sense
              can know and understand this, and that we need to not be dependent upon
              so-called
              experts to realize something is badly wrong.
               Further, we need to
              realize that only we can fix it.
               The system won't fix
              itself.
              
            
Of
              course, we often think of certain
              people as violent and aggressive, and with good judgment
              want to
              exclude them from our communities.  This need to
              exclude is a
              theme we'll come to at the end of this paper.
              
            
Lets
              add another approach to our
              consideration ...
              
            
Above
              we noted that the scientist in the
              laboratory sought to understand the plant through reducing
              it to ash.  He did not study the
              living plant in its natural environment, but removed
              it to the laboratory and disassembled it.   The
              medical doctor
              in this same period of scientific development spent a lot
              of time
              taking apart the cadaver - the dead body.
               He did not concentrate on
              the living organism, but on the dead organism.
              
            
A
              similar kind of thinking has gone on in
              brain studies, where
              the
              physical apparatus is assumed (if we read the literature carefully) to be the basis
              for all
              mental activity.  The scientist studied dead brains, and if he
              studied living
              brains, he
              often studied ones with problems
              - that is ill or dysfunctional
              brains (such as people with the split
              brain problem).
              
            
If we
              do a survey of psychological
              literature, we
              find different attitudes there as well.  Some study
              optimum states of consciousness, others only diseased or
              deviant states of consciousness.
               Recall the Chief of
              Psychiatry, and his allies in the pharmaceutical industry - he tests his
              drugs on an already ill (socially deviant) population, who can't  truly consent, because the real nature
              of their abuse by the system is not apparent to them.  Like most
              people in the
              field, he and
              his allies consider their activity (the use and
              abuse of the unfortunate in the pursuit of limited goals, such as behavioral
              modification, knowledge
              and
              profit) to be
              normal - that is okay.
               Remember, the
              psychiatrist and the
              pharmaceutical company are not even trying to heal the
              patient, but
              only modify behavior.
              
            
In the
              background here is a very deep
              question, upon the rocks of which Western Civilization now
              founders.
               Natural Science has taken the course where it has
              rigorously
              decided that there is no spirit in the world - no spirit
              in Nature, no
              spirit in the human being.   All we are, to this
              materialistic outlook, is matter.
              
            
In
              large part this view comes from an
              unfortunate truth in the field of psychological studies:
              that the
              investigator never studies his own mind, but only that
              of others, and then only through processes which take
              apart (destroy
              or eliminate the
              living element), or which only look at a
              dysfunctional consciousness.
               From an ontological (or basic premise) point of view, natural
              science mostly uses death processes and disease
              processes to try to wrest, from the once living and healthy, its secrets.
               Were natural scientists to study their
              own minds objectively, the presence of the spirit would
              soon be quite
              apparent.
              
            
The
              application of a little common sense
              logic might suggest that the secrets of the living and the
              healthy will
              be found in the study of those elements of existence, where they
              arise - that
              is in the family and social environment.  This is not
              easy,
              however.  While certain thinkers in these fields have
              looked to
              the positive (Abraham Maslow etc.), the institutional system does not take such an approach.
              
            
There
              is a view held by some in the field
              of psychology that speaks of the "identified patient".
                This
              is the person who comes to a soul-healer (the
              psychologist) in order to
              resolve certain personal problems, and many mental health
              professionals
              realize that the so-called "identified patient" might be
              the most
              mentally healthy person in that family.  At the least
              this person
              recognizes a problem, but the root of the problem may not
              be discovered
              in the individual, but only in the family-matrix.
              
            
A
              related theme ...
              
            
It
              took a while, but women finally understood that this same
              method of
              thinking had led doctors to think of birth as a disease
              process, and such views had to be
              opposed and eliminated (a struggle not yet over).  In a similar
              way, we have to resist taking the so-called
              deviant out of
              Society in order to study them in isolation, but rather we
              need to keep the whole together, and recognize that they
              aren't so much deviant, as unique and highly individual.
               It is in fact Society that
              needs to be
              healed of the assumption that unusual mental states (and their related
              behaviors) are an "illness".
              
            
That
              is the true insanity - to take the living personality and treat it
              like the
              plant in the laboratory where we first destroy it before
              we can
              understand it.  To
              repress
              the unusual personality through powerful and intrusive
              artificial (not
              living) chemical
              forces, simply
              to coerce changes in behavior, is not healing.
                
              
            
It is
              in fact the worst kind of tyranny - the tyranny of the majority (who declare
              themselves superior psychologically) over an
              essentially helpless
              minority (the
              different).  It says more about us, as a Society, than it does
              about them.  It reveals our  "us and them" assumptions, and our moral
              weaknesses in shunning them and setting them
              outside our company, all the while pretending as if we were
              helping them, when the raw truth is
              that we are only helping ourselves.
              
            
It is
              Society that lacks the sanity of
              true charity, and
              an
              honest impulse to help (and or heal) the weak and troubled.  Its far past
              time for us to grow into a greater maturity
              in our social relations with the different. 
              
            
Lets
              come at this once more with a
              slightly different emphasis ...
              
            
Healing the Healer: the first steps in a sane future
 evolution of psychiatry and psychology
              -
              
            
When
              Freud's
              works were translated  into
              English, from the
              German, the terms geistes and seele were
              translated as mind, and
              not as
              spirit and soul, which
              easily
              could have been done (c.f. Bruno
              Bettelheim's Freud and man's soul, A.A.Knopf, 1983).
               Thus continued
              and deepened the materialization of the underlying
              thinking of those
              who sought during the 19th
              century
              to treat problems of human inner life - of
              the psyche - the soul (which
              as
              everyone knows is the root term for the words psychology
              and psychiatry).
              
            
Modern
              scientific
              thinking on the brain now seeks to explain all inner
              states
              of the human being today as consequences of material
              causes. Mind and brain
              are now seen as equivalent.
               The Fall, from
              a one
              time appreciation of the human spirit and soul dimensions
              of existence, is, within
scientific
              thinking, nearly
              complete.  At
              least at
              the level of assumptions.
              
            
"It is old hat to say that the brain is
              responsible for
              mental activity. Such a claim may annoy the likes of Jerry
              Falwell or
              the Ayatollah, but it is more or less the common
              assumption of
              educated people in the twentieth century. Ever since
              the scientific revolution, the guiding view of most
              scientists has been
              that knowledge about the brain, its cells and its
              chemistry will
              explain mental states. However, believing
              that the brain supports behavior is the easy part: explaining how is
              quite another." (Mind Matters: How the
              Mind and Brain interact to Create
              Our Conscious Lives, Michael S.
              Grazzanica Ph.D. pp 1, Houghton Baffling, Boston 1988).
              [emphasis added]
              
            
This
              process
              of materialization of our ideas of human inner states of
              being
              has now gone so far that some believe today that there is
              no "I"
            , or "ego"
            or "self
              consciousness", and
              that this
              perception of self by the brain
              is nothing but a chemically manufactured illusion.
              
            
Into
              this
              minefield today come those who feel called to what remains
              of the
              profession of  "soul
              healer".
               Even
              Grazzanica, in
              a recent
              dialog with the writer Tom Wolfe, when
questioned
              on this very  issue, was
              loath to
              admit such could be possible.
               This interview, broadcast
               on C-Span
              Books, shows
              Grazzanica rising from his chair and moving around so
              certain was he
              that the I or ego was real.
               All the same, he
              had  to confess
              that some evidence more and more suggested otherwise.
              
            
To
              appreciate
              the depth of this problem for modern humanity, the
              reader is
              urged to try to  speak
              or write
              of human interactions without using personal pronouns, for
              this is
              the ultimate implication of this train of thought: If
              there is no
              I then there is no you, nor
              he, or she.
                All is simply it.
              
            
This
              last
              was dramatically portrayed in the film the Silence of the
              Lambs when the
              serial killer commands the "it"
            to rub on the
              oil and for "it"
            to obey all commands.
               If it is an
              imagined serial killer madman that refuses to acknowledge
              in his victim
              the reality of an I, how
              equally
              insane then has become certain kinds of thinking in
              natural science
              that would, in
              the name of
              some kind of hyper-objectivity, declare
              as a
              complete illusion the idea of any human subjectivity at
              all.
              
            
In
              a
              very real sense, we
              can see
              that scientific thinking has run up against a wall of
              sorts.  At the same
              time, a careful
              review of the research reveals that this wall only really
              exists in the
              conceptual frame of reference in which all this research
              is conducted.  It
              is not the
              facts of experience that are flawed, but
               the thinking
              that makes the errors.  It
              is the paradigm
              itself that
              has reached the limit of its viability (c.f. Thomas
              Kuhn's The Structure of Scientific Revolutions).
              
            
Now
              the
              writer of this little essay is not unfamiliar with these
              fields of
              interest, but
              as
              previously noted was in his work life drawn into them, albeit
              not at
              the professional level of the doctors.
               I have 18 years
              in the
              trenches mental health, from
              lay
              therapy in California in the 1970's, to
              group-home
              work with adolescents in the 1980's
               to ten years
              in a for-profit psychiatric facility in New Hampshire in
              the 1990's.
               I've been a
              counselor, an
              orderly and
              a mental health worker.  Nor
              am I
              uneducated, but
              I have
              degrees in pre-seminary (B.A.)
            and Law (J.D.)
               My avocation (now
              full time
              in retirement) is
              philosophy, and
              this at a
              level far beyond ordinary academic philosophy.
               With this
              aside set out, let
              us
              continue.
              
            
These
              limits
              of the paradigm of scientific materialism have been
              reached
              everywhere.  The
              studies  of
              consciousness and how that might arise from a material
              brain still are
              unable to explain how this happens or what consciousness
               is.  There
              are
              theories, but
              nothing
              testable.  In
              reality for
              this thinking, the
              sacrifice
              of the idea of self-consciousness is just a cheap and easy
              way to get
              rid of a very big  problem.
              
            
Over
              in
              physics, the natural scientist
              has
              his own problem with consciousness, for
              his
              split-beam experiments prove in this field that the
              fundamental
              indeterminacy of states of matter does not become "real"
               until the
              observing subjective self-consciousness acts upon the
              experiment.  The
              observer
              can't actually keep any longer his own subjectivity
              outside the work - the
              two remain
              interconnected.
              
            
This
              is
              true also with regard to a great deal of research being
              done on the
              brain.  The researcher
              in these fields often has to ask the subjectivity (the "I")
            of his subject
              to engage in certain "mental"
            actions, in
              order for a
              brain scan to have something to look at.
               The subject is
              to look at pictures, try
              to access
              memory and so forth.  The
              problem
              comes when the experiment is thought about afterward, and
              researcher
              tries to create  his "model"
            or theory, and
              not
              include the facts that the subjectivity of the researcher
              and the
              researcher's subject, first
              had to
              make a social agreement before the "mental"
            act even
              arises.
              
            
The
              physicist
              knows he can't do this (refuse
              any
              longer to recognize the participation of his own
              consciousness and
              self-conscious choices) anymore, so
              perhaps it
              is time for those who do research on the mind to recognize
              the same
              fact.
              
            
In Mind Matters, Grazzanica, having
              already
              likened brain to a mechanism, then
              says
              paradoxically: "A thought can change brain chemistry, just
              as a physical event in the brain can change a thought". My
              question
              for Grazzanica is: what
              does he
              think causes the
              thought which changes
              the brain chemistry?
              
            
Clearly
              to
              the naive experience of any thinking subject, it
              is their
              own self-conscious activity that directs thought.
               In point of
              fact, there is no
              experiment and even no theory, without
              the
              thinking of the scientist.
              
            
Where
              this
              leads us then is to this:
              
            
Since
              the
              psychiatrist and the psychologist are human, and
              flawed (as we all are
              flawed), can
              it not be
              possible that  hidden
              within
              modern theories of consciousness are assumptions that are
              no longer
              justified precisely because we have arrived at the above
              noted limits?
              
            
To
              make
              the question as stark as possible: Can a
              researcher  or "healer"
            in the field of "mental"
            health, subject
              his
              patients to  treatments
              he
              would not do
              to himself
              or to his own children?  Have
              any
              doctors prescribing ECT, for
              example, actually had
              ECT?
              
            
The
              easy
              answer is that it seems necessary to engage in this kind
              of
              treatment  in
              order to
              help the patient.  But
              this is
              falsified by the fact that quite often the soul healer no
              longer
              believes he is healing a subjectivity or
              self-consciousness, but
              in fact is
              really only altering behavior.
               Certainly, in
              many
              circumstances, the
              subjective
              self-consciousness of the patient wants some kind of
              relief from inner
              torments, but
simultaneously
              the social order surrounding the patient seeks and needs
              a change of behavior, which
              this
              same social order considers to be deviant, or
              outside the
              acceptable norm.
              
            
Further, since
              the soul
              healer no longer thinks of the subjectivity as real, but
              only the
              material brain, then
              all kinds
              of gross processes and adjustments become possible, because
              one is
              really only dealing with the alteration of a mechanical
              system.  Biological to
              be sure, but (and
              this with
              a kind of unrecognized denial)
            essentially a
              thing, not a person.
              
            
The system of mental health seems to run itself these days, and the soul healer is just a cog in a unhealthy aspect of the social organism, whose purpose more and more requires of its participants that they not feel either sympathy or empathy with their patients.
Is
              it
              not one of the costs to the psyche of those who work in
              this field
              that they have to stop having normal human feeling, and
              basically
              dehumanize their patients on some level in order to
              subject them to
              such powerful forms of suppression of the individual
              spirit?  Mental health
              professionals routinely subject their patients to chemical
              restraints
              on behavior, while
              at the
              same time never actually believing they are curing the
              patient of a
              treatable illness.
              
            
Remember, please, psychiatry
              has
              become almost entirely behavioral in its approaches.
               No longer is
              the subjective inner state of being of the patient
              relevant.  All
              is driven
              by the need to define  certain
behaviors
              as undesirable (the
              DSM-V), and
              then to
              attempt to modify them without respect
              for
              the subjectivity of the patient.
               The
              subjectivity (how they feel
              about the
              treatment) of the
               patient is
              less and less a concern, and
modification
              of unwanted behaviors the entire goal, for
              the
              individual spirit is here being sacrificed to the assumed
              needs of the
              social organism for
              order.  Any individual
              unable to conform to social order is quickly defined (already
              in
              school, and sometimes
              even earlier in the family) as
              either
              criminally or mentally defective.
               (for a
              sociological perspective on this read: Deviance and
              Medicalization: from Badness to Sickness, Conrad
              and
              Schneider, Merrill
Publishing
              Company, 1985)
              
            
Is
              there
              a way out?
              
            
Before
              trying
              to answer that question, lets
              take a
              look at the whole situating in its basic form.
              
            
Are the individuals crazy, or is Society crazy
              
            
First lets step back a bit and think about growing up in modern culture. What was it like to live in a family and go to school and then join the work force?
Some
              examples:
              
            
Suppose
              you
              didn't like to sit still in class.
               You were
              curious and perhaps gregarious.
               You wanted to
              touch things, and
              play with
              them and talk to the other kids, and
              do fun
              stuff.  You were full
              of life and full of spirit.
              
            
But
              the
              adults around you had, even
              prior to
              your arrival, already "conformed"
            to the social
              norms, and so they
              expected you to "conform"
            too.
              
            
In
              the
              family, if
               you didn't
              behave you were probably physically and/or emotionally
              punished, although
              no
              one likes to admit how much this still
              goes on
              today.
              
            
When
              you
              survived your families rules and the school's rules, you
              went to
              work.  At work you
              had a boss and he had his rules too.
               These also you
              need to survive, because
              in
              order to live you had to eat, in
              order to
              eat you had to have money to buy food, and
              in order
              to have money you had to work for a boss.
              
            
Unless
              you
               were criminal or crazy, that
              is
              deviant and non-conformist - that
               is
              irrepressible of spirit in one way or another and wouldn't
               follow
              normative social rules "just
              like
              everyone else".
              
            
Everywhere while growing up some "authority" (with a great deal of practical power over you) demanded you do what it wanted you to do, and not what you wanted to do.
We
              all
              go through this and it seems to make a lot of sense.
               Everyone more
              or less agrees this makes a lot of sense, and
              it is the
              normal or standard thing to do, so
              most
              everyone does it.
              
            
Shouldn't
              be
              a problem, right?
              
            
Except
              for
              a couple of things we tend not to connect to growing up
              and
              learning to conform to the social authority which has
              spent this
              enormous amount of effort to get us to be what it wants us
              to be and
              not to be what we want to be, such
              as:
              
            
STRESS
              and
              ILLNESS, both PHYSICAL
              and PSYCHOLOGICAL!!!!!!
              
            
Opps?!?!?
              
            
All
              that
              energy and spirit that gets pressed down during growing
              up, through the
              power
              exercised by the "authority"
            towards the
              social conformance urged upon us by society, moves
              into our
              psychological and physical organism and causes stress and
              illness.
              
            
So
              for
              all the good we believe we do by using our authority on
              children to
              get them to conform to social norms, maybe
              that's
              not such a good idea after all.
              
            
The
              spirited
              nature of the child has a kind of kinship with water and
              similar fluids (there
              are other kinships as well).
                The one I have
              in mind here, however, is
              concerned
              with a well known physical law: the
incompressibility
              of fluids.  This
              is how
              your brake system on your car works. Because
              the
              brake fluid is incompressible, when
              you push
              your foot on the brake pedal, this
              fluid, trapped in the
              tubes of the brake system, pushes
              the
              brakes (whether disc or pad).
               Because of
              other laws of physics the force of the foot gets
              multiplied, either
              by
              changes in the diameter of the tubes or assisted by engine
              power (this makes no
              difference to the analogy).
              
            
What
              this
              means is that when we use authority, either
              in the
              family, and/or the
              school and/or the work place to repress the spirited
              nature of the
              individual, we stress the rest of
              the
              "system" of
              our being
              and nature, both
physically
              and psychologically.  [See
              the film The Village, by M. Night
              Shyamalan, for a fairy tale like metaphorical look at
              these kinds of
              social issues.]
              
            
Then
              later, when the
              stressed individual acts "mental", or "criminal", we
              treat this
              problem with those social systems, which
              are even
            more
              authoritative
              and not less.  Even
              with
              physical illness we do the same - the
              medical
              profession uses its "authority"
            to get us to
              take drugs, and
              the drugs
              are a "physical authority"
            applied to our
              bodies and minds.  Instead
              of
              offering more freedom from stress, we
              increase
              the stress (remember all those
              nasty "side effects"?).
              
            
Maybe we really need to think out the whole damn structure of our social culture better from top to bottom, and in the meantime we ought perhaps to stop whacking the "mentally" ill (overstressed spirited human beings) over the head with more authority to conform (whether the rules of a hospital or the physical rules of a drug).
From
              this
              point of view, its
              just might
              seem like society
              is more crazy
              than the individual; or, that
              the
              collective is more stupid than the one.
              
            
To
              return
              to the question of what might be done...
              
            
The
              point
              of this little paper is not to attack those called to the
              professions of soul healing.
               They are, in
              fact, caught in
              between.   On
              the one
              hand there is the social order that wants something done
              about  "them"
            - the
               deviants.
               On another
              hand is the massive presence of the paradigm of scientific
              materialism, which
              will not
              tolerate any mention of spirit or soul, but
              rather
              insists (with less and less
              evidence everyday) that
              all is
              matter, and all
              explanations of human existence must be based upon
              materialist or
              physical conceptions.
              
            
Some
              even
              create prophecies about the end of the human, and
              the  supplanting of
              the human with the biomechanical.  They imagine we
              will discover
              how to transplant the consciousness of the human being
              into the memory
              chips of a machine, thus giving us imperishable bodies and
              immortal
              consciousness.
              
            
At
              the
              other end are those - the "them"
            -  the
              deviants.  We
              still don't
              know how much behavior is derived from Nature and how much
              is derived
              from Nurture.  What
              we do
              know, those of us
              lucky enough not
              to be
              caught up  "in
              the system", is
              that we
              don't want someone messing with our inner life.
               This most
              personal sphere of autonomy - our
              own
              thoughts, feelings
              and
              impulses of will - this
              we will
              guard even to the point of violence if necessary.
              
            
We
              understand
              the American  and
              French
              revolutions.  We
              applaud the
              iconoclast, who
              manages
              their individuality without getting
               too deviant
               - we
              even often
              call them artists.
               We worry about
              tyranny, especially the
              tyranny of the majority.  We
              even have
              gone so far today, that conformance
              itself is
              often  seen as a
              character flaw.  That
              is, until your non-conformance
              goes too far.
              
            
Today
              more
              and more the parents and friends of psychiatric patients
              find what
              is done to their kin to be unjust, even
              criminal.  Since
              the
              patient is often unable to advocate for
              himself, others must
              take up the task.
              
            
Pressures
              then
              mount on the soul healer.  If
              we step
              back from this, and
              look at it
              as a kind of an organic process in cultural development, we
              could ask
              whether or not the soul healer is in fact just that person
              who can do
              the most for all parties, given
              that the
              soul healer is already in  the
              center of
              the storm.  If
              the soul
              healer takes a stand, then
              all will
              be forced to pay attention.
              
            
the weight of scientific materialism
+
need for social order -> the soul healer <- the kin of the patients
+
the
              patients themselves
              
            
The
              soul
              healer is himself a spirit struggling to be scientific, a
              member of
              the social order, kin
              of some in
              need, and perhaps
              has even been a patient.  All
              which
              surrounds the soul healer socially should help the soul
              healer, instead of
              demanding that the center conform to their one-sided point
              of view.  If we find a
              way to heal the soul healer, we
              might well
              begin to heal the whole.
              
            
Some
              practical
              suggestions:
              
            
First, concerning scientific materialism: This approach, in that it seeks knowledge of consciousness, makes one glaring fundamental error. It assumes nobody has studied consciousness before. The whole cultural history of mankind is full of such studies, all of which are practical and experimental and rational. Some seem to lean toward a vague mysticism, but this is only when see from the outside. The more modern are eminently scientific. A partial list: the Middle Way of Lua Tzu; Yoga; Tibetan and Zen Buddhism, Quabbalah; Gnosticism; Sufism; Alchemy; Rosicrucianism; Transcendentalism; Christian Hermeticism; and, Anthroposophy (this last is the most modern and scientific).
The
              soul
              healer will find much to aid his ability to help
              scientific
              materialism overcome its own one-sidedness, by taking
              in hand
              his own path to self
              knowledge.
              
            
Second, concerning
              the
              social order: the
              soul
              healer needs to speak plainly to power, and
              recognize
              that while political
power
              can  want almost
              anything, a
              great deal
              it wants is not possible, and
              let us
              still have a free society.  Go
              too far in
              eliminating deviance (something
              more
              and more hard to define), and
              all other
              freedoms will be eroded.  The
              soul
              healer, being in the
              middle of these social forces, needs
              to have
              his views particularly respected, for
              only he
              sees and knows certain aspects of the
              whole.  The social
              order needs to follow the guidance of the soul healer in
              how money is
              spent and on what.  
              
            
Third, concerning the kin of the patients: more and more the kin must accept that they are often (but not always) the best caregivers. Their hearts are most open and committed, but such care must be cooperative in nature ... all four groups, who surround the soul healer in the center have to work together. In practical terms this means that families and communities in which special individuals have been born and raised, perhaps need to stop wanting to send these individuals away, and hide them in institutions.
Fourth, the
              patients
              themselves: they
              need to
              realize that the more they want to
               indulge in
              socially deviant behaviors, the
              more
              necessary  they
              make it
              that they be isolated
              from
              the rest.  No
              one, the conformist
              or the non-conformist, can
              force
              themselves on another individual
human
              being.  Actions will
              have consequences, and
              no one
              will have a perfect life.
              
            
What
              becomes
              essential, for
              all five
              parts of this organism directed at soul health, is
              mutual
              trust and  cooperation.
                Each has a
              role.  All must sit at
              the same table.
               Nothing  can
              change
              overnight, but
              with
              patience and agreement the whole can make progress, one
              day at a
              time.
              
            
This
              following
              also needs to be said to the soul healer:
              
            
Immediately
              you
              define deviant behavior as symptomatic of a disease (mental
              or
              otherwise), you
              have
              locked in a box a whole other set of questions that need
              to  be asked.
               Predominant
              among these questions are whether the social order itself
              is healthy.  If
              the social
              order breeds deviance, then
              why do we
              blame the deviant?  If
              all causes
              are material, why
              do  we even have a
              debate about Nature and Nurture?
              
            
The
              main
              problem, from a
              philosophy of knowledge point of view, is
              that we
              live in a time where there is an excess of analysis, and
              hardly any
              synthesis.   Remember: the
              scientific
              enterprise (at the present, this
              can change) is dominated
              by analytic thinking - thinking
              which
              takes apart what it observes in order to make it
               easier to
              analyze.  The fewer
              variables, the
              easier to
              define the experiment.
              
            
Eddington
              called
              this, at the
              beginning of the 20th
              Century, knowing more
              and more about less and less.
               Detail
              multiplies far faster than wise synthesis.
              
            
So for
              example, physics,
              having confined itself to dealing only with what it could
              count (quantities
              to the
              exclusion of qualities), can
              only
              create a world view (the
              big bang) based upon
              number relationships - no
              other
              relationships having been investigated or understood.
               The soul
              healer, trapped in the
              scientific model which only counts and takes apart, can't
              any
              longer understand his patient whose subjective psyche is
              complex in the
              extreme, and completely
              inter-related and inter-dependent - not
              just
              inwardly, but
              more
              crucially socially.
              
            
For
              the
              soul healer there are almost too many variables,
               at least in
              the sense of what is acceptable science today.
               Thus, everything
              has
              become dependent on material chemistry (in
              its widest
              sense), while
              the
              reality the soul healer faces is obviously a mixture of
              material
              chemistry and emotional or social "chemistry".
               Perhaps we need an entirely new discipline: social alchemy,
              which would
              be concerned with how we transform the soul-lead of human
              weakness and
              darkness, into soul-gold for the benefit not just of the
              individual but
              the community as well.
              
            
Part
              of
              the problem is the  pursuit
              by the
              soul healer of pure objectivity, following
              the
              lead
              (in
              a
              sense) of physics.
               By various
              kinds of rules (developed
              over time in the history of soul healing such
              as the problem of transference), the
              soul
              healer more and more abandoned his own subjectivity.
               Yet, and
              everyone
              in this field knows this, the
              best talk
              therapy work is often done in groups, and
              involves a
              great deal of perception on the part of the soul healer of "feelings".
              
            
Unperceived
              emotional
              chemistry has to be brought into the open.
               In order to do
              this, the best guide
              is actually the self-awareness of the soul healer's own
              feeling life.  A
              therapist
              not seeing his own therapist on a regular basis is not
              upholding the
              necessary standard of self discipline.
               An explorer of
              the spiritual dimensions of human inner life, that
              is not
              studying with someone more experienced, will
              also fall
              into error.  If
              the soul
              healer combines his work (that
              is he
              studies his own mind and the art of soul healing), will
              need to
              work not only with other soul healers, but
              with those
              whose spiritual practice is mature.
              
            
Those
              who
              want to move in this direction will find, obviously, a
              mine field.  Therapists
              are
              human and subject to much temptation - sexual
manipulation
              of the patient being an obvious case in point.
               The soul
              healer who pursues real self knowledge in an objective
              fashion, will discover
              that his best guide is his own moral attitude, a
              problem that
              is not at all simple.  
              
            
Feelings
              are
              best perceived when we develop the ability to think with
              the heart.  Thinking
              with
              the heart, however, is
              best done when our
               conscious
              motive is to realize the good.
                We will the
              good, and then think
              with the heart.  Moreover, the
              gesture of
              what is the good begins in the head.
               We think first, what
              is the
              good, then we will
              the good and let the heart be what it was designed to be: an
              organ of
              perception.
              
            
Why
              does
              this work in the realm of soul healing?
              
            
Because
              what
              every human being wants is to be known and cared about
              non-judgmentally by other human beings.
               This is where
              the child begins its life, and
              where all
              the deep pain of growing up is lodged.
               At the same
              time this is a very frightening want.
               We want our
              truth to be known, and
              our social
              order discourages us from expressing our truth.
               The social
              order already in the family doesn't want the truth of who
              we are, but rather
              some kind of mask.  Everyone
              there
              is already wearing masks, and
              this we
              imitate from childhood onward.
               The very first
              thing deep psychological art we learn is to put on a mask.
              
            
That
              is
              the fundamental nature of childhood and it leads easily to
              the
              correlative creation of an outer personality - it
              is a mask
              designed to navigate troubled emotional seas.
               We have how we
              behave, and then who
              we really are inside - known
              to our
              secret self.  Conflict
arises
              between the two modes of being - the
              mask and
              the reality.  Everyone
solves
              the conflict in unique ways.
               Some parts we
              mask, other parts we
              share.   The
              variations
              on the mixture are remarkable, and
              once we
              really appreciate the nature of individuality - the true
              spirit of the
              individual human being - we
              will
              discover that scientific materialism has been itself a
              mask hiding our
              fear of religious domination for a long long time.
              
            
The
              social
              order itself put on a mask.
               The whole
              advertising  industry
exists
              to manipulate  this
              conflict
              for the benefit of commerce.
               The soul
              healer will find that in order to truly heal the
              individual, he
              must
              simultaneously help to heal the social.
              
            
And, all
              the keys
              to this vast work lie within his own humanity.
               We discover
              and heal the truth of ourselves, and
              we at the
              same time discover and heal the truth of the world. Fully
              half of
              what the soul healer can know is available to him only
              through a
              scientific and objective introspection.
               At present the
              soul healer only knows what is available through his
              senses.  What lies
              interior, a
              vast
              landscape already explored by many others, remains
              potential.  Unexplored, the
              rest of
              the world is incomplete.  Once
              explored, no
              secret is
              prohibited.
              
            
What happens when we do this
              
            
Consider
              now
              two common problems: hearing
              voices
              and serious depression.  
              
            
From
              the
              side of scientific materialism, these
              often
              reported phenomena are diagnosed as defects at the level
              of brain
              chemistry.  The
              mind, as a mechanism, is
              seen to  be producing
              such effects because those who are not seen as deviant
              supposedly do
              not experience them.   The
sub-conscious
              thought of the soul healer is that since I do not
              experience voices or become paralyzed with depression, such
              phenomena
              must be a flaw in the brain chemistry itself.
               The logical
              conclusions then is that if I can change the brain
              chemistry with drugs
              or ECT, I have fixed
              the problem.
              
            
This
              is
              very reasonable, as
              long as we
              refuse to recognize the inherent contradictions and
              present day limits
              of scientific thought about consciousness.
              
            
Suppose, for
              example, we do
              something very dangerous (only
              at this
              time, and in this
              essay, as a thought experiment), and
              consider
              the possibility that the paranoid schizophrenics'
            report of
              hearing voices is in fact accurate.
               They are
              hearing voices that are real.
               Granted this
              is not a normal condition for a human being, but
              why do we
              assume that because it is abnormal, it
              is not true.  The
              one fact
              does not automatically follow from the other.
              
            
Further, if we turn to the understanding of the historical (and recent) mind sciences (who dangerously don't accept that the mind is based in matter only), we will find all kinds of explanation for the voices. So as to not complicate things, let us just consider such a view as might arise in the West, and is modern and scientific: Anthroposophy.
If
              the
              voices are real, what, possibly, is
              the patient
              hearing?
              
            
To
              say
              invisible people is to mock the experience of the
              individual having
              the experience, but
              at the
              same time, this
              is
              precisely what we see when we notice a paranoid
              schizophrenic walking
              down the street, seemingly
talking
              to the air - talking to
              someone that is apparently not there (we don't see
              anything).
              
            
Our
              culture
              defines this as insane and seeks to rid this individual of
              this
              experience.  Yet, in
              Western
              mind sciences, two
              clear
              possibilities are recognized. One
              is that
              the schizophrenic is talking to the dead, or
              that they
              are engaged in a kind of spiritually abnormal dialog with
              the double or
              the shadow.  These
              mind
              sciences would not say that the individual talking to
              invisible people
              is behaving in a spiritually healthy way, yet
              at the
              same time they would say that what the schizophrenic
              experiences is
              real, and not
              illusory (albeit warped by psychic imbalances).
              
            
This
              turns
              everything on its head, certainly.
               Yet, it
              also
              redefines the problem, and
              in a quite
              significant way.  The
              problem at
              once ceases to be one of ridding the brain mechanism of a
              mechanical
              dysfunction, but
              of actual
              soul healing, for
              something
              is out of sorts in terms of the self-consciousness of the
              individual.  The
              inwardness
              is out of balance, and
              what is
              out of balance can be restored to harmony.
              
            
Nor
              does
              this exclude physical therapies.
               Rudolf Steiner, the
              discoverer
              of Anthroposophy, gave
              a series
              of lectures to an audience of both pastors and doctors, which
              he
              called Pastoral
              Medicine.  He
              talked at
              length and specifically about mental illness, putting
forward
              the idea that many such individuals needed both medical
              care
              and pastoral care, simultaneously.
              
            
Just
              to
              give an example from personal experience.
               I was working
              on a woman's unit at a for-profit psychiatric facility
              where was
              admitted a nun.  She
              was a
              member of an order that teaches children and she no doubt
              was
              exhibiting anomalous behaviors.
                What struck me
              as particularly tragic, was
              that while
              she was in the hospital, the
              inner
              ground of her spiritual life (daily
              prayer
              and Mass etc.) was
              ignored.  If fact, I
              was the only
              one who would talk to her about her spiritual life, and
              it was
              clear how much she hungered just to have someone listen to
              that aspect
              of her soul.
              
            
Of
              course, the reader may
              now say this is ridiculous, but
              the reader
              no doubt has not practiced meditation and other inner
              disciplines for
              years.  Had they
              engaged in such practices, the
              schizophrenics' experiences
              then take on an entirely different meaning.
               Hearing voices
              and seeing things that supposedly aren't there is a common
              stage of
              spiritual development well know to those on a meditative
              path.  When mind
              becomes sufficiently inwardly silent, it
              also
              becomes receptive to that which is otherwise too subtle to
              be
              experienced by ordinary consciousness. 
              
              
            
Our
              self-conscious
              subjectivity is actually more real than matter, and
              when it
              wakes up to itself sufficiently, it
              discovers
              another world along side the one we normally experience
              through the
              senses.
              
            
It
              would
              go too far here to give meditation instruction, but
              at the
              least lets revisit some of what science thinks is knows.
               For example, it
              is common
              in an experiment, where
              the
              brain is  being watched
              with a CT scan, to
              observe a
              certain sequence: the
subjectivity
              is asked to perform a certain mental function (solve
              a
              puzzle, for example), and
              then at
              some point there appears to the scan a great deal of
              activity in some
              part of the brain, after
              which
              the subjectivity reports the solution.
               These
              observations are seen as demonstrating not only that the
              brain solved
              the puzzle (after all the observed
              electrical activity occurred in
              time prior to the report of the solving of the puzzle), but
              also what
              part of the brain was involved.
              
            
The
              problem
              here isn't the observations being made by the
              investigating
              scientist, but
              rather
              with the interpretation of their meaning.
               Remember above
              that we pointed out the tendency in brain studies to leave
              aside the
              social agreement between the investigating subjectivity
              and the
              subjectivity of the one whose brain is being studied.
               The physicist
              knows he has to reinsert this into his appreciation of
              what happened in
              his split-beam experiment, so
              lets do the
              same here.
              
            
Causally
              the
              first thing that has happened is the social agreement by
              which the
              self-consciousness of the scientist asked the
              self-consciousness of the
              research subject to
              engage is certain activity (solve
              the
              puzzle in this case).
               Without that
              request, nothing
              happens.
              
            
Just
              as
              with the indeterminacy problem for the physicist, there
              is no
              brain activity to observe without the social agreement
              asking the
              subjectivity of the one whose brain is being studied to
              engage in
              self-conscious mental activity.
               The next thing
              observed is the electrical discharges in the brain.
               Prior to this, however, the
              subject
              has inwardly acted (which the subject certainly
              experiences, and the
              scientist if he is honest about his own introspective
              knowledge of his
              own mind also regularly experiences).
               The causal
              train is: scientist
              asks > subject acts
              inwardly > brain activity
              is observed > then
              the
              subject reports the solution to the puzzle.
               The actual
              brain activity is surrounded by four self-conscious
              subjective  acts, and
              it is only
              our preconceived paradigm that makes us isolate the brain
              activity as
              if it is causally independent.
               The fourth act
              is the scientist's subjective act of interpretation of the
              meaning of
              the experiment.
              
            
1) scientist asks
2) subject acts inwardly
3) brain activity is observed
4) subject reports a solution to the puzzle
5)
              scientist
              interprets the meaning of the experiment
              
            
Clearly
              the
              observed brain activity is caused by the inner activity of
              the
              puzzle solving subject, and
              therefor
              the observed brain activity is a consequence of, not
              the cause of, this
              inner
              puzzle-solving act.  What
              is
              actually being observed, once
              we free
              ourselves of the constraints of the paradigm, is
              a spiritual
              act which needs a material brain to act in a material
              world.
              
            
The
              research
              subject can't hear the voice of the scientist asking for
              his
              cooperation, without
              the
              physical ear, nor
              can the
              research subject report the solution to the puzzle without
              the material
              apparatus of the voice box.
               If, for
              example, we wired the
              scientists up as well, we
              would see
              the whole sequence of events quite clearly.
               But every time
              there was observable brain activity, there
              is prior
              to that the spiritual activity (thinking)
            of the
              participants in the experiment.
              
            
Yes, I
              know, there are lots
              of brain activity going on without the self-conscious
              intervention of
              the thinking subject, but
              all that
              just goes to prove the observation of soul healers in the
              centuries
              prior to the full materialization of scientific thinking, when
              Freud and
              others re-discovered the existence of the sub-conscious
              and unconscious
              elements of human inner life (something know to ancient
              mind sciences
              for centuries).  The
self-conscious
              subject has to be coaxed into sufficient self observation (talk
              therapy) in order to be
              able to report, what
              has
              otherwise been hidden from the I, or
              self-consciousness.
              
            
If
              this
              process of self examination is aided by the modern mind
              sciences
              rooted in deep inner disciplines, then
              it is
              possible to go even further in the direction of needed
              discoveries that
              can shed a great deal of light on the soul health of many.
               What the
              Freudians etc. discovered
              was
              just the surface of a plane of existence already well
              known to
              Alchemists, and
              others, for centuries.
               The
              sub-conscious and unconscious aspects of human inner life
              are already a
              well explored territory.
              
            
If
              this
              understanding is then integrated with all the remarkable
              research
              on brain physiology and chemistry, a
              whole
              unknown world of soul healing can result, such
              that ECT
              and overly powerful drugs then become completely
              unnecessary.  The
              scientists
              of the material world have done a great work, which
              is only
              limited  in its
              application by the restrictions imposed by the no longer
              workable
              paradigm of strict scientific materialism (all
              is matter, there
              is no
              spirit).
              
            
Let
              us
              come at this once more, this
              time with
              respect to depression, instead
              of
              hearing voices.  What
              do the
              deep explorers of our shared human inwardness already know
              about
              depression?
              
            
What
              is
              the basic phenomena of depression?
               It is a
              paralysis of the will, and
              this a
              varying degrees.  The
              deeper the
              mal-ease, the
              more
              immobile the patient.  Some
              would
              take to their beds and never leave, if
              not
              otherwise treated.  
              
            
The
              mind
              sciences of the Occident (as
              opposed to
              those of the Orient - who
              are
              differently oriented in terms of goals)
            have long
              recognized what is to be called: the
              doctrine
              of the temperaments (the
              choleric, the
              phlegmatic, the
              sanguine
              and the melancholic).
               These are
              quite apt objective observations of general human
              characteristics, and
              can be
              quite useful in their application.
               Depending on
              the temperament the course taken by depression will be
              different.  A
              choleric
              might ignore it until some crisis ensues, while
              the
              melancholic will find self-satisfied glory in it, for
              it proves all his worst
              fears.
              
            
What
              is
              similar to all is the influence of the double or the
              shadow.  There really
              is no understanding of the human being without
              appreciating not only
              soul and spirit, but
              also the
              dark side - the shadow.
               One writer (see
Meditations
              on the Tarot, Arcanum
              XV The
              Devil), speaks
              in
              quite practical terms of the tempter, the
              prosecutor
              and of egregores.
              
            
Egregores
              are
              older (and wiser)
            terms for what
              addicts know as “the
              monkey on my back”.
               I have taken
              to abandoning that name (it
              is clearly
              too archaic), and
substituting
              the idea of “wounds”.
               We bear wounds
              in the soul (psyche), some
              of which
              fester in such a way that they overwhelm our conscious
              will.  I point out
              the temperaments and the three-fold nature of the shadow
              simply to
              suggest that this way of thinking is as equally complex
              and rich as is
              the present day conventional view.
               Not only that, but
              what is
              being offered here is meant to supplement, not
              replace
              the conventional view.   
              
            
I
              also
              mean to suggest that depression is complicated, and
              one has to
              in any event carefully observe and examine whoever has
              such a problem
              with attention to a lot of detail, for
              not only
              is everyone quite individual, as
              all soul
              healers appreciate, the
              situation
              is delicate, and
              the
              patient very vulnerable and unsure -
            they won't
              know what facts to share, and
              may often
              hide relevant phenomena for a variety of personal reasons.
              
            
If
              it
              is clear that the basic problem is a paralysis of the
              will, and a related
              experience of “life
              is too much”, then
              we can be
              fairly sure that the shadow, in
              the form of
              the prosecutor is in play.  In
              the soul, the
              ego (or spirit)
            is overwhelmed
              by the dark.
              
            
A
              major
              aspect of the problem is that we tend to think that this
              is an
              experience that should be eliminated -
            people, we
              often
              believe, ought to not
              suffer, but should be
              happy.  A choleric, who
              can more
              easily ignore a deep case of the
               “blues”, will
              look down
              upon a melancholic, who
              revels in
              this mood.  Since
              our
              culture teaches no coherent inner disciplines (materialism
doesn't
              recognize their need), people
              do not
              think that the ego can be taught how to manage their soul
              life out of
              their own inner will.  Thinking
              the
              brain is the cause of all inner states, we
              don't
              really following those lines of thought that would lead us
              to
              appreciating other possibilities. 
               
At
              a
              cultural age where some think the self-consciousness is an
              illusion, we
              will no
              doubt never consider that this very self-consciousness can
              become the
              master of  its
              feeling
              life.  Of course, all
              kinds of
              people engage in serious self-help or self-development
              disciplines, with
              success.  Some people do
              manage, through such
              as the 12 Steps, to
              overcome
              addiction and alcoholism, using
              a
              discipline that sees the whole process as spiritual in
              nature.  Our culture is
              full of examples where the I masters something of the
              inner life, unless
              you get
              in the mental health system, which
              isn't
              permitted (in general)
            to apply any
              other treatment modalities but medications.
              
            
I
              always
              found it the strangest kind of paradox, in the hospital
              where I
              worked for ten years, to go from the adult unit to the
              substance abuse
              unit, where two
              entirely different paradigms were at work.
               What was even
              stranger was to watch how those labeled dual-diagnosis were treated.
               A bi-polar
              addict was a odd creature indeed (you
              just have
              to read the treatment plans and the doctors intake
              interview, to
              see just
              how weird this can be).
               For the addict
              especially, the
              problem
              was very acute, for
              what most
              troubles them (their
              addiction) tends to
              require that they take no drugs at all.
               But if they
              are simultaneously described as bi-polar with an
              addiction, and
              mostly
              depressive (those with mania
              aren't so bothered by their so-called mental disease)
            there is a big
              problem. 
              
            
How
              to
              you prescribe to an addict an upper to defeat their
              depression?
              
            
If
              we
              survey the field over the last 40 years, we
              will see
              how just at this juncture
              the
              profession itself created addictions to mood altering
              drugs.  Have a
               mood disorder (that
              is have a
              soul state the culture defines as deviant), why
              lets give
              you a happy pill.  Oh, sorry, you've
              become
              an addict to Valium now?  Gosh, you
              sure are a
              wreck. (The system and the
              doctors are not responsible -
            right?)
              
            
To
              summarize:
              
            
The
              soul
               healer who
               undertakes a
              serious study  of
              his own
              inwardness, following
              a
              modern mind science, will
              find
              their ability to help people greatly increased with every
              step they
              take in self knowledge and understanding.
              
            
Details
              can
              be found in my books: the Way of the Fool;
            and, American Anthroposophy.
              
            
the forces opposed to the self-development
of the soul healer
              
            
Social
              institutions
              acquire power, and
              their
              leaders gain wealth and prestige.
               Pharmaceutical
              corporations have a lot at stake in manufacturing drugs to “help”
            the mentally
              ill.
               Politicians like to be seen as “doing
              something”.
               People in
              general don't want to be bothered by deviant behavior.
               Patients cry
              out for aid.
              
            
Like
              many
              people, the soul
              healer is confronted with a house of mirrors of choices.
               He can swim
              with the pack, or
              plot his
              own course.  One
              way is
              easier, the other
              harder.  Which way does
              Society need him to swim?  If we
              define Society by its power structures, those structures
              will certainly
              need the soul healer to provide services that lets the
              powerful take
              action.  In the Soviet Union, hospitalization for a
              "mental"
              illness was a political tool of a totalitarian State.
               Recently
              during the Bush II administration, psychologists were used
              to oversee
              torture and to help in its application.
              
            
As
              I
              pointed out above, the soul healer is in the center of a
              surrounding
              set of forces, and this fact then reveals something else.
               While
              we can urge that a whole society move in a certain
              direction, if we
              understand the practicalities of how social change
              actually arises we
              realize that such change occurs one individual at a time.
               It
              can't happen by fiat from Washington, but only organically
              out of
              individual free choices.  
              
            
Think
              globally,
              act locally.  Only the soul healer can give us the
              example and from there suggest what others can and ought
              to do.
               The coming revolution is personal and biographical.
                We do it from within our own lives.  My
              novel America
              Phoenix begins with
              the following discussion, which is entirely relevant here
              and a good
              place to end (with a bit of Art):
              
            
"Synergy?" said Hex-man.
"Right, synergy" replied J.C. "Things happen together. The whole is greater than the sum of the parts. We tend to think that political and social change requires that we organize movements. Remember when we always talked about the "movement".
"Sort of, that was really before my time".
"Yea, right, okay. So anyway, synergy is about multiple things happening together to create something they can't accomplish alone. Its one of the main organizing principles living in the social organism. Just one, by the way, but for our purposes it will help to understand it.
"Yea, I get it. You and I, we do something together. Get better results than if we do it alone. Plus, other people, people we don't even know. They do stuff, and it interacts with our stuff synergistically. Is that a word?"
"I think so, but you get the basic idea. The thing is we can count on it. In fact we need to become highly aware of it. Think of us as trying to navigate the seas of history. In these seas are currents, and if we can ride some of the currents, stuff happens in a better way, than if we are trying to steer across them or against them. So we have to learn to make mental maps of the seas of social existence, and then find that place we want to work, and with whom - keeping in mind that we aren't alone and that others have similar goals and it all works together synergistically. "
"Okay, I get it I guess. But can you explain a little why this works, especially when people aren't really organized into mass movements?"
"Well, actually, mass movements are kind of dangerous. The more mass the less consciousness. We get mobs and violence. Small groups appreciating that each other exists do better. They concentrate more on what they really can do, and less on ideology. The phrase "think globally, act locally" understands this.
"Try it this way. Lots of people today want to decide for themselves what is true and what is right to do. Think of this impulse, a very common modern human impulse, as a kind of emerging social force in the evolution of human consciousness, or human nature as some might say. But everyone doesn't always agree about what is right, yes? Yet, what happens is that when a lot of people are struggling to do what is right, and not just hiding under the covers, you get a lot of right things being done in a lot of places. The way the social organism works, in its synergistic sense, is that all these right things add up to something more than the individuals can often imagine.
"Everyone has a place, the place right where they are. In that place they seek to do what Plato might have called the Good. This ideal of the Good is like a wonderful landscape, seen from many different directions. So each one of us, seeking to do the Good, helps bring this wonderful landscape more and more into real social existence. Each of us is like a kind of small sun, shining into the social organism our own striving for goodness."
"Okay, I can see that. But how do we know what the Good is?"
"Well, everyone has their own Way of course, but if I was to try to put the how of it into words, it has to do with when we think with our hearts and not just our heads. If we think just with our heads we get a kind of cold and calculating idea, generally one more selfish. But we need to think with our hearts, that is we need to think in a warmer way, more empathic, more caring of the other person, the thou. So we will the good and think with our hearts. Everyone can do that, don't you think. Or at least try."
"Yea, I get it. Don't need somebody to tell us what to do. We do our own thing, and if we will the good and think with our hearts, something happens all over the country or the world because of the synergy principle, something we can't imagine."
"Right, you got it Hex-man. Oh, one other thing. Ever see the movie Six Degrees of Separation?"
"No, what's it about?"
"Well, the story is kind of funny, but it has this idea behind the title. The idea is that between ourselves and any other person there are only six relationships. You know someone, and they know someone else, and so on for six relationships, until each of us is connected to any other person in the world by only six such relationships, or six degrees of separation."
"Crap. Can't be true. You think between me and the President are only six people separated? Shit, no way."
"I don't know, its just the idea. Maybe some math people invented the idea. But there is some truth. We are connected in ways we don't see. You know me. I was in Vietnam, and I knew this CIA guy. Maybe now he works in Washington and his boss knows a Senator, and the Senator knows the President."
"Christ, that is weird."
"Yea, I know. But think about it in a different way, along the lines of what we have been doing with the synergy idea. These connections are real. We influence each other. You need something from me, or I need something from you, then these relationships become important. Things spread like splashes on a pond. Who knows what energy flows along the connections. "
        
***********************************************************
Transcendentalism Comes of Age*
- the transcendentalist impulse, heretical
Christianity
            and American Anthroposophy -
            
          
*this title
            follows the trail blazed by Owen Barfield's book of essays
            called: Romanticism
            Comes
            of Age,
            which sought to show how the romantics were a preview in
            time of the
            impulses connected to European Anthroposophy.
             Here we
            do the same thing, only this time seeking to show the same
            essential
            connection between the transcendentalists and American Anthroposophy
            
          
introduction
            
          
Some readers
            of this will have no idea
            what “Anthroposophy” is.
             Rudolf Steiner, its scientific
            discoverer,
             defined it as follows: “Anthroposophy
            is
            a path of cognition from the spirit in man to the Spirit in
            the
            Universe.”  It
            will help to appreciate what I mean by “scientific
            discoverer”.
            
          
Anthroposophy
            is a name given by Steiner
            to a universal human capacity.
             This potential is developed
            naturally in some cases, and only by hard work in
            others.  In
            some individuals there is a mixture of both.
             Details can be found in my
            book American
            Anthroposophy.
             This development involves
            the awakening
            of the will in human thinking (cognition), such
            that
            this will is able to bring about the metamorphosis of human
            thinking from its present state to the new (previously
            potential) state.
            
          
Thinking then
            becomes able, following this
            metamorphosis, to
            connect
            human consciousness to the Spirit, or Universal Consciousness (Emerson's Over-Soul).  Emerson
            developed this capacity more self-consciously (through hard work
            and instinct) and Thoreau was was able to
            do it more naturally (instinctively).  We know, for example, the degree to which Thoreau was able to be awake within the true
            thoughts
            of the natural world.
            
          
Emerson
            described this condition (from one point of view)
          in this way, in his essay Nature, written
            at
            age 33 in 1836: Nature is a thought incarnate and turns to
            thought once
            again as ice becomes water and then gas.  The World is mind
            precipitated, and the volatile essence is
            forever escaping into the state of free thought.  Rudolf Steiner, at age 25, 50 years later in 1886, wrote this in his book A
            Theory
            of Knowledge Implicit in Goethe's World Conception: Thought is the last
            of a
            series of processes by which Nature is formed.
            
          
For our
            modern conscious, we might describe the
            situation this way:  The assumption of natural science is that thought is
            disconnected from
            the world (a kind
            of naive dualism).  Further, under the remnants of the
            once popular doctrine of logical positivism, such as
            analytic philosophy and various philosophies of
            language, thought
            itself (in
            consciousness) is
            believed to really only be available to be observed and
            analyzed when
            it enters language in sentences (this is justified by our naive experience of
            thinking in
            its discursive form, as if we were inwardly speaking to ourselves).
             For both Emerson and
            Steiner, thought could be
            appreciated best right where it appeared before us in our
            own
            consciousness.  And
            someone
            like Thoreau, didn't
            so much think about this, but rather did it.
             That is, he thought, and wrote down, or spoke, what he
            thought.
            
          
Steiner, in particular, described his
            book The
Philosophy
            of Spiritual Activity as: some results of introspection following the
            methods of
            natural science.
             One was to think about
            thinking - to cogitate about cogitation, using as much
            as possible the methods of natural science: objective
            observation and
            experimentation.  We are to seek an empirical knowledge of
            thought and
            thinking, as appears
            directly
            within our own consciousness.  Why?
            
          
Because in
            that most intimate sphere of
            our experience all the secrets of thought and the world as a
            co-joined
            unity (not
            a
            dualism, but a
            monism) can
            be
            perceived.
            
          
The 19th Century was the full flowering of natural
            science.  Parallel to that
            development, the
            Romantics
            and the Transcendentalists offered an alternative to the
            materialism (all is
            matter, there
            is no spirit) then coming to dominate the
            thinking of the educated Western world.  In America, the
            transcendentalists appeared at the beginning of the 19th
            Century most strongly in Concord, but by the end (the 1880's) the power of that impulse
            wained, and by 1890 the Concord School of
            Philosophy had closed.
            
          
Research by
            Steve Burman, presented recently at the
            Concord Convocation (directed
            by
            local Concordian Stuart Weeks), showed
            that
            even though the Concord School ended, it ended with
            the knowledge that something was about to
            be born in Central Europe out of German Idealism (Hegel, Schilling, Goethe etc.)  This
            assessment was
            correct, for
            simultaneously to this waining (for a time) of the Concord School in America, in Europe
            Rudolf Steiner (as a young man) was bringing in the culmination of the work of
            German
            Idealism and marrying it to the scientific impulse (to the practical  application of
            this work
            he later gave the name Anthroposophy).
            
          
In the early 20th Century the idea (but not its practical
            realization) of
            European Anthroposophy became known in America.
             Unfortunately, this took the
            course of too much study of things Steiner
            wrote and said, and
            not
            enough practice of inward disciplines.
             This confusion of practice
            and study is
            where the transcendentalist impulse becomes related to
            heretical
            Christianity.
            
          
Traditional
            Christianity has become
            dominated by systems of belief (rooted in an excess of biblical study), and few people
            actually bother to suffer the trials of
            practicing fully what is taught in the Gospels.
             Heretical Christianity has
            always
            emphasized practice over dogma, which is why the Roman Church so often declared
            these
            folks heretics and tortured them and then killed them. 
            
          
The Gospels
            themselves always hinted at
            the fundamental problem, by identifying two groups at the Birth: the shepherds
            and the
            kings.  The
            kings were related to the old pagan mysteries, which
            sacrificed their prior eminence (symbolized by the gifts of
            gold etc.), so that the Way of the
            Shepherds could begin to live into the world.
             This new Way of Faith was
            rooted in the
            social form of Pastor and Flock.
             The stream of kings' wisdom (the more ancient
            Way of Gnosis)
          did not leave completely, but remained
            active
            wherever some kind  of direct experience of the Divine Mystery was
            cultivated
            and taught. The
            kings
            taught that the individual human being did not need a
            pastor, and that all individuals
            were able themselves to be priests.
            
          
This stream
            of kings' wisdom, such as the Essenses, Gnostics, Manicheans, Pagans, Alchemists, Rosicrucians, some early natural
            philosophers, Christian
            Hermeticists, Anthroposophists
            etc., was more
            interested in the truth than in an official
            institutional point of view.   By the
            time
            transcendentalism appeared in Concord, for example, the power of
            traditional Christianity to severely punish
            heretical thinking had been lost, although the capacity of traditional Christian
            authorities to studiously ignore contrary ideas remained.
            
          
Such was the
            fate of European
            Anthroposophy as it slowly emerged in 20th Century Central Europe - the traditional
            Churches ignored it.  In a similar fashion, Stuart Weeks' effort, through the four years
            here in Concord of the annual Concord Convocation, seeking to
            unite
            transcendentalist thought and Anthroposophy, is basically
            ignored by local Concord Churches.
             Most lovers of the work
            of the transcendentalists here in Concord look to the past - to Emerson, Thoreau, Fuller, and so forth, and not to the
            present, or the future.  Even the Convocation
            didn't quite know what to do with itself, for like most
            of the Anthroposophical Movement worldwide, the Convocation
            was
            unable to maintain the scientific discipline which Steiner
            modeled and
            taught.
            
          
Enter
            American Anthroposophy, or Transcendentalism
            Comes of Age.  What
            does
            it mean: Comes
            of Age?
            
          
This could be
            answered in several
            different ways.  I write that last sentence (thought) so one doesn't
            assume that the next sentences tell the
            whole tale.
            
          
We all know
            that time is rushing by at an
            almost breakneck speed.  Change forces us toward ends we hardly seem
            ready to see, much less master.
             Both Anthroposophy and
            Transcendentalism need to be American - that is practical
            and pragmatic.
             We are far past a time when
            mere good
            thoughts and idealism are to be of much use.
             Americans are doers of
            deeds.  We create and  invent and accomplish.
            
          
American
            Anthroposophy, if it actually is
            Transcendentalism Comes
            of
            Age, must be useful to our present social crisis.  What then is
            American* Anthroposophy as a practice, rather than a
            dogma or a
            doctrine?  What
            can
            one do with it?  
            
          
[Steiner
            recognized there would come to
            be an American Anthroposophy, see my book for details.]
            
          
Interesting
            enough, Steiner described
             Americans as natural
            anthroposophists, and being English speakers, they were also
            instinctively in what he called the
            Consciousness Soul in their life of rights (their public life
            of law and politics).
             This last means that we
            Americans, in spite of our human
             flaws, are also at the
            leading
            edge of social transformation.
             We insist, for example, that politics
            be moral.  We get confused (obviously) by what that means in practice, but we need our
            public life to be more than just a vanity
            of the power hungry - the sharks, wolves and pirates.
             The Republic was founded on
            such a need and view, and if American
            Anthroposophy can't help with that, then sorry, but come back later when we have the time to be “philosophical” (in the sense of
            contemplating our collective navels).
            
          
If what was
            hinted at above about the
            difference between the naive dualism of natural science (thought  is disconnect
            from the
            world), and if Emerson
            and
            Steiner's appreciation of the fact that thought and world
            are a unity (a monism) were better known, we could then begin to
            see something practical.  The instinctive wisdom of think globally, act locally can become a
            science.
            
          
Our personal
            thoughts are not
            disconnected from life, but rather represent a perception of the living
            inside of
            existence.  In
            fact, we often
            are conflicted because so much of modern life suggests we
            can't
            personally know, but have to rely on experts and scientists.   Everywhere
            this is
            rebelled against, in small ways and large.  As the world
            continues its movement toward increasing
            social chaos (an
            intermediate stage of an ongoing metamorphosis toward a new
            civilization - that is, Western Civilization is
            in the process of dying into a new becoming), we
            are
            more and more being thrust on our own powers of observation, judgment and
            thought.
            
          
We live the immediacy
            of our
            biographies, not
            some
            guy in Washington, or some academic in an Ivory Tower.  We have to deal
            with the
            effects of each other's increasing stress driven craziness, and it will be
            our own
            thinking and judgment that pulls us through.
             Emerson could not have put
            it more
            succinctly: In self trust all virtues
            are
            comprehended.
            
          
Yet, we are wise to
            be cautious.
             We know we often make
            mistakes, and that frequently our
            thoughts turn out to not be true.
             Science wants to tell us
            that we are just material brains, whose impulses were
            mapped out millions of years ago by a blind chance
            evolution.  That's a reasonable (but false) idea, with the existential
            problem coming when we face what to do when there is no food
            and water
            in our house, while
            our
            neighbor appears to have plenty.
             Survivalist and militia
            groups are getting ready to treat
            this as if we still lived in caves.
             What was once called Social
            Darwinism is not pretty in
            practice, and
            many of us expect more of ourselves.  The age of
            paternalism (dominion over)  is giving way to a rebirth of maternalism (communion with). 
            
            
          
As this time
            of less and less material
            wealth descends upon Americans (joining us to social conditions already common
            among the
            majority of the rest of the world), we
            will
            face difficult choices.  Is Emerson's seeming idealism of self trust and
            self
            reliance a fiction?
            
          
American Anthroposophy is about how to think.  Not what, but how.  It is practice
            not
            theory.  It is
            a science of thinking that gains for the individual all the
            confidence
            they need in their own capacity for sound judgment in a time
            of seeming
            social madness.  The lessons of Katrina are to be multiplied.  We can't
            expect the
            government to save us, but must learn to rely on ourselves and each
            other.  As a consequence this new how of thinking has both an
            individual and a community component (when necessary, such as when
            faced with a personal moral choice, we do it ourselves -
          we can also do this new how
            of thinking together, through conversation). 
            
          
While many
            will want a kind of simple
            Mac-version of this new how of thinking, its deeper
            reality is not to be gained like service in a
            fast food place.  All the same a brief sketch of this new
            thinking can be
            provided.
            
          
Properly
            called: Living Thinking (In The Acts of the Apostles this is called the
            experience
            of holy breath), this transcendental
            form
            of cognitive activity involves
            four
            stages of development.  These may be identified as thinking about, thinking with, thinking within and thinking as.  Each stage
            morphs out of the prior condition through an
            inwardly willed sacrifice (renunciation), coupled
            with
            an intention to love more and more selflessly the object of
            thinking.
            
          
To continue
            briefly: Ordinary consciousness is
            basically thinking about.  We generally think about other people, for example.  When we try to see the
            world from their point of view, we are moving from thinking about to thinking with.  This act, however, requires the
            conscious or
            instinctive renunciation of our natural inclination to
            re-actively like
            or dislike another person.  If we like them too much (an excess of
            sympathy), we
            will
            not see them truly (a
            kind of love that is blind).  If we dislike them too much (an excess of
            antipathy) we also will not see them truly
            - which lesson is described in
            the Gospels
            in the Sermon on the Mount as the problem of the mote and
            the beam.  To think truly with another, we have to renounce these
            reactive feelings, and consciously (willfully) make new (redeemed) mental pictures that seek to know them from
            their point
            of view - to think with them.
            
          
The
            transition from thinking with to thinking within is more difficult.
             The mind must learn to
            empty itself entirely of its given thought content as
            regards the
            object of thinking.  In the Sermon on the Mount this is expressed in
            the
            Beatitude: blessed are the
            poor in
            spirit, for theirs is the
            kingdom of
            heaven.
              To be poor in spirit
            means to not have a thought content
            to which we are attached.  We have surrendered our personal and individual
            point of
            view - renounced
            it.  When
            consciousness is empty of its old coagulated thought, the duality
            discussed
            above is overcome, and the first stages of a true new and living
            monism
            arises.  Mind
            is no longer separate from the inside of sense experience, but within the inside of
            sense
            experience.  Just
            as
            we have an inside of which we are deeply self aware, so does
            everyone else, including Nature.
             Remember: “Nature
            is
            a thought incarnate,...” wrote Emerson.
            
          
After
            learning to let “it
            think
            in me”, which is the
            way Steiner
            puts it, or by
            learning to “think on our knees”, which is the
            way the author of Meditations
on
the
            Tarot: a journey
            into Christian Hermeticism puts it - by stepping so
            strongly
            away from our own point of view, we are now on the threshold of learning to think as, not just within.
             This final struggle involves
            renouncing
            the centrality of our own self.   We think fully of
            the other, as if the self didn't exist.
            
          
Now this
            process of learning to think about, then with, then within and finally as is circle and spiral-like in
            nature.  Ordinary
            consciousness
            does not disappear, but  the will in thinking is
            strengthened.  Moreover, something already
            possessed by
            ordinary consciousness becomes
            raised out of
            instinct and into full self-consciousness.
            
          
When, for example, a mother
            selflessly thinks for and about the needs of her
            children, she
            instinctively can intuit what she needs to do that is the good, or that moral
            action
            called for by the circumstances she faces.
             When our consciousness is
            focused on other-need, to the
            exclusion of what is for our own benefit, we become knowing doers (Steiner's phrasing).  We find, by this selflessness, those thoughts which the situation calls forth.  We know the inside of the
            circumstances of
            our lives.
            
          
Natural
            science, for example, stops at thinking about
            Nature.  The
            scientist keeps his own consciousness and nature apart (having assumed
            already a
            disconnect).  He doesn't even conceive
            that Nature could have consciousness.  Not looking
            for it, he cannot find it.
             Were he decide to look for
            it, the
            door to the inside of Nature is through his own
            inside.  We
            don't approach any kind of real intimate relationship with
            another
            human being by focusing solely on their surfaces - what we see
            through our
            senses.  To
            know them, we
            have to learn of their inside, which we call: getting to know
            each other.  The same
            process is required with regard to Nature.
            
          
We know today the moral emptiness of thinking of another human being as a thing - as an object without an inwardness or its own meaning. We have mostly overcome making slaves of other human beings. We have not yet overcome making a slave of Nature. We are working Nature to death, and because we are interdependent with Nature, we are in effect murdering ourselves and our posterity. As Einstein pointed out: "We can't solve problems by using the same kind of thinking we used when we created them.”
This then is Living Thinking (holy breath), which
            is
            precisely what is needed to deal with the crises of our
            time.  We have to learn to not
            just think about
            the elements of existence  (the living people, the living social processes), but with, within and as these elements.  Existence has
            an inside, just
            as
            does each human being we meet.  That inside can be known.
            
          
With the
            above thoughts we can now
            appreciate more deeply something hidden in the instinctive
            wisdom: think globally, act locally.  To think globally means not just to think and
            try to
            understand the whole world, but to think holistically - to
            grasp
            with thinking the whole situation, including its inside.
             To think globally means to
            go beyond the stark tendency
            of natural science to concentrate solely on analysis, but instead to
            consciously practice synthesis.
            
          
In fact, science doesn't
            know at all what to do with the social
            crisis of the world, for it never asks the relevant questions.  Religions
            doesn't do all
            that well in this realm either, tending to believe they have a monopoly on
            spiritual
            truths (although
their
            tradition of social good works and service accomplishes much) .
             Government, as Katrina
            taught us, is also mostly useless.  We are on our own.  What will we choose to do?
            
          
In point of
            fact, the movement from a dead and dying paternalism (dominion over) toward a new and
            living
            social maternalism (communion
            with) includes
            a
            movement away from I toward Thou.
             What I can or cannot do
            alone is far outweighed by what
            we can do together.
            
          
Thinking, which
            frequently has to be individual (in order to be truly moral), when it is
            applied to the needs of several has to acquire
            another quality.  We have to think-together, to take council
            together.  I-thinking acquires morality through selflessness, but at the same
            time we-thinking requires not just
            selflessness, but
            a
            capacity to weave the thoughts of many into a whole.  In our we-thinking
            conversations we
            have to unite the separate thoughts into a unity.  An individual
            trying to
            dominate the conversation does not serve the whole, but only
            himself as an
            isolate.  He
            raises his thought above the
             potential of the unity of
            all present thoughts.
            
          
We know too
            that this isn't easy.  There are whole
            disciplines connected to how to achieve what some call
            consensus.  First Nations
            communities would often discuss for days at a time serious
            issues which
            were to affect the whole.  No individual was expected to sacrifice their
            individual
            judgment and freedom to the whole
            - everyone was still free to go
            their own way.  But whatever community
            there was, that
            had
            to find some level of shared agreement through social
            processes of communion with.
            
          
A lot of
            common place sayings are
            relevant here.  The whole is
            greater than the
            sum of its parts, for example.  Many hands make light work is another.  The 12 Steps of AA are fully rooted in community
            practices.  So is the social process
            called: non-violent
            communication.  Everywhere
            we
            look at the social commons (the social below, which is more and more separate from the
            influence of the
            dying hierarchical organizations), group
            social
            processes are coming to the fore precisely because they are
            more
            effective.  They
            work!
            
          
The core of
            this working is conversation.
             True conversation at
            this level is a skill, perhaps even an art (some call it the Royal Art).  This was the
            heart of the transcendentalist impulse - the circle of
            friends.  Community (shared) problems need to be solved
            by that particular community itself, through the
            conversation of social equals.
             What is being suggested
            here is that in this practice of the Royal Art of
            Conversation, we together find the true
            inside (thoughts) of the social
            immediacy we
            share.  Not
            only its truth, but
            a
            kind of truth which is co-creative.
             We
            (together)
          participate in this socially
            creative art, by
            the
            which the many crises of the coming times are solved in ways
            never
            before thinkable, because we didn't yet need to think them.  Another common
            place
            saying comes to mind: necessity is the
            mother of
            invention.
            
          
This then is
            Transcendentalism Comes of
            Age: Finding
            the needed true thoughts through those conversations as are
            made
            necessary by our shared trials of life, in each circle
            of friends of which we are a member.
            
          
        
***********************************************************
        
The Arcanum of the Loom
by
Joel A. Wendt
Something from a distant and masked future lays its seed in our present. Is it Beast or Angel? How will we raise it, educate it, nurture it? Will we be in charge of it, or will It be in charge of us?
How can we know what lives in this erupting electronic entity? The number of people on-line has been doubling every 6 months, more or less. Web pages are growing at a similar rate. Is it a cancer? Or an intervention divine?
When America was being born in revolution, electricity was almost a magician's art. Some felt that in discovering this energenic power, they had finally found the soul!
Many are writing about this unusual phenomena, which is to accompany us on our journey into the third millennium. In the pages that follow is just one more picture, perhaps ...
first iteration
Lets start by just trying to hold in our imaginations a picture of these events from a certain point of view.
Picture the Earth, a blue-white sphere in space, the human habitat, embedded in a field of stars. Now form a close-up of this surface, using the inner camera of your imagination pan inward, until you see just a part of the globe, the details of the clouds, and a mere slice of starlight darkness off to one side. Next paint on this part of the sphere millions of tiny tiny light points, places where individual human beings sit before a computer screen. Next, draw very thin lines joining these light points, a seeming image of the physical bindings, the wires and other transmission links, joining these computers together.
From this view, the blue-white Earth is interwoven with a very thin weaving of light, bringing countless humans into contact with each other.
Now picture the human beings, sitting before the screens. What is outer physical is only partially relevant. More significant is what is invisible, the mind, the spirit and soul, sitting before the screen. From this inner landscape comes thoughts, feelings, activity. Two aspects of this product, this generative consequence of the inner human, are very important.
The first is this. The material structure, the computers, the links, the software, all that which exists as tool was first imagined, then created by the human being. So when I sit before my computer, this tool which I am using, owes its origin to human creative deeds, to imagination, thought, heart, will, labor, stress - all that humans have done, so that computers exist and are joined together in this weaving of light. Human consciousness has extruded from its own nature certain possibilities onto the physical world. Much like a plastics factory takes liquid plastic and molds it, so human consciousness has taken the physical world and molded this tool.
The second aspect is this. When these woven joinings are used, that is when I "surf the web", "explore the loom", send e-mail, download software, play games, buy products - all that is done via the Internet, does not involve the physical, except as tool. It is my inside, my mind, my soul and spirit, which "surfs the web" and so forth.
Now consider two human beings, joined by the woven light. The physical is irrelevant. Only the soul and spiritual, the mind, the inner life, is involved. Someone sends e-mail. The next reads it. A very special process happens in these most simple acts. When I compose e-mail, before my fingers type, my inner voice speaks, and my feelings and will are involved. When I read e-mail, again my inner voice speaks, and my feelings and will are involved. The most significant acts are all invisible to the eye. The only trace left in the physical is the image-symbols, the letters, mere lines of dark on light. The meaning attributed to these symbols is all an internal act. If I mis-speak, or if I mis-read, this is my responsibility.
Not easy to communicate, one mind to the other, on the loom of woven light. Understanding the word*, both in its inner and outer manifestations, is crucial, if true communication, community and communion is sought for.
Truth can be ignored. False statements are commonplace. Abuse is not unknown. The use that is made of the loom of woven light is a moral act. The loom itself is neutral; it is simply a tool.
Imagine now the content on the loom. Web pages, websites, home-pages, commercial sites, game rooms, chat rooms, talk (most written), content, pictures, information. How does it get there? Why is it there?
Certainly that which is done for the purposes of commerce is fairly clear. But much that is on the loom, comes to be there because of love, even that which is on commercial sites. Love? Yes, love.
Go take a look. Ask about orchids, for example. Do a search for orchids. Many sites, beautiful pictures. Why is this there? Because someone loves orchids and wants to share that love with others. Much that is on the loom is there because of time and effort which is completely unpaid. No money is earned, yet the "information" is there, free, for the asking.
Suppose you thought you might have adult onset diabetes. You hear that diet can manage this disorder. You go to the loom, and behold, site after site. Information on diet, food, advice, doctors, medicines and more. Commercial sites, some, but mostly just ordinary people who have faced this problem themselves, and who, out of love, place this information, that they have won through hard labor and suffering, on the loom so that others can find it.
Now, let us imagine again our picture. The blue-white globe, nested in the field of stars, covered over with individual stars of its own, individuals, fallen stars, living on the Earth, joined by weavings of light, singing to each other, sharing, offering, giving ...
*For more insight into the moral use of the word, see Speech ; and, pragmatic moral psychology .
second iteration
Rub your feet or shoes or socks across a carpet, and touch another person to see a spark. Heat and light and sound appear, a miniature lightning flows from our finger to leap the gap between that and another object, person, wall, whatever.
On a desk, bigger than a breadbox, a computer sits. Subdued, channeled, perhaps mastered, that spark runs effortlessly, faster than thought itself, performing a million tasks a second, often in a space not much larger then a postage stamp.
What is that spark? What is electricity? One very deep thinker calls electricity "fallen light". Let us for the moment assume this is true. What is this person trying to say to us?
Lucifer is called a fallen Angel. Prideful, independent, disobedient, Lucifer could no longer face God, and fell, from Grace, from heaven. So if electricity is "fallen", or graceless and prideful and disobedient, separated from the Divine, what was its original state? What is unfallen light?
In Goethe's Farbenlehre (Theory of Color), he speaks of the "deeds and sufferings of light". What kind of physics is this which sees "light" as Being? "Fiat Lux!" spoke God, in the Creation: "Let there be Light!".
Would you like to experience this light personally?
We only think we see light, when in fact true light is invisible, and we only see color. Think on this. Look around for yourself. Look! At night, while the moon is full. During the day, when the shadows move. Yes, I know what your physics book says, but, there is a revolution coming, and it is coming right at science, and its name is: magic. (See also: Catching the Light: the entwined history of light and mind, Arthur Zanjonc)
Stand in a narrow doorway, facing into the room. Move your arms out until the backs of your hands rest against the side of the doorway. Now begin to press outward with your arms. Press hard, it needs to hurt some. Hold this pressing tension with all your strength for at least a full 60 seconds. Then quickly step into the room and completely relax your arms. Place no will in these limbs at all. If you've done this correctly, your arms will rise of their own accord, then fall, then rise again, but not quite as high as before, then fall, then rise again. Usually at least three risings.
In this way you can experience for yourself a force called levity, which is the counter pole of the gravity force. This levity force works from the cosmic periphery in toward the center as a drawing or suctional force. The rising of the sap in all plant life comes from the action of this force. However, this force is not light itself. In the science of the future, which already is appearing in this century, this force is also called the ethereal formative force, in its biological ramifications. It is the force which takes the plastic malleable nature of the biological organism and gives it form. Its existence is a by-product of the existence of light. It is our will which impels the levity force into our limb muscles, so that when we relax, the excessive levity is strong enough to overcome gravity, until it is used up. It is our will that is of the light.
Take a magnifying glass and look closely at the palms of your hands. The lines there are produced by the streaming in and out of your body, through the hands, of the ethereal formative forces. The Beings who create these forces are what the aboriginal Americans honored in their Ceremonies connected to the Four Directions.
Form an image in your imagination. Try to hold this image, not letting it slip away, or dissolve. Not at all easy to use the light, is it?
Modern materialistic science posits a completely consciousless and being-less universe. This science is only able to do this by systematically excluding data from its experiments, so that at each new stage the knowledge produced is more and more about less and less. Science can't find soul and spirit, consciousness and essence, at the basis of the universe, because at each turn of its examination it has eliminated and reduced the facts it would admit for consideration. Having excluding all that was difficult to control and count, of course it could only find a universe that was controllable and countable. Science didn't find the truth of the world, it just invented a new myth. To see the history of this, get and read: Man or Matter, by Ernst Lehrs.
Sit quietly in a chair, upright, relaxed, yet alert. Imagine that you are breathing through all the pores in your body. Don't control or alter in any way the natural semiconscious rhythm of your breathing, just form the imagination that as you inhale, light is also drawn into your body through the pores, then out again when you exhale. With some practice, you will learn to breath in and out of your body, the light. See Step II, Initiation into Hermetics, Franz Bardon.
This is unfallen light. What then is fallen light, or electricity?
Matter arises from the condensation of the elements. This condensation has occurred over time in rhythmic pulses. The elements in this case are the magical-classical ones: fire, air, water and earth. This rhythmic condensation produces in its wake an organism of a variety of types of matter, ordered according to the elemental gravity-levity balance therein - gravity and levity being by-products of the activity of the elements during this condensation. This produces the well recognized table of chemical elements. See in this regard: Radiant matter: decay and consecration, by Georg Blattmann, and The Nature of Substance, by Rudolf Hauschka.
The elements are the product of the activity of beings - invisible cosmic beings. In the human being, the seed of these cosmic powers is found in will (fire), intellect (air), feeling (water) and consciousness (earth).
Matter then is magically enchanted Being. Gurdjieff describes this in All and Everything, as the sacrifice of a group of beings who forever then accepted complete passivity. Woven into this arrangement is another class of beings, who joined in the rebellion against heaven lead by Lucifer. It is their nature which appears then in matter as cohesion. That matter has the quality that it coheres is due to the presence of these fallen light beings, as their part of that great sacrifice from which the acceptance of eternal passivity creates solidity out of pure spirit. That I have a physical body and can't put my fist through the wall next to me is due to this sacrifice.
Our technological civilization - our electrified civilization - is made possible by the unconscious breaking of this enchantment, and the freeing of this fallen light from its true and natural place and placing it instead into seemingly man made devices, so as to perform services for us. Lest you think this is completely crazy, just recall for a moment some comic book magic grimore you have seen with its strange style of writing, the symbolism of incantation and spell weaving, and then look at an electrical diagram, or wiring diagram, and realize that without the acts and symbolic thinking that has gone with this development, electricity would have remained an obscure and misunderstood element of science.
Faraday perceived the polaric and reciprocal arrangements of the energies of electricity, but his concepts regarding ponderable and imponderable natures was discarded as those who followed preferred a more spiritless set of conceptions. Clerk Maxwell's equations are not possible without Faraday's laws. Thus, the understood (by Faraday) spiritual nature of what he was working with disappears, and mankind gains some apparent mastery of electricity, but no true understanding of its nature.
Perhaps, you who are reading this, are sitting in front of a computer, and you have had some experience of what in electrical circles are called "glitches". Electricity does not always behave, and we do not always understand when it does not, because when it misbehaves it acts contrary to our assumptions about its nature. We dismiss these acts and ignore them because they do not fit the pattern we assume is true. But anomalous electrical phenomena abounds, and there are deep mysteries for those who are willing to be open to them. Keely, Russel, and Tesla, created works difficult to reproduce, which yet inspire others to follow into many places outside the mainstream thinking of modern physics (which has trapped itself in the repeating loop of the quantum assumption).
We use a tool we do not understand, and about which we hold tragic illusions. In our minds lives a false idea, a ghost, a shadow of the truth, and if we are to master the next phase of the electrification of our civilization, the so-called information revolution (a big misconception by the way) we have to begin by understanding the nature of electricity first.
A computer is a dark servant, just waiting to be even more freed from its bindings. A copper wire is not a hollow tube through which little bubbles of electricity dance. The word "current" is a misconception. Electricity does not flow. When electricity is present in an object, such as a copper wire, the deep nature of that wire is altered. The matter (the copper) exists in a different condition then it does when electricity is not present. This is why "superconductivity" is aided by extreme temperatures of cold. Consider:
We are told cooling lowers the electrical "resistance" of the matter cooled. The truth is not so difficult. Water freezes and becomes ice, that is it "crystallizes". Which means that the deep structure (what we imagine as "atomic", and "molecular", that is as very small bodies, are in fact not material bodies at all, but "points of intersection" of forces - forces being the passive will of enchanted beings) of super cooled matter is pushed in the same "direction", i.e. toward the crystalline - that is the tension in the matter between the tendencies toward chaos and the tendencies toward order is overbalanced in the direction of order. In matter so overbalanced, so placed in an "unnatural" state, "fallen light" has more freedom.
The brain has electricity in it. Our nervous system exhibits some qualities similar to electrical systems. Are our thoughts the movement of these electrical impulses? Are our thoughts some form of fallen light?
No. Our thoughts are of another nature entirely. As a by-product of that activity which produces thinking, the material apparatus of the brain (which doesn't think by the way) displays the release of "fallen light", which is also in the matter of our bodies. Our material bodies also have "coherence", and when thinking occurs, the matter ages, loses some small part of its coherence, and "electricity" appears.
The brain is an organ which mediates between the spiritual and the material. One of the ways thinking is thought about today, uses the computer as a model. Our brains are seen as similar to a computer, hardwired systems, with software built in. There is some value to this image, as long as we are careful not to make too much of it.
Consider this: A computer consists, apparently, of hardware and software - material apparatus and programs that run on that apparatus. The mind, in the view of some, is similar, just that instead of inorganic matter, it is organic (whatever that is). This view is in error, but the analogy might work if a missing parts were not left out.
Someone made the computer, thought it up, created it, and wrote the software. In addition someone uses all this in order to accomplish something, to express something. So, if this analogy is to mean anything, we have to keep the whole thing, and not believe the computer and the software evolved through blind chance, or that it operates itself purely on the basis of its internally determined structures.
So the human being has aspects which are given. He/she has other aspects which are self determined. You doubt this, you think the human being is a bio-chemically determined thing? Elsewhere on this site are materials, which if followed, will show the individual the true nature of their inner (spiritual) freedom.
Thinking is a transcendent act, not a material one. As an aid to the discover of this I refer again to The Quiet Suffering of Nature , especially the aspects concerning the study of projective geometry. Consider this:
Many years ago, Abraham Lincoln is said to have studied Euclid's Elements of Geometry, an early classical geometry text, in order to discipline his mind. Now and in the future we might study Olive Whicher's Projective Geometry: Creative Polarities in Time and Space, seeking by this study to bring a whole other level of discipline to the mind. This is the key to so many things, which are not possible without it.
Everyone understands the need for physical exercise. The mind needs exercise as well, both in terms of "stretching", such as the study of the above geometry, and "discipline", which is to tame its (the mind's) excesses with true moral understanding (see again, pragmatic moral psychology , this site).
When this stretching and discipline become common practice, then mind transcends ordinary thinking, and the idea of mind as an electro-chemical physical organ disappears (see also: The Idea of Mind: a Christian meditator considers the problem of consciousness , this site). There is no other way of it but to walk the path and discover matters through one's own experience. To argue about what has been written above is deny discourse and scientific method, which requires reproducible experiments and protocols. To acquire the stretching and discipline refereed to above is to accomplish all that.
third iteration
Which comes first the chicken or the egg? Which comes first the big bang and evolution, or our ideas that these should or could be? Can mind arise spontaneously by accident? Or must mind come to be born of something of like nature? Can anything exist, which was not first conceived? Consider this:
Nothing a human being has created (which is not real creation anyway, just a re-arrangement of the already given) was not first thought. That is, all material re-arranging flows from a prior invisible act. In this, is it not possible that an echo exists of something which has preceded it.? Does not our process of creation - even just in re-re-arranging - mirror our own creation? It is said that before we became, we were first thoughts in the mind of God. For the purposes of this, the third and last iteration, let us consider this an axiom.
In another place of this part of the loom (my cyber-home) can be found a description of God's "splitting", the initial process of creation (see Earth Ranger 2323 , this site). Creation in this sense has more to do with music then with things "blowing up".
Music has themes, melodies, counterpoints, changes of rhythm and texture. In that God has split Himself in the Creation, the music has now more that one Instrument. Some Instruments never leave the Realm of the Invisible to live and learn in the realm of the visible. Some of God's children, the human beings, do. But as Instruments, these children are incomplete. Other Instruments are more complete - but in thinking this we must not conceive of these instruments as material. Earthly music is only a poor echo of the Music of the Spheres, and the instruments with which we make earthly music are only poor imitations of the real Instruments, the cosmic spirits, the hierarchies, angels, archangels, archi, and on, all the way to the sublime Cherubim and Seraphim.
The given world, the material world, is the Creation out of the Deeds of the Instruments - an Echo, as it were. In a way, we can look at the material world, the world of the senses, and recognize that it reveals something hidden. Just like the pattern in the iron filings given by the field of the magnet unveils that invisible field, so does the material world (at a much greater level of complexity) unveil the invisible within the visible. Evolution, in that as an idea it attempts to portray creation as a kind of accidental combining and re-combining, looks but does not see. The Natural world expresses, in material form, the Music of the Spheres, and it is no wonder at all why nature is so beautiful, endlessly fresh, rhythmic, melodious, and full of all the mirth and drama we find so astounding in the great symphonic works of classical music. Moreover, we, as the children, are essential and central to the scheme of things.
Of what point music without an audience? A sunset without a human being to see it has no meaning. We also are a theme, expressed from out of Cosmic Music. Not only that, but only within us, within our own invisibleness is the symphony completed. Outer nature is but a part of something which is not whole unless the human being forms the thoughts, gives the names, utters the inner word, without which meaning would not exist. And in that we give meaning, we but echo that larger Word from which Meaning comes.
So what part of the Music is the computer? What has the human being expressed in his mastery of the re-combining of the given material world in creating a machine that uses fallen light to perform so many calculations a second that it stands on the threshold of becoming able to mimic the human mind?
Consider what is missing in this image. Unfallen light is missing. Life is missing. Real intelligence is missing. The work of the human being is incomplete. Can we give a machine a conscience? Do we dare, or must we finish the work begun, and learn first to understand light and life and intelligence and conscience, before we attempt to truly echo the Creation?
Perhaps, the final arcanum of the loom is a question mark.
?
Look at the symbol carefully. Start at the upper left, where we start when we write this symbol. A small sphere, a symbol of wholeness, leaps into movement and then descends, disappearing into a point, before leaping a gap and ending in a second sphere. The first gesture disappears, sacrifices itself, before recreating another image of its basic form. Consider: "God said, "Let us make mankind in our image and likeness;..." Genisis 1:26
****************************************************
        
          appendix
          
        
Next are two essays which I include in many of my books,
as they are of special import for reasons that will be obvious
to those that
          read and understand them.
          
        
The Meaning of Earth Existence in the
Age of the Consciousness
          Soul
          
        
This next
          essay was abstracted from my book, the
          Way of
          the Fool,
          in
          order to submit it to the Newsletter of the Anthroposophical
          Society in
          America in the winter-spring of 2006, where, as is typical of
          my
          offerings there, it was ignored.  For this book it has
          been
          carefully rewritten, with entirely new material added in
          certain
          places.  By the way, the Way of
          the Fool
          is, at
          its core, the beginning of a courtship between that reality
          referred to
          by the terms esoteric and exoteric Christianity - between
          Gnosis and
          Faith (Kings and Shepherds), and this essay is the final
          thought-picture in the main body of that book.
          
        
The Meaning of Earth Existence
in the Age of the
          Consciousness Soul
          
        
*[John 16:
          12-15 "I
          have much more to say to
          you, but you can't bear it just yet.  But when the other
          comes,
          the breath of truth, he will guide you in the ways of all
          truth,
          because he will not speak on his own, but will speak what he
          hears and
          announce to you what's coming.  He will glorify me,
          because he
          will take of what is mine and announce it to you.
           Everything the
          Father has is mine: that's why I said he will take of what is
          mine and
          announce it to you."]
          
        
*
          
        
from the
          book: the Way of the Fool:
               
                                
          
        
There yet
          remains a small effort to make
          a synthesis this work - to make a whole out of seemingly
          disparate
          parts.  I will try to be brief.
          
        
A principle
          aspect of the great Mystery
          of our Time is the Mystery of Evil, both outwardly in the
          structural
          backdrop to the shared social world of humanity, and inwardly
          in the
          depths of our own souls.  I have tried above to point out
          how it
          is that the essential matter is not the outer social world,
          but the
          inner soul world, and the trials and education of the i-AM,
          in
          the biography. The context, which we need to call the maya
          of history and current events, and which is receptively
          held everywhere from below by the
          Dark
          Mystery of the Divine Mother, all passes away, and only what
          is
          Eternal, that is what becomes an aspect of the developing i-AM,
          continues;
          and, this inner realm (the whole Inwardness of the Creation,
          which includes human souls and spirits) only exists because of the Heavenly Mystery of the penetrating
          thoughts of the Father, while the
          whole (the
          outer social maya and the eternal inner mind) is created, loved,
          overseen and
          mediated (wherever two are more
          are
          gathered...), in all its Grace
          filled and
          Artistic interrelationships, by the Earthly [new Sun] Mystery
          of the sacrifices of the Son.
          
        
We (humanity)
          now begin to move out of
          our spiritual childhood, and in making our way through the
          Rite of
          Passage that is Life as it leads us toward our spiritual
          maturity we
          need to take hold of the complex of the doubles and the karma
          of
          wounds, as these thrive within our souls, and which encourage
          human
          evil through temptation and inner prosecution.  Even so,
          this task
          of meeting the Mystery of Evil within the soul is not as heavy
          as we
          think, for through the Shepherd's Tale
          [Charles
          Sheldon], the
          King's Tale [Rudolf Steiner], the Healers' Tale [the community-created Twelve-Steps] and the Sermon on the
          Mount, we have all the practical
          instructions that we need.
          
        
In seeking to
          understand in ourselves
          these three: moral
          grace,
          freedom and love [each of these is
          elaborated in great detail in the book], we set before
          ourselves what
          is required to be learned in this Age and it is with these
          three
          naturally unfolding capacities that we are Graced and
          strengthened so
          as to be able to meet with courage the Mystery of Evil.
           If we do
          dare this path, and seek for the deepest instruction in
          Christ's Sermon
          on the Mount, then will come to us a change in the nature of
          our
          biography, such that it more and more takes on the pattern,
          described
          in the John Gospel, as the Seven Stages of the Passion of
          Christ (the
          washing of the feet; the
          scourging; the crowning with thorns; the carrying of the
          cross; the
          crucifixion; the entombment and the resurrection) (for a careful exposition of these Seven
          Stages, see
          Valentin Tomberg's [anthroposophical] book: Inner
          Development).
          
        
Whereas Christ
          lived this in an
          apparently mostly physical way, those, who truly follow In
          His
          Steps [the name of Sheldon's
          book,
          as well as a critical phrase** in Ben-Aharon's The
Spiritual
          Event of the Twentieth Century - a profound
          Imagination of
          the True Second Coming], will in the
          main
          feel these trials in their souls, as aspects of the joy and
          suffering
          in the human biography.
          
        
**["Now when they
          identified
          themselves with the situation of earthly humanity, the souls
          who
          remained true to [Archangel] Michael prefigured,
          in their
          planetary Earthly-Sun life, the great Sacrifice of Christ.
           They
          walked again in His
          steps [emphasis added] as they did in
          former
          earthly lives, only now the order of following was reversed.
           They
          went before Him, showing Him the way, acting out of free and
          self-conscious human decision, and He followed in
          their
          steps [emphasis added] only after they fully united themselves
          with the divided
          karma of Earth and humanity.  Only then could He offer
          His
          sacrifice as the answer to the new, future question of human
          existence:
          the question concerning the mission and fate of evil."  Jesaiah Ben-Aharon, The
Spiritual
          Event of the Twentieth Century.]
          
        
These trials
          may seem difficult, but the
          truth is they are merely human.  It was Christ becoming
          human that
          went to the Cross, for how could He place an example before us
          we could
          not do out of our own humanity (just as Sheldon wrote in In
          His
          Steps). [something written by a
          Shepherd (a
          pastor) in America, at the same time Steiner (a King) was
          writing his The
          Philosophy of Spiritual Activity (Freedom)]
           It is the human in Christ that asks in the Garden of
          Gethsemane
          that the cup be taken from him, but if not, He accepts the
          Father's
          will. While later it is the even deeper human in Christ that
          says on
          the Cross: "My
          God, my God, why did you abandon me?".
 Who
          among us, in the trials and sufferings of life, has not
          uttered these same thoughts? [That Steiner teaches an esoteric
          meaning
          for the end of life statements of Christ, in no way
          contradicts their
          exoteric meanings, which are also true.]
          
        
It is here that
          Christ's teachings
          strongly diverge from the Wisdom of the Buddha, for the Buddha
          would
          have had us overcome suffering by learning not to know it (one
          version
          of the third Noble Truth of the Buddha reads as follows: " ...concerning the
          Cessation
          of Suffering; verily,it is passionless, cessation without
          remainder of
          this very craving; the laying aside of, the giving up, the
          being free
          from, the harboring no longer of, this craving.",
          whereas
          Christ asks us to embrace our human pain so that we can pass
          through the Narrow Gate of suffering to then know our deepest
          self, the
          true i-AM, and then through this burning trial of
          knowledge of the
          true-self, ultimately come to Him.  If we would follow In
          His
          Steps then we too must take on
          ourselves the
          errors (sins)*** of the world, and the tasks of forgiveness
          and love,
          for every love
          engendered free act of moral grace
          takes up a
          small part of Christ's suffering, so that we too participate
          in the
          deepest creative acts of the Seventh Day of Creation - the transformation of
          evil
          into love.  [This is for
          anthroposophists the teaching attributed to Mani, but the
          reason such a
          personality even knows this is because the transformation of
          evil
          into love is modeled for us in the
          deepest
          felt actions of the Divine Mother and the Son.  When we
          know
          intimately these actions of the Divine Mystery, we know the
          true
          spiritual meaning of the Mystery of Evil, and that this
          Mystery is
          Itself the real source of the earthly doctrine connected to it
          that is
          sometimes called Manichaeism.]
          
        
***[The word
          sin does not appear in the
          original Greek, from which the Gospels were translated into
          the other
          languages.  The Greek word hamartia, misused to indicate sin, actually means "missing the mark" (it is a term from archery).   See in
          this
          regard the Unvarnished
          Gospels by Andy Gaus.]
          
        
Is this
          foolish?  Of course, but we
          need not fear this Way of the Fool, for
          our Faith
          in Christ's Promises will always be fulfilled, as we ourselves
          can
          learn to become the fulfillment of the law and the prophets.
           Yes,
          this Way is full of trials, but whoever has lived life, and
          reflected
          upon their experience, knows that in the meeting of our
          biography's
          trials with courage we discover what it truly means to be
          human: to
          struggle, to fall, to get
          up and to learn - and, through this process, gently and
          humbly, begin
          to take up along side and with Him, Christ's kind and light,
          Yoke of
          Love.
          
        
Having said all
          this, it becomes
          necessary to make one last picture for the reader, for
          clearly, in that
          we read the news and hear of the horrors of man's continuing
          inhumanity
          to man, we ourselves face a terrible trial.  How are we
          to
          understand a world seemingly so filled with Evil?
          
        
Picture, for a
          moment, the surface of the
          Earth.  Below dense matter and fiery substance, while
          above,
          airless space.  Humanity lives out its Earth Existence
          only in
          this narrow spherical band of Life, whose diameter is just
          under 8,000
          miles (and whose height is just three to four miles, because
          above
          15,000 feet above sea level, the atmosphere starts to not
          contain
          enough oxygen to support our breathing).  The total
          surface area
          of the Earth is 196 million square miles, and the habitable
          land area
          43 million square miles   Six billion plus human
          beings must
          find all that they physically need, which when we consider
          actual
          available arable land (land that could be cultivated for food,
          and
          other necessary resources), means that each individual only
          has a
          square 161 feet on a side from which to grow what they need.
           This
          then is the
        physical spacial
          aspect
          of the social organism of the whole world.
          
        
Yet, we know
          that this spherical space is
          itself often unwisely distributed, for human social
          arrangements,
          whether rooted in dominance and selfishness (dominion over) or generosity and sharing (communion with), these social arrangements seem to determine
          this
          social order.  This stream of moral gestures (choices),
          of good
          and/or of evil, moves out of and through human beings,
          organizing the
          physical one.
          
        
As to this moral aspect
          of the social organism of the whole world, it has reached in this Time a kind of climax of
          development,
          and it will be important to appreciate the true nature of the
        logos order in which
          Christ has set modern human existence, through
          His creative powers as the Artist (Lord) of Karma (the precise
          and love
          based placement of individual biographies in relationship to
          each
          other).   Here is something Natural Science cannot
          do, for
          the meaning
          of
          existence is beyond the weaknesses
          of their
          yet fanciful and spirit-empty images.  This will also
          help us to
          understand why so many (falsely, but with some degree of
          reason)
          believe we live in the End Times.
          
        
In the
          Twentieth Century the world was
          woven together into a single social organism, not just via the
          globalization of economic matters, or the personal
          interconnections
          offered by the Internet, but most centrally by the Media.  At the
          beginning of the 20th Century, few knew
          what went on elsewhere the world, in any detail or with any
          immediacy.
           At the end of the 20th Century, at the same time that
          the
          returned Kings' were unfolding the New Revelations of Christ
           [the
          story of the 20th Century involves a return of the
          meaning-essence of
          the Three Kings of the Gospels - that is a return of the
          knowledge of
          Gnosis, hungering to be woven again into a single whole with
          true Faith
          - an event which clearly had to accompany the True Second
          Coming], the
          world itself was woven into a whole in the sense that no macro
          social
          event was not to be almost immediately known everywhere the
          same day
          (if not the same hour) that it happened.
          
        
We live in a
          time when has arisen a
          Culture of Media - a kind of knowledge commons, in which vast
          resources
          are used to create for us pictures of the meaning of the world
          and of
          events.  The more developed the country, the greater our
          daily
          experience can be saturated with the messages coming from this
          Culture
          of Media.
          
        
Moreover, great
          effort and expense is
          gone into by those who would force us to believe what they
          want us to
          believe.  Between advertising, political propaganda,
          outright
          lies, weak or lame reporting, and other similar failures to
          reach the
          truth, this saturation of the soul by the Culture of Media
          would seem
          to fail to offer us any service at all. What is not
          appreciated is that
          the Christ is far wiser than even the deepest believers
          imagine.
           Every evil is eventually turned to good, and next we
          will explore
          the prime example for our time.
          
        
Recall what has
          been pointed out many
          times now, that the
        individual biography is the
          central reality of life on the Earth.
           What happens inside us as we experience life is
          much more important and enduring than the outer events which
          surround
          us.  That Stage Setting (all the world's a stage....) is
          but epiphenomena to the reality of the life of the soul.
           To help
          us appreciate this then, let us explore these matters from the
          point of
          view of the individual biography.
          
        
In this time,
          there are over six billion
          plus of these biographies woven into the tapestry of the
          social
          organism of the whole world.  Six billion lives held
          delicately
          and exactly within the Love and Divine Justice of the Mystery.
           Within these biographies, all the individual i-AMs
          experience that precise and personal instruction that hopes to
          lead
          them to the realization of their own divinity and immortality
          of
          spirit. [The epoch (rite of passage) of the Consciousness Soul
          is 2100
          years long, going from the time of the beginning of the
          on-looker
          separation (and the creation of Natural Philosophy - Science)
          in the
          1400's, until the years around 3500 AD.]
          
        
To understand
          this we need to think it
          from the inside out, and not from the outside in.  The
          Culture of
          Media only provides context, never essence.  True, life
          is hard,
          even harsh, even terrible.  The naive consciousness wants
          to turn
          away from this suffering, and cannot understand how God (the
          Divine
          Mystery) could allow such things as torture, child abuse and
          the
          genocidal acts which are dumbed down by the terms: ethnic
          cleansing.
          
        
The reality is
          that what the Divine
          Mystery does is to allow for freedom.  This most precious
          gift is
          essential to the immortal spirit during its Rites of Passage
          we are
          calling: Earth Existence.  Moreover, the Mystery also
          makes
          certain there is a true Justice through the post-death
          passages of
          kamaloka and lower and higher devachan, in a manner no human
          social
          structure can provide.  Christ has told us this in the
          Sermon on
          the Mount: "to what sentence you sentence others,
          you will be
          sentenced".  All this should be kept in mind as we proceed.
          
        
As a single
          ego, I wake in the morning.
           From the night I bring the remainder of yesterday,
          perhaps worked
          over.  Surrounding me, as I live the day, are the lives
          of those
          with whom I have a karma of wounds - with whom I have a debt
          of meaning
          to creatively work over.  This we carry together, each
          bearing a
          part, each bearing their own wounds.   These are
          wounds from
          the past, from the present and from the future.
          
        
To observe the
          world of today, as we walk
          the walk of our lives, is to observe trials of fire and
          suffering -
          rites of wounding and being wounded. But not just this, for
          also there
          is healing.  Where we let love thrive, wounds become
          healed.
          
        
Thus flow all
          our days, often too fast to
          even notice the beauty and wonder of the sea of personal
          relationships
          and shared trials.  Yes, there is misfortune, and evil
          deeds.
           But do we really imagine Christ and the Divine Mother
          lets this
          evil happen without recourse or justice?  We may not know
          this
          directly through Gnosis, but we also can
          have Faith.
           Gnosis without Faith
          is empty of Life; and, Faith without Gnosis is empty of the
        Truth.  Only when we join
          them together, do we get: the Way (the
          Mystery of living the Good), the Truth (the Mystery of knowing the
          Good) and the Life (the Mystery of union with the
          Good).
          
        
This then is
          the wonder of the outer and
          inner biography, for often the wounds are not visible.
           Yes,
          sometimes the wounds are visible to our eye or ear for we see
          people
          too fat, too thin, too lamed in body, too poor, too physically
          or
          mentally deficient.  Often, however, so many of us suffer in silence that we really do not know the nature and
          personal
          meaning of their wounds - only our own are visible to the eye
          of our
          heart, unless we first learn to exercise and unfold certain
          powers of
          soul and spirit.
          
        
Amidst all this
          visible and silent
          suffering, we find ourselves woven into the Culture of Media.
           Images and sounds flow around us, pictures of a world on
          the
          verge of chaos and madness.  Yes, we have the intimacy of
          our
          personal biography, but through the Culture of Media we are
          drawn into
          the painted backdrop of the whole world - a backdrop we all
          share.
           War in Iraq.  Global warming.  Governments out
          of
          control.  Pandemics waiting in the wings.  Local
          economic
          recession, and even world-wide depression.
          
        
What lives in
          this painted backdrop - in
          this Stage Setting - in the wise relationship of the Culture
          of Media
          to the unfolding of our personal biographies?
          
        
The answer is
          this: the
        mirror of our own inner darkness
          and light...
          
        
Inside us the
          double-complex - our
          feelings of judgment, our temptations, our addictions and our
          sense of
          failure. Inside us the darkness that belongs personally to us,
          and
          outside us, carried to us by the Culture of Media, the mirror
          of that
          darkness.  But also inside us the Good that we would
          author.
          
        
Think on it.
           Do we not experience
          the images and sounds brought to us by the Culture of Media as
          something that is filled with what we like and we dislike?
           We
          live our biographies and the Culture of Media confounds our
          souls with
          pictures of dark and light to which we all respond
          individually.
           The great masses of humanity do not make the News.
           The
          great masses of humanity experience the News.
          
        
What is News?
           News is exactly what
          the reporters and television personalities call it: stories.  The Culture of Media provides us stories
          (tales)
          of the world, which are often presented as if these stories
          are true,
          something most of us have come to know they are not.
           News stories
          reflect all kinds of bias, and in some cases the bias is
          deliberate.
           Moreover, news stories reflect conditions of commerce
          living in
          the agency reporting them.
          
        
For example, it
          is well understood that
          in the last third of the 20th Century in American television
          the news
          divisions of the major networks disappeared, and the
          entertainment
          divisions took over the responsibility for the news.  The
          opportunity to inform and educate the receivers of news
          stories became
          secondary to the need to keep them interested so as to be able
          to sell
          commercial time and make a profit.  In addition, the
          stories are
          mostly about dire and tragic events, and little is
          investigated or
          reported that is about the positive and the creative.
          
        
We are right
          then to wonder sometimes
          about the News, about its harsh nature and artless excessive
          attention
          to the dark deeds of many.  Humanity in general bears
          within it
          the beam that is not seen, while the mote
          is exaggerated.  But the world itself is not this beam,
          is not
          this darkness.  The greater part of darkness is inside us
          - in our
          own souls, and from there projected onto the world.  The
          Culture
          of Media exaggerates this darkness further, at the same time
          it gives
          us much that also arouses our own unredeemed antipathies and
          sympathies.
          
        
Once more for
          emphasis...
          
        
The world in
          its reality is not this
          Media generated excess of darkness (so out of balance with the
          light
          that is also everywhere present), which we all project from within
          the soul - the beam.  Yet, in
          the Culture of Media this whole processes of dark projection
          is
          exaggerated so that the mirroring
          nature of the social
          world itself begins to bother us.  This logos
          order of the social world is complex
          and rich, and worth a
          deep study.
          
        
Pictures of a
          distorted and untrue
          meaning of the world abound, and while we share these
          pictures, we make
          personal and individual our reactions.  Just as the
          intimate
          events of our biographies have a personal meaning, so does the
          shared
          stage setting have a personal meaning.  In a more general
          sense,
          for example, many Christians today are confronted, via the
          Culture of
          Media, with pictures of individuals whose actions as
          self-proclaimed
          Christians either inspire us to imitation or cause us to turn
          away in
          shame.  The same is true in Islam. The terrorist who
          frightens us
          in the West, also causes many ordinary Muslims to turn away in
          horror.
           Everywhere fundamentalism rises, to continue the
          example, the
          great mass of humanity, that are not so tied to such arid
          rigidity,
          shrink away in antipathy.  Do we not assert quietly,
          inwardly to
          ourselves: this
          is not me, I am not that - I will not be that!
          
        
In our
          biographies then, we are
          confronted in the intimacy of our personal relationships with
          what are
          sympathetic and antipathetic reactions to that which we would
          choose to
          admire and imitate, and that which we would shun and refuse to
          be like.
           Via the Culture of Media, we are met with that which
          approaches
          us in the same way, yet on a larger scale.   Just as
          we as
          individuals have a Shadow (a double-complex), so nations,
          religions and
          peoples have a Shadow, and the Culture of Media puts in our
          faces these
          pictures and meanings with which we can identify or from which
          we can
          turn away, often in shame.
          
        
Christ has
          arranged, in this particular
          moment in time (the cusp of the 20th to 21st Centuries, which
          is also
          the Dawn of the Third Millennium) to place in the dying away
          hierarchical social forms of humanity, those biographies which
          do two
          main forming gestures within that history.  This is all
          connected
          to a process in which social chaos arises in order to cause
          these old
          hierarchical [third cultural age] social structures to let go
          their no
          longer valid hold, and in many instances be eventually
          replaced with
          new social form arising out of the social commons [fifth
          cultural age].
          
        
In the first
          instance, these biographies
          living in the decadent social hierarchies (such as government,
          corporate and church organizations) portray strong images, via
          the
          Culture of Media, to which we react equally strongly out of
          our likes
          and dislikes.  For example, one of America's wise women,
          Doris (Granny
          D) Haddoch, has said that we should
          be grateful for such
          as George W. Bush, because he causes us to awake from our
          sleep as
          citizens.  As a consequence, in our individual
          biographies we
          react to the extremes of these dominant religious, business,
          cultural
          and political personalities, and this brings about in us as
          individuals
          certain inner judgments and calls to action.
          
        
The second
          effect of those biographies
          unfolding in the now decadent institutional social hierarchies
          is to
          drive the social order further into a needed condition of
          chaos,
          something all 6 billion plus biographies require in order to
          birth the
          moral dilemmas necessary for the Age of the Consciousness
          Soul.
            This social chaos sweeps traditional moral
          authority aside,
          and forces us as individuals into situations where we must
          rely on the
          own I in order to properly face the moral crisis.  In
          that human
          beings are incarnating in massive karmic communities in order
          to have
          these sometimes shattering moral experiences, this causes the
          present
          world social organism to have the strong tendency to
          completely
          dissolve into a condition of near total social conflagration
          [thus my
          website: Shapes in the Fire].
          
        
The moral
          aspect
          of the logos ordered social organism of the world requires crisis in order for the individual biographies to live, not just intellectually,
          but fully
          and dynamically and existentially into dilemmas of moral
          choice.
           Only true moral choice can awaken in us what is offered
          in this
          Age to the development of the Consciousness Soul.
          
        
Nothing in the
          world is not touched by
          the Art of Christ, who as Lord of Karma - Lord of the
          Satisfaction of
          Moral Debt and healer of karmic wounds, arranges in majestic
          harmony all the biographies so that even from the smallest
          detail to
          the grandest historical event, meaning is put to the service of our development - the
          leaving
          behind of our spiritual childhood followed by our birth into
          spiritual
          adulthood.
          
        
The world
          historical crises of this time
          are a complex and rich Stage Setting, against which 6 billion
          plus
          souls live out the dramas of their individual biographies.
          
        
Thus, in this
          birth from spiritual
          childhood to spiritual adulthood, the Time - the Age of the
          Consciousness Soul - is a Rite of Mystery, a Baptismal Mass
          for all of
          humanity, just as was told to us by John the Baptist. [in
          Matthew 3:11]
           "Now
          I
          bathe you in the water to change hearts, but the one coming
          after me is
          stronger than me: I'm not big enough to carry his shoes. He
          will
          bathe you in holy breath and fire."
          (emphasis added)
          
        
Consider now
          more closely what happens inside
          us as we experience the intimacy of
          our
          biographies, and the shared pictures that come via the Culture
          of Media.
          
        
Choice
          confronts us.   Do I be
          like that, or like this?  From what place inside do I
          choose?
           In a time so filled with chaos that rules no longer
          apply, I
          discover that I can rely only on myself.  Out of myself I
          must
          author the Good in response to the world of meaning that
          surrounds and
          confronts me.  So powerful, in its personal immediacy,
          are these
          experiences, images and meanings, that we cannot turn away
          from them.
           It is as if the World itself is on Fire, wanting to burn
          and burn
          and burn until we run from it in terror, or stand up to it and
          give the fullest of our participation
          to its moderation and its healing.
          
        
Yet by Grace, I
          contain the means to know
          the Good that my biography and membership in the shared fate
          of
          humanity draws out of me.  What I source becomes a part
          of the
          world, and I know that this is so.   I know my
          freedom to
          enact the moral grace that my heart comprehends in its deepest
          places.
           Deep inside my soul my very own heart hungers to sing: Love will I give.
           Love
          will I create.  Love will I author.
          
        
So now we think
          away the physical - the maya
          of the sense world, and let our picture thinking gaze only
          upon this
          inner, invisible to the physical eye, moral act.  An act
          more and
          more emerging everywhere, for while in America, and the
          Cultural West,
          the Consciousness Soul is first widely  appearing, it
          will and
          must appear everywhere that human beings let the world touch
          their
          wounds, while they seek to share with others the trials by
          fire of
          their biographies.
          
        
Invited by the
          Love and Art of Divine
          Circumstance to look within and to reach into the depths of
          our own
          being in order to source and author that Good which we know to
          be
          right, we touch something spiritual and are Touched by
          something
          Spiritual.  In this time of the True Second Coming, in
          the
          inwardness of our souls and invisible to all outer seeing, a
          Second
          Eucharist is being enacted - the Good offers Itself - Its own Being - to us (Moral Grace).
           For the
          Good we know is not just known in the soul as what we tend to
          think of
          as a mere thought, but if we attend most carefully, it is true
          Spirit,
          just as the John Gospel writer told us that Christ spoke:
          [John 3:6-8] "What's born of the flesh is
          flesh, and what's born of the breath is breath.  Don't be
          amazed
          because I told you you have to be born again.  The wind
          blows
          where it will and you hear the sound of it, but you don't know
          where it
          comes from or where it goes; its the same with everyone born
          of the
          breath."
          
        
[The existence
          of a Second Eucharist, to
          accompany the True Second Coming, in no way means to diminish
          or change
          the Original Eucharist.  On the contrary, we will find
          that via
          the Second Eucharist our understanding of the meaning of
          the Original Eucharist (the transubstantiation of matter) will
          deepen.
           See in this regard, the small pamphlet: Radiant
matter:
          Decay and Consecration, by Georg
          Blattmann.  From the transubstantiation of matter we are
          being led
          onward to learning how to participate also in a
          transubstantiation of
          thought.]
          
        
Thus we are
          being truly and continuously
          born again today (each act of moral grace is another Second
          Ethereal
          Eucharist and birth), from out of our spiritual childhood and
          into our
          spiritual adulthood, baptized outwardly by the fires of the
          times in
          our biographies, and by holy breath within - a Second
          Eucharist where
          Christ gives of His own Substance that biblical knowing of the
          Good -
          His own Being.  For us to truly know the Good, requires
          we join
          our own soul to the Good.  Our yearning to author the
          Good out of
          ourselves is how we participate in the Baptism of being truly born again, and
          how we participate in the sacrament of
          the Second Eucharist.  Christ also participates by giving
          to us,
          out of Himself, this very Good - this Moral Grace.  When
          having
          received within ourselves this sacrament of the Second
          Eucharist, an
          act that only arises because we seek it and form its actual
          application, we remain free - we create moral law - we author
          the
          fulfillment of the law and the prophets.  Given to us
          within by
          Christ as a capacity, we then author its incarnate nature and
          pass it
          on to the world of our biographies, - from out of us thence
          into the
          outer world (or into the inner world), do we then ourselves
          author this
          Good: love
engendered
          free moral grace.
          
        
But how does
          Christ do this?  Is
          this Good offered to us in this Second Sacrament as if it was
          a thing,
          passed by hand from one to another?
          
        
No.
           Christ as holy breath breathes
          upon the slumbering burning embers of our own good nature,
          just as we
          breath upon a tiny fire in order to increase its power.
           He
          sacrifices His Being into this breath, which gives Life to the
          tiny
          ember-like fire of our moral heart.  The holy breath
          becomes
          within the soul of each human being who asks, seeks and knocks
          a gift
          of Living Warmth that enlivens our own free fire of moral
          will.
          
        
The Narrow Gate
          opens both ways, making
          possible thereby the intimate dialog and conversation of moral
          deeds
          and thoughts that is woven between the i-AM,
          the
          Thou and the Christ (wherever two or more are gathered...),
          which
          intimate conversation leads ultimately to the consecration - the character development - of the soul.
          
        
In this way our
          thinking can now behold the Meaning
          of Earth
          Existence in the Age of the Consciousness Soul:
          A
          macro-cosmic Rite, a Second Ethereal Eucharist, in which we
          give
          birth out of ourselves in the most intimate way possible,
          knowledge of
          the Good, not as mere thought, but as Life filled moral will,
          breathed
          into greater power by the sacrifice of the true ethereal
          substance of
          Christ's Being in the form of holy breath.  
          
        
The outer world
          is but a seeming, and
          what is brought by the Culture of Media mere pictures of the
          Stage
          Setting for the World Temple that is home to our biographies.
           When we think away this outer seeming - this logos
          formed and
          maya based sense world, and
          concentrate only on the Idea
          of the moral grace (Life filled holy breath) we receive and
          then enact
          out of the wind warmed fire of individual moral will - as
          individual
          law givers, as the fulfillment of the law and the prophets - we create this Meaning of Earth Existence.
           Every act of moral grace, given greater Life
          within in the deepest intimacy of our life of soul, is an
          ethereal
          communion with Christ, even though we may only experience it
          as what to
          us is a mere thought of what is the Good at some moment of
          need in the
          biography.
          
        
Christ gives us
          this Gift, by Grace,
          freely out of Love, and with no need that we see Him as its
          Author.
           We hunger inwardly to know what the right thing to do
          is, and
          when this hungering is authentic, we receive Christ's Holy
          Breath.
           This does not come so much as a thought-picture of the
          Good in
          response to our questing spirit, but rather as the contentless breathing substance of Christ's Being.  We
          are
          touched (inspired) by Love, and at this touch we shape
          that Breath into the thought that we then know. The nature of
          its
          application and form in which we incarnate this thought is
          entirely our
          own.  We shape the thought completely out of our own
          freedom - our
          own moral fire of will, for only we can apply it accurately in
          the
          individual circumstances of our lives.
          
        
As the Age of
          the Consciousness Soul
          unfolds accompanied by this Second Eucharist, the Social World
          of human
          relationships begins to light and warm from within.  For
          each free
          act of moral grace rests upon this Gift of Christ's Being to
          us - an
          ethereal substance received in the communion within the Temple
          of the
          own Soul, freely given in Love whenever we genuinely: ask, seek and knock
          during
          our search for the Good.  Our
          participation in this Rite, this trial by Fire leavened by
          Holy Breath,
          leads us to the co-creation of new light and new warmth - the
          delicate
          budding and growing point of co-participated moral deeds out
          of which
          the New Jerusalem is slowly being born.
          
        
This
          co-creation is entirely inward, a
          slowly dawning Sun within the macro Invisible World of Spirit.
           Moreover, we do it collectively (as humanity).
           While each
          of us contributes our part, it is our collective conscious
          celebration
          of the Second Ethereal Eucharist (creating the Good) that
          begins the
          transubstantiation of the collective (presently materialized
          and
          fallen) thought-world of humanity into the New Jerusalem.
          
        
Thought is
          real, and it is as equally
          real as is matter.  The Original Eucharist transforms the
          already
          divinely given now-dying substance of earthly matter into
          Life-filled
          Spirit through our ritual invitation of
          the active
          Grace of the Divine Mystery; and, our participation in the
          Second Ethereal Eucharist transforms dead thought
          into living ethereal Substance, through the mystery of our
          individual
          spirit's active and embryonic grace, that becomes united into
          the
          collective co-creation of humanity.
          
        
In the
          Invisible World of Spirit, we
          co-participate, out of the own moral fire of will, in the Dawn
          of the
          New Sun that is to become the New Jerusalem.
          
        
Let us now slow
          down here for a moment,
          and take a deep breath, for these last thoughts above may seem almost too big - too idealistic -
          to be
          easily contemplated.  To ease our understanding and
          gently ground
          it, let us consider this situation once again in it most
          ordinary
          aspects.
          
        
The world of
          our biographies places each
          individual into the fires of experience.
           These are remarkable gifts that lead us toward moral
          questions -
          often deep and troubling.  We yearn to know what to do,
          and in
          this circumstance we may ask, seek and knock.  What
          has been called earlier in this book Moral Grace is available
          to us,
          yet the mystery of this practice of inner activity is where we
          ourselves
          create moral law - where we become the fulfillment of the law and the prophets.
          
        
In the King's
          Tale, we saw that Rudolf
          Steiner's book The
          Philosophy of Spiritual Activity
          showed how
          to come to this knowledge through the practices of Gnosis - to
        knowledge -
          in the form of moral imagination, moral intuition and
          moral technique.  In the Healers' Tale, we saw how the 12
          Steps
          helped us to master the soul through the elevation of the
          spirit, and
          in this way come to know God's Will as we understand it.
           Finally,
          in the Shepherd's Tale we came to understand that by
          asking What
Would
          Jesus Do out of Faith, we could
          also
          come to the needed individual moral beliefs.
          
        
Three different
          paths (among perhaps many
          more) all leading to those individual invisible depths that
          each of us
          must uniquely experience, which we have now seen must be
          properly
          called: the
Second
          Eucharist of Holy Breath.  So
          we
          come now to perceive the Time - this Age of the Consciousness
          Soul -
          where, if we seek it, we have made ourselves available to be
          baptized
          with Fire
          and
          Holy Breath, just as John the
          Baptist us told
          Christ would do, 2000 years ago.
          
        
Even so, we
          still have to truly want to know the Good -
          to authentically ask, seek and knock.
          
        
*************************
          
        
Ideas such as
          the above, and in the rest of the essays in this little book,
          need to
          have behind them a rational
          method,
          in order
          to be in accord with the times and the scientific spirit.
           This
          last essays outlines that problem,
          
        
albeit more
          in the language of Anthroposophy proper.  Anthroposophy
          (a path of
          spiritual development) and Christianity (a religion) are not
          the same
          thing, although they both have an underlying relationship
          which may be
          apparent to the readers of this last offering.
          
        
In Joyous Celebration of the Soul
Art and Music of Discipleship
- a moderately serious introductory sketch unveiling
a mostly
          American way of understanding the New Thinking -
          
        
first some necessary context
          
        
Recently in the
          News for Members of the
          Anthroposophical Society in America (late 2005), was published
          a
          wonderful lecture given by Dennis Klocek, elaborating the
          alchemical
          foundations living in Rudolf Steiner's spiritual scientific
          work.
           The essay below means to be something from just one
          voice out of
          another of the streams that seeks to find its home within the
          Anthroposophical Society and Movement - the stream of discipleship, of those who are karmically related to the
          original
          Twelve and the direct participation in certain aspects of the
          Mystery
          of Golgotha. [See the essay above (The Meaning...) for why I write in this way.]
          
        
In the essay
          that follows, it might help
          the reader to understand that it is mostly written for, and
          out of, the
          American Soul.  About this Soul, Rudolf Steiner spoke in
          different
          places and in the following ways, which I will paraphrase:
           The
          American comes to Anthroposophy naturally.  English
          speakers are
          instinctively in the Consciousness Soul in their Life of
          Rights.
           There is a hidden and unique form of Anthroposophy that
          is to
          develop in America in the future, and one should look to
          Emerson and
          his circle of friends to appreciate it.
          
        
The reader, of
          whatever Soul background
          and gesture,  who would seek inner stimulation from
          actively
          engaging this essay, should understand that for the American
          Soul much
          of what is described below is already instinctively present.
           This
          instinctive relationship to the art and music of discipleship
          appears
          first in the American Soul in the dominant tendency to be
          directed
          outwardly toward the world, fully engaged in social reality,
          and
          sometimes (often more frequently than appears on the Evening
          News)
          seeking to heal the social world's wounds.  Part of the
          hidden
          mystery of this Soul is that it is possible to take what is so
          present
          instinctively, and awaken it by gradual degrees into full
          consciousness.  This task may turn out to be far easier
          for the
          American Soul, than has so far been imagined within
          Anthroposophical
          circles.
          
        
To fully
          inaugurate this gradual
          awakening, however, does require turning from the outer world
          and its
          worries and wonders for a bit, and to look within - to
          practice
          introspection.  When looking within becomes a normal part
          of soul
          life, American anthroposophists should not be surprised to
          find that
          they already live instinctively in their wills in ways with
          considerable kinship with the path of discipleship - the path of
          moral action in
          the world through renunciation and love.
           With the addition of this introspective looking within,
          we add to
          the thinking we already do about the field of outer-world
          social moral
          action, a complementary and much needed thinking about the
          soul-field
          of inner moral action.  Outer world thinking and action
          are
          enhanced by everything we learn from the practice of looking,
          thinking
          and acting within.
          
        
By the way, it
          is not the point of this
          essay to encourage any divisive distinction, such as might be
          assumed
          because of the emphasis on matters American.  Nor is it
          being
          suggested here, for example, that Americans are any better at
          Anthroposophy in any way.  On the contrary, we are just different.  Each
          Soul gesture in the Threefold World has
          unique gifts to offer, and this essay means to serve the
          potential
          freeing of those yet untapped American gifts from a kind of
          child-like
          imitation of things European.  This tendency, to model
          our soul
          practices on a kind of European anthroposophical idealism of
          the soul,
          was a natural impulse connected to our admiration of the work
          of our
          European brothers and sisters.  It is time to grow past
          this
          however, to discover our far more earthly and pragmatic way to
          the
          Spirit.   And, to do this not only for the benefit
          of the
          American Soul Itself, but also for the benefit of the
          Anthroposophical
          Movement world-wide.
          
        
There are then
          two themes, which while
          related are also quite separate.   The relationship
          of the
          Alchemical stream and the Discipleship stream is one theme,
          and the
          relationship of the American Soul to the wider world is
          another.
           The point of intersection, between the Discipleship
          stream and
          the instinctive capacities of the American Soul, shows only
          that the
          Rosicrucian and Manichean streams of the Old World, and their
          connection to Initiation, does not quite have the same meaning
          for the
          American Soul as does the natural Christ Impulse inspired in
          Americans,
          and revealed by their relationship to the outer world of
          social need
          (in part a consequence of the fact, that due to its rampant
          individualism, the Consciousness Soul is developing faster
          here - See
          Ben-Aharon's "America's
          Global Responsibility: individualism, initiation and
          threefolding").
          
        
The Alchemical
          stream is a stream of
          studied spiritual knowledge and of initiation.  It is
          more of the
          Kings and of Gnosis than of the Shepherds and of Faith.
           The
          Discipleship stream is more related to that moral work in life
          that
          comes from following the Teachings of Christ, and thus is more
          of the
          Shepherds than of the Kings.  The disciples, who were
          meant to be
          fishers and shepherds of human beings, were not (in general)
          of the old
          mystery streams as were the Kings (St. Paul, remember, was not
          a
          disciple, but began was an enemy of Christ prior to his
          initiation on
          the road to Damascus).  The Shepherds belong to what was
          being
          newly created - to the future Mysteries that are to arise from
          the
          social commons. These future Mysteries are not to flow out of
          the old,
          now impotent and dysfunctional hierarchically organized
          Mystery
          Centers, but from finely and homeopathically distributed
          Branches and
          Discussion Groups - that is the New Mysteries are to be born
          out of and
          in ordinary social life where groups of individuals draw
          together (wherever two or more are
          gathered...).
          
        
At the same
          time, while the America Soul
          is more naturally of the Shepherd stream, - of the
          discipleship stream,
          because of its orientation to outer world moral action, it can
          by
          turning inward and seeking a pragmatic introspective life,
          begin to
          draw from the wisdom-well of renewed European spiritual life.
           Rudolf Steiner, in his works on objective philosophical
          introspection ("A Theory
          of Knowledge Implicit In Goethe's World Conception"; "Truth and
          Knowledge"; and "The
Philosophy
          of Spiritual Activity") gives us a
          quite useful generalized map to this introspectively
          investigated inner
          territory - a territory that for the American Soul has many
          different
          and unique characteristics.  With Emerson, we get a
          similar map,
          not as exact and scientifically rigorous, but one which
          nonetheless is
          more in harmony with the actual landscape of the American
          Soul.
          
        
We can then
          read Steiner to initiate us
          into our introspective soul voyages, in the most objective and
          scientific fashion; and, read Emerson for that travelogue,
          which is
          more attuned to the unique scenic beauty to be actually found
          there,
          given that the American Soul, like the other soul-gestures of
          the
          Threefold world, is differently oriented in its fundamental
          nature.
          
        
I have tried
          here to distinguish two
          problems that ought not to be confused.   This
          article is not
          saying that the American Soul and the Discipleship stream are
          identical, only that there is a definite kinship.  What
          is also
          being said is that for those in this discipleship stream (of
          which
          there are no doubt many - Americans and otherwise - within the
          Society
          and Movement, and for whom this article also aims to provide
          greater
          self-understanding), they will tend to be less attracted to
          exercises
          aimed at spiritual development, and more called to moral
          action in
          life, which incidental to its true deeds, produces the after
          effect
          called: character
          development.
          
        
"For every one step in spiritual development, there must be three steps in character development". Rudolf Steiner: "Knowledge of Higher Worlds and How to Attain It".
[Keep in mind,
          when thinking about
          character development, this question: To what aspect of
          character
          development do we relate a good sense of humor, laughter,
          foolishness
          and dance?  Please also note that at one time the word silly
          meant to be possessed by the sacred.]
          
        
This is not to
          suggest that specific
          spiritual developmental exercises are unimportant, but rather
          just to
          point out that if the moral (character) development lags
          behind, it
          more and more becomes a danger that spiritual experience will
          come
          toward us in a one-sided way.  Further, we need to understand
          that
          true heart thinking is almost entirely a consequence of the
          extent to
          which the
          will
          to do the Good
          (that is to be moral) is the foundation for all feeling and
          thinking
          activities.
          
        
To make some of
          this a little more
          concrete, we might notice that it would not be uncommon for
          those drawn
          to the Discipleship stream to find that their biography
          involves a need
          to encounter the 12 Steps of AA, or to have to undertake some
          similar
          deep moral-Trial work.   Challenges to character
          development
          are common in biographies with a strong kinship with the
          discipleship
          stream.  Which thought then leads us to the essential
          point.
           Moral or character development does not result from
          spiritual
          exercises, but only from inner and outer actions in the
          biography, and
          their related moral dilemmas.  The practice of exercises
        builds
          capacities in the Soul, while moral
          actions, both inward and
          outward, apply these capacities in life (which then purifies the Soul).  Christ puts it this way: Blind Pharisee, wash
          out the
          inside of the cup and saucer first, if you want the outside to
          end up
          clean [for the whole theme, see
          Matthew 23:
          25-28]
          
        
Let us review a
          bit:  From a certain
          point of view, the Alchemical stream is very European, and
          thus has a
          tendency to put forward the incarnation of an Ideal as a goal,
          leading
          to the emphasis on spiritual exercises, knowledge and
          initiation.
           Americans, on the other hand, tend to face the social as
          a
          problem to be solved through moral action.  This is very
          pragmatic, for it is not the purity of an ideal that matters
          as much as
          being able to do something to help others.  In this
          sense, the
          stream of Discipleship is more natural to Americans because,
          in harmony
          with our engagement with and in the world, as social helpers,
          discipleship is rooted in moral action - in doing the Good ("...and
crown
          thy Good, with Brotherhood...").
          
        
[Isn't this
          Brotherhood also partly
          related to our ability to help each other experience the
          katharsis of
          laughter, especially under dire circumstances.
           Conversation does
          have a higher function than light, but then what about a well
          encouraged giggle?  The Shadow cannot abide humor, and
          runs away
          when we make fun of it.]
          
        
In a sense, the
          idealism of the European
          anthroposophist has blinded the American anthroposophist,
          first by
          suggesting there is only one way to be anthroposophical (a
          European
          soul idealism), and second by failing to appreciate that the
          American
          Soul is considerably different.  The result is that
          instead of
          coming to true self knowledge, we (in America) have been
          pursuing what
          is at best a temporary illusion (a goal we really can't
          achieve),
          instead of our developing, more consciously, the earthly
          (including
          humorous and joyous), socially oriented and pragmatic instinct
          that is
          our given nature.
          
        
I hope the above has not been too confusing. Mostly I just wanted to point out certain contextual themes, and leave to the reader's own thinking precisely what to make of these ideas. In what comes next, where we get more deeply into the pragmatic and the concrete, I hope then that these contextual matters will, as we proceed, begin to make a more practical, and a less abstract, sense.
*
          
        
[a brief biographical note: My interest in introspection began around 35 years ago, in 1971, as a result of a kind of spontaneous awakening in my 31st year. I didn't call it introspection at that time, but I had become quite awake inwardly, and was only able to orient myself to these experiences using the Gospels. Seven years later, in 1978, I met the work of Rudolf Steiner, and gravitated to his writings on philosophy, particularly A Theory of Knowledge..., and The Philosophy of Spiritual Activity. I also became very interested in Goethean Science, projective geometry and all the Steiner material on the social problem, which was my own main outer-world interest. It was over 25 years later, in 1997, that I wrote my first effort at describing what I had learned about the moral nature of the Soul under these two influences: the Gospels and Steiner's writings on objective philosophical introspection. That essay was called "pragmatic moral psychology" and can be found on my website . At that time, however, I did not yet know enough about the Shadow, and only now, almost 10 years later, can I write the immediately below with some confidence in my appreciation of the intricacies of these problems in the light of an intimate experience of the threefold double-complex.]
substance, or better yet,
selling water by the river*
          
        
*[The river of
          the soul lies inward in
          everyone.  To teach, as it were, about the soul, is to
          sell water
          by the river, to give to someone something that is already
          right in
          front of their own true face.  In spite of all that
          exists, for
          example in our home libraries of Steiner texts etc., there are
          really
          only two essential books for the study of the soul: the Book
          of Life,
          and the Book of our Own Soul.  Learn to read those, and
          you'll
          know the core of what you need to know.  A text, even
          this text,
          can at best be a word-map describing a territory you'll only
          really
          know by direct experience, however many other books you ever
          read.
           The
          reality
          of matters spiritual is, however, not found in reading, but
          only in
          action.  We can acquire a lot
          of
          concepts by reading, but we need experience (the consequences
          of action) more.]
          
        
We should keep
          in mind as we begin, that
          what is described below is essentially very human and very
          ordinary.
           It is one possible descriptive word-map, as it were, of
          the soul
          engaged in the dynamics of inner awakening via the path of
          discipleship.  As a map, it will be somewhat abstract and
          defined.
           The actual territory is something else altogether -
          human, messy,
          inconstant, prone to emotional ups and downs - that is all the
          wonders
          of ordinary consciousness. All a word-map tries to do is to
          point out
          various significant features.  Look out for these
          mountains,
          notice those valleys.  Here is a pure spring, there is a
          hard and
          dangerous rock wall.  It is my hope that the reader will
          find
          below some guidelines which will help them to chart their own
          path
          through the pristine forests and dark swamplands of the soul.
           Keep in mind it takes courage to explore there, but at
          the same
          time there is no other adventure quite like it.
          
        
Recall then
          what Dennis Klocek gave in
          his lecture to the 2005 AGM, and then published shortly
          thereafter in
          the News for Members  (or if you didn't hear or read it,
           try
          to find a copy as soon as you can):  On the blackboard a
          mandala:
          a circle, expressing a series of alchemical relationships:
          earth
          (freedom); water (phenomenology); air (silent practice) and
          fire
          (dialog).  The circle form suggests a return to earth
          (freedom) at
          some new or higher kind of level.  But before considering
          that,
          first some deep background.
          
        
If, from a
          certain point of view, we
          think of the above four elements in Dennis Klocek's lecture as
          notes in
          a rising scale, we could also find that in between each note
          is an interval.   While the note is in itself more of
          a step
          in spiritual development supported by spiritual exercises, the
        use
          in
          life (the interval) of the acquired spiritual skill/capacity is
          more of a
          moral act - an aspect of the process of character development.
           The soul is fallen - it is an out of tune instrument,
          yet we
          hunger to return, to rise up and to experience reintegration,
          and to
          give voice to the joy of coming Home, which the Story of the Return
          of the
          Prodigal Son tells us leads to
          celebration
          and feasting.
          
        
Because the
          spiritual development
          exercises are so well known, and so completely covered
          elsewhere in
          Steiner's basic books, as well as Dennis Klocek's books, I
          will not be
          discussing them here.  This essay assumes a general
          knowledge of
          that work, and some practice in their use. Here we are looking
          at the
          development of the Soul solely with regard to its struggles
          with the so
          very messy, personal and human moral questions of the
          biography.
          
        
In case there
          is some confusion here, in
          Steiner's Knowledge of Higher Worlds, the
          moral is approached mostly through a series of admonitions,
          encouraging
          the student to orient him or her self in life in certain ideal
          ways.
            Only in The
          Philosophy of Spiritual Activity,
          with the
          discussions of moral
          imagination,
          moral intuition and moral technique,
          did
          Steiner confront the moral problem directly and
          exactly.
          
        
The details
          that follow I have derived
          from my own (naturally messy and human, stupid and silly, and
          when I
          really get serious - pretentious) introspective investigations
          of the
          moral dimensions of the soul, but it should be kept in mind
          that while
          it is prudent to describe these phases and Trials as if
          separated in
          time in the soul, they are much more likely to be layered over
          each
          other - and often simultaneous in a variety of ways.  It
          also
          needs to be clear that what is to follow wishes only to add
          another
          dimension - another view from a different direction - to what
          Dennis
          Klocek gave, and not to contradict it in any way whatsoever.
          
        
It is
          particularly crucial to note here
          that we are mostly discussing those moral acts that take place
        in the
          Soul, not those in the outer
          biography.  There is a
          relationship to be sure, but it will help to understand that
          we are
          moral in both worlds: the outer world of our biographies, and
          the inner
          world of Soul practice and art.
          
        
I emphasize the
          word Trial
          to add another quality to our understanding.  Moral
          development
          takes place in the biography through Trials.  These
          challenges to
          the life of soul and spirit are meant to be difficult.
           We become
          deeply engaged in our karma of wounds
          with others in
          these Trials.  Moreover, these are called Trials
          precisely because
          there is great pain, suffering and effort (as well as not
          enough fun)
          connected to them, and because the Shadow plays such an important and often decisive role.
           Furthermore, various aspects of the Seven Stages of the
          Passion
          of Christ (as described in the John
          Gospel)
          are enacted in the Soul via these biographical Trials: the Washing of the
          Feet, the
          Scourging, the Crowning with Thorns, the Carrying of the
          Cross, the
          Crucifixion, the Entombment, and the Resurrection.  There is nothing abstract about these
          difficult
          processes of  soul transformation, and this should be
          kept in mind
          as we go forward, namely that: every time I use the word Trial
          I am
          speaking of quite human, difficult  and sometimes years
          long
          life-crises.
          
        
There is, in
          this regard, something of a
          kind of spiritual law involved.  Just as the world of the
          senses
          has its laws of gravity and color, so the soul world has its
          laws.
           The ones to keep in mind here are the karma of wounds in
          the
          outer biography, as well as the outer and inner moral Trials
          to be
          faced there, which bear an exact and direct interrelationship.
           To
          face a challenge in life, to face a Trial, means to engage in
          just that
          personal teaching which belongs specifically to that baptism
          by
          biographical fire*  most needed for the development of
          our
          individual character.
          *[see previous essay]
          
        
Consider a
          marriage for example, or the
          children to be raised there.  These relationships are not
          trivial
          distractions to any spiritual development, but rather are
          precisely
          those riddles and mysteries of life belonging particularly to
          our own
          ego's character developmental needs.  One can read all
          kinds of
          spiritual books, practice all manner of spiritual exercises,
          and still
          not advance because the biographical tasks are ignored.
           To begin
          to awaken within, and to appreciate that we are surrounded in
          our
          biography with just those moral tasks and Trials we
          individually need,
          is to recognize just how precisely and miraculously has
          Christ, as the
          Artist of our karma of wounds, woven us into the world of
          personal
          relationships.  So when Christ advises that unless we
          become again
          as little children, we cannot enter the kingdom of heaven, He
          is, among
          other matters, telling us precisely who our deepest spiritual
          teachers
          in life often are.
          
        
This world of personal relationships, and their corresponding moral Trials, whether of family or work, or even wider world challenges, is also very elastic in a sense. We are quite free in it, and it has a quality that can respond rather exactly to only those tasks which we choose to take up. Part of true Faith is to accept what comes to us as challenges, yet at the same time to recognize that our freedom also allows us to choose at every juncture, which way to turn, what burden to carry and when to laugh at ourselves.
For example,
          the interval from earth
          (freedom) to water (phenomenology) involves the skill:
          thinking about.
           This
          skill we receive as a natural aspect of living in this age,
          in that we are inwardly free to decide what to think; and, in
          accord
          with the Age of the Consciousness Soul, we are also becoming
          more and
          more able to form individual free moral ideas as well.
          
        
The
          Consciousness Soul really just means
          that if we inwardly wish to know the Good, in any particular
          moment of
          moral demand, crisis or need, we can in fact know what the
          Good is.
           Yet, in order to have this knowledge, we first have to ask, seek and knock.  We have to inwardly form the question,
          and
          struggle there to let ourselves answer from the higher nature
          of our
          ego.  The Good is what we make it to be, and as this
          essay
          proceeds, we will get deeper and deeper into this Mystery.
           This
          is why my book (found for free on line at
          http://ipwebdev.com/hermit/twotf.html or which can be
          purchased at
          www.lulu.com) "the Way of
          the Fool" calls this capacity to
          know the
          Good: Moral
          Grace.
          
        
[As an aside,
          for those more familiar
          with Steiner's terminology, you should keep in mind that by
          necessity
          he was required to cognitively form his research and
          understanding into
          the language of the Intellectual Soul, as that was the
          condition of his
          audiences.  In this book we are writing out of the
          language of the
          Consciousness Soul itself (something toward which American's
          are
          instinctively gifted).  So, for example, when in the
          opening
          lecture of the book The
          Challenge of the Times Steiner
          speaks of the
          need for people to work out of an experience of the threshold,
          he is
          using Intellectual Soul terminology.  In the essay above,
          where I
          have elaborated carefully on the Second Ethereal Eucharist
          experience,
          this has been a quite concrete and exact picture of human
          intercourse
          across the threshold in the language of the Consciousness
          Soul.  I
          also mean to suggest here that it is quite possible to take
          many of
          Steiner's works and translate them from
          Intellectual Soul language into Consciousness Soul language.
            The attentive reader of this text, who takes to
          heart the
          suggested practices, will in fact eventually find themselves
          able to do
          this translation process themselves.  Once able to do this,
          the
          reader will be able to confirm not only their own experience,
          but all
          that is written here in Steiner themselves, for nothing here
          is
          contrary to what Steiner offered.]
          
        
Now in this
          thinking about
          there is the object of our interest, in relationship to which
          we are
          the subject.  As subject, we think about
          this object.  This thinking is also essentially (and
          initially)
           discursive to our inner experience.  We appear to
          inwardly
          talk to ourselves.   Our spirit seems to inwardly
          speak that
          which our soul then hears.
          
        
It is with the
          skill thinking about
          that we first enter on the problem of the Water Trial of
          phenomenology.
           Thinking about naturally
          contains something of the shadow forces of the
          soul, in that our feeling life is, in the beginning, dominated
          by
          antipathies and sympathies*.  These natural likes and
          dislikes of
          our individualized soul color all that we think about.
           Through
          them what we think about
          acquires an individualized (non-objective) meaning for the
          spirit - the
        i-AM, in the soul.
          
        
*[see R.S. lecture 4, Social and Anti-social Instincts, in The Challenge of the Times, where you will find the following discussion approached indirectly through the language of the Intellectual Soul.]
[The use of
          this form of the term "i-AM",
          is
          meant to lessen the emphasis on the being
          nature of the ego - its noun-like aspect, and to place more
          emphasis on
          the action nature - on the verb-like aspect of the ego.
           The being
          nature of the ego tends to be more related to the teachings of
          the
          Buddha, while  the action nature
          of the ego tends
          to be more related to the teachings of Christ.]
          
        
In the light of
          Steiner's The
          Philosophy of Spiritual Activity,
          the
          experience (the percept) is, in the beginning, distorted in
          its meaning
          (the thought, the concept) by the shadow elements lingering in
          the yet
          unredeemed antipathies and sympathies.  By the way, the
          reader
          should be clear that only their own personal introspective
          observations
          can adequately discern what is going on within ones own soul.
           We
          have little business believing we can make such determinations
          about,
          or for, another.
          
        
Noticing these
          excessive and unredeemed
          aspects of antipathy and sympathy will give us our first vague
          perceptions of the work of the threefold double-complex, the
          Shadow in
          the Soul.  Thought
          is
          a flower rooted in the soul-soil of feeling, and filled from
          within
          by the blossoming life of the will-in-thinking.
          Where an excess of unconsciousness infects this soil and this
          life, the
          Shadow is given free play.
          
        
In order to
          progress properly through the life passages that comprise the
          Water
          Trial, we have to learn to renounce the unredeemed antipathy and sympathy.  This is the central moral act that makes
          possible
          the transformation via the Water Trial from thinking about
          to thinking with.  We enter
          the Water Trial knowing how to think about,
          and
          we can leave the Water Trial knowing how to think with.
           The
          essential moral nature of this Trial is outlined in the
          Gospels in the Sermon on the Mount, in the teaching concerning
          the mote
          and the beam.  In the biography, when we learn to
          struggle with
          the covering over (or painting in thought via the unconscious
          Shadow
          driven creation of mental pictures) of the persons that we
          meet with
          our individual unredeemed antipathies and sympathies, we are
          learning
          about the beam in our own eye.  We see not the person,
          but our own
          soul as that lives in our projected sympathies and
          antipathies.
           To learn to see past the beam, to meet the true
          phenomena of the
          other, to learn to think with them
          rather than about
          them, this is the moral craft to be
          discovered during
          the Water Trial.
          
        
The biography
          gives us just those
          experiences that challenge this learning.  The spouse,
          the child,
          the co-worker, the boss, the neighbor, the relative, or the
          stranger-other, all will evoke the beam, the unredeemed mental
          pictures.   We must learn how not to paint our
          experience
          with this already unconsciously given thought-content, and
          instead
          learn to let the experience itself speak
          into the soul, and to become consciously
          active as a creator of the free thought in relationship to the experience.
          
        
Again, one way
          to banish the Shadow
          influence here (when we discover our thinking to be possessed
          by the
          beam) is to laugh at ourselves - to see the essential
          silliness of our
          dark inner depictions of others, as well as those depictions
          which are
          too sympathetic (that is where we raise another up to the
          level of a
          kind of minor deity, such as how too many view Rudolf Steiner
          - and
          others - out of a soul mood of ungrounded and unrealistic
          admiration).
          
        
Sobriety, for
          all its virtues, must be
          balanced with play, otherwise the soul becomes an arid desert.
          
        
So, for
          example, when we look at another
          person and recognize that they are, in themselves, not just
          that which
          we observe in the moment, but rather that they are their whole
          history
          - their whole biography (in fact a sequence of biographies),
          and when
          we learn to consciously set aside the reactive feelings of
          antipathy
          and sympathy, only then can we start to think with
          who they truly are, and not just about
          them.  Our folk wisdom calls this learning to walk in
          another's
          shoes.
          
        
This thinking with
          can of course be applied to anything living, anything that has
          a life
          element to its nature, not just human beings, plants or
          animals.
           This includes the history (the story) of a social form,
          such as a
          family, or even an Anthroposophical Branch.  When we recreate in
          the
          imagination, free of antipathy and sympathy, the story-picture
          of
          something, we are then learning to think with the object of our
          thought.
          
        
Goethe taught
          himself to think with
          the plant, and to this organic way of thinking Rudolf Steiner
          later
          gave the name: Goetheanism, which is a
          thinking that leaves behind the discursive
          aspect of thinking about, and replaces
          that with a
          thinking with - a qualitative
          characterizing picture thinking
          (Tomberg's formulation).  We do this by learning to make
          inner
          images (mental pictures) consciously.  We still retain
          the ability
          to think discursively about these
          inner images -
          thinking about does not
          disappear, but remains a skill which can be
          applied when we choose and where we feel it is appropriate
          (which is
          why I wrote earlier of the layered nature of these soul phenomena).
          
        
Two additional
          aspects of soul phenomena
          need to be understood here - the attention and the intention and
          their
          relationship.  The moral act of renunciation is more
          related to
          those actions of the will-in-thinking that
          determines on which particular object we focus our attention.
           When we are lost to the beam in our own eye, part of our
          attention is unconsciously focused on our own soul's reactive
          feelings
          of antipathy and sympathy.  To the act of renunciation of
          these
          interfering aspects of our attention, we need to join the
          intention to
          love the object of this phenomenological (story-picture)
          thinking.
           After subduing the impulse to live imprisoned and in the
          thrall
          of the beam in our own eye (reactive feelings of antipathy and
          sympathy), we use our first stage (necessarily awkward and
          tentative)
          understanding of how to love the other in such a way so as to
          redeem
          them in thought.  We
          consciously
          create a new picture to replace the old unconscious and
          reactive one.
          
        
As part of the
          Water Trial, we don't just
          set aside the reactive feelings, but we learn how to create in
          the soul
        cultivated feelings. We create freely chosen cultivated
          moods of
          soul - that is intended feelings of reverence, wonder and so
          forth,
          which then have a salutary effect on the thought content that
          is to be
          produced according to where we let our attention come to rest.
           This is an example of where the exercises bear fruit.
           If we
          have practiced these exercises, this will be a great help when
          we then
          need to apply the newly learned ability to form cultivated
          moods of
          soul, as a prelude and foundation for thinking with
          someone in a new way.
          
        
With a cultivated feeling we transform the soul-soil from which the thought is born and then flowers (which is also why the ideal is expressed as: thinking with the heart).
In a certain
          sense, what is renounced,
          love replaces.  What is given up, becomes transformed.
           What
          is dark, is turned to gold.  What is evil - our dark
          habits rooted
          in the unconscious fear and mistrust of the other - the Thou,
          are
          beginning to be transformed into love.  And, best of all,
          what is
          too sober, particularly in our Self, can - as is necessary -
          be made
          silly.
          
        
The
          renunciation of unredeemed antipathy
          and sympathy does not, however, mean their elimination.
           The will
          acquires the capacity to master this somewhat base song of the
          soul.
           We cease attending to it unconsciously, and turn that
          attention
          (and the related intention) elsewhere.  We master the
          unconscious
          soul gesture that leads antipathies and sympathies into the
          forefront
          of the soul, and like a good choir director, silence it so
          that we can
          concentrate on other instruments of soul potential, other
          voices.
           Transformed and conscious feelings of antipathy and
          sympathy
          become a valid means of discernment.  But we need to be
          awake to
          the arising and becoming of these feelings, if we wish not to
          give the
          shadow element free play.
          
        
The
          will-in-thinking (an awake and more and more morally pure
          intention and
          attention) fills the thought with life (which is why I add
          to the
          ideal of thinking with the heart, the ideal also to will the good).
          
        
In this way we
          also refine the gold that
          is latent in antipathy and sympathy - their capacities for
          discernment
          and truth are enhanced, because we apply them with more
          consciousness -
          a more awake attention and intention.  In the teaching on
          the beam
          and the mote, Christ, in Matthew 7:5, ends it this way: You fake, first get
          the log
          out of your own eye and
          then you
          can see
          about getting the splinter out of your brother's eye.[emphasis added]
          
        
Again, one of
          the best ways to eliminate
          the log is to learn to laugh at it.  The log arises from
          the
          Shadow side of soul life, and in the light and warmth of our
          learning
          to laugh at ourselves, the Shadow's hold dissolves.
          
        
In Steiner's The
Philosophy
          of Spiritual Activity, we are
          taught the importance of the moral basis for our actions,
          whether
          outwardly in the sense world, or inwardly in the soul.
           Only that
          action, which is preceded by a self-determined moral reason
          (intention), is truly free.  Even so, no one should be
          surprised
          to discover that they are already trying to do these
          activities in some
          fashion or another.  Emerson said this: In self trust all
          virtues are
          comprehended.  The purpose of
          this essay
          - this word-map - is to help us raise out of the realm of
          instinct,
          step by step into full consciousness, our already existing
          natural
          goodness.
          
        
[Another brief
          biographical note: As I
          shared previously, I underwent a kind of spontaneous awakening
          at age
          31, and one of the by-products of this inner infusion of
          light, was
          that I became hyper-aware of judging people.  I could see
          myself
          putting them into various boxes and categories, and being now
          awake to
          this beam in my own eye, I could also see that this was not
          right - it
          violated conscience, so that I struggled to learn how to not
          do it.
           That said, learning how not to do it, does not mean that
          we
          always apply this newly learned moral craft.  On the
          contrary, I
          often fell back into old ways many times over the years,
          although there
          did slowly dawn a kind of sensitivity, that let me see that I
          had been
          again in thrall of the beam.  Stepping outside the prison
          of the
          beam does not become automatic - a habit, but must always be
          applied,
          in the moment, consciously, with intention and attention (the
          will-in-thinking).]
          
        
After we have
          learned to renounce
          (consciously and for specific and individually freely chosen
          moral
          reasons) our soul gestures of yet unredeemed antipathy and
          sympathy, in
          order to learn how to think with that
          object of thinking
          which we are learning to love, do we then move out of the
          Water Trial,
          via more necessity, to the life passages of the Air Trial.
          This
          movement from water (phenomenology) to air (silent practice),
          which
          before (at the entrance to the Water Trial) began with
          thinking about,
          now
          begins with the newly learned craft of thinking with.
           We
          start with that which we have now discovered as a spiritual
          development in the course of the Water Trial, and then apply
          that new
          level of moral craft (capacity of the will) of renunciation
          and love to
          the Air Trial.  The will-in thinking, which has
          learned to master the unredeemed aspects of feelings of
          antipathy and
          sympathy, and to replace these with thoughts born out of
          cultivated
          moods of soul, is
          now
          strengthened.  It is this strength that then lends itself to the life lessons of
          the Air
          Trial.
          
        
Dennis Klocek
          described the Air Trial as
          a learning to think backwards - of unraveling, or unrolling,
          the
          thought content produced by thinking with.
          The
          Discipleship stream sees it from a slightly different
          direction,
          one which, however, is not in opposition, but which instead is
          once
          more intended to be complementary.
          
        
Via the Water
          Trial we have learned how
          to think with, and that has
          produced a thought content in the soul.
           It
          is this
          content that must now be renounced in the Air Trial.  When Steiner wrote of this he called it:
        sacrifice
          of thoughts.  We learn how,
          again in meeting people, to not
          have a thought content at all.  We become inwardly
          silent.
           Strong forces of will are needed in order to subdue the
          already
          achieved thought content, which we have wrapped around another
          person
          (or any other object of thinking), even if this content now
          lives free
          of unredeemed antipathies and sympathies.  We can also
          renounce,
          during the life passages of major aspects of the Air Trial,
          those
          thoughts produced only by thinking about.
          
        
Further, in the
          feeling life there live attachments to
          the thought content.  We have, after all,
          produced it.  It is our creation, and we like it (most of
          the time
          - where the Shadow has unconsciously produced the thought
          content, we
          can learn to relate to this soul phenomena out of a healthy
          antipathetic
          discernment - we can come to not
          liking it
          that we have such a thought).  Sometimes, however, we
          can't even
          separate our own sense of self from this thought content.
           Nonetheless, to traverse the Air Trial we need to
          renounce our
          collection of mental pictures (thoughts).  Remember, the
          self
          development that accompanies the sequence of alchemical Trials
          is not
          just related to spiritual exercises, but also to moral or
          character
          development; the chief features of which are acts of sacrifice
          - acts
          of renunciation, and acts of love (the beginnings of: Not I, but Christ in
          me).
          
        
Steiner also
          calls this attachment to our
          thought content, in certain circumstances: being in bondage to
          the
          concept "One
          must
          be able to confront an idea and experience it; otherwise one
          will
          fall into its bondage" (The
Philosophy
          of Freedom, last sentence of the
          original Preface).  It can be a savage inner struggle -
          this Air
          Trial - to learn to forcefully set aside our favorite pictures
          of the
          world, a seemingly negative artistic act, sometimes taking
          months to
          accomplish.  At the same time, their essential nature
          does not
          disappear, for the very same qualitative aspects of our true
          nature -
          our true i-AM - can once again
          call them forth. Thought does not
          disappear, it only becomes latent and goes into a kind of pralaya (the state of being uncreated, unformed).
           The
          will-in-thinking is strengthened by this act of renunciation,
          and when
          we choose to think again concerning this same object of our
          thought,
          the penetrating new powers of the will-in-thinking (attention
          and
          intention) can call forth from this pralaya an ever deeper understanding of the underlying
          meaning
          and truth of that about which we have chosen to think.
          
        
[another
          biographical note: I first
          explored this process during my many long years of the Water
          Trial,
          which really began when I discovered that I had become
          captured by a
          psychological paradigm, or world picture.  I had come to
          view
          everyone, after a time, through the lens of this
          psychologically based
          world picture.  I discovered that the best way to become
          inwardly
          free of this capture, was to undo any relationship to this
          paradigm, an
          activity that took several months.  A year or so later, I
          let
          myself be captured by a similar world picture, this one
          connected to
          Tibetan Buddhism.  Again, many months were needed to
          become
          inwardly free - to break the chains of the teaching - to be
          able to
          only experience these thoughts when and if I consciously
          called them
          forth.  Subsequently, upon encountering Anthroposophy, I
          gave
          myself wholly to it - became intoxicated with it in a way, and
          spent
          three years drinking in all that I could manage, eventually
          once more
          finding myself inwardly lacking the spiritual freedom before
          the
          concept that I knew by then was essential.   
          
        
Only after many
          months of work at
          sacrifice of thoughts, was I able to stand in relationship to
          the
          massive and marvelous thought content of Spiritual Science,
          inwardly
          free.  Through this activity of sacrifice of thoughts, I
          eventually stood in relationship to concepts, acquired from
          Steiner, in
          such manner that they only appeared in my consciousness when
          called
          forth.  From this free perspective (which I was then able
          to
          survey as a whole), I then could see that Anthroposophy was
          not a
          thought content at all, but rather just the method of awake,
          and fully
          conscious (intended and attended) free thinking I had been
          instinctively seeking for many years.]
          
        
As the shadow
          elements (unredeemed
          antipathies and sympathies - Water Trial, and emotional
          attachments to
          our self-created thought content - Air Trial) are being let
          go, we now
          begin to have another experience connected to the Gospels.
           This
          is again related to the Sermon on the Mount, specifically the
          beatitude: "blessed
          are
          the poor in spirit, for theirs is the kingdom of heaven".
          
        
The rolling
          back, the sacrifice of, the
          renouncing of the previously created thought content, makes
          the soul
          inwardly poor in spirit.  As we
          empty out the soul, we begin to learn a new
          spiritual activity, which might be called thinking within.   The Air Trial passages of life are
          taking
          us from thinking with toward thinking within.  This opens us to
          the delicate first stages of the conscious experience of the kingdom of heaven as It begins to appear with greater clarity out of the
          general
          background noise of the soul, and on the wings of our natural
          instinct
          for the embryonic New Thinking.   The Air Trial is
          developing
          that which is meant to take us upward and onward to the Fire
          Trial, or
          dialog.  When we are poor in spirit, empty of the
          previously given
          thought content (and master of silent practice*), then we can,
          to a
          degree, experience directly the
          inside of the object of our thought.
           In
          personal relationships, this is the capacity for the
          beginnings of true
          empathy.
          
        
*[Tomberg, in
          his Anthroposophical
          Studies
          of the New Testament writes: Exercise thy forces
          so thou
          mayst create thine inner Kingdom.  Surrender this kingdom
          after
          thou hast created it.   Resign thyself as a beggar
          to the
          Spirit!"]
          
        
In a sense, the
          base elements of
          unredeemed antipathy and sympathy are a foundation in the
          soul. They
          are of the earth.  In the Water Trial, we rise to a more
          subtle
          and plastic condition in the soul.  To think with,
          to
          know the phenomenology of the object of thought, is to bring
          the
          thinking into movement with its
          object.  The
          earth aspect is more solid and crystallized, while the water
          aspect
          more fluid and more mobile.  The discursively produced
          thought is
          dead (the instinctive living element necessary for any thought
          remains
          in the unconscious), while the consciously created
          picture-thought is
          more living.  With the air element, the soul becomes more
          expansive.  Thought that is renounced in the Air Trial
          dissipates,
          disperses and dissolves into the general spiritual background
          of the
          soul - the previously noted pralaya (uncreated, unformed)
          condition.
           The will-in-thinking does not any longer call it forth,
          nor does
          it let the thought call itself forth.  When we are in
          bondage to
          an idea, it calls itself forth, and the Air Trial teaches us
          to break
          the chains by which we have let our unconscious feeling
          attachment tie
          us to the concept/idea.  We break these chains of feeling
          by
          dissolving them, and Dennis Klocek's metaphor of rolling back
          the
          thought is quite apt.  We untie it from its attachment to
          the
          soul, and without doubt the practice of the spiritual exercise
          of the
          Ruskshau is a great help here.
          
        
Only then, when we are truly empty, can thought, in the sense that it is the true inside of our object of thinking, come toward us. The true idea of the object moves toward us, as we learn to open ourselves to it, such that it then thinks in us. As Christ says in Luke 17: 20-21 "Asked by the Pharisees when the the kingdom of God was coming he answered: "The kingdom of God doesn't come with the watching like a hawk, and they don't say, Here it is, or There it is, because, you know what? the kingdom of God is inside you."
Steiner writes
          at age 25, in "The Theory
          of Knowledge Implicit in Goethe's World Conception", published in 1886, that: What takes place in
          human
          consciousness is the interpretation of Nature to itself.
           Thought
          is the last member in the series of processes whereby Nature
          is formed.
          
        
While Emerson
          writes at age 33 in the
          essay "Nature"",
          published in 1836, 50
          years before Steiner wrote the above: Nature is the
          incarnation of
          a thought, and turns to a thought again, as ice becomes water
          and gas.
          The world is mind precipitated, and the volatile essence is
          forever
          escaping again into the state of free thought.
          
        
Thus, having mastered (to a degree) silent practice (learned how to be poor in spirit), we are at the beginning of the Fire Trial, and similar in kind to our previous renunciations, the soul now begins to discover how thinking can be in deepest kinship with its object, by abandoning the Self - by no longer seeing ourselves as the center of the universe. Instead we begin to love the object of thinking more than we love ourselves. This deepening intention to love, in that our own i-AM learns to stand out of the way, allows the i-AM of the other more room in the soul - we begin to see them not just from their inside - true empathy or thinking within, but as them, united with them. Again, anything living that can be thought empathically, can also be even more deeply known when we learn to unite with it in thought. But this requires more than our own action. The art of true empathy, or thinking within, now, as we let go our own centrality of being, becomes the chalice in which It can think in us - and the life passage of Fire Trial begins to unfold.
This is the
          fruit of the Air Trial now
          carried further - the spiritual developmental capacity to have
          dialog
          with the realm of the invisibles, for true empathy free of
          self
          importance and rooted in inner silence, now lets the inner
          being of the
          other - the Thou - speak.  Having understood how we
          become in
          bondage to the concept, and emotionally attached to it, we no
          longer
          repeat those actions, with the result that thought tends not
          to come to
          rest in the soul, to coagulate there.  Instead, thought
          now passes
          through the soul - flows like a living stream.
          
        
[In 1999, seven
          years ago, I wrote this:
           My
          method
          basically now consists (when life circumstances allow it) of
          sitting at
          my desk and writing descriptive passages of social and
          political
          realities.  Inwardly the experience is analogous to
          looking at a
          clear stream.  The surface of the stream results from my
          inner
          activity in sacrifice of thoughts, fact gathering, picture
          forming and
          artistic expression (more or less done simultaneously).
           At the
          same time as my thinking sees this clear surface, I can
          perceive that
          there arises, on the other side of that surface, activity
          which does
          not belong to my own will, but which appears there
          spontaneously of its
          own accord.  The clear surface is then a product of two
          activities
          acting in concert.  With my writing I record what appears
          there.]
          
        
With this art (thinking within), which
          was earlier
          merely a skill
          (thinking about)
          and
          then a craft (thinking
        with), we now are in the midst
          of the Fire Trial.  But before discussing this Trial more
          deeply
          from the point of view of Discipleship, we need to look ahead
          a bit and
          understand what lies on the other side of the Fire Trial.
           We need
          to have a picture of what happens in between - in the moral
          interval
          between fire (dialog) and the new earth (new freedom), as the circle gesture
          spirals
          around in a kind of completion, before moving on to a new
          level of
          experience.
          
        
[a bit more
          biography: the material next
          to be presented, regarding what can happen after the life
          passage of
          the Fire Trial, is a little bit speculative on my part.
           While I
          have had quite definite experiences of the kind: Imagination,
          Inspiration and Intuition (mostly by Grace from Above), I am neither naturally clairvoyant nor an
          initiate. I
          am not even sure most of us need anymore to strongly seek such
          a goal,
          at least certainly not in a single lifetime.  When I get
          deeper
          into the Fire Trial material itself (below), especially given
          the
          layered nature of the soul capacities and experiences of all
          the
          Trials, and as well the true mystery nature of ordinary
          consciousness,
          why I encourage a consideration of the more modest goal of a
          kind of sacramental
          thinking (as against initiation)
          especially for Americans, will
          be made more plain.]
          
        
This
          culmination of the Fire Trial is
          described in Steiner's John Gospel lectures, in lecture
          twelve, as: The Nature of the Virgin
          Sophia and of the Holy Spirit (when
          reading
          this lecture, keep in mind that it was addressed to the
          Intellectual
          Soul, not the Consciousness Soul).  The previous
          spiritual
          developmental tasks, interwoven with the moral and character
          developmental intervals, or Trials, produces a katharsis, or
          purification
          of the astral body, such that the
          Rite of
          Initiation may now be enacted, and the seed organs of
          clairvoyance may
          now be impressed on the etheric body.  I emphasize the
          term may,
          because
          while a great deal of the development leading to this stage is
          rooted in our own actions - our own will-in-thinking, as the
          Fire Trial
          progresses we become more and more interdependent with the
          will
          activity of the invisibles.
          
        
We do not, as I
          understand it, so much
          initiate ourselves, but instead are initiated in a cooperative
          dance
          necessarily involving Another.
          
        
On the other
          side of the Fire Trial, if
          initiation is to be the result, we have acquired new faculties
          of
          perception.  The spiritual world is now there to be
          experienced
          directly, and the soul has fully developed that spiritual
          freedom,
          which The Philosophy of Freedom (or Spiritual
          Activity) contemplates, for we have
          renounced unredeemed antipathy
          and sympathy, we have renounced our emotional attachments to a
          given
          thought content and we have renounced even the significance of
          our own i-AM
          in relationship to others; all the while learning to love ever
          more
          deeply the objects of our perception (beholding) and thinking.
          
        
[From this
          point onward, I will be often
          using the term beholding instead of
          perception (in certain cases) and for this
          nuance I am grateful to Clifford Monks, who provided this in a
          recent
          conversation between the two of us.]
          
        
Now before us
          stand new objects of inward
          beholding.  The world of Imaginations is faced with this
          new
          freedom, but it stands inwardly over there, as it were, such
          that once
          more we have something which we think about,
          only
          this time it is not a sense object but a spiritual object.
           Moreover, the perceptual element of an Imagination has
          required
          our co-participation; and, the thought content produced by our
          cognitive capacity, during the experience of the
          supersensible, arises
          simultaneously with the experience.   Contrary to a
          sense
          object, which has as an aspect of its nature what Steiner
          called the
          necessary given, a spiritual
          Imagination as an object of clairvoyant
          beholding does not exist independently of our own will-on-fire
          in
          thinking.  We have authored and sourced (for this
          language, grateful thanks to Harvey Bornfield) it in
          cooperation with
          spiritual beings.
          
        
Our new thinking about has
          participated in the
          creation of the Imagination.  We experience the
          Imagination in
          infinite internal space (ethereal and peripheral space) as an
          object,
          whose existence comes about because our own activity is
          coupled with
          the by Grace activity of higher beings.  The intention
          and
          attention are involved in a Parsifal question* to which the
          Imagination
          is an answer (producing a kind of wordless knowledge).
           Subsequent
          in time to this wordless knowing experience (which includes a
          conceptual element), cognition then produces the word forms,
          either
          written or spoken, in which the living Imagination dies into a
          crystallized word-picture**, such as what is given to us in
          many of
          Steiner's lectures and writings.  When we actively (not
          passively)
          read these word-pictures, recreating them in our own
          picture-thinking,
          the soul harmonizes with the Imaginative aspect of the world
          of spirit,
          creating out of this harmony a rudimentary chalice in which
          later
          spiritual experiences can arise.
          
        
[*A Parsifal
          question is a question that
          if we didn't ask it when we could have, we may have to wait a
          long time
          to later receive an answer.  **Steiner's many notebooks
          offer
          evidence of the first stage of this process, by which he
          incarnated
          into language his sublime supersensible experiences.  He
          has the
          experience, with its wordless conceptual element, and then
          makes a record in language (or drawings) in the notebooks.
           There
          reason there needs to be a record is that
          the sublime
          experience does not enter earthly memory - it can only be
          known again
          by returning to the Source.]
          
        
So we begin
          then to repeat at a higher
          level the previous Trials, but this time facing experiences we
          have
          never before had.  We travel once more around the mandala
          of the
          circling spiral of soul metamorphosis, learning in new ways to
          think about
          (Imaginations), then on to new thinking with
          (Inspirations) and finally to new thinking within (Intuitions).  [There would seem to be here
          a great
          mystery, about which I have not (yet) any experience, but at
          the same
          time a great curiosity: do angels etc. tell jokes or laugh and
          dance?]
          
        
This full new thinking, however, is itself at a higher stage. It is thinking transformed into willed creative and participatory beholding. The normal thought content, which we know as an aspect of our original state of consciousness (earth and freedom, in discursive thinking about), only arises in the soul after the clairvoyant thinking perceiving/beholding. This thought content falls out, as it were, during the period of time the spiritual experience is fading away. The spiritual experience does not continue in earthly memory, but at the same time, the thought content produced (that is, how the experience was initially cognized as it fades away) does remain in earthly memory.
Let us now
          return to a deeper
          appreciation of the life passages we are calling: the Fire
          Trial.
          
        
All the work we
          do, through the various
          Trials and passages of our biography, more and more purifies
          the soul,
          making it ready for clairvoyant spiritual perception.  At
          the same
          time, there is constant spiritual music in the soul - the song
          of the
          wind and of the breath - even as far back as when we are only
          being
          newly born out of the first Trial of earth and freedom.
          
        
Ordinary
          consciousness is already full of
          spirit.  Our problem is how do we pick the gold out of
          the dark
          shadowy and leaden dross of the soul, normal to its given
          fallen state
          of earth and freedom.  Two factors are clues.  These
          are
          discovered during the early stages of introspection in the
          idea of
          needs and the idea of choices.  The wind - the breath -
          the living
          river of thought - blows through the soul constantly, but always in accord with
          need
          and most often in accord with other-need,
          that is the needs not of the Self, but of the Thou.  To
          live into
          this Grace given always present intuition-like breath, we need
          to
          choose. When
          we
          do choose service to other-need, then true, good and
          beautiful intuitions flow on the wind of Grace into the soul,
          even in
          its ordinary and fallen state of consciousness.
          
        
How else are we
          to understand the natural
          and harmonious state of grace always potential in such
          relationships
          as: mother and child, comrades at arms and true lovers.
          
        
Other-need also helps
          keep our ambitions in check.  One of the
          temptations that the Shadow offers to us is to let us believe
          we can,
          for example, out of reading a Steiner text speak with
          authority about
          matters concerning which we have had no other experience than
          the text.
           Absent the real experience - the percept - true thought
          (the
          concept) cannot arise.  Only in conjunction with actual
          clairvoyant experience can we, in full conscience, speak of
          such
          matters with the same confidence as did our Teacher, Rudolf
          Steiner. 
          Yet, in the face of other-need, and our choice to devote
          ourselves to this need, spiritual contact (experience) does
          appear in
          the soul.  The
          spiritual
          percept (experience) arises within the soul as a response to
          the Parsifal question which our intention and attention have
          created
          out of our relationship to other-need; and, the modest nature of our choice to
          serve this need makes our soul a suitable chalice to receive
          that
          thought content which then serves this need.
          
        
For example, we
          have no need (besides a
          vain curiosity) to know who was the 20th Century Bodhisattva
          incarnation of the future Maitreya Buddha.  Yet, on the
          other
          hand, there is a deep need to know how to love those intimate
          others in
          our biography, so that we can learn to heal our shared karma
          of wounds.
          
        
With this in
          mind (and also keep in mind
          the layered nature of soul development, as against the
          one-sided idea
          that it is a mere linear progression) let us look at the Fire
          Trial,
          which Dennis Klocek has described also as: dialog; and which he related to meeting with the dead,
          who come
          to us through our encounters with others.  From the
          standpoint of
          the Discipleship stream, this is once more perceived a bit
          differently,
          yet again in a complementary fashion.
          
        
Having passed
          through the previous
          Trials, our will-in-thinking now possesses certain capacities,
          certain
          inner arts, the essence of which are moral in nature. The self
          development spiritual exercises are secondary to, but
          supportive of,
          the character (moral) developments.  We have learned in
          the Water
          Trial to renounce unredeemed antipathies and sympathies and to
          replace
          those with a redeemed thought-content produced in a chalice of
          freely
          chosen cultivated feelings - that is we have learned to think
        with
          the object of thought. In the Air Trial we have renounced as
          well even
          this self-produced thought-content, in order to live in the
          silence,
          that is poor
          in
          spirit - thus beginning the
          experience we
          have been calling: thinking within.
          
        
In Fire Trial,
          which begins with its
          capacity of thinking within won in the Air
          Trial, we
          now enter into dialog on the wings of a renunciation of self
          importance.  That which is not-Self is to become more
          important
          than that which is Self.   Love of the other
          fills the
          attention and intention, and the work toward Not I, but Christ
          in me
          matures.  In this case, the
          dialog
          element for the Discipleship stream is more accurately
          characterized as
          Steiner's "it
          thinks in me", albeit this form of
          expression
          is lacking a certain artistry (Intellectual Soul, not
          Consciousness
          Soul).  A more beautiful phrase would be: the delicate and
          subtle
          presence of Fullness and fullness of Presence (Holy
          Breath).
          
        
[another
          biographical note: I learned,
          over many years of hard experience, that the essential matter
          was the
          Parsifal question - the deeply felt question, coupled with the
          absence
          of personal ambition in this question.  The knowledge I
          seek must
          be consciously intended to serve others, not to serve my vain
          curiosity.  In fact, my success in my researches into the
          social
          (see other essays in this book), seems to have been entirely
          related to
          my renunciation of the possibility of initiation in order to
          more
          deeply be led to an understanding of the social, an act which
          occupied
          my prayer life for a number of years in the mid-'80's.
           As a
          consequence, I began to experience this wind, this delicate
          and subtle
          presence of Fullness and fullness of Presence in response to
          my
          Parsifal questions concerning an understanding of the social,
          which I
          had sought in order to serve other-need.  My biography
          led me to
          working, from my mid-thirties onward, as a member of the
          working poor.
           I cleaned toilets, washed dishes in restaurants, worked
          in mental
          hospitals, and the last three years of my work life (59-62), I
          worked
          in a factory.  This led me to not only a personal, but a
          shared
          experience of the suffering in the world due to the Age of
          Materialism,
          which has led the i-AM not to appreciate
          itself or the causes of its suffering,
          and which gave me such pain of soul that the only way I could
          think to
          alleviate this was to seek, via the New Thinking, the ability
        to tell a
          new story of the
          world and of human meaning.
           This was my
          Parsifal question in its broadest form, and the wind would
          come at
          anytime It choose as I lived out these experiences, so that
          I had
          to learn to be sensitive to this wind,
          and
          to serve It, even by pulling off the road when driving and
          taking
          notes, or getting up from bed at night and writing when
          called.
           The success of this inner work also made me on more than
          one
          occasion, an obnoxious moral nut case, filled with excessive
          moments of
          grand hubris - my own Shadow intoxicated and inflamed.
           Fortunately, the Trials would knock me down whenever I
          got too
          drunk with the seriousness of any luciferic fantasies of
          having a
          mission.]
          
        
The moral art of thought not only
          comes to
          the truth of the object of thinking, but also knows its
          goodness and
          its beauty.  In intimate relationships, where we learn to
          love the
          will of the other - the Thou, and to see the beauty, not of
          their
          physical appearance, but of their deeds - in this selfless
          perception
          we then start to live in their true Fullness and Presence.
          
        
Thinking within, as it traverses the Fire Trial, begins to
          experience
          the spiritual world as a thought world, via a pure thinking,
          which is a
          cooperative art - Grace will be present.  This purity is
          three-fold.  It is pure in the sense that it is only
          thought -
          that is it is sense free.  The attention is so focused
          only on
          thought, that the outer sense world recedes far into the
          background of
          consciousness.  That is one aspect.  The second kind
          of
          purity is moral in nature.  The soul is pure in its
          intention and
          attention.  The intention and attention are chaste, as it
          were.
           Modest, or moderate.  Without ambition of any kind.
           Not even seeking initiation or enlightenment.
           Insight
          increases in the soul, but each time as a surprise - as a
          wonder.
          
        
The third kind
          of purity is as regards
          the thought - the concept itself.  It is only
          pure concept or idea and in this it is thought as Being, as
          Presence
          and Fullness.  Our earthy
          grasping of
          the thought, which in the beginning tends to render it into
          mere mental
          pictures or generalized concepts, has been gone beyond.
           We have
          sensed thought unconsciously in this beginning, and caused it
          to fall
          into our earthly and darkened consciousness from out of its
          original
          living environment.  When we learn how to return thought
          to its
          true realm and nature, then our sense-free thinking, and the
          purity of
          our intention and attention now lets the pure nature of the
          Being of
          the Thought think
          in
          us (dialog).
          
        
At the same
          time, this conversation has
          what seems at first blush an odd quality to it, in the sense
          of our
          freedom.  As discussed in the essay above, on The
Meaning
          of Earth Existence in the Age of the Consciousness Soul, just as Christ gives his Being to our need for
          knowledge of the Good as an act of Grace in such a way that
          the thought
          of the Good is entirely ours to shape, so also that which thinks in us does not answer our knock with any authority
          whatsoever.
           This Holy Spirit (the wind in the soul   
        spends (exhausts) Its will into us in a
          way.  Its participation with our i-AM
          in the nature of the thought's form is such that, while the
          Holy Spirit elevates our perception of truth, we remain the
          final
          author and source.  The Holy Spirit's participation is
          also a gift
          and becomes the wind to the wings of our soul.  Borne on this wind we see
          from
          whatever height, depth or breadth that must be there for other-need.  We serve the Thou and the Holy Spirit
          serves us
          both.
          
        
The soul is now
          grateful for whatever
          wills to dialog with it, and has
          no need for anything other than the
          occasional, but profoundly nourishing, experiences of Grace,
          all of
          which it had already begun to know, even coming in the
          beginning in the
          wonderful mystery of ordinary consciousness, and in accord
          with other-need and choice.
          
        
Yet, in this
          same beginning, the karma of
          wounds, and the unredeemed aspects of the astral or desire
          body move us
          forward in life, and we are guided by the Shadow into and
          toward our
          necessary biographical experiences.  In the processes of
          the Fire
          Trial, we learn to let go these drives, to move with and
          within the
          stream of Providence in Life.  The soul now tends to want
          only to
          be content and at rest, no longer driven.  We love the
          necessity
          that Providence brings us, and devote ourselves to that task,
          recognizing that the Great Whole of Life is in Other and far
          more
          competent Hands (Christ's Love).
          
        
There can be,
          by the way, either (or
          both) an outer necessity and an inner necessity.  Self observation, with an
          evocation of
          conscience applied to the question of whether we are being
          truthful to
          ourselves,
          will
          reveal whether an inner necessity is to have the same weight
          as an
          outer one.  This essay, in
          fact, was
          very much produced out of an inner necessity in connection
          with the
          delicate and subtle presence of Fullness and fullness of
          Presence,
          brought into the stream of Time, because of a Parsifal
          question that
          occurred to me regarding the pending conference on Ben
          Franklin (August
          18-19, 2006), where I lived in Fair Oaks, California.
           Yet, even
          in this work, I encountered Fire Trial elements, for latent
          and
          unredeemed ambitions limited and distorted my first versions
          of this
          essay.  Only after I had recognized these ambitions and
          laughed at
          myself for them, did matters begin to acquire a satisfactory
          to
          conscience moral clarity.
          
        
We need to keep
          in mind that we remain of
          the earth, even when the wind - the kingdom of heaven - is
          blowing
          through the soul.  In our earthly dialogs, one with the
          other, we
          need to learn to just listen and not to always impose our own
          opinions
          upon the others' freedom of thought (for parents of children
          and others
          in a teaching necessity, this will be different, sometimes).
           We
          can let the soul rest in wonder at what the Thou will say and
          do.
           So also with the invisible other-presence in the soul.  In this way the outer
          biography and
          the inner biography more and more consciously harmonize their
          naturally
          interwoven music.
          
        
Life itself -
          the biography - will demand of ordinary layered consciousness,
          and in
          harmony with the necessities of our karma of wounds, those
          experiences
          to be faced in which other-need and choice appear.
           If
          we think with the heart and will the good, Grace will come in
          the form
          of those other-needed intuitions - the deepening consciousness
          of what
          other-presence wants to say into our inwardness, in
          concordance with
          our slowly growing and developing capacities, as is necessary
          for
          service to the Thou.
          
        
This is the
          essence of the Fire Trial - a
          burning away purification of self for other.  Just as in
          the Air
          Trial we set aside attachment to a given thought content, so
          in the
          Fire Trial we give away our attachments to our own meaning -
          we
          dissolve the self descriptive concepts with which we
          previously adorned
          our i-AM, as if wearing a costume.  Instead, we just
          are.
           In all our actions and choices, we are (if we think on
          it)
          always: "In
          the
          Beginning...".
          
        
We no longer
          are this or that, but just
          are (i-AM).  Each favorite self-name: father, mother,
          anthroposophist, alchemist, lawyer, ditch digger - all these
          names of
          self are let go, using the craft and art acquired in the Air
          Trial.
           We do this in order to get ready for the first part of Not I, but Christ in
          me - the Not I part.  We burn away
          the I concepts, which by their very nature are limiting and
          mark us as
          not-free and are a beam in our own eye-inside, directed at
          ourselves.
          
        
We don't have
          to think of ourselves as a
          father or mother, for example, since the necessity of the
          biography
          places those tasks before us already.  The inner
          biography too,
          with its ambitions, hopes, dreams and wishes, pulls us forward
          as well.
          
        
There is as yet no traditional clairvoyant spiritual perception - the astral body is still being purified during the Fire Trial. What was the lower ego, or that which begins its path accompanied by the Shadow or threefold double-complex, has more and more merged and identified itself with the higher ego - the self-participated aspect of conscience.
When we live
          purely in Parsifal questions
          (that is, poor
          in spirit), in the artistic mastery
          of our
          antipathies and sympathies, having set aside self-importance
          and
          attending to the object of thinking with the intention to
          love, then
          thinking is meet with other-presence,
          as needed.
           This is the quite definite inner experience of the
          delicate and
          subtle presence of Fullness and fullness of Presence, which is
          described in the John Gospel as follows: What's born of the
          flesh is
          flesh, and what's born of the breath is breath.  Don't be
          amazed
          because I told you you have to be born again.  The wind
          blows
          where it will and you hear the sound of it, but you don't know
          where it
          comes from or where it goes; it's the same with everyone born
          of the
          breath John 3: 6-8
          
        
This Fire Trial is all the more painful, because we have become exposed via the previous layers (stages) of spiritual and character development, to a much deeper introspective understanding of our own desire body - our own astral body. We can now not only think within the other - the Thou, but also we can now think much deeper within our own soul - we are naked before our own introspective clarity of perception. That which remains unredeemed, and still yet outside the full and completed Fire Trial of purification, lies inwardly exposed to us. The descending conscience (like the descent of the dove in the Gospels) meets the rising lower ego, both seeking union and marriage; and this light from above, a kind of deep moral Grace, illuminates and warms all that is yet shadow in the soul. Emerson has put the bare bones of it like this in his lecture, The American Scholar: "For the instinct is sure, that prompts him to tell his brother what he thinks. He then learns that in going down into the secrets of his own mind he has descended into the secrets of all minds..."
*
          
        
Just as we learned to think about, with and within the other - the Thou, so we learn to think about, with and within ones own soul. Each skill, craft and art of thinking emerges from its corresponding Trial. The Earth Trial is a given, it is where most of us start. The Water Trial requires our first struggles with renunciation and the beginning, and delicate, expressions of love. The Air Trial takes us even further, to the abandonment of our favorite thoughts. Then we also renounce our excessive sense of Self, in the process of facing the Fire Trial. There we are also most exposed to our own other-Self, - the Shadow - which is now fully illuminated - no secrets whatsoever.
Let us
          consider, briefly, some hints on
          the encounter with the Shadow, from the point of view of the
          Discipleship stream.
          
        
When Valentin Tomberg was writing as an anthroposophist, he described in his book "Inner Development", three aspects to the Shadow: a luciferic double, an ahrimanic double and a human double. Later, in his profoundly Christian "Meditations on the Tarot: a Journey into Christian Hermeticism" he wrote of the tempter, the prosecutor and of egregores - that is of self-created psychic parasites in the soul (Steiner called these latter creatures, in Man as Symphony of the Creative Word: cancers or tumors of the soul).
When we think
          discursively - talk
          inwardly to ourselves, the unconscious works into the soul.
           That
          is, both the higher and the lower unconscious are present.
           No
          true thought, for example, can arise in the soul except for
          its having
          come to us via the living stream of thought (see Kuhlewind
          here).
           But, because in ordinary and fallen soul consciousness,
          we are
          bound (intentionally by the Gods so as to give us true freedom
          on the
          earth) into an inner darkness of spirit, we only can know
          thought as it
          falls out and down into the soul from its original living
          element.
           In discursive thought the living element has died.
          
        
Conscience,
          another higher element of the
          unconscious, also speaks into the soul via discursive thought,
          as that
          whispering still small voice.
          
        
At the same
          time, the Shadow is active
          here as well.   When we struggle with our own
          temptation or
          tempt others (the luciferic double), or when we hurt
          ourselves, or
          others (prosecute ourselves or others) with mean thoughts (the
          ahrimanic double), these too come from the unconscious into
          discursive
          thinking.  When we fall, over and over again into
          temptation such
          as addiction or alcoholism, part of the soul becomes
          excessively free
          of the ego, for the ego is weak in many ways.  This part
          can be
          called an egregore or a tumor of soul.
          
        
However, since
          all manner of bad habits
          (an ill temper, an abusive tongue) are also connected to tiny
          tumors of
          soul, I have began to feel that this language lacks what art
          and a
          sense of beauty needs to give to our conceptions, so above I
          wrote only
          of wounds, of our karma of wounds.
           In the
          case of egregores or serious tumors or cancers of the soul, we
          can call
          these self-generated
          wounds.
          
        
What the life
          passages of the Trials give
          to us is ever greater consciousness.  We draw out of the
          unconscious, through a more and more awake intention and
          attention,
           not only its lower elements, the Shadow and darkly cold
          side of
          temptations, prosecutions and wounds, but also the Light and
          heart
          warmed side, the stream of living thought and participated
          conscience.
          
        
So, in facing
          the Water Trial of the mote
          and the beam we begin the work of discipleship, the work of
          seeking
          reintegration and reunion with the Divine Mystery Itself.
           So also
          with the Air Trial and the Fire Trial.  Bit by bit we
          perceive and
          then let go what is dark in the unconscious, thereby
          separating and
          drawing into the light the gold of our growing
          will-in-thinking.
          
        
The fruit of
          each Trial remains with us,
          and at each passage becomes deeper.  The soul becomes a
          rich
          texture of layers of inner song and music in the form of ever
          unfolding
          capacities of will, in the corresponding creative cultivation
          of
          sublime elements in the feeling life, all interwoven with the
          arising
          and passing away of the breath-stream of living thought.
          
        
The purified
          will (an appropriately moral intention and attention) creates
          heart
          warmth in the soul-soil of feeling, out of which the light and
          life
          filled flower of thought is born.
           And,
          because we are first born into this process out of the Earth
          Trial of
          freedom, our whole passage in these Life Trials goes forward
          in
          freedom.  It all evolves out of our choices.  Recall
          Emerson:
        In self
          trust all virtues are
          comprehended.[emphasis added]
          
        
Nothing
          renounced has disappeared, but
          rather the soul becomes an instrument, which the i-AM
          in freedom learns to play.  The notes and intervals
          become primal
          dynamic expressions of soul forces and capacities, many
          generated out
          of spiritual exercises.   Just as we must practice
          the use of
          a material musical instrument, so we must practice the
          capacities of
          the soul.  At the same time, many forces and capacities
          (if not
          more) have a quality that comes only from the moral tone of
          the soul.
           We purify the instrument of the soul as much as we learn
          how to
          use it.  Both are needed, both are necessary.  The
          spiritual
          exercises, that is the how as in
          technique, has more
          kinship with the teachings of the true Alchemists - the stream
          of the
          Kings, while the moral purity of the soul has more kinship
          with the
          teachings of Christ - the stream of the Shepherds.
          
        
Steiner's The
Philosophy
          of Spiritual Activity is the
          modern transformation of the Christ-in-me
          moral essence of
          the John Gospel, while Knowledge
          of Higher Worlds is the modern
          transformation
          of the Rosicrucian Ideals of spiritual developmental
          exercises.
            While the latter has more kinship with the soul
          nature of
          Central Europe -  the seeking to incarnate the Ideal, the
          former
          has more kinship with the soul nature of the American - the
          need to act
          morally in the world.  Both are present everywhere in the
          world,
          it is just the mix and their proportions that vary from one
          soul
          gesture to another, in the wonder and mystery of the Threefold
          World.
          
        
Let us now seek
          to make a whole.
          
        
We become more
          and more inwardly free as we renounce and
          transform sympathies and antipathies,
          then as well the very thought content itself, until finally we
          sacrifice our own importance.  Each act of renunciation
          is
          accompanied by a corresponding and deeper capacity to love.
           Each
          act of love, beginning with the most simple appreciation of
          the other -
          the Thou, creates inner purity: inner light and warmth.
           We are in
          the process of learning to make of the soul a temple, and to fill it with created and cultivated
          feelings of
          reverence and wonder at not only the world of nature, but also
          the
          world of social community - the stream of karmic wounds and
          free
          destiny meetings with our companions in life.
          
        
Ultimately,
          this inner and outer moral
          work leads us to becoming fully inwardly naked to ourselves in
          the Fire
          Trial (where there is no longer the possibility of escaping
          the
          Shadow), and as well fully and consciously naked to the other-Presence (the kingdom of heaven is within you).  But
          even in
          the face of the
          other-Presence we are nevertheless
          completely
          free. The nature of the breath (the other-Presence) is to bring
          not only a new depth of comprehension, but ever more freedom,
          for we
          never stop being the principle willful agent of the
          thought-content
          that arises in the soul.  Overtime we become even freer
          and more
          creative - a true artist in thought.
          
        
The creation of
          a human thought content
          is the sole province of the 10th Hierarchy.  Only in us,
          and
          through our love, does the Cosmos know Itself in the beauty of
          human
          thought.  We were told this as long ago as Genesis
          2:19-20, with
          the symbolic picture that unto Adam is given the power of
          naming every
          living creature.  We name the world, give it its human meaning, with every thought we source and author.
          
        
Here we can now
          come to understand more
          deeply the truth, beauty and goodness hidden in Christ's
          comments in
          response to the question of what is the most important
          commandment: He
          said to them, "You
          are
          to love your lord God with all your heart and all your spirit
          and
          all your mind.  That is the important and first
          commandment.  [love other-Presence] The second one is
          similar:
          You are to love those close to you as you love yourself. [love the Thou, the companions in life]  All the law
          and the
          prophets hang from these two commands"
          .
           Matthew 22: 37-40.
          
        
What we really
          learn is to participate
          sacramentally in the arrival of the thought-content in the
          soul, which
          becomes then ever new each time we truly think.  We are,
          in this,
          inwardly born again and again and again.  This living thinking is a
          perpetual rebirth of thought, which comes
          into being and dies away - a constant dying and becoming.
           We
          learn to unite with this living stream of thought, the living
          stream of
          breath within.  We give ourselves over to it, in a
          participatory
          Rite - an artistic soul dance of sacred-heart thinking, and
          then
          discover the true secret of the Fire Trial, which has been
          hidden out
          in the open in the Gospels, just in this: Now I bathe you in
          the water
          to change hearts, but the one coming after me is stronger than
          me: I'm
          not big enough to carry his shoes.  He will bathe you in
          holy
          breath and fire.  John the
          Baptist:
          Matthew 3:11
          
        
leading us, through His Grace (holy breath within)
and His Love (as Artistic arranger of the Karma
of the Fire of Trials in our biographies), to:
Not I, but Christ in me.
        
          *        
          *         *
        
        
      
        
As a
          kind of preview, here are the titles of the first
          sets of videos (keep in mind that because YouTube limits the
          videos of
          most of us to 10 minutes it is not yet possible for me to
          present
          material except in this kind of broken up fashion - that is as
          sets of
          videos - in order to adequately cover any particular theme) -
          these are
          (the active link leads to the essay as written - the video
          involves the
          reading of the essay to the camera):
          
        
Sam
Harris,
            and humanity’s moral future -
          which
          is a reply to Harris’s recent TED conference speech.
          
        
Saving
            the
            Catholic Religion from the Roman Church:
          through deepening our
          understanding of the Third Fatima Prophecy,
          the writing of which was prompted by the current abuse scandal
          in
          Europe and the relationship of the present Pope to that
          scandal.
          
        
Barack Obama and the reality of the anti-Christ spirit - which concerns a confusion that is too much entertained by too many regarding what this term (the anti-Christ spirit), taken from the Letters of John in the New Testament, actually means.
        
Here is
          a link to that section of my YouTube
            Channel
            (joel232001) containing the videos
on
the
Coming
Metamorphosis
            of Christianity in playlist form.
          
        
I should
          not fail to mention that I have written two
          books so far on this theme of the metamorphosis of
          Christianity: The
            Way of
            the Fool:
          the
          conscious development of our human character, and the future
          of
          Christianity - both to be born out of the natural union of
          Faith and
          Gnosis; and New
            Wine:
          foundational essays
          out of
          a Science of the Spirit, in support of the coming living
          metamorphosis
          of Christianity, a collection which
          includes
          an important piece called: The Natural Christian, written
          especially for those many people who would say something on
          the order
          of: “I’m not religious, but I am spiritual”.
          
        
The fact
          is that the Christianity that many see today is
          much confused, as most people with common sense realize when
          they
          compare the actions, of many who give themselves the name
          Christian, to
          what is actually the teachings of Christ as represented in the
          Four
          Gospels.  There are many other matters of import
          regarding this
          situation that need to be developed carefully, but with this
          brief
          message I wanted to lay out somewhat why this theme of the
          Metamorphosis of Christianity has been added to my other video
          and
          written work.
          
        
Mostly
          it should be kept in mind that this work of mine
          that is presented here is grounded in practice, such that
          through
          practice the inner life of thinking, feeling and willing is
          transformed.  As a result when we produce any cognitive
          content
          (the themes) it has been  thoroughly informed with
          many years of experience and is not a mere exercise of the
          intellectual
          arts.
          
        
For a more careful elaboration of this cognitive development, see my essay/booklet Living Thinking in Action.
        
This
          year of 2010 was one of those seventh year climaxes,
          and since part of this aspect of soul life is enhanced when we
          consciously participate in it, then you might be able to guess
          that I
          had to become very involved in a review of the past aspects of
          my soul,
          and an evaluation of whether they should be allowed to die
          away.
           In terms of the inner life of thought, one will find in
          my works
          in various places a discussion of the practice of sacrifice of
          thoughts, and some years during the Season of Easter, this
          process can
          become rather deep in nature, and including then  habits
          of
          feeling and will as well as thought-content.
          
        
We could
          say that the more we identify with the teachings
          of Christ and the more we manifest those teachings out of our
          own free
          will, the more deeply the soul feels the rhythm of the Year,
          especially
          the process of Death and Resurrection representative of the
          Easter
          Season.  What we let go of that which within us has
          become old and
          now dying is then reborn in a new way during Easter Week,
          usually
          beginning as early as Good Friday.  Resurrection is
          something new,
          not a return to the old.
          
        
As my
          soul underwent this transformation in 2010, there
          followed various changes in my life that included taking up
          more deeply
          in thought that aspect of the future of humanity that is
          connected to
          the future of Christianity.   This is not a simple
          matter on
          the one hand, yet very simple on another.
          
        
        
Once
          more
          in
          different
          words: the present day
          religious expression of the teachings of Christ, which we tend
          to call
          Christianity, does not reveal, in far to many instances, what
          is
          potential when one follows more fully those teachings as a
          spiritual
          practice.   This is not to say that those who call
          themselves
          Christians are in particular any kind of spiritual failures, only that the teachings of Christ, in practice,
          are as
          difficult as everyone realizes.   As a result, the
          religion
          of Christianity can only grow and become over time, as people
          discover
          how to better incarnate the teachings.   Mostly the
          problems
          come when we institutionalize small parts of the teachings,
          and reduce
          them to human-created fixed dogmas and doctrines, thus driving
          out of
          them the living substance of Christ’s own always ongoing
          participation,
          as He promised:  Whenever two or more are gathered in my name, I
          am there; and, I will be with you
          until the ends of time.
          
        
It may
          be useful to those who hear this to consider the
          possibility that we do not yet have the full richness of
          understanding
          of the true Being of Christ, even in the conceptions put
          forward by
          present day institutional Christian Religions.   The
          contemporary Idea of God and the Reality of God are much
          different,
          especially since scientific materialism has come to seem to
          explain
          physical reality with such force of conviction.
          
        
Contemporary
          natural science is itself quite limited in
          its appreciation of existential reality, given that this
          science has
          systematically reduced itself to only that which can be
          represented by
          numbers - that is quantities - by leaving outside of its
          considerations
          all that is qualitative and which is also part of our
          experience.
            This approach, to only making scientifically real
          that
          which can be counted, has warped the conclusions of natural
          science
          away from reality in a very large way, and as we go into the
          future
          this religious-like scientism of the mere countable-physical
          will have
          to be overcome.
          
        
Should
          we find our way, over time, to a true idea of the
          nature of God and of the significance of the Christ
          Incarnation within
          that understanding, we will come to realize that the same
          Divine
          Mystery named by the ancient civilizations of the Vedanta
          type, or
          Hindu type or Egyptian type is the same Being throughout time
           -
          what aboriginal Americans call: the Creator.  The Mystery
          of 2000
          years ago was that the Creator, in the form of the Son, so
          loved human
          beings, that He could not but follow us into material
          existence, and
          left for a time the higher worlds of the Divine Mystery to
          become human
          and then go through the gate of death as all of us must do.
           Through this action He committed Himself to being fully
          with us.
          
        
The Son
          aspect of Creator-God then lived as a human being
          for a time in between the Mediterranean and the Dead Sea, and
          left
          behind teachings which are for our benefit.  Following
          this, and
          in accord with His promise to be with us to the ends of time,
          He became
          the Spirit of Earth existence as part of  His Death and
          Resurrection, which among other matters means that we now live
          literally inside the Son aspect of the Divine Creator Being,
          which
          surrounds us and permeates us.  The work on this theme of
          the
          Metamorphosis of Christianity will go into this fact in some
          detail,
          and show how even through the activity of the scientific mind,
          we may
          come to a deeper knowledge of the meaning and utility of our
          religious
          nature.
          
        
Let me
          just reference something here which may seem a bit
          odd, yet which is a clue for a great deal that is to come in
          the future
          to our understanding.
          
        
In the
          famous Prologue to the John Gospel, which begins: In the Beginning was
          the Word
          ... we find this phrase shortly
          after those
          first words: In
          it was Life and the Life was the Light of the World.  Once we understanding our existence, out
          of a
          science that does not systematically exclude the investigation
          of the
          spirit- of qualities, we will come to see that this phrase in
          the
          Prologue is precisely and exactly true, even in a scientific
          and
          rational sense.  In the Word - in the Divine
          Creator-Being - was
          Life, and this Life has manifested right into our
          material-physical
          existence as the Light we see by everyday.  So when I
          write, as I
          did above, that the Spirit of the Earth - that is the Cosmic
          Christ -
          surrounds and permeates us, I mean this literally, and
          perceptually.
            When we walk in the Sunlight on a warm spring day,
          we are
          not only spiritually inside the Creator-Being, but we are
          physically
          within the manifestations of this Creator-Being, and the many
          hierarchies of Beings that serve the larger elements of the
          Mystery.
          
        
When we
          breath we are filled with this Life, and that
          manifests as our experience of being alive.  When we have
          thoughts
          and imaginations that are filled with inner light and life, -
          this too
          is a participation within the Divine Creator-Being.  Let
          me begin
          to end this introduction to this new theme for my video work
          by quoting
          some verses by the Moody Blues, which shows that they too
          understood
          this, out of their own Way of learning to see:
          
        
From the
          Album Octave
          released in 1978, the words of the song: One Step into the
          Light
          
        
One step into the light
One step away from night
It's the hardest step you're gonna take
The ship to take you there
Is waiting at the head
Of the stairs that lead up
          through your opening mind
          
        
Above the dark despair
Shines a light that we can share
Close your eyes and look up in between your brows
Then slowly breathing in
Feel the LIFE FORCE streaming in
Hold it there, then send it
          back to him
          
        
All the old things are returning
Cosmic circles ever turning
All the truth we've been yearning for
Life is our saviour, saviour,
          saviour, save your soul
          
        
The river of LIVING BREATH
Is flowing through the SUN
He was there before the earth began
The world will drag on you
Use his love to pull you through
Find the mission of YOUR LIFE
          and start to BE
          
        
All the old things are returning
Cosmic circles ever turning
All the truth we've been yearning for
Life is our saviour, saviour,
          saviour, save your soul
          
        
There's one thing I can do
Play my Mellotron for you
Try to blow away your city blues
Your dreams are not unfound
Get your feet back on the ground
The TRUTH will set us FREE, we cannot lose
We cannot lose, we just have
          to CHOOSE
          
        
It is
          then my hope in these videos on the theme of the
          Metamorphosis of Christianity to take us into a realm of
          thought and
          understanding that is becoming more and more common today, and
          which
          does not leave outside of its substance the aspect of our
          human nature
          that is rational and scientific.  Certainly in my videos
          on the
          Songs of a True White Brother of the Hopi Prophecy, I have
          come at this
          same truth from one direction, and now in this additional
          material I
          will be able to focus on ongoing transformations of
          Christianity
          itself, as these too manifest the coming spiritual processes
          that are
          living so strongly in the events of our time.
          
        
One
          final thought, prompted by the reading of an
          interesting article in a recent New Yorker magazine.  A
          problem
          for a long time in Christian thought has concerned the idea of
          the End
          Times, and the coming of the Kingdom of Heaven, and other such
          ideas
          based upon statements of Christ collected in the Gospels, and
          then
          re-imagined in the writings of such as St. Paul and the author
          Revelations.
          
        
Perhaps
          this idea will help.
          
        
The Christ Incarnation occurred at a moment in Cosmic time when the Creation was at its mid-point, and certain up-building processes of a material nature were mostly finished. This is particularly true with regard to material reality and is marked in our scientific observations by a change in the state of matter such that it could no longer become more dense in accordance with those processes of rhythmic compression that accompanied the Creation. We noticed this change, in scientific language, when we discovered the property of matter that we name: radiation.
          During the process of the precipitation of more and more dense
          elements, there finally came a time, at what we call
          erroneously the
          atomic level, when the forces we name abstractly as gravity
          could no
          hold matter together and it began to spontaneously decompose.
           This is the secret hidden in the periodic table of
          elements,
          which reveals the order of the creation of the elements,
          starting with
          the smaller and more universal first, until such time as it
          becomes
          impossible to maintain this tendency to increased material
          density
          given the other forces (will of Beings) at play in the
          Creation.
          
        
Just as
          Christianity is undergoing a metamorphosis, so is
          all of the Creation, including materiality, subject to the
          laws of Life
          - the principle one being: metamorphosis, or the continual
          unfolding of
          the new out of the old.
          
        
This
          beginning of the end of the material earth existence
          corresponded with a change in the nature of humanity’s
          spiritual life,
          where we started to leave our spiritual childhood behind and
          begin the
          long hard road to spiritual adulthood; and, where at a certain
          stage in
          the future we will leave behind material existence itself.
          
        
Thus the
          seer Rudolf Steiner described the Incarnation of
          the Son aspect of the Creator as: the Turning Point of
          Time.  At this point then began
          the end of earth
          existence, a long process from a human perspective, but a much
          shorter
          one from a cosmic perspective.   At this point of
          maximum
          density, such that the physical Earth would now begin to age
          and then
          die, the Son aspect of the Creator Being incarnated to join
          His Being
          to our future in such a way that we would have His company for
          all
          future time to come.
          
        
The
          central point of these above comments is that we need
          to realize we have yet a great deal more to learn about
          ourselves and
          about cosmic and human past and future existence.  What
          is in the
          Gospels is only an introduction, and the understanding of
          natural
          science of material reality only a prelude to a much more
          magnificent,
          and scientifically rational, appreciation of the true nature
          of the
          Creation and the Beings that brought it about.
          
        
As these
          videos unfold we will enter into how to attain
          knowledge of the true Second Coming, which has already begun,
          and much
          else besides.  However, as these matters require that
          they be
          approached from multiple directions and in a kind of subtle
          and
          delicate fashion, the watcher of these videos (and the reader
          of the
          related essays) ought not to expect all will be made apparent
          in any
          kind of easy or simple way.  Whenever new knowledge, or
          in this
          case new revelation, comes toward us, our ability to
          understand it and
          eventually work practically with it in our lives -  this
          ability
          is entirely dependent on the attitude and thoroughness of a
          disciplined
          inner life that we bring to what is offered.
          
        
The apt
          cliche is: no pain no gain.  Without a
          corresponding effort on the part of those who receive these
          words,
          little of the truth will become known.  Or, to return to
          how
          Christ put it at the end of the Sermon on the Mount: without
          practice,
          we build the house, of our soul and spiritual life, upon sand.
        
        
Sam
              Harris, and humanity's
            moral future
            
            
by joel a. wendt
            
              
            
I am a writer, not so much a public speaker. So I hope you won't mind too much if I read this to the camera*, instead of trying to render it seemingly spontaneously. I can do spontaneous, but not on this subject matter and in this context. Basically I have written a response to Sam Harris's talk given at the recent TED conference ...
              
*exists also
                  as a Youtube video.
                
              
As I
                watched Sam Harris prowl the stage
                at the recent TED conference, via the YouTube video, I
                was struck (in
                part) by how much he resembled a protestant preacher.
                  His
                religion was different, but it clearly meant the same
                thing to him that
                a preacher's systems of beliefs mean.
                
              
For
                Sam Harris this belief system
                included a kind of hyper-rationality, coupled with a
                faith in the
                teachings and processes of natural science, which from
                his point of
                view saw itself as superior - as a truth process - to
                any world view
                that might challenge it.  The approach to moral
                issues that he
                proposed and defended bore little difference in style
                and felt passion,
                to the views of someone whose Bible was the Old and New
                Testament.
                 Except in Mr. Harris's case, the content of his
                Bible included
                evolution, big bang theory, and modern research on the
                brain.
                
              
Lest
                the listener of this piece think I'm
                just another lame-brained Christian fundamentalist, they
                should
                actually read my works, which are available for free on
                the Internet.
                  The difficulties with modern evolutionary
                theory are
                discussed in my essay: the Quiet Suffering of Nature;
                as regards the big bang theory one can read about those
                problems in my
                essay on The
                Misconception of Cosmic Space as Appears in the Ideas of
                Modern
                Astronomy; and, my examination
                of the limits
                of brain research - that is discussed in the essay The Natural
                Christian.
                
              
Just
                like a preacher, Mr. Harris was
                filled with a kind of self-righteous fervor: asserting
                that his was the
                right view; that his kind of science could ultimately
                answer all deep
                moral questions with what was right and true; that the
                world should
                follow him; and, that this would put an end to those
                religious views he
                despised.  Now I do not exaggerate here, for
                despise was clearly
                what he felt, as he mocked and criticized religions and
                peoples for
                whom he had no real empathy, although in his own view he
                saw empathy as
                a human characteristic of high value.  Asked at the
                end his talk
                by a kind of moderator, to reconsider his critical views
                of others, and
                to reach for a more empathic understanding of what it
                might mean to be
                born and raised in a region of the world, with a highly
                different
                culture and language, he refused.
                
              
He
                was not interested at that point in a
                rationality counter to his own, and clearly spoke in an
                effort to
                convince not just his audience but himself as well,
                through what he
                seemed to feel was rational argument, that the mocking
                and despising of
                large groups of people that he exhibited was itself
                morally defensible.
                 Although he did not directly refer to it, as one
                who follows his
                work I am aware that he regularly includes, in those who
                should be
                mocked and found morally wanting, Christians and others
                who would be
                tolerant of different religious views.  Mr. Harris
                has no
                tolerance for tolerance, which is a classic form of
                hypocrisy that
                while allowing no acceptance of others, yet
                hypocritically finds its
                own similar in nature views entirely acceptable.
                
              
It
                does not seem to enter into his
                consciousness that when Christ teaches in the Sermon on
                the Mount that
                we should be cautious about judging others and watch
                more closely the
                beam in our own eye, and less closely the mote in
                another's eye, that
                right there in that teaching is the very core of a moral
                and ethical
                principle that is fully rational and scientific.
                 The thing is
                that this principle needs to actually be practiced, a
                personal moral
                discipline with which Mr. Harris does not seem familiar.
                
              
At
                the same time we should be aware that
                Mr. Harris is not alone, and that many Christians do not
                themselves
                practice it, nor do many of those in other religions,
                including the
                religion of atheism.  That Mr. Harris takes of the
                scientific
                enterprise and does exactly the same thing - that is
                fail to see the
                beam in his own eye first - only continues and compounds
                the flawed
                human characteristic so many of us share, that wants to
                judge, but not
                recognize in that impulse something profoundly weak and
                unloving.
                 Mr. Harris wants us to believe that his religion
                of science will
                produce moral teachings that will rival what the Great
                Teacher of Love
                offered to the world, while at the same time Mr. Harris
                is entirely
                unwilling to love those he mocks and despises.
                
              
Trying
                to be rational, Mr. Harris
                proposes certain concepts as a basis for his prejudices.
                 For
                example, he asserts that what one ought to do is to
                answer the deep
                historical questions of the problem of good and evil by
                holding as the
                highest values a kind of human rationality (similar to
                 his), and
                that the goal of any such limited rationality should
                express itself
                within our communities in an effort to promote what he
                calls the
                flourishing of the human being.  He presents a
                fantasy of an
                idyllic future in which his style of rational morality
                will replace
                those values he mocks and despises, which fantasy is
                nothing new in the
                history of thought, but just another Utopian dream that
                is bound to
                fail because it lacks a willingness to enter into a real
                understanding
                of what it means to be a human being.
                
              
The
                Great Teacher of Compassion, Gautama
                Buddha, proposed what he called: the Four Noble Truths,
                which Mr.
                Harris has to know of as a modern educated man.
                  But in Mr.
                Harris's universe, the first truth can't be seen, which
                Gautama Buddha
                put forward as: Life is Suffering.
                
              
This
                true down to earth observation of
                the human condition is essential for understanding
                existence, and lacks
                the dreaming idealism and Utopianism that pervades Mr.
                Harris's
                thought.  Moreover, the next three Noble Truths
                involve solving
                the problem of suffering within ourselves, and not by
                going out and
                demanding the rest of the world change to accord with
                our own view.
                 For all his search for true moral values, Mr
                Harris seems not to
                have discovered Gandhi's dictum: Be the change you want
                to see in the
                world.
                
              
Assuming
                as another of the highest
                values, Mr. Harris believes in the rational
                perfectibility of the human
                being, and that if we just were as rational as is he,
                most all
                suffering would be eliminated from life because out of
                science would
                arise a moral expertise that would reveal, as if from on
                high,
                universal moral laws which all should then be taught to
                obey.
                
              
In Mr. Harris's universe, the religious demagogue would be replaced with a scientific demagogue, who of course would not recognize his own hypocrisy at all. Yes, I am a little bit exaggerating his argument, but only a little. The core of it remains as described, and we will seldom find in Mr. Harris's work a value we might call: human freedom. The behaviorist B.F. Skinner got so wrapped up in his limited view of human nature coupled with an adoration of science that he wrote a book called: Beyond Freedom and Dignity, arguing for using scientific methods to modify human behavior, and thus supposedly producing happier people. Sadly Harris seems to want to resurrect this horrible way of viewing human beings as perfectible clay for a moral molding by natural scientists.
As a
                social philosopher I am not
                surprised that Mr. Harris's views are popular and
                thought by many
                others to be highly rational and appropriate.  We
                do exist in an
                Age when there has arisen a religion of natural science
                that has been
                aptly described as scientism.  Its believers accept
                uncritically
                the theories of natural science, and given that this
                same Age also
                contains a falling apart of many institutional
                religions, who are
                justly criticized for their own obvious hypocrisies, it
                is no wonder
                that at the intersection of scientific and religious
                debate there is
                little resolution - but rather a lot of seemingly heated
                conversation,
                which displays yet little real light or true human
                warmth.
                
              
Not
                only that, but many today who are
                fans of his work are themselves unfamiliar with the
                great history of
                ideas in Western Civilization in which all these matters
                have been
                discussed and elaborated with far greater wisdom than
                Harris offers.
                
              
The
                reality is that the public debate now
                going on between those whose beliefs involve the
                teachings of modern
                materialistic natural science, and those whose beliefs
                involve
                religious principles that they will not allow to be
                rationally examined
                - this debate is deeply flawed because both sides are
                seldom willing to
                be at least a little bit self-critical (look to the beam
                in the own
                eyes), and for the most part don't bother to be
                historical - that is
                they don't recognize that these questions are not new,
                and in fact the
                way the present day debates are conducted, their
                superficiality becomes
                obvious whenever we look to that aspect of the
                 past where these
                questions were more thoroughly examined.
                
              
Both
                sides today tend to act as if no one
                before them thought about these matters.
                
              
Now
                it is not my place here, or is there
                the time here to do so, but it is possible to elaborate
                more fully
                about how to deepen the debate.  I wrote of this on
                my website in
                the essay: Does
                God Exist (which is not a
                proof of God but
                rather a proof of the superficiality of the modern
                debate).
                 Instead of deep discussion, we mostly get the
                disputants
                preaching to their own semi-educated choirs. What we
                need is instead to
                renew our acquaintance with what the past has thought
                and taught, and
                from there go forward with each side seeking not to
                justify its own
                biases, but rather with a willingness to understand each
                other better
                (less beam, more mote), and more importantly to actually
                be seeking the
                truth.
                
              
Rather
                than pronounce willy nilly the
                possession of the truth, the sides come together to seek
                the truth
                together, recognizing in true humility that to be
                authentically wise is
                to cultivate ignorance.  While this is unlikely,
                given that
                self-importance and egotism easily attaches to one who
                proclaims to
                know better than the other guy, it remains possible to
                do so, however
                improbable.  For the reality is that both science
                and religion, as
                presently practiced, were they to actually seek the
                truth together,
                would find that they share a similar kind of one-sided
                flaw.
                
              
The
                claim of Harris's kind of
                 scientism for an exclusive power in the realm of
                truth is
                excessive, in the same way that the claims that many
                religions assert
                of being a primal moral authority is excessive.
                  Both are
                out of balance, and both are filled with the clinging
                death grip of a
                fundamentalism that cannot image it could ever be wrong.
                
              
This
                is partially why Mr. Harris's
                performance (again lets not miss the fact that it is a
                performance)
                seems so similar to that of a preacher.  Just as do
                the
                hyper-religious, the hyper-rational assumes
                self-righteously a superior
                point of view.  Mr. Harris firmly believes he knows
                more than
                others, and that his approach is better, and there is no
                reason
                whatsoever for him to reconsider his views.  He
                wants to rid the
                world of the religious bigot, all in the name of himself
                as possessing
                a superior moral position.
                
              
Now
                the mystery of evil can be thought
                about carefully.  It can be understood how it is
                that suffering
                exists.  It can be known that the human being is
                (in a small way)
                perfectible.  At the same time, to come to such an
                understanding
                will require of both science and religion a sacrifice,
                because the
                truth is not only good (that is moral), but it is also
                beautiful.
                 The poet, through Art, is closer to the meaning of
                existence than
                either the hyper-rationalist or the hyper-religionist.
                
              
It
                will not be fruitful for the future of
                humanity for the scientific mind and the religious mind
                to be at war
                with each other.  In taking such a one-sided
                approach, both fail
                in their utility for helping the human condition.
                 Religion must
                become in its essential practices scientific, and
                science must become
                in its essential practices religious.  The impulse
                toward meaning
                of the artist needs to marry the two sides, who only
                through mutual
                love and compassion toward each other will then rightly
                lead humanity
                into the future.   At war with each other,
                they will only
                increase the divisions that if unchecked are to be the
                destruction of
                life itself.  Partially this means that as
                individuals, if we want
                peace to exist between our own rational and moral
                strivings, we need to
                do this by evoking the artist within.
                
              
If
                Mr. Harris wants to attack the
                religious and reveal the moral superiority of his
                version of science,
                he really needs to do this with regard to the more
                proven teachers, not
                with the weakest and most troubled.  When he feels
                up to taking on
                the Buddha and Christ and Gandhi, as well as their true
                students, then
                Mr. Harris will have shown himself capable and worthy of
                being listened
                to as an authority on the moral life.  But he
                doesn't do that,
                instead he goes for the cheap shot, the easy and lamest
                prey, such as
                the father who under social pressure wants to kill his
                recently raped
                daughter, as if somehow Harris is superior and deeper
                than someone weak
                and confused and brought low by cultural circumstances
                many more resist
                than fall into.
                
              
Humanity's
                deepest teachers of the truly
                moral life all share a particular moral fact in common,
                as the bedrock
                for all other moral development, and it is this: moral
                development is
                not an act of the intellect, but of the will.  It
                is not about
                having the right idea, but about having the right force
                of will.
                 That will works on itself first, before it ever
                looks upon the
                world as something that needs to be changed.
                 Otherwise, we are
                nothing but a self-righteous hypocrite, and having
                learned nothing of
                the true nature of self, or of compassion or of love, we
                will only
                effect the world as a destructive force, not as a
                creative one.
                
              
This
                is sad and I as said before, a
                tragedy.  Mr. Harris is not a moral authority, but
                simply a
                confused soul, who can't distinguish the truly good
                among religious
                teachers from the fundamentalist lost in the arid
                dessert of rigid
                belief.  In attacking those, Harris reveals himself
                to be their
                kin, lost in his own fundamentalist relationship to a
                kind of natural
                science related to in the soul as a system of belief,
                but certainly not
                as the harbinger of future moral leadership in a world
                of suffering he
                can't trouble himself to really empathize with, or
                understand.
                 Christ could not have been more plain, when He
                said: we need to wash out the
                inside of the cup our self first before we can ever make
                the outside of
                who we are truly clean.
                
              
The
                basic problem for Mr. Harris, and his
                theories about morality, is that he doesn't actually
                 know
                anything about the real religious components of the
                moral life.
                 Lacking practice and experience he, like the
                fundamentalist
                religious preacher, is just an opinionated scientist
                wandering in a
                field where he is completely out of his depth.
                
              
Just
                consider the reply he wrote recently
                to his so-called critics.   No mention there
                of the teachers
                of compassion, love and non-violence.   Not
                even his critics
                seem to grasp what is at issue, which suggests that the
                heart of the
                religious and the moral life has escaped them as well.
                 Perhaps we
                have here a situation that is cultural-wide, so one
                might be tempted to
                cut Harris some slack.
                
              
Once
                more the Catholics are up to their
                necks in the child abuse scandal, this time focusing on
                Europe instead
                of America.  Clearly institutional religions in the
                West have
                somehow not really learned to live out of the teachings
                of Christ.
                 It should then be clear that I don't cut organized
                religion any
                more slack than I refuse to cut Harris.  If you are
                going to
                engage yourself in seeking to assert a moral
                superiority, whether based
                on religious or scientific doctrine, you had better be
                ready to engage
                the real depths of these teachings, and not the
                superficial and
                hypocritical ways in most practice their religions.
                
              
Much
                more could be said, but given the
                complexity of an authentic search for moral reality all
                I can do is
                refer to my own work, which work will refer to others as
                it should.
                 If the viewer of this video is interested in
                transcending his own
                biases, especially the biases he shares with Mr. Harris,
                then they may
                receive some help from my works, the directions in which
                they point,
                and which they can begin to explore by just visiting my
                website Shapes
                in the Fire.
                
              
Thanks
                for listening.
              
                
                  
Saving the Catholic
                  Religion
                  from the Roman Church
                  
                
- through deepening our
                  understanding
                
of the Third Fatima
                  Prophecy -
                  
                
- by Joel A. Wendt -
                 
                
                  Everything lives and dies - everything,
                  even God.  Remember, the Son came to Earth,
                  became human and then
                  died.  
                   Remember too what He said: I and the
                  Father are one; and, no one gets
                  to the Father except by me.
              
Dying is not an end, but rather a
                    transformation from one state to another state, so
                    we could say with
                    truth that everything lives and then transforms into
                    something new.
                      Dying is not an end.
                       The poet-scientist
                    Goethe called this: dying and becoming, and we know
                    the general idea as: metamorphosis.  As nothing
                    is beyond God, then God too can become.
                      Knowing the truth
                    of this explains the creation of human beings - a
                    vehicle for God's
                    becoming.
                    
                  
In the light these ideas now recall the
                    words of the Third Fatima Prophecy:
                    
                  
"I write in obedience to you, my God, who command me to do so through his Excellency the Bishop of Leiria and through your Most Holy Mother and mine.
"After the two
                    parts which I have already explained, at
                    the left of Our Lady and a little above, we saw an
                    Angel with a flaming
                    sword in his left hand; flashing, it gave out flames
                    that looked as
                    though they would set the world on fire; but they
                    died out in contact
                    with the splendor that Our Lady radiated towards him
                    from her right
                    hand: pointing to the earth with his right hand, the
                    Angel cried out in
                    a loud voice: 'Penance, Penance, Penance!'. And we
                    saw in an immense
                    light that is God: 'something similar to how people
                    appear in a mirror
                    when they pass in front of it' a Bishop dressed in
                    White 'we had the
                    impression that it was the Holy Father'. Other
                    Bishops, Priests, men
                    and women Religious going up a steep mountain, at
                    the top of which
                    there was a big Cross of rough-hewn trunks as of a
                    cork-tree with the
                    bark; before reaching there the Holy Father passed
                    through a big city
                    half in ruins and half trembling with halting step,
                    afflicted with pain
                    and sorrow, he prayed for the souls of the corpses
                    he met on his way;
                    having reached the top of the mountain, on his knees
                    at the foot of the
                    big Cross he was killed by a group of soldiers who
                    fired bullets and
                    arrows at him, and in the same way there died one
                    after another the
                    other Bishops, Priests, men and women Religious, and
                    various lay people
                    of different ranks and positions. Beneath the two
                    arms of the Cross
                    there were two Angels each with a crystal
                    aspersorium in his hand, in
                    which they gathered up the blood of the Martyrs and
                    with it sprinkled
                    the souls that were making their way to God."
                    
                  
Christ said: I come not
                    to bring peace,
                    but a sword ...  Are
                    we then not to be
                    surprised when the first image above is of an Angel
                    wielding a sword?
                     But even this action, by the Son, is moderated
                    by the Forces of
                    the Divine Mother.  Are we not ready now to say
                    it is past time
                    for the Mother to take her rightful place in the
                    Catholic Religion?
                     Not off to the side, in a small chapel, but
                    right in front of the
                    whole congregation.  Is it not time for women,
                    who were in the
                    beginning of the Christian Religion leaders and
                    Bishops, to once more
                    be the equal of men in the Catholic Religion, if not
                    in the Roman
                    Catholic Church?
                    
                  
Who then, on Earth, is being exhorted
                    to
                    give Penance?  Certainly not just the laity,
                    the women, and the
                    nuns and the religious.  Who has most
                    demonstrated their disdain
                    for authentic morality but the male hierarchy of the
                    Church, again and
                    again and again over the Centuries?   Who
                  leads
                    the parade through the ruins of the City and up the
                    Mountain?
                     What does this image teach, but that death is
                    to come to the
                    patriarchal structure of the Roman Church so that
                    new life may come to
                    the Catholic Religion - blessed with the blood -
                    with the life essence
                    of the all to often martyred faithful - to be
                    sprinkled over the souls,
                    who in following the Catholic Religion are making
                    their way thereby to
                    God.
                    
                  
And the
                    first
                    shall be last and the last shall be first.
                     Those who lead may not always be rightful
                    leaders, but rather
                    with their ambition and their arrogance instead be
                    of a lessor moral
                    stature and nature.  And those who are humble,
                    and go last by
                    choice and inclination, they will be first in their
                    moral nature.
                     The order of the parade in the Prophecy is not
                    without its own meaning.
                    
                  
The City half in ruins is modern times,
                    where Western Civilization itself is undergoing a
                    dying and becoming -
                    a metamorphosis to something new.  Within that
                    broader
                    conflagration lies another, the death and
                    transformation of the Church
                    itself, where all from Pope to the laity pass
                    through the fiery baptism
                    of Christ (as John the Baptist said: the one
                    coming after me will
                    baptize you with fire and holy
                    breath), which fire is the
                    times in which we live.  The
                    castigation of the current Pope is part of his
                    personal biographical
                    fire, as no one of any religious rank or
                    accomplishment is to escape
                    this Baptism.
                    
                  
The Catholic Religion is foremost a Christian Religion.   The Roman
                    Church is a religious institution, arising in
                    connection with political power and compromise,
                    which by that means was
                    founded on sand about 1600 years ago.  When
                    certain (but not all)
                    of the bishops of various early Christian sects
                    united their efforts
                    with the dying Roman Empire, the resulting earthly
                    institution could
                    not but be defective - it was a house build not upon
                    the truth, but
                    upon sand.  Recall the last words of the Sermon
                    on the Mount.
                    
                  
"Therefore everyone who hears
                    these words of mine and puts
                    them into practice is like a wise man who built his
                    house on the rock.
                    The rain came down, the streams rose, and the winds
                    blew and beat
                    against that house; yet it did not fall, because it
                    had its foundation
                    on the rock. But everyone who hears these words of
                    mine and does not
                    put them into practice is like a foolish man who
                    built his house on
                    sand. The rain came down, the streams rose, and the
                    winds blew and beat
                    against that house, and it fell with a great crash."  Matthew 7: 24-27
                    
                  
Following its founding the Roman
                    Catholic
                    Church soon fell to earth, and became corrupt.
                     At every crucial
                    stage of its history, this religious institution
                    failed to practice:
                    that is, to follow In His Steps, but instead made political and social
                    compromises in
                    order to preserve its growing  patriarchal
                    authority and the
                    earthly wealth and privileges of its all male popes,
                    cardinals and
                    bishops.  These sought not to follow Christ,
                    but to seek earthly
                    power and position.  We forgive them because
                    they are human, but
                    we cannot continue to support anymore their
                    continuing  confusion
                    and its ever more deadly effects.  
                    
                  
Recall that the rule of celibacy came
                    to
                    be because of concerns that the children of church
                    leaders might seek
                    to inherit Church property, even though Christ
                    taught voluntary
                    poverty, not the seeking wealth.
                    
                  
Throughout the history of the Church,
                    sainted individuals, both men and women, having
                    engaged in the practice of the true teachings of Christ, went
                    on to found
                    religious orders where practice was the core rule.
                     Within the Church hierarchy, knowledge of the
                    moral life was at
                    the same time gradually lost, as those within it
                    became more and more
                    tempted to protect the structure of the Church itself.  The
                    egotism of the Church
                    leaders became confused, and thinking that Christian
                    Religion was
                    identical with the dogmas of the institutional
                    Church, the preservation
                    of the Church was assumed a higher moral value than
                    the practice of
                    the religion - the practice of the moral life.  A code of
                    obedience to earthly
                    fallen men became more important to Church
                    authorities than obedience
                    to the teachings of Christ.  
                    
                  
Christ in fact did not teach obedience
                    to
                    men (or to Himself), but humility and service
                    through beginning with
                    the gesture of the Washing of the Feet.  How
                    often, however, in
                    spite of Christ's clear teachings did these voices
                    of asserted
                    patriarchal authority and power speak to us of the
                    Church?  The
                    Church, the Church - we must protect the Church -
                    meaning there not the
                    Religion, but the seats of their institutional power
                    and privilege.
                     Recall as well the stories of what St. Francis
                    did complain.
                    
                  
In the present day scandals, regarding
                    the abuse of children by priests (and others higher
                    up as well), we see
                    clearly how for generations the hierarchical
                    structures of the Church
                    sought to maintain itself against any loss of
                    authority, which might
                    have resulted from having to confess that the male
                    priesthood had
                    become horribly dysfunctional, and that celibacy
                    itself (something not
                    at all a part the beginning) was asking too much of
                    human beings.
                     Certainly voluntary celibacy is a wonderful
                    virtue to practice,
                    but as a compulsion it should never have been asked,
                    for then it is no
                    longer a virtue but a human imposed trial.
                    
                  
The real question here, however, is not
                    so much concerned with recognizing the true
                    defective history of the
                    Church, but rather in making it clear that the
                    institutional Church is
                    a failure, and continues to lead the faithful - the
                    Body of Christ -
                    into error, not into truth.  What else is the
                    Third Fatima
                    prophecy telling us, gently to be sure for it is
                    after all a message
                    from the Mother, but still showing us the coming and
                    now present end of
                    something that is necessary in order for new life to
                    arise.  When
                    the prophecy was first opened and read in 1960, we
                    are told that the
                    then Pope was so ashamed at the recognition of his
                    own guilty role that
                    he fell into a swoon, and the Prophecy withheld from
                    the faithful for
                    decades beyond the time it was supposed to have been
                    released.
                      Who knows what additional folly was born
                    in that failure?
                    
                  
While the earthly institutional Church
                    is
                    fallen (too earthly),  the life of prayer and
                    other aspects of
                    religious practice are
                    not.  When, for example, the Mass is practiced
                    (even if the state of soul of the celebrating priest
                    is flawed), Christ
                    does unite this earthy Church with His True Church
                    that remains in
                    Heaven.   The heavenly Church is perfect,
                    and while the
                    earthly Church is fallen, Christ has not abandoned
                    His children, so
                    that when they call to Him in prayer and through
                    ritual, He Comes.
                     He is there in the Mass and will be there in
                    the Mass on into the
                    limitless future, just as He is there, with the
                    Father, whenever we
                    pray in secret as He taught in the Sermon on the
                    Mount (Matthew 6:6)
                     Did He not say: I will be
                    with you unto the ends of time?
                    
                  
It now becomes necessary to add to the
                    sad and already tragic aspect of the many errors
                    over the Centuries of
                    the fallen institutional Church an even greater
                    spiritual crime,
                    although yet unknown.  But first some
                    background, for this crime
                    only delayed the arrival among the faithful of the
                    knowledge of
                    something wondrous - it did not stop it from Coming
                    at its appointed
                    time.
                    
                  
While many of the correctives, to the
                    continuously errant course of the Roman Church, were
                    offered over the
                    Centuries by the lives of the saints and by the
                    founding of the various
                    orders, another stream of Christian wisdom was at
                    the same time
                    intensely excluded right from the beginning.
                     This was the stream
                    of the Kings, the representatives of the ancient
                    mysteries, who with
                    the Shepherds had also attended the Birth.  The
                    stream of the
                    Shepherds became the disciples and then became the
                    bishops of the early
                    Church - that is: they reflected the pastoral
                    impulse which uses the
                    image, as given to us by Christ, of the shepherd and
                    his flock.
                     But the magi - the teachers of the ancient
                    mysteries who too had
                    knelt before Christ - their wisdom became lost for a
                    time.
                    
                  
Even in the creation of the New
                    Testament, Roman Church authorities excluded many
                    other Gospels and
                    sources besides the usual four, in particular that
                    which was connected
                    to the stream of wisdom of the Kings, such as the
                    Gospel of Thomas.
                     While it was maintained that there was
                    justification for this,
                    this exclusion mostly existed as a way of defeating
                    competing ideas and
                    views.  In drawing to itself earthly social
                    power, the early Roman
                    Church grossly edited the possible knowledge and
                    understanding of the
                    meaning of the Christ Event, to accord with its
                    human and flawed
                    determination to make its own limited views simple
                    and clearly under
                    institutional control.
                    
                  
The early Church murdered as heretics
                    many speakers of truth, and destroyed libraries and
                    other centers of
                    spiritual learning, all in order to dominate.
                     This attitude
                    toward the destruction of seemingly competing views
                    continued for
                    centuries, and it wasn't until secular society and
                    the various kings
                    and queens of the late middle ages no longer
                    instantly obeyed Church
                    authority, that the murder of the holders of
                    heretical views began to
                    wane.   Finally with the arrival of the
                    Reformation and then
                    of the Romantics in Europe and the
                    Transcendentalists in America, did
                    the male dominated Church become sufficiently
                    powerless to enforce
                    widely in social life its rigidly held views through
                    violence.
                    
                  
Of course most know that the Church has
                    routinely silenced independent thinkers within its
                    own ranks for
                    centuries, and the current Pope Benedict the 16th,
                    before assuming that
                    office was in fact the dominant authority over what
                    were to be the
                    right ideas of the Church through his former
                    position, which is called:
                    Prefect of the Congregation for the Doctrine of the
                    Faith.
                    
                  
In a sense we need to see the
                    institutional Church as trying to maintain its
                    power, first through the
                    destruction of competing thought, and the killing
                    and silencing of
                    heretics (including the founders of Natural
                    Science), both within and
                    without the structures of the Church itself.
                     Then as time passed,
                    the Church lost more and more its prior public
                    authority as the various
                    Nation States no longer supported it as the official
                    religion, with the
                    result that tighter became its grip on ideas within
                    the Body of Christ.
                     The still too Roman
                    Church now strangles much
                    needed ideas, such as the ordination of women, with
                    the same deadly
                    intent it once burned heretics at the stake.
                    
                  
But the Body of Christ, the laity and
                    the
                    religious orders, are more and more less inclined to accept that Rome should
                    have such authority.
                     This should not be a wonder, because Christ
                    said: I am Way, the Truth, and the
                    Life.  The Church has
                    never had anything
                    to fear from the Truth - never, although every act
                    of repression and
                    control was a demonstration of this fear.
                    
                  
The reality is that the strangulation of ideas is evidence of an absence of real Faith. True Faith, which is essentially trust, has nothing to fear from science, for example, and never has had to fear knowledge, or other Ways, including the ancient Ways and Traditions of the wisdom of the Kings. Yet, in its efforts to dominate ideas, to compel what is allowed to be thought by its members, whether in terms of moral teachings or doctrine, the Church itself has become the opponent of Christ. To oppose the Truth is to oppose Christ.
We describe as totalitarian a political
                    State which wants to control thoughts and ideas.
                     How then should
                    we describe the institutional Roman Church?
                    
                  
One way to understand this fall from
                    Grace into corruption and totalitarian thought
                    control, is to
                    appreciate that social forms (such as an
                    institutional religion) can
                    begin in a state of alive-ness and then over time
                    become sclerotic or
                    hardened, the same way the human body can become
                    hardened over time.
                    
                  
This can also happen to religious
                    orders
                    within the Church, after their founder has crossed
                    over.  For
                    example, the at one time independence of the Jesuits
                    was lost, and they
                    became essentially an intellectual war-like arm of
                    the Pope.
                     Results were more important than means, and
                    the true significance
                    of the practices of the Ignatius meditations, or
                    essence of the Rules
                    of the Order, becomes confused.  The history of
                    the Roman Church
                    is littered with such ruins.  Fortunately, some
                    will keep the
                    practices of the various religious orders alive, so
                    there are always
                    pockets where hardening and dogmatic fundamentalism
                    is kept out.
                    
                  
Now with this background we can begin to consider the even greater, though yet mostly unknown, spiritual crime that the Church recently committed (in the 20th Century).
Let me first put this forward as a
                    sequence of hypotheses - as several "suppose thats".
                    
                  
Suppose that as natural science began
                    to
                    dominate the thinking of the world, in its
                    conclusion that all was
                    matter and that there was no spirit, natural science
                    became what in
                    John I would have been called: an aspect of the
                    spirit of the
                    anti-Christ.  In that long ago language, we can
                    still today find
                    the right modern idea if we do not make too
                    exaggerated our approach.
                     What does that language in John I say, but
                    that the anti-Christ
                    spirit will deny the existence of the Son and of the
                    Father.
                    
                  
This is what natural science does
                    today,
                    in that it teaches that there is only matter, never
                    spirit.  Do
                    not be confused by those zealots who think the
                    anti-Christ is a person
                    who will bring destruction and end times.  This
                    is not so.
                      The anti-Christ spirit simply penetrates
                    human
                    consciousness in the absence of Christian practices, and then denies the Son and the
                    Father, as the writer
                    of John I understood through the examples he saw in
                    his time.  It
                    (this anti-Christ spirit) expresses itself as an
                    idea contrary to the
                    Truth.
                    
                  
But Christ is the Truth, as our Faith
                    would tell us.  If then science denies the
                    Father and the Son,
                    then somehow it has failed to find the truth.
                     It may know a great
                    deal, but something must be missing.  Let me
                    repeat this in
                    another way.
                    
                  
Christ is the Truth.  Science
                    denying spirit and saying all is only matter, denies
                    the Father and the
                    Son.  Our Faith then tells us this kind of
                    science must be flawed.
                     But where do we find a science that knows the
                    spirit?  He
                    promised to be with us to the ends of time - is He
                    with us in this
                    dilemma now?
                    
                  
Most religious institutions believe the
                    situation is one of debate, say between a scientific
                    thinker such as
                    Sam Harris, and between someone of a more religious
                    persuasion.
                     It is argued by some religious that religion
                    has as its proper
                    territory the question of morals, and they are
                    willing to leave to
                    science the question of facts.  But Mr. Harris
                    is relentless, and
                    now asserts that this flawed science not only should
                    dominate the
                    question of facts, but can give us morals as well.
                    
                  
If we look to the leaders of the
                    institutional Church, we don't get much of a moral
                    example, so what can
                    be done?  Wel, Faith would suggest that Christ
                    would act and not
                    leave us alone in this failed situation - would not
                    leave us bound to
                    the materialism (all is matter, there is no spirit)
                    of present day
                    science.
                    
                  
Suppose He did.   Suppose
                    during the early parts of the 20th Century Christ
                    found a voice for New
                    Revelation.   That not only did Christ
                    find such a voice
                    crying in the wilderness of scientific materialism
                    (all matter, no
                    spirit), suppose the exercise of that voice
                    predicted Christ's true
                    spiritual Second Coming (just as the first John the
                    Baptist predicted
                    Christ physical Incarnation).  Further, suppose
                    that all this
                    happened in a way in which the problems that might
                    face such acts of
                    Christ could be meet with the standards of inquiry
                    common today to
                    natural science.   Suppose that in this
                    2nd voice crying in
                    the wilderness, existed the capacity to unite
                    science and religion,
                    without damage to the true nature of either Way of
                    being in the world.
                    
                  
In addition, suppose that the true
                    Second
                    Coming began its principle effects upon the world,
                    during the darkest
                    horrors of the 12 years between the burning of the
                    Reichstag (1933) and
                    the exploding of the Atomic Bomb (1945) - the time
                    when millions of
                    Jews and Russians and Germans, and hundreds of
                    thousands others, were
                    murdered in war.  And suppose that true to what
                    Christ had
                    predicted, that He would come again in a certain
                    form or way, this He
                    actually did: Jesus
                    replied,
                    "You have said it. And in the future you will see
                    the Son of
                    Man seated in the place of power at God's right hand
                    and coming on the
                    clouds of heaven." Matthew
                    26: 64
                    
                  
Suppose that the stream of ancient
                    wisdom
                    - the Kings of the Gospel stories - are at work
                    again today.
                     Given the opportunity to give birth into life
                    a new revelation -
                    new spiritual truth belonging to the age of science
                    - something happens
                    in the world right in front of the male dominating
                    hierarchies of the
                    fallen Roman Church, and they ignore it, just as
                    they ignored the
                    priests who steal innocence, and just as they
                    ignored the holocaust,
                    and just as they ignored the countless other crimes
                    within the Roman
                    Church, in order to preserve the institutional
                    Church at the expense of
                    the practice of the Religion.
                    
                  
And suppose that this true Second
                    Coming
                    is not the End Times Second Coming, but something
                    else, something more
                    needed and wanted by the Faithful.  Those who
                    want to judge all
                    matters of Christian Religion by reference to the
                    Bible, want
                    essentially to confine the Divine to words in a
                    book, and in particular
                    words as interpreted by fallen human beings.
                     The Divine cannot be
                    so confined, but is free to speak in any way and in
                    any how It chooses.
                    
                  
What does it mean: to unite science and
                    religion?  How could we know about this
                    so-called true Second
                    Coming in the spirit - in clouds of
                    heaven?  What
                    can be made of facts and morals that combines into
                    something both and
                    neither - something beyond the limits of each?
                    
                  
And, more crucially: What has this to do with Saving the Catholic Religion from the Roman Church?
A story ...
                    
                  
In 1861 was born a man in Central
                    Europe,
                    by the name of Rudolf Steiner.   He was to
                    become the voice
                    crying in the wilderness of scientific materialism,
                    and those who he
                    had Baptized with the true scientific spirit (the
                    one that does not
                    deny the Father and the Son) prepared themselves for
                    the true Second
                    Coming of Christ, not in the material physical body,
                    and but in a
                    spiritual body.  In the age where science
                    mistakenly assumes all
                    is matter and there is no spirit, where else would
                    Christ - the Truth -
                    come again in this Now, but in the spirit - in the
                    future you will see
                    the Son of Man seated in the place of power at God's
                    right hand and
                    coming on the clouds of heaven.
                    
                  
This then happens in the 20th Century
                    to
                    a degree all over the world, although the
                    announcement of this event
                    was right in Central Europe and right under the
                    noses of the Roman
                    Church, with its vast intellectual prowess via the
                    Society of Jesus.
                     New Revelation of how it is that behind matter
                    lies spirit, and
                    not only the idea of that, but how to go about
                    reconstructing science
                    itself so that this can be known without ever
                    violating the best that
                    already justly lives in natural science.
                    
                  
Nor is this Revelation dependent upon
                    mere belief.  All the work of this Revelation
                    points to facts,
                    which can be sought and discovered and which lead
                    ever and again toward
                    not only a true scientific practice of Religion, but
                    toward a truly religious practice of Science.
                     Right under the noses of the self-serving male
                    dominated
                    hierarchical structures of the Roman Catholic Church, New Revelation was/is given and then
                    criminally ignored.
                    
                  
How would medicine, education, social
                    science, natural science, agriculture, art,
                    philosophy, theology, - how
                    would all the vast fields of human knowledge change,
                    if real scientific
                    knowledge of the spirit were joined to the already
                    huge scope of the
                    scientific knowledge of matter?
                    
                  
There are here a thousand stories, as
                    this transformation of New Revelation into practical
                    Arts has been
                    slowly begun (we are only in the beginning of the Second Coming - the Copernican revolution took almost
                    400 years to
                    dominate human thinking, and now its counter
                    revolution - the true
                    Second Coming, will as well take Centuries to emerge
                    into full
                    flowering).  Here let me tell just one such
                    story (there are far
                    too many), with a small preliminary introduction.
                    
                  
In order for the scientific spirit to
                    enter into the already centuries long scientific age
                    and participate in
                    some kind of extension of the arts of science so as
                    to include the
                    spirit, the crucial subject of inquiry first has to
                    be the human mind.
                      It is the human mind that is the primary
                    tool out of which
                    materialistic science has been given birth, and it
                    is through the human
                    mind that the New Revelation and the true Second
                    Coming are to be
                    perceived.
                    
                  
Those who aspire to elevate rational
                    thinking are on the right track, but they are
                    mistaken in their
                    assumption that our instinctive thinking is all that
                    mind can manifest.
                      Yes, we do think, but we sleep inwardly
                    through the real
                    processes of thinking, and it is out of the renewed
                    Kings wisdom that
                    the real nature and understanding of the full
                    spiritual potential of
                    thinking has been born.  Let me repeat: has been born.
                    
                  
The counter-revolution has begun, and
                    Christ has come again.  To the consciously
                    developed and fully
                    willed thinking, Christ is perceivable.
                      Mind is spirit in
                    action, and this personal spirit in action that
                    lives potential in our
                    thinking can be brought to a condition where it
                    perceives Christ.
                    
                  
In his religious role (among many other roles) as the
                    John the Baptist of
                    the true Second Coming, Rudolf Steiner first
                    elaborated in three books,
                    at the end of the 19th Century, precisely how to
                    give birth to this
                    spiritualized thinking.  Not only how, but he
                    explained exactly in
                    what ways this spiritual revolution in thinking fit
                    within the existing
                    stream of philosophical and scientific thought.
                     In the third of
                    these books: called The Philosophy of Spiritual
                    Activity, the subtitle
                    was: some
                    results of introspection following the methods of
                    natural science.
                    
                  
To become baptized by the second John
                    in
                    preparation for our true full baptism by Christ
                    during His Second
                    Coming means only to become fully awake a bit ahead
                    of something that
                    will arise over time in all human beings who seek
                    it, which yet is
                    available already today for those willing to
                    undertake the practices.
                    
                  
The at one time falsely declared
                    heretical wisdom of the Kings has now returned
                    unfettered, and
                    presently makes possible the metamorphosis of
                    thinking itself.
                     There are many ways to approach this
                    transformation, some more
                    instinctive and some more conscious.  In all
                    cases where some
                    degree of the new thinking mystery arises, human
                    knowledge is extended
                    in such a way that the reality of spirit is added to
                    our understanding
                    of matter.
                    
                  
What happened in Central Europe in the 20th Century, right under the noses of the Catholic institutional hierarchies, and its scholars in the Society of Jesus, was nothing less than the beginning glory of a Christ centered spiritualization of all human knowledge. Those who took up this new understanding of the potential of the human mind, inspired by (baptized by) Rudolf Steiner, gave birth to knowledge very much needed by present day humanity. One can not overstate how much this knowledge is needed, and what a crime it was then (and continues today and into the future) for the institutional Roman Church to deny the truths the live right in front of them, and of which they were and are aware.
Steiner called his work Anthroposophy,
                    and as a Kings wisdom he expressly differentiated it
                    from the Christian
                    Religion.  Anthroposophy was simply the science
                    of the new
                    thinking cognition, and like any such science it was
                    meant to live in
                    service to human needs - not itself become another
                    competing religious
                    impulse.  Pope John Paul II knew of this work
                    during his early
                    years in Poland, and as Karol Jozef Wojtlya, he
                    participated in
                    anthroposophical work.  On the Internet one can
                    find a picture of
                    him as Pope with a book on his desk by a former
                    student of Steiner's.
                    
                  
Steiner wrote over 30 books, was quite
                    famous in Central Europe at the beginning of the
                    20th Century, giving
                    over 6000 lectures, while often during his last
                    years these lectures
                    were attended by thousands.   There was no
                    way the Church was
                    unaware of this voice crying in the wilderness of
                    scientific
                    materialism.
                    
                  
Remember: Christ is the Truth and we
                    have
                    nothing to fear from seeking it.
                    
                  
Let me now take up some small examples
                    of
                    this ongoing work, which are related to each other
                    although sometimes
                    separated as if involving different fields.
                     Just as modern
                    science often over emphasizes the distinction
                    between disciplines,
                    their reality is only truly understood when they are
                    integrated.
                    
                  
So we have as a ripening fruit of the
                    new
                    thinking, what are called in separation: Biodynamic
                    Agriculture,
                    Anthroposophical Medicine and Goethean Science.
                     All three of
                    these are joined in their contributions to the
                    health of the human
                    being, and are filled from within by knowledge of
                    the spirit which has
                    now been added to knowledge of matter.
                      The human being,
                    while on the Earth between birth and death, is both
                    matter and spirit,
                    and many problems of humanity today cannot be solved
                    without first
                    understanding and then realizing in practice the
                    integration of the
                    relevant spiritual facts with the relevant material
                    facts.
                      
                  
Below I can only skip across the
                    surface
                    of this knowledge like a flat rock thrown
                    horizontally onto the surface
                    of a pond or a lake.  The details are too vast,
                    which is why those
                    who take up this work make for themselves new
                    religious-like careers.
                     What was formerly heretical thinking is no
                    longer to be confined
                    to the monastery or the convent, but comes now full
                    born into the light
                    of day.
                    
                  
The more general of these inner related
                    disciplines is called Goethean Science, and one can
                    find excellent
                    examples of its practice on the website: The Nature
                    Institute.
                     The new thinking mysteries begin with the
                    metamorphosis of
                    ordinary cause and effect abstract thinking into
                    what is best called
                    organic thinking (and sometimes called Goetheanism,
                    after the
                    poet-scientist Goethe who was among the first who
                    instinctively
                    practiced it).    This organic
                    thinking naturally grows
                    into pure thinking, which is similar in a way to the
                    high level
                    concentrated thinking of the pure mathematician, but
                    which is a more
                    conscious type of pure thinking because it is filled
                    from within by a
                    fully intended moral impulse.
                    
                  
On the Nature Institute website, one
                    can
                    come upon many works, and here is just a good
                    example: by Stephen
                    Talbot: On Making the
                    Genome Whole,
                    were current advances in the investigation of the
                    nature of the cell
                    reveal more and more that the natural scientist can
                    no longer hold to
                    the view the DNA is the cause of living processes,
                    but that if we
                    honestly view what goes on in the cell (as
                    understood today), the part
                    does not determine the whole, but rather the whole
                    determines the part.
                    
                  
This idea is significant for all human
                    knowledge, particular that concerning our health. 
                    
                  
As well, the human being needs food in
                    order to live.  We are all aware today how
                    poorly run is the
                    social system that delivers food to our tables.
                     Nutrition is a
                    core aspect of health, particularly of the physical
                    body.  A
                    doctor acquaintance of mine, deeply familiar with
                    biodynamic
                    agriculture and anthroposophical medicine has made
                    the following
                    statements in conversation (I've highlighted these
                    in italics),
                    concerning which I will then offer my own
                    elaboration.
                    
                  
1) The chief cause of death in
                    America is the American doctor.  This is
                    not meant to morally blame, but to point out the
                    fact that the
                    ignorance of the relationship between spirit and
                    matter that so
                    pervades modern medicine - this ignorance kills.
                     The modern
                    doctor frequently mis-diagnoses, and then compounds
                    that error by using
                    a sledge-hammer when a butterfly kiss is more
                    therapeutic.
                      All we have to do is listen to the ads
                    for modern medicines
                    and all their deadly side-effects to realize that
                    whatever the
                    understanding of medical science is today, it
                    actually knows a great
                    deal less than it pretends. 
                     
Because this ignorance is a culture-wide - that is most everyone assumes that it is the best understanding - scientific materialism lives inside modern medicine as a kind of religion, and just like the Catholic Church in the 16th century, when its beliefs were challenged by the early natural scientists, modern science will brand all spiritual views as heretical and seek to punish those who disagree. But medicine is more art than science, and the true practice of healing requires more than arid facts, numbers and countless tests with machines.
2) The reason people are obese
                    is not because they eat too much, but because they
                    are starving.  The
                    physical body is a work of wonder, about
                    which we still have a great deal to learn (see the
                    essays one the
                    Genome mentioned above, where if you want to get at
                    the core of this
                    drastically incomplete knowledge, just consider that
                    at the cutting
                    edge of cell biology the idea that DNA in the cell
                    is the chief cause
                    of bodily function and form is not longer
                    recognized.  Rather
                    researchers into cell biology now recognize that the
                    parts do not
                    determine the whole, but rather that the whole
                    clearly determines the
                    parts.  This confounds them, for it makes of
                    the living once again
                    a mystery.
                    
                  
In the light of this, from the side of
                    a
                    spirit oriented understanding of nutrition, my
                    doctor acquaintance was
                    pointing out that the body knows that there is
                    almost no real nutrition
                    in the foods agribusiness provides through our
                    grocery stores.  As
                    a consequence, the wisdom of the body is always
                    telling us to eat more
                    and eat more and eat more, because we are
                    nutritionally starving.
                     All of us eat food with little nutrition, but
                    the obviously obese
                    are just those with a body type and typical internal
                    chemistry that
                    more readily transforms sugars into stored fats.
                     Everyone,
                    whatever body type, can't get real nutritious food
                    in the regular
                    grocery store, and this is a cause of a great many
                    illness, both
                    physical and mental.
                    
                  
Processed foods, which are too often
                    agricultural waste transformed into profit making
                    highly advertised
                    junk (with a lot of sugar added so we get the
                    illusion of renewed
                    energy and a lot of salt added so we get the
                    illusion that these things
                    taste good) are killing us in the same way the
                    doctor is killing us -
                    through greed and and arrogant ignorance.  
                    
                  
Food grown on farms is meant to keep us
                    alive, not kill us.  To keep us alive, it has
                    itself to contain
                    life - the food has to be itself alive.  Modern
                    farming practices,
                    as the organic movement fully knows, produce foods
                    that look good (with
                    a lot of help from added fake color and surface
                    oiling). but which
                    don't deliver actual nutrition.  The
                    materialist will argue that
                    there is no proof of this, but his idea of proof is
                    confused.  The
                    real experiment is being done on a massive
                    world-wide scale on all
                    human beings, and while we may not yet fully
                    appreciate the exact
                    causal mechanism (what the materialist demands as
                    proof), the history
                    of last 150 years reveals clearly the arriving of
                    all kinds of
                    illnesses in connection with changes in the growth
                    of food and the
                    simultaneous creation of the picture of the human
                    being as a mechanism
                    - as only matter.
                    
                  
You can't see what you don't look for
                    and
                    having assumed away spiritual concepts of the human
                    being, it is no
                    wonder that today this is hard to find.
                    
                  
In Biodynamics the situation is
                    developed
                    further than in organic practices, for the
                    agricultural processes
                    (modern huge farms) of today actually are killing
                    the soil and the body
                    inheritance characteristics of the animals we eat as
                    well.  The
                    living Earth, on which we depend as a fully
                    integrated organism in its
                    totality, is dying, and we are killing it.  The
                    arrogant and
                    ignorant child is killing its Mother.
                    
                  
In order to return life to the Earth, we have to recognize that it is itself integrated into the Cosmos, into the extra-telluric fullness of the whole Solar System. Nothing is separate from anything else, and it is only the over-use of the presently limited thinking processes of analysis (without wise synthesis) by natural science that has led to this false perception of independence (parts unrelated to wholes). The moon and the planets do influence plant and animal growth, and we need to include these realities (out of a scientifically oriented new discipline of observation and thinking - Goethean Science) in our understanding of the underlying nature of living agricultural processes. This is Biodynamic Agriculture.
Biodynamic produce has now become the sought after prize of many gourmet chefs, and as well biodynamic wines are seen as exceptional. Why - because those who know foods and wines know taste, and nothing - nothing - tastes quite as lively (as full of life) as biodynamic foods and wines, to the carefully developed and cultivated senses of a gourmet.
In a similar fashion as to farms and
                    food, the human organization is not merely physical,
                    but spiritual as
                    well.  We have in fact four bodies, not one: a
                    physical body; an
                    ethereal or life body; a soul or psychological or
                    astral body; and, a
                    warmth or ego or spirit body.  A properly
                    disciplined thinking can
                    learn to perceive these less visible elements of our
                    reality and
                    nature, and while each part is healed in a subtly
                    different way, all
                    are yet interdependent.
                    
                  
My doctor acquaintance has produced a
                    book, which I recommend as an excellent practical
                    and pragmatic doorway
                    into this realm of the union of knowledge of spirit
                    and matter.
                     He doesn't know everything, but he will be a
                    good start, on a
                    valuable subject for all, to coming to the
                    appreciation of the facts of
                    which I have been writing here: New Revelation is
                    making its way into
                    the world, and the true Second Coming is upon us.
                     These changes
                    leave traces in human cultural developments -
                    fingerprints as it were,
                    and in Dr. Cowen's book: The
                    Four-Fold Path to Healing,
                    we have one quite
                    outstanding fingerprint.
                    
                  
For example, he describes how with good
                    nutrition, we heal the physical body.  With
                    good therapeutics
                    (butterfly kisses instead of sledge-hammers) we heal
                    the ethereal or
                    life body.  With good movement exercise we heal
                    the soul or
                    psychic/emotional or astral body, and with
                    meditation (good mental
                    exercises) we heal the spirit body.
                    
                  
This is just one, by the way, of
                    thousands of books and works and human activities
                    that have begun to
                    come into the world through the New Revelation and
                    as part of the true
                    Second Coming in the spiritual.  Education is
                    being transformed,
                    as is Art and Psychology and Science and Social
                    Science and beyond.
                     The presence of these fingerprints is far
                    greater in Central
                    Europe, and has been going on there longer than in
                    America.  The
                    ignoring of this Christ presence, and its offerings
                    to humanity's
                    deepest needs, is the ultimate spiritual crime of
                    the now very much
                    needs to be dying institutional Roman Church.
                    
                  
Unfortunately, it will not die an easy
                    death and with that theme I will next approach a way
                    to understand how
                    to save the Catholic (or Christian) Religion from
                    the no longer viable
                    patriarchal dominance of old Christian religious
                    institutions, for all
                    institutional hierarchical structures must
                    eventually undergo the dying
                    and becoming described in the Third Fatima Prophecy.
                    
                  
A question that may arise, in those who
                    hear or read these words, is: what about
                    me?  If Christ
                    has come again, how am I to know this?  If He
                    promised to be with
                    me until the ends of time, how I am to see Him in
                    the spirit today?
                      Doesn't he make himself available to
                    all?
                    
                  
As an aspect of the true Second Coming in the spirit - in the clouds of heaven - in the inwardness of the human being - there has also come to be a Second and purely spiritual Eucharist. In Luke Christ says: the kingdom of heaven is inside you. So, look inside yourself and you will find Him there. This second Eucharist does not eliminate the Original, which has to do with the transubstantiation of matter, but does add to that of matter the transubstantiation of thought. This is the essence of the new Mystery of Thinking.
The Original Eucharist is communal and
                    requires thereby guiding hands, which no longer
                    needs to be a priest,
                    however.  It is simply a practical problem.
                     To celebrate the
                    transubstantiation of matter - its
                    respiritualization as it were - as a
                    community, requires many hands.  We do not feed
                    ourselves, but
                    each other.
                    
                  
The Second Eucharist in the Ethereal
                    (in
                    the clouds of heaven - in the inwardness of our own
                    Life Body) is
                    entirely personal and takes place between our own
                    spirit (our own I-am)
                    and the Divine, within the temple of the soul or
                    mind.  The
                    practice of the transubstantiation of thought is
                    religious in intention
                    (that is an aspect of our will) and scientific in perception (that is
                    an aspect of our
                    introspective thinking) and artistic in practice (that is an
                    aspect of the
                    contribution of the heart or of feeling).  Some will call it thinking
                    with the heart,
                    although that is an oversimplification.
                    
                  
This potential for the Second Eucharist
                    was known from the beginning of Christianity, and
                    the disciples in Acts
                    called it: Holy Breath.  Recall John the
                    Baptist: the one coming after me, I
                    cannot even carry His sandals; He will baptize you
                    in holy breath and
                    fire.
                    
                  
The practice is fairly straightforward, and was described by Christ in the Sermon on the Mount, although since that time it has fallen into confusion and earthly excesses.
When Christ gave the Our Father, He
                    said
                    to pray it in secret.  "But when
                    you pray, go into your room and shut the door
                    and pray to your Father who is in secret; and your
                    Father who sees in
                    secret will reward you."
                     Matthew
                     6:6
                    
                  
This is the true spiritual mystery of
                    prayer - to pray in secret, not in public.  The
                    practice of public
                    prayer is the practice of institutional coercion and
                    religious
                    totalitarianism.  We are meant to be shamed by
                    this, and its chief
                    fruit is the further empowerment of the priest as a
                    necessary
                    intermediary between us and the Divine.  That
                    time is over.
                    
                  
During this prayer in secret, be all
                    the
                    same bold: say it out loud.  There is no need
                    to be so loud as to
                    be heard in the next room, but it is more a matter
                    of authenticity.
                     You are in secret, but not hiding.  Speak
                    it with your
                    normal voice.  Let this spoken tone carry the truth of how you actually
                    feel in the moment,
                    even if filled with doubt and despair.  Prayer
                    is about truth.
                     Speak truly, and then listen inwardly.
                    
                  
Listening inwardly can be difficult,
                    especially if we have had little practice.  It
                    is, after all, an
                    art of sorts - first a skill, then a craft and then
                    an art.  Holy
                    Breath does not shout, for it is of Life, just as
                    the prologue to the
                    John Gospel describes: "In Him was
                    Life and the Life was the Light of men"
                    
                  
Contrary to doctrine and ancient ideas,
                    neither the Son or the Father (or the Mother) is
                    about obedience.
                     Their love grants us full freedom as its
                    highest currently
                    expressed meaning.  In our time, however, there
                    has arisen,
                    because of the flaws and fallen nature of
                    institutional and patriarchal
                    religious practices, the idea that there are
                    absolute moral principles
                    to which everyone must be obedient.  One can
                    even understand that
                    there may have been in the past some degree of
                    necessity for this
                    approach, because the human being was not fully
                    developed - did not
                    possess entirely what is potential (and this remains
                    true to a degree -
                    we can yet be more).  For that reason a
                    religious culture urging
                    obedience to high moral ideas may have been in the
                    past a bit justified.
                    
                  
Yet, the timing of the true Second Coming in the spiritual is about acknowledging that we are now capable of becoming morally free. The whole point of Christ's present day Baptism of human beings, by fire and holy breath, concerns this moral freedom. This idea too is found in the images of the Third Fatima Prophecy which we have been studying.
The City is in ruins - Western Civilization is undergoing dramatic metamorphosis. What could be more clear from contemporary events we see on the evening News? Institutional religion must as well transform. The Holy Father leads the procession up the Hill to the foot of the Cross, there to die in violence not unlike what is being visited all over the world. The spiritual essence released by this act - the blood - is to be saved by Angels and then offered to us in the future as we continue to struggle to make our way toward God.
Rudolf Steiner, out of the Kings
                    wisdom,
                    taught us in detail how to have a practical
                    relationship to the dead -
                    to those that have crossed over.  They remain
                    interested in our
                    lives, and available to help.  At the same
                    time, nothing that we
                    need is to be hidden from us, if we but rightly
                    understand what Christ
                    tried to teach us about prayer.
                    
                  
When we pray the Our Father in secret,
                    we
                    have made of the mind and soul a temple for our
                    immortal spirit.
                     This mood of prayer, and the seven petitions
                    of the Our Father,
                    when practiced (remember what Christ said about
                    building our house upon
                    rock) leads us further.  In this temple and in
                    secret we now say
                    whatever is on our mind, out loud and authentically
                    giving voice to our
                    true feeling nature as we are at that time.  We
                    hide nothing.
                    
                  
Ask, seek
                    and
                    knock, He said.  
                    
                  
If we have a question spoken aloud, and
                    the more modest the question (the more humble), we
                    will receive an
                    answer in the inward silence of our own mind/soul
                    temple.  A
                    voice, like in form and texture our own inner voice,
                    yet so so soft,
                    will reply in the clouds of heaven inside us.
                     The reply will be
                    nearly instantaneous, and almost simultaneous,
                    because even before we
                    speak out loud, the question has lived first in our
                    hearts, and its in
                    our hearts that we are known ("...but then
                    I will perceive the same way that I was
                    perceived all along."
                     St. Paul, 1
                    Corinthians 13).
                    
                  
Because we live in the time of Fire,
                    the
                    time of the ruination of the City, where the Angel
                    with the Sword is
                    acting (remember He said: ...I come not
                    to bring peace but a sword),
                    and because we strive to walk up the Hill - up the
                    Mountain -  to the Cross - that is because we
                    strive to be moral -
                    Christ's Baptism of us by Fire is that struggle to
                    walk up that Hill -
                    to be moral in a time of great troubles - that is in
                    this time - this
                    present.  If we wish to follow In His Steps, we
                    will not be able
                    to hide from moral trials.
                    
                  
But the institutional Church is fallen.
                     What moral authority can it present to us,
                    when clearly the male
                    institutional hierarchy can not lead by example?
                     Christ answers
                    this in all the practices He taught, and which we
                    can follow.  One
                    of these is prayer, and when the fire of our
                    individual biography
                    forces us to confront troubling individual moral
                    questions, we can no
                    longer lean on the Roman Church, but must instead
                    reside in the
                    Catholic (Christian) Religion.  The Religion
                    says pray in secret
                    and find your reward in secret; or, ask, seek and
                    knock.
                    
                  
Good and humble questions take the form
                    of how may I help this other person.  How may I
                    love them.
                     These good questions are other-directed.
                     Self-directed
                    questions, such as get me out of jail or what is the
                    right number for
                    the lottery - these questions we already know in our
                    hearts the Divine
                    should not answer.  But if we alter them in the
                    right way, so that
                    we ask (to continue the example) how do I live with
                    being in jail or
                    how do I live with being poor - these questions can
                    be answered.
                    
                  
However, if we put among many possible questions a straightforward moral question into the intimacy of prayer something rather remarkable and powerful, and initially frightening, happens. If we ask, as did the character in the movie Million Dollar Baby, should I help this person who wants to die, die? We do not get an answer, but Silence.
The Silence speaks thus: you already
                    know
                    what the right thing to do is.  There is in the
                    Silence no
                    abandonment, but rather a gift of freedom and most
                    remarkably - the
                    gift of trust.  You know, you decide, you act,
                    says the Silence.
                     The same Faith we have in God, God has in us.
                    
                  
The Silence also says: you cannot hide
                    here by making the Divine responsible for what life
                    and the baptism by
                    fire of your own biography has already made you
                    responsible.
                     Don't in prayer come to shift the blame to the
                    Divine, or to a
                    book or to another person in the form of a priest or
                    a bishop or a
                    pope.  Its your life, and you decide.
                     This is what it means
                    to be Baptized by Fire, and to walk up the Hill, or
                    Mountain of moral
                    trials, through the ruination of the City and toward
                    the Cross.
                    
                  
But what then about Baptism by Holy
                    Breath?  What is that about?
                    
                  
Next in prayer we share what we have
                    decided to do.  We take responsibility, and we
                    let the Father
                    know.  We accept the Cup, and with
                    gratefulness.  This Christ
                    lived and taught by example.
                    
                  
Now comes the miracle - now comes the
                    reward - now comes Holy Breath.
                    
                  
We will find that we are stronger -
                    that
                    our course once chosen is joined by Another, who
                    walks beside us.
                     We walk up the Hill following our self chosen
                    course, and we do
                    not walk alone.  Remember: I will be with you
                    until the ends of
                    time.  Even if we drop the Cross, another picks
                    it up.
                    
                  
This is true for everyone, whether
                    Catholic or Christian or whatever.   To
                    take full human
                    responsibility for moral choices is to be Graced by
                    Holy Breath, which
                    comes not as an idea, but as a renewed strength of
                    will.
                    
                  
All of this, by the way, can happen in
                    an
                    instant.  Life confronts us with many moral
                    dilemmas and choices.
                     The more we practice taking responsibility,
                    the more confidence
                    we gain in the practice of our version of religion.
                     Even the
                    atheist will be graced in this way, because the
                    event of the Second
                    Eucharist is invisible, and cannot be known unless
                    we start to look for
                    it.  Not having the idea of it, the atheist
                    will not see it, but
                    this grace is not denied anyone who choses to be
                    moral out of their own
                    insight.
                    
                  
Lest someone think this will lead to
                    all
                    kinds of moral relativism and all the other
                    complaints made by modern
                    priests of institutional religions, the facts of
                    experience are
                    otherwise.  These, who assert moral authority,
                    judge, when having
                    been taught in the Sermon on the Mount not to judge.
                     We pray in
                    secret and are rewarded in secret and it is no one
                    else's business.
                    
                  
Now don't think you are going to get it
                    right all the time.  Life hasn't ever taught
                    such a lesson, and to
                    live truly in life is to live in Christ.  To
                    learn authentic
                    prayer and to discover and have confidence in our
                    own capacity for
                    knowing the right course of moral action is to bear
                    a Cross - to follow
                    Him and take up our own cross.
                    
                  
Nor are such ideas anything fully
                    mysteries and hidden.  One need only watch
                    these two films of
                    Clint Eastwood to see how artists perceive this
                    reality, without ever
                    having to grasp it in ideas: Million Dollar Baby and
                    Gran Torino.
                     Eastwood plays in both these roles the human
                    face of someone who
                    can't quite get it what the priests of the Roman
                    Church have to say.
                     His deepest questions, they can't answer.
                     Not because they
                    lack experience, so much as they are not him.
                    
                  
The Baptism by fire in our biography is
                    personal.  Its not for another, its just for
                    us.  We are
                    individual and loved as an individual which is why
                    moral choices have a
                    very tricky time coming down to universal principles
                    to which all must
                    be obedient.  For example, all abortions take
                    place in an
                    individual context and it is that individual which
                    must deal with the
                    question - the meaning of the moral question is
                    meant for them, and
                    this includes the dilemma of those who want to
                    preserve life.
                     Their dilemma too is individual.
                    
                  
There is a caution, however.
                      Which again is related to the absence of
                    actually practicing
                    the Catholic (Christian) Religion.  The
                    anti-abortion movement frequently shapes itself in
                    the form of a mob.
                     Not always, but frequently.  As a mob it
                    is more like the
                    folks in the Gospels who Christ appears before and
                    says: He who is without sin, let
                    him cast the first stone.
                     Its a
                    teaching story that gives a concrete example of the
                    problem of the mote
                    and the beam - the problem of judging lest ye be
                    judged.  An
                    anti-abortion mob really ought to look to their own
                    beam, first.
                     Once they understand that, then Christ says,
                    will they be able to
                    help the person with the mote.
                    
                  
A similar thing is true when we think
                    about the current Pope and the innocence shattering
                    priests.
                     Let's not become a mob.  Let's instead
                    understand that
                    within the larger scale of things, it is time for
                    the Body of Christ,
                    the laity and the religious, in the Catholic
                    Religion, to do something
                    the institutional Church cannot do.  Walk up
                    the Hill and
                    consciously let the old die.  Stop leaning on
                    the institutional
                    Church as a moral authority, and take up the Cross
                    yourself.
                    
                  
There doesn't need to be a reformative
                    mob-like revolution in the Roman Church for there to
                    be a metamorphosis
                    of the Catholic (or Christian) Religion.  Carry
                    your own cross,
                    don't throw stones and have faith.  The rest
                    will take care of
                    itself.
                    
                  
The Roman Church will then become more
                    and more irrelevant.  Already it has had to let
                    go all manner of
                    buildings, because the material costs of the tragedy
                    of child abuse
                    have been so high.  All over are empty spaces,
                    some once Churches.
                     The City is falling into ruin.  Who said
                    God only shows up
                    in a Cathedral?  Nothing prevents the laity and
                    the religious from
                    gathering together in small circles to actually
                    practice the Christian
                    Religion.
                    
                  
Certainly we can expect the male
                    authority driven hierarchies to threaten
                    excommunication  - that
                    is to deny the celebration of the Mass and the
                    transubstantiation of
                    matter during this rite.  Let them.
                     Christ doesn't follow
                    the Pope, or the Bishops or the Priests.  They
                    have no authority
                     whatsoever over Him.
                    
                  
Join in community with others and once
                    more struggle to practice the Religion.  Let the Church
                    built on sand wash
                    away in the storms of the present times.  Walk
                    up the Hill.
                     Carry the Cross.  Keep company with
                    others of a like
                    intention.  But pray in secret.  He will
                    be with us, and She
                    will be with us.   The Religion is
                    actually very simple.
                     Savor its simplicity.
                    
                  
Pray in secret and individually.
                     Meditate (have thoughtful conversations about
                    the Truth) in
                    community.  And last, but certainly not least:
                    Love each other.
                  
                  
                
                        
                        
Barack Obama
and
the
                        reality of the anti-Christ spirit
                        
                      
- what might happen if you begin to insert
reason into Christian discourse,
on
                        questions of public life -
                        
                      
by Joel A. Wendt
                        
                      
The purpose of the following material is to help Christians, and others, appreciate that there are alternative views which might help our public life - our life of shared social and political discourse and action - alternative to those ideas that tend to dominate what is thought to be a Christian view of how to participate as a member or a citizen of any social order such as a State. In order to lay out this alternative, however, it is also necessary to deepen the reader’s understanding of the potentials of true Christian practice - what actually happens when we take up the Cross and follow Christ, instead of just uncritically accept certain ill-thought out systems of belief.
* * *
Among some right wing and
                        fundamentalist individuals,
                        claiming to speak as Christians, one can find
                        the idea that the current
                        president of the USA, Barack Obama, is the
                        anti-Christ.
                          Their interpretation of the meaning
                        of this biblical idea
                        is in error, although by seeking the true
                        meaning of this idea, that we
                        know of through the Letters in the New Testament
                        as John I and John II,
                        can actually help us understand better political
                        life through searching
                        for the deeper understanding of: "render
                        unto Caesar the things
                        that are Caesar's and unto God the things that
                        are Gods".  This
                        is to say that if we deepen our
                        appreciation of this idea of an anti-Christ
                        spirit, we can at the same
                        time deepen our understanding of our shared
                        public life, which we call
                        politics.
                        
                      
This will not be easy, for we have
                        many confusions here,
                        so we need to proceed carefully and look at the
                        situation from multiple
                        and flexible directions.  Here is what the
                        Bible actually says
                        about the anti-Christ spirit, for it appears in
                        only one place - the
                        first two Letters of John:
                        
                      
1 John
                        2:18-19 "Children, it
                        is the last hour; and just as you heard that
                        antichrist is coming, even
                        now many antichrists have arisen; from this we
                        know that it is the last
                        hour. They went out from us, but they were not
                        really of us; for if
                        they had been of us, they would have remained
                        with us; but they went
                        out, in order that it might be shown that they
                        all are not of us."
                        
                      
1 John
                        2:22-23 "Who is the
                        liar but the one who denies that Jesus is the
                        Christ? This is the
                        antichrist, the one who denies the Father and
                        the Son. Whoever denies
                        the Son does not have the Father; the one who
                        confesses the Son has the
                        Father also."
                        
                      
1 John 4:2-3 "By this you know the spirit of God: every spirit that confesses that Jesus Christ has come in the flesh is from God; and every spirit that does not confess Jesus is not from God; and this is the spirit of the antichrist, of which you have heard that it is coming, and now it is already in the world."
2 John
                        1:7 "For many
                        deceivers have gone out into the world, those
                        who do not acknowledge
                        Jesus Christ as coming in the flesh. This is the
                        deceiver and the
                        antichrist."
                        
                      
Biblical speculation by
                        error-capable human beings has
                        created an idea that conflates these passages in
                        the first two Letters
                        of John with images from Revelations, as well as
                        certain ideas in the
                        Old Testament.   It is amazing the
                        number of supposed
                        thinkers who don’t bother to find out that
                        Revelations and the Old
                        Testament never mentions the anti-Christ spirit
                        in their wide ranging
                        representations of prophecies of coming dark or
                        evil spiritual
                        influences.  It is then through this lame
                        and undisciplined
                        thinking that the anti-Christ spirit (a kind of
                        attitude of the human
                        soul, living in most human beings) is morphed
                        into the picture of a
                        single person or an evil Being.  This
                        extreme exaggeration then
                        disables us from actually appreciating what
                        might be learned from this
                        idea in the Letters of John, were we less
                        inclined to want to find the
                        world inhabited by  fearful and evil
                        bogeymen.  As with much
                        today that masquerades as Christian practice,
                        this hysteria itself is
                        of the anti-Christ spirit, for it denies the
                        Son, not intellectually
                        but by deed, by refusing to recognize,
                        understand and practice the
                        teachings and follow the deeds of the Son, and
                        substituting instead of
                        true practice a vain allegiance to ill-reasoned
                        systems of belief.
                        
                      
In this article I have chosen to
                        write of the anti-Christ
                        spirit (small s), and not of the anti-Christ
                        Spirit (capital S), hoping
                        to make the following distinction.  In the
                        latter case, with the
                        use of the term Spirit capitalized, a Being is
                        implied, as if these
                        words anti-Christ Spirit were the name of
                        someone, perhaps visible,
                        perhaps invisible.   In using the term
                        anti-Christ spirit
                        (not capitalized) instead, my intention is to
                        use the term small s
                        spirit to refer to an attitude of soul.  So
                        throughout this
                        article the term anti-Christ
                        spirit is to represent
                        a general attitude of
                        the human soul and not an evil Being.  This
                        is fully consistent,
                        in my view, with the basic idea in the letters
                        of John.
                        
                      
Another principle example of this
                        anti-Christ spirit in
                        contemporary Christian thought is the idea that
                        something, in order to
                        be spiritually true, must be Biblical.
                         That is, for example, the
                        idea that it can’t be true that human beings are
                        immortal spirits
                        experiencing a sequence of incarnations over
                        long periods of time (the
                        idea of reincarnation and karma).   As
                        this idea of the
                        cultural East came to the fore in America and
                        elsewhere in recent
                        decades, Christian religious thinking denied it, and based its denial on an
                        absence of this idea in
                        the Bible.  This idea is not absent from
                        the Bible by the way, but
                        those who oppose it force various possible
                        biblical interpretations
                        toward their own doctrines - that is, they make
                        Bible passages fit the
                        meaning they have already decided it ought to mean.
                        
                      
As regards the idea of
                        reincarnation and karma, we need
                        only realize the profound meaning hidden openly
                        in Christ’s comment
                        that we are forgiven seventy times seven.
                         Such a level of
                        complete forgiveness, by the Divine Mystery, is
                        most clearly manifested
                        in those circumstances when we are allowed to
                        return in the body again
                        and again in order to have as many chances as
                        possible to resolve our
                        errors.  To believe that we can learn the
                        lessons of Christ in
                        just one life-time is to imagine that Christ has
                        little patience for
                        his Children and for whom  He has
                        demonstrated so much Love.
                         The Divine-Father Mystery would not deny
                        us all the time we need
                        in order to learn what life has to teach.
                        
                      
God is the God of all, not just
                        those living in Western
                        culture.  In bringing the idea of
                        reincarnation and karma from out
                        of Eastern culture, to Western culture, is God
                        not speaking: here is an additional idea
                        by
                        which to more deeply understand the Creation.
                         Yet, we deny God the capacity to speak to
                        us from another
                        quarter, by our limiting all that we can know
                        and think to only what is
                        taught in the Bible.
                        
                      
This fundamentally legalistic and
                        theological practice of
                        arguing about a truth, such that if it cannot be
                        found in the Bible it
                        cannot be true, is also a denial of the Father
                        and the Son.
                          This is accomplished by the
                        reduction and confining of the
                        Divine Mystery to only what is contained in a
                        book, clearly of human
                        origin however inspired, and limited as well in
                        time to the Past.
                          To rest our systems of understanding
                        on a book is to deny
                        the true Glory of the Creation, and to limit God
                        to never being able to
                        say anything more to us (that is we make God
                        incapable of new
                        revelation).   To look to a book,
                        instead of to the reality
                        of life as it daily surrounds us, is to deny the
                        authentic presence of
                        Christ in our lives (succumb to one of the
                        temptations of the anti-Christ
                        spirit).
                        
                      
Yes, many do assert a Christ
                        presence in their lives, but
                        only in the sense that it can be found first in
                        a book - in the Bible.
                         Christ is not to be allowed by these views
                        to appear to us as He
                        wishes, but must only appear to us as
                        error-capable human beings choose
                        to interpret a text.  This is another form
                        of hypocrisy.
                          Many claim to believe in the Divine
                        Mystery as the Author
                        of our existence, and at the same time limit
                        that God to never being
                        able to say anything new, or to never being
                        capable of speaking to us
                        from any other direction than out of a book,
                        which we should never
                        forget must be constantly interpreted by human
                        beings.
                        
                      
This anti-Christ spirit among those
                        claiming to be
                        Christian is also often of the same nature as
                        the mob concerning which
                        Christ said: He
                        among you who is without sin, let him cast the
                        first stone.
                         Finger pointing, and asserting that Christ
                        will
                        come at the End Times and destroy human beings
                        is to be not in touch at
                        all with the Creative works of the God of Love.
                         Here I do not
                        have the time and space to deal with the
                        confusions spread by these
                        so-called Christians as to the true meaning of
                        the deep symbolism of
                        Revelations (that is dealt with elsewhere by
                        others and mostly with
                        great depth), and instead I here choose to work
                        more carefully with a
                        single idea - the idea of the anti-Christ spirit
                        as appears in
                        contemporary life; and, as may or may not relate
                        to the deeds and ideas
                        of our shared public life, which we call
                        politics (which Christ
                        referred to when he made the well known, but not
                        well understood,
                        distinction between the realm of Caesar and the
                        realm of God).
                        
                      
It will help as well to note in
                        passing the work of the
                        Russian philosopher, Vladimir Soloviev.  He
                        wrote a significant
                        book near the end of his life, with the title: War,
                        Progress, and the End of History: Three
                        discussions, which
                        included "A Short Story of the
                        Antichrist".
                         Soloviev
                        had
                        unusual
                        views on the relationship between thinking
                        consciousness and experience which are well
                        worth investigation in
                        their own right, and which were at the time,
                        being very advanced, quite
                        controversial.  For example, he considered
                        individual human
                        cognition to be capable of direct knowledge of
                        the spirit behind all
                        existence, and given that approach, we might pay
                        some attention to his thinking as expressed in this Story.
                        
                      
Soloviev basically tells the tale
                        of a charismatic
                        individual who rises to political and cultural
                        power in an imaginary
                        state.  He is very popular, and nearly
                        everyone loves him,
                        including all but a few religious leaders.
                         While this is an
                        oversimplification, we could say that this
                        individual's main flaw of
                        character is his egotism.  He is not so
                        much evil in a demonic
                        sense, but rather evil in that he is more for
                        himself and his own power
                        than he is for anyone else.  He wraps
                        himself in the mantle of the
                        Good, through his words, but in his actions he
                        serves no one but his
                        own egotism.  This does not mean he is a
                        dictator in the classical
                        sense, ruling with an iron fist.  On the
                        contrary, he seems to
                        accomplish a lot, as long as we don't notice the
                        texture and quality of
                        his rule given that it is based in his love of
                        his own self above all
                        else.
                        
                      
To return to the two Letters of
                        John (of the three that
                        are in the New Testament), where the anti-Christ
                        spirit is mentioned:
                        
                      
Clearly John means to point out to
                        us what can live in
                        people that is anti- or against the spirit of
                        Christ - against the
                        spirit of sacrifice and love (in I John 4:2-3 The
                        spirit of God).
                         Christ is fully selfless, so much so that
                        if we
                        ask why Judas has to kiss him so that the
                        soldiers could arrest him, we
                        realize it is because when He and the disciples
                        taught, it is clear
                        that only His most intimate disciples knew which
                        single individual was
                        the
                        center, for all, under his influence were
                        capable of speaking and
                        teaching.  Christ is the paragon of
                        egolessness or lack of any
                        self-centeredness, and it would seem that
                        Soloviev wished to express
                        his view that the anti-Christ spirit is not only
                        in denial of the
                        Father and the Son, but more in love with its
                        own Being than any other.
                         There is no I and Thou for this
                        anti-Christ spirit, there is only
                        I.
                        
                      
Let us, at the same time, not fail
                        to appreciate that
                        while Christ's Life sets the bar high, He would
                        not, as Charles Sheldon
                        the author of In His
                        Steps knew, put any
                        task beyond human
                        capacities.  While few attain any where
                        near to the full
                        expression of this yoke of love through selfless
                        self-sacrifice, many
                        express the essence without any need to preach
                        to or condemn others.
                         So when we go about perceiving in modern
                        culture the presence of
                        this anti-Christ spirit, we need to see it as
                        everywhere, not just
                        isolated in those individuals, groups, ideas or
                        processes we do not
                        like because they are different.  In point
                        of fact, that very
                        psychological process of judging and labeling
                        others, as wrong or evil
                        because we do not like them, is itself a form of
                        the anti-Christ
                        spirit, denying as it does the core of what
                        Christ taught about not
                        judging in the Sermon on the Mount.
                        
                      
It should also be noted that these
                        aspects of the Letters
                        of John bear a critical resemblance to our time,
                        in a peculiar way,
                        because of his pointing out that "it is
                        the last hour."
                         While he understands the existence of an
                        anti-Christ spirit, he can't quite see it in
                        himself - he can't quite
                        notice that his act of judging is itself of the
                        anti-Christ spirit.
                        
                         
Those today, who conflate this
                        spirit with the images
                        from Revelations, are often also filled with a
                        dread of the present.
                          There is to this weak thinking so
                        much perceived woe in the
                        world, so much that they judge to be wrong and
                        evil, that they think
                        then how can it not be the
                        last hour.  The
                        problem is that this view, especially today,
                        fails to appreciate the
                        lessons of history, in which nearly every crisis
                        of Western
                        Civilization brought out the assumption that
                        that particular crisis was
                        the last hour - was the End Times.  What
                        justification is there
                        that makes modern End Times believers hold that
                        they are the ones that
                        have finally got it right?
                        
                      
The reality is that such a view is
                        all beam and no mote,
                        and sees the world not as it is, but only as
                        something wrong because it
                        is different from what we in our self-righteous
                        vanity assume it should
                        be.
                        
                      
The fundamental problem is one that
                        has been true all
                        along.   Lets call this problem: the
                        absence of Christian
                        practice.
                        
                      
Here is Christ from the end of the
                        Sermon on the Mount: "Therefore
                        everyone who hears
                        these words of mine and puts them into practice
                        is like a wise man who
                        built his house on the rock. The rain came down,
                        the streams rose, and
                        the winds blew and beat against that house; yet
                        it did not fall,
                        because it had its foundation on the rock. But
                        everyone who hears these
                        words of mine and does not put them into
                        practice is like a foolish man
                        who built his house on sand. The rain came down,
                        the streams rose, and
                        the winds blew and beat against that house, and
                        it fell with a great
                        crash."  Matthew
                        7: 24-27
                        
                      
The dominance of the need for
                        systems of doctrine and
                        belief, and their supposed importance over
                        Christian practice, is what
                        leads to all manner of errors.  Of
                        significance here is an idea
                        that I can’t find a source for, but which is as
                        follows: The world cannot be cured
                        of
                        error by rational argument.  The world
                        is not just rational, it is also irrational
                        (emotionally impulsive) and
                        trans-rational, that is capable of being
                        transcended. 
                         
Partly the idea here is that when
                        politicians compose
                        what appears to be a rational argument for their
                        view of what
                        government policy should be, they act as if this
                        argument should win in
                        a contest or a debate.  A similar kind of
                        event occurs in religion
                        when supposedly rational argument is used to
                        distinguish one set of
                        beliefs from another set of beliefs.
                         People who do this
                        professionally are often called theologists, and
                        sometimes
                        philosophers.  In the political world they
                        are often called
                        lawyers.
                        
                      
Yet the fact is that the idea of
                        Christian practice is
                        about the will, not about the intellect.
                         Although, ... one can
                        come to experience that the substance and
                        content of the intellect may
                        be made to rise and transform through acts of
                        the will applied to the
                        mind.  Confusion often arises, however, in
                        Christian practice when
                        we hear someone make this kind of reference in
                        an argumentative way
                        against the importance of Christian practice: It is
                        not by works alone, but
                        only by the grace of God that we are saved.
                        
                      
First: ... it is significant for
                        experience to make a
                        distinction between the Four Gospels and the
                        rest of the New Testament
                        (including Revelations) if what one wants is to
                        understand what Christ
                        means in the Sermon on the Mount by practice.  For all that is valiant and
                        righteous in the
                        Letters of Paul and others, the true potential
                        of the soul is to be
                        found foremost through the efforts to practice Christ’s teachings directly from
                        the Four Gospels,
                        recognizing that these are not to be
                        theologically interpreted away
                        from their plain meaning, by the use of argument
                        based on something in
                        the rest of the New Testament, or even in the
                        Old Testament.
                         Paul, for example, interprets Christs teachings, but he is
                        clearly not Christ Himself.
                        
                      
To make this as clear as possible:
                         We make a great
                        confusion if we place on the same level of
                        importance any of that which
                        is in the Bible that is not directly the sayings
                        of Christ in the Four
                        Gospels.  In those sayings, God clearly
                        speaks if we but put
                          into
                          practice what is said.  Only
                        through such practice will we
                        find
                        the way to rightly interpret the rest of the
                        Bible.
                        
                      
If, for example, one were to try to
                        invent a
                        counter-argument of an intellectual nature
                        against the importance of
                        the practice of the teachings in the Four
                        Gospels, we are then trying
                        to modify what Christ taught by reference to the
                        error prone
                        interpretations of the disciples.  For all
                        else that they do, and
                        this includes the Letters of Paul, it is what is
                        remembered and taught
                        about what Christ actually said and did that is
                        the most important.
                         Whatever else is in the New Testament must
                        be measured against
                        Christ’s actual words and deeds.
                          Raising up the idea, that
                        works alone cannot lead to salvation, is to
                        follow a human
                        interpretation of the meaning of the words of
                        God.  The teachings
                        of Christ can only be fully understood when
                        practiced - they are not
                        matters of the intellect or lawyer-like
                        theological or philosophical
                        debate.
                        
                      
Keep in mind that what is being
                        said here, is not
                        argumentative and reasoning toward a different
                        intellectual conclusion,
                        but rather based upon what becomes understood of
                        Christ’s teachings
                        through a will which practices.  What the
                        disciples understood was
                        limited by their human nature, and this human
                        nature can only be
                        transcended through practice.   What
                        you have here then is a
                        confusion of different themes and realities that
                        must be
                        distinguished. 
                        
                        
                      
The intellectual problems are many
                        for the theological
                        impulse multiplies possible interpretations of
                        doctrine and dogma
                        endlessly, while the way through their confusion
                        is to focus on
                        practice first.  The historical Arianism
                        controversy, for example,
                        was an argument about matters which someone who
                        practices would realize
                        has no real practical meaning if we are to
                        follow In His Steps.
                         We follow as best as possible Christ’s
                        clear teachings, and
                        through the resulting life trials and
                        experiences our ability to
                        understand and know is enhanced.  From this
                        enhanced state we then
                        gain a better insight into the meaning of
                        Christ’s teachings, and as
                        well a better ability to appreciate the limits
                        of what was later added
                        by Paul and others according to their own
                        interpretations.  
                        
                      
For example, the general tenor of
                        Paul’s letters is often
                        critical of others, whose Christian practice he
                        judges as wanting.
                         We have to ask then to what degree did
                        Paul practice the work of
                        understanding the beam in his own eye first,
                        before he tries to help
                        someone with the mote in their’s.  Remember
                        Paul was not only not
                        a disciple, but at one time a rabid opponent of
                        Christ and Christ’s
                        teachings.  Once converted by his
                        experience on the road to
                        Damascus, he doesn’t lose his excess of zealotry
                        (which true practice
                        would moderate), but merely applies it in a
                        different direction.
                        
                      
As a consequence, from outside the Four Gospels, the discussion
                        of not by works alone focuses on two matters: one is the
                        common practice at
                        the time of people asserting they followed the
                        law.  This boasting
                        is rightly recognized as problematical in John’s
                        letters, but even in
                        that the John of these letters remains himself a
                        hypocrite for not
                        recognizing his own boasting (my words here are
                        also colored with the
                        temptation to boasting).   The second
                        matter is Grace (or
                        salvation).  Without doubt Christ’s love
                        (or Grace) accepts us,
                        whatever our practice, but this is not the
                        meaning of the last verses
                        of the Sermon on the Mount.  These last
                        verses simply explain the
                        consequences of an absence of practice - without
                        practice the house we
                        build in our souls and spirits will fail in any
                        times of troubles.
                        
                      
We might consider that we will need
                        less to be saved if we actually tried harder to practice.
                         What
                        is
                        it that protestant Churches do today, but in
                        essence sell indulgences when they preach that simply by
                        confessing to having had
                        an encounter with Christ, we are saved from our
                        errors, past and
                        future.  Confess, join our church, give us
                        money and lets all hate
                        the unbelievers together.  What kind of
                        message is that?  It
                        is certainly not something Christ would say or
                        do.
                        
                      
It is clear to the common and
                        accepted examination of the
                        history of Christianity, that the religion was built by Paul’s Letters, even
                        though scriptural
                        interpretation contains the idea that Christ
                        authorized this creation
                        of a church to be done by Peter.
                         Remember Paul was not even a
                        disciple, but rather was an opponent of early
                        Christians.  The
                        newly converted are often excessive in their
                        passions.   Also
                        keep in mind that the verse about Peter uses the
                        term rock,
                        and
                        the
                        verse
                        about practice as well uses the term rock.
                         Yet, the first
                        actions of this supposed rock, Peter, is
                        to deny Christ three times.  Clearly at the
                        most crucial moment he
                        wasn’t much of a rock in practice.  He
                        saved himself, via an
                        impulse rooted in the anti-Christ spirit - that
                        is he denied the
                        Christ.  This aspect of the Stories in the
                        Gospels is itself an
                        important teaching, worthy of much discussion.
                        
                      
The Roman Church, for example,
                        borrowing from the
                        historical ideas of a ruler’s succession, has
                        used the idea of the laying
                        on of the hands to
                        maintain the fiction that all Popes are Peter’s
                        successors, forgetting that when the time of
                        testing came, Peter denied
                        Christ.  Was he then the rock which Christ
                        hoped for, or did the
                        Roman Church built itself upon sand from the
                        very beginning?
                        
                      
All of these kinds of actions, such
                        as the wanting to
                        link the Roman Church to Peter, failed because
                        they are rooted
                        primarily in the intellect - they are ideas
                        first, and never entered
                        deeply enough in the soul to become
                        self-transformative acts of the
                        will.
                        
                      
True Christian practice, however,
                        trains the will.
                         We choose practice or not, according to
                        our own insight.  If
                        we don’t practice, that which results from
                        practice will not arise in
                        the soul and spirit.  Just as an athlete
                        must exercise the
                        physical body, so must the soul and spirit be
                        exercised.
                          Our belief in one or another
                        doctrine of so-called faith
                        (an act of belief, but an act of belief is not
                        the true act of the will
                        and trust that is properly called: Faith) - our
                        beliefs are of no
                        meaning
                        here, in the same way an athlete doesn’t get any
                        change in his
                        capacities for what he believes are his skills,
                        but only for what he
                        actually becomes capable of doing when the trial
                        of performance comes.
                         Do not forget that we divide ourselves
                        against each other most
                        often over our passion for our personal beliefs,
                        when every detail of
                        Christ’s teachings, as practices - as efforts of
                        will, would have us
                        love, tolerate and forgive each other.
                        
                      
To make this discussion more
                        concrete, let us return to
                        the beginning, for we are here working with the
                        idea of the anti-Christ
                        spirit.  Most people in applying this term,
                        apply it to others,
                        not to themselves.   In this they are
                        throwing stones.
                        
                      
The anti-Christ spirit appears in
                        the soul as a sense of
                        egotism and self-importance.  We all bear
                        the anti-Christ spirit
                        within, and the long long process of the
                        elimination of this spirit is
                        only possible through our own continuous
                        activity.   We rid
                        ourselves of the beam in our own eye first,
                        before we can learn to make
                        viable and useful any observations about others.
                        
                      
This egotism can even happen (and
                        most often does) to
                        someone who likes to boast of how much they are
                        serving the Father and
                        the Son.  In many Churches we find the idea
                        that this or that
                        person is more godly than any other.
                          In Catholicism, the
                        members of that belief-system are encouraged to
                        call the Pope: His
                        Holiness.  The denial of the Father and the
                        Son described in the
                        John Letters is not a doctrinal matter but a
                        matter of will and of
                        practice.  We deny the Father and the Son
                        whenever we raise
                        ourselves, or another, up in status over others
                        (that is we refuse to
                        practice
                        washing the feet).  Recall that He said: Whatsoever
                        you do to the
                        least of these my brethren, you do so also unto
                        me.
                        
                      
The use of Christian ideas and
                        categories in politics
                        will always be a failure of practice.  It
                        is impossible to form a
                        truly Christian political idea that is
                        exclusive, or judgmental in its
                        nature, without violating most of Christ’s
                        teachings.  Which is
                        why Christ gave us a great hint for our practice
                        when he said: Render unto Caesar the
                        things
                        that are Caesars, and unto God the things that
                        are Gods; and, why so
                        many who strive today for Christian
                        practice concern themselves with issues of
                        social need and justice,
                        without any need to assert this or that person
                        is more godly and thus
                        will be a better politician.
                        
                      
Our relationships with each other
                        and our relationship
                        with God are not the same, although Christ gives
                        another great hint
                        when He said upon being asked what was the most
                        important commandment: The
                        most important is to love
                        God with all your heart and all your mind and
                        all your spirit; while
                        the second is like unto it, which is to love
                        your neighbor as yourself.  Among those who struggle
                        with these problems,
                        such as Catherine MacCoun in her book On
                        Becoming an Alchemist (a book concerned with
                        practice above all else following the Kings
                        stream of wisdom - see also
                        my book The Way of the
                        Fool) - in her
                        book the human being can be described as living
                        an existence at the
                        center point of a kind of Cross.   The
                        vertical element of
                        this Cross is our relationship to the invisible
                        Beings of what she
                        calls the upper and lower vertical (who we are
                        to love following the
                        first part of the great commandment).  The
                        horizontal element of
                        this Cross concerns our social relations with
                        each other (who we are to
                        love following the second part of the great
                        commandment).
                        
                      
The realm of Caesar is the social-political world of humanity, and this horizontal life operates according to different rules than does the vertical - the realm of God or the Divine Mystery. Would that this could be stated in a very simple fashion - unfortunately human social life is exquisitely complicated. All the same this next needs to be said:
Christ’s love manifests most
                        strongly in human existence
                        in the individual biography.  We are
                        individuals and Christ loves
                        each individual with the same Grace.  No
                        so-called holy or godly
                        person is more loved by Christ than even those
                        who are most fallen
                        (recall that Christ teaches to look after the
                        lost sheep, not just the
                        found ones).  Christ’s Grace is not even
                        limited to only those who
                        profess to believe in Him.  We do not love
                        our children based only
                        their profession of faith in us.   We
                        love them as they
                        are. 
                        
                        
                      
The circumstances of our individual
                        biography are
                        embedded in a social-political context, however.
                         Whenever we pray
                        (in secret) and seek contact with the Divine -
                        that contact is
                        available.  Christ is not somewhere in a
                        kind of hyper-cosmic
                        spiritual realm outside us, but rather, as was
                        understood by the
                        disciples, He was/is Imminent.  He says in
                        Luke: the kingdom of heaven is
                        inside you.
                        
                      
Here we can better understand the
                        confusion of many when
                        they thought that the coming of the kingdom
                        meant a radical change in
                        outer social existence.  The immediate
                        coming of the kingdom, as
                        taught by Christ, concerns what happens when we
                        actually practice.
                         The narrow gate to the kingdom is inside
                        us, and by cleaning out
                        the inside of our own cup, we come through that
                        gate to the kingdom.
                          Outer social life and life in the
                        kingdom are two different
                        things.  The nearness of the coming of the
                        kingdom never was meant
                        to be about Christ’s earthly world rulership.
                         Recall that He
                        said: my kingdom is not of this world.
                        
                      
Contemporary Christian practice, in
                        that we speak of
                        letting Christ into our lives and the rich
                        experience reported by those
                        who manage to actually do this, is valuable and
                        real.  The
                        problems come from the errant sea of theological
                        (argumentative)
                        meaning in which this event of having a direct
                        encounter with Christ is
                        placed.   Ordinary Christian practice
                        (social service, going
                        to church, prayer etc.) does produce effects and
                        can lead to
                        experiences of Christ, but the biblical based
                        interpretations of this
                        personal event, colored with doctrines and
                        dogmas that divide us into
                        different sects and rites, - these
                        idea-structures lead us astray in
                        our thoughts.   Our heart finds the
                        right place, but our mind
                        is over-influenced by systems of vain belief
                        everywhere at odds with
                        each other, most of which were born in the
                        judgmental beam in our own
                        mind’s eye.   The multiplicity of
                        Christian faiths or beliefs
                        ought to cause us to ask questions about their
                        validity, a worthy
                        criticism many contemporary thinkers apply to
                        what they perceive as a
                        Christianity filled with systems and doctrines
                        completely at odds with
                        each other.
                        
                      
If we deepen our practice, we will
                        come to know this
                        Christianity of the heart (as against one of the
                        mind or intellect) as
                        an experience
                        of the subtle and delicate presence of Fullness
                        and the
                        fullness of Presence - what in Acts is called
                        Holy Breath.  As
                        John the Baptist foretold: The one
                        coming after me, I’m not big enough to carry his
                        sandals.  While I baptize you in the waters
                        of repentance, He will
                        baptize you with Holy Breath and Fire.
                        
                      
Before going deeper into this quite
                        accurate and
                        prophetic statement of John the Baptist, let us
                        make a small but
                        significant digression.
                        
                      
In our age, particularly in America
                        but common as well
                        all over the world, there seems to many to be a
                        new spirituality in the
                        wind (so to speak).   As part of this
                        new spirituality we can
                        come upon websites and blogs and books and all
                        manner of sources, where
                        are quoted all kinds of wise sayings, mostly out
                        of the cultural East,
                        although other sources are used as well.
                          People will share
                        these wise sayings with each other on the social
                        networks such as
                        Facebook, and then for a moment entertain these
                        sayings as personal
                        thoughts.  With such thoughts in mind (as a
                        kind of background
                        conceptual music in the soul - in the gateway to
                        the true
                        inwardness), people will go through their days
                        believing that they are
                        becoming more and more spiritual, and more and
                        more spiritually
                        developed as a personality.
                        
                      
Many who style themselves as
                        Christian do a similar thing
                        - they share what they believe are wise sayings.
                          Communities, in fact, tend to
                        develop special individual
                        vocabularies of such seemingly wise sentiments,
                        which everyone is
                        socially encouraged to accept as true.
                        
                      
From an objective point of view of
                        the intimacy of soul
                        life, we have to characterize such wise sayings
                        as mere sentimental platitudes.   The world has been,
                        especially through its
                        fascination with Eastern cultural thought,
                        occupied with these
                        sentiments (which speak of kindness and love and
                        oneness and such) as
                        if by having such thoughts in the soul one has
                        attained a kind of
                        renewed spiritual grace.   This is not
                        so, but rather is a
                        kind of horrible illusion that is suffocating
                        the individual human
                        spirit in a kind of self-satisfying pretense
                        that has been aptly
                        recognized when one remembers this phrase from
                        Western culture: the
                        road to hell is paved
                        with good intentions.
                        
                      
These sentimental platitudes -
                        these seemingly good
                        thoughts, which often give us a nice warm
                        feeling about ourselves, are
                        a trap for the spirit.   The nature of
                        the trap in the good
                        intentions that pave the road to hell is that we
                        can then believe,
                        because our soul occupies itself with nice warm
                        platitudes on a daily
                        basis, that we have accomplished something in
                        the realm of the
                        spiritual.  This is not so, unless, we take hold of that warm thought
                        in such a way that
                        our will becomes different.  True spiritual
                        development has little
                        to do with the content of the mind, as a aspect
                        of soul life by itself,
                        without the good thought causing us to activate
                        the will in such a way
                        that we start to change our Way of Life, down to
                        its most intimate
                        core.  
                        
                      
While our will can cause a change
                        in the cognitive
                        process itself, such that we learn to produce
                        our own wisdom (no longer
                        needing to immerse the soul in the sea of
                        borrowed sentimental
                        platitudes), the crucial matter is the change in
                        the will itself, by
                        the will itself.  This will is in fact the
                        higher element of our
                        spirit, and as long as we let it slumber in the
                        warm bed of sentimental
                        thoughts, it will not wake to any of the soul’s
                        true potential
                        spiritual capacities.  
                        
                      
In the light of these thoughts, let
                        us now consider more
                        carefully: The
                        one coming after me, I’m not big enough to carry
                        his sandals.
                         While I baptize you in the waters of
                        repentance, He will baptize
                        you with Holy Breath and Fire.
                        
                      
Most of us acquire our picture of
                        the world in a mediated fashion.  We don’t experience
                        it directly, but
                        through the actions and communications of some
                        other source.
                          World news, for example, we get
                        through news sources.
                          We in fact call these sources: media.
                         We
                        also
                        get
                        news (of a sort) about our family or our work
                        place
                        also through others.  We are given stories,
                        which often are not so
                        much truthful, but rather are gossip.
                          The story teller
                        frequently has an agenda.
                        
                      
From these mediated sources we
                        construct inwardly in our
                        consciousness pictures of the meaning of the
                        world.  In greater or
                        lesser degrees this constructed inward
                        collection of mental pictures is
                        flawed, for both the story teller, and our own
                        biases, infect the
                        qualitative nature of this inner understanding
                        (all beam and little
                        mote).
                        
                      
This process of meaning-creation
                        begins in our childhood
                        and continues throughout the rest of our lives.
                         Some aspects are
                        more formal such as are created by what we call
                        education, and as well
                        by that which we may or may not be taught
                        through religious sources.
                         We swim in a sea of stories of the meaning
                        of the world, and by
                        reflection, the meaning of our selves.
                        
                      
In the present it has become
                        particularly important to
                        human beings to determine for themselves this
                        meaning of existence.
                         We rebel against the control of our
                        thoughts, although
                        paradoxically we often feel so incapable that we
                        turn to others in such
                        a way as to give to them power over our own
                        thoughts.  We do this
                        whenever we succumb to a talking head on cable
                        television, or the
                        rantings of a preacher in our church, or the
                        ideas of the priests of
                        natural science.  Any where we feel a lack
                        of personal or
                        individual capacity, we are prone to surrender
                        to others the creation
                        of the mental pictures we hold regarding the
                        reality of our own
                        experience.  We let others tell us what our
                        own
                        experience means.
                        
                      
Basically we are then not very
                        awake to the fundamental
                        questions regarding this meaning-creation
                        process.  All the same,
                        certain characteristics of the world can be
                        observed.
                        
                      
Each biography has an outward set
                        of circumstances unique
                        to it, and is as well inwardly individual and
                        unique.  While we
                        all, as human beings, have consciousness (soul)
                        and self-consciousness
                        (spirit) the content of those are unique to our
                        individuality.
                         That certain aspects of what calls itself
                        natural science tend to
                        think our physical biology is determinative of
                        this, that idea itself
                        is a modern world view mediated by dominant
                        aspects of the culture of
                        natural science, which would unjustly impose its
                        meaning on our free
                        understanding.
                        
                      
If we survey the world carefully,
                        without bias, we see
                        many many different languages and cultures and
                        social-historical
                        circumstances.   One person grows up
                        in South L.A., becomes a
                        gang member and dies young.  Another grows
                        up street poor in
                        Bombay, finds a way to obtain an education of a
                        sorts and ends up
                        working as a telephone clerk serving Western
                        businesses, all the while
                        raising a family.   I could go on, but
                        the important point it
                        to recognize that each unique individual also
                        lives within a unique set
                        of social-cultural-political circumstances.
                         Yes, there are many
                        similarities, but once we get into the details
                        these assumed
                        similarities fail to encompass the true nature
                        of the totality of any
                        individual biography.
                        
                      
Part of the inward mental pictures
                        of each individual
                        includes some kind of meaning of the world, both
                        in a personal way, and
                        as a recipient of media - that is, most of us live
                        somewhere where we acquire,
                        through mediated processes - that is through the
                        stories of others,
                        mental pictures of what the rest of the world is
                        like, and how our part
                        of that world fits into the larger whole - that
                        is: its meaning.
                        
                      
Shakespeare took hold of this in a
                        rather pithy (but
                        one-sided) fashion when he wrote:  All the
                        world’s a stage,
                         And all the men and women merely players:
                        They have their exits
                        and their entrances; And one man in his time
                        plays many parts, ...
                        
                      
As we each have a different mental
                        picture of the wider
                        world and its meaning, and how that relates to
                        our personal existence
                        and meaning, we will behave in accord with those
                        mental pictures and as
                        well due to and out of our individual nature.
                         All the same we do
                        share certain very special elements of this
                        structure or order to and
                        in the world.
                        
                      
The surrounding circumstances of
                        each biography are a sea
                        of troubles.  Again Shakespeare:  To be,
                        or not to be--that is
                        the question: Whether ‘tis nobler in the mind to
                        suffer  The
                        slings and arrows of outrageous fortune  Or
                        to take arms against a
                        sea of troubles  And by opposing end them.
                        To die, to sleep--
                        
                      
Each unique individual is embedded
                        in certain fires of
                        experience (sea of troubles), which cause them
                        to have to make certain
                        choices (the sea of troubles doesn’t cause the
                        choices themselves - we
                        still choose, but the necessity of choosing - that is caused by
                        the sea of troubles).
                         While often such choices can be seen to be
                        similar, they are not
                        the same, if
                        we carefully observe the details as against the
                        superficial
                        similarities, - each choice is unique.
                         While all
                        abortions and all murders seem to be similar
                        acts, the context and meaning in which any individual carries
                        out such actions is
                        unique.
                        
                      
Yet, so-called Christians judge
                        others, not having
                        learned to practice the teaching of the beam and
                        the mote, and form
                        mobs as well and then throw stones having
                        determined someone else is
                        not as morally perfect as are they.  But
                        even this flaw and the
                        related mob action are also an example of the
                        fire of all biographies
                        today, because a major cause of this fire
                        belongs to us.  Our
                        actions (the consequence of our choices) produce
                        effects and the
                        effects on others come back toward us (the folk
                        wisdom is: what goes
                        around comes around).
                        
                      
The whole world burns in a sea of
                        troubles, and seeing
                        this rapidly destructive sea many Christians,
                        with some small
                        justification, believe this is the End Times.
                          The world
                        does burn, but when our view of this burning
                        lacks the skill and
                        practice of mastering the beam and the mote, our
                        mental pictures of the
                        meaning of this burning will be distorted by our
                        beam.  Acting on
                        the world through this beam will contribute to
                        the general social
                        conflagration.  We only can come to the
                        cognition of the truth of
                        this situation by learning to overcome the beam
                        in our own mind’s eye -
                        overcome the semi-conscious judgmental feelings
                        by which we see the
                        world according to our own biases.
                        
                      
Everywhere we see, in the stories
                        mediated by the news
                        sources, the consequences of the beam of
                        judgment of all of us as this
                        judgment creates more problems than it solves.
                         The political life
                        of America, with its blogs and its tea parties
                        and its shouting heads
                        on cable television and its Christian right
                        groups and its liberal
                        knee-jerk groups - all this chaos and confusion
                        of different screaming
                        voices of points of view is born in the beam of
                        judgment.
                        
                      
How did this baptismal fire arise?
                        
                      
Christ also said: I come
                        not to bring peace but a sword, to separate
                        father from son, and mother from daughter ...
                         He
                        did
                        this
                        by giving us individuality, by creating us
                        unique and
                        supporting us in being unique.  By His
                        sword of the gift of
                        uniqueness He divides us into individuals, and
                        by the fire born in our
                        conflict generated by our individuality and its
                        unredeemed judgments
                        born in the beam, we are then faced with the
                        trials of the times.
                        
                      
These trials are three-fold in
                        their nature.  The
                        first comes from our reactions to the nearby
                        conditions of our
                        biography - our work life, our family life, our
                        economic life - all our
                        intimate social relations.  This is the
                        intimate element of our
                        portion of the sea of troubles.
                        
                      
The second comes from our reactions
                        to the Stage Setting
                        in which our biography arises.  This
                        perception of the Stage
                        Setting - of the meaning of present day
                        historical events - is rooted
                        in our own judgments and understanding of the
                        world.  We have
                        created mental pictures of the world, about
                        which we have deep
                        feelings.  
                        
                      
In acting and choosing concerning
                        what we see as modern
                        historical events, as well as what we see of our
                        intimate social
                        relations, we tend to join groups - we seek like
                        minded communities for
                        mutual support.  We join churches,
                        political parties, the army, -
                        we give money to Doctors without Borders, we
                        serve in helping the
                        homeless, we join survivalist militias - the
                        choices are endless.
                        
                      
The third trial concerns our
                        inwardness.  We have
                        thoughts about which we can be obsessive.
                         We have feelings to
                        which we become attached and won’t let go.
                         We have impulses of
                        will that we do not restrain.  The beam is
                        rooted in this
                        inwardness, with the same tenacity as the roots
                        of a well formed and
                        very vital tree.  It is no accident Christ
                        speaks of this as a
                        beam or a log - that as wooden.
                        
                      
The feeling judgment is part of the
                        needed skills of our
                        soul life.  We do not want to get rid of
                        it, but we do very much
                        want to master it.  The beam element or log
                        comes from the
                        thoughts, feelings and impulses of will that we
                        let become old and
                        rigid.   A young tree is growing,
                        vital and alive.  Only
                        a dead tree falls in the forest and needs to rot
                        in order to serve the
                        whole.  When we are children we do not
                        possess this old soul
                        structure - everything is vital and alive and
                        magical when we are
                        young.   Here is the clue to why
                        Christ says: Lest ye become again as
                        little children, ye cannot enter the kingdom of
                        heaven.
                        
                      
The more inflexible we let become
                        our personality - the
                        more we are burdened with dead logs in the soul
                        - the more dead and dry
                        this old timber is - and the more easily it can
                        be consumed in the
                        fires and trials of the biography. Wash
                        out the inside of your
                        cup, He said, if you
                        want the outside to be
                        truly clean.
                        
                      
To learn to deal with the beam is
                        to undertake a
                        house-cleaning of the temple of our own soul.
                         To recognize the
                        beam and how it arises in the soul is to begin a
                        great work - a work we
                        do not have to do alone.   Remember: Wherever
                        two or more are
                        gathered; and, I will
                        be with you to the
                        ends of time.  It
                        is no accident that 12
                        Step work requires a community, and that in
                        America these are often
                        oriented in a somewhat Christian Way (meetings
                        end with the Our Father).
                        
                      
Since this work on the beam is
                        within the inwardness -
                        within the own soul, it is work of the spirit.
                         When we work out
                        of our own spirit in the right way, seeking to
                        actually practice what
                        Christ taught, He then keeps us company.
                          In this company we
                        now begin to know that other part of the baptism
                        spoken of by John the
                        Baptist - Holy Breath.   Not only are
                        we to be baptized by
                        the fires in our unique biography, coming toward
                        us from the outside -
                        from the social-historical community-family
                        context in which we live
                        our life - we are also to be baptized within by Holy Breath.
                        
                      
Now this deepening of our modern
                        understanding of this
                        baptism is accompanied by New Revelation, as
                        this prophecy of the first
                        John the Baptist recognized, because we live in
                        the time of the True
                        Second Coming.  Christ brings this Baptism
                        as part of His coming
                        again.  In other places I write in more
                        detail of how Rudolf
                        Steiner (1861-1925) was the second John the
                        Baptist figure - the one
                        announcing the True Second Coming - the voice
                        crying in the wilderness
                        of scientific materialism.  This True
                        Second Coming in “clouds of
                        heaven” - in the heaven within us as Christ
                        points out in Luke - in the
                        depths of our own conscious inwardness or soul
                        life - leads to a Second
                        Eucharist to accompany the Original.
                          This too is
                        experienced by modern disciples who follow the
                        practices.  See my
                        essay/video on Saving
                        the
                        Catholic
                        Religion
                        from the Roman Church.
                        
                      
The experience of Holy Breath comes about this way, as is described in my essay: The Meaning of Earth Existence in the Age of the Consciousness Soul, an essay that can be read for free in many places on my website, and which is the summa of my book: the Way of the Fool. Here is part of what I wrote there:
Thus we
                        are being truly and
                        continuously born again today (each act of moral
                        grace is another
                        Second Ethereal Eucharist and birth), from out
                        of our spiritual
                        childhood and into our spiritual adulthood,
                        baptized outwardly by the
                        fires of the times in our biographies, and by
                        holy breath within - a
                        Second Eucharist where Christ gives of His own
                        Substance that biblical
                        knowing of the Good - His own Being. For us to
                        truly know the Good,
                        requires we join our own soul to the Good. Our
                        yearning to author the
                        Good out of ourselves is how we participate in
                        the Baptism of being
                        truly born again, and how we participate in the
                        sacrament of the Second
                        Eucharist. Christ also participates by giving to
                        us, out of Himself,
                        this very Good - this Moral Grace. When having
                        received within
                        ourselves this sacrament of the Second
                        Eucharist, an act that only
                        arises because we seek it and form its actual
                        application, we remain
                        free - we create moral law - we author the
                        fulfillment of the law and
                        the prophets. Given to us within by Christ as a
                        capacity, we then
                        author its incarnate nature and pass it on to
                        the world of our
                        biographies, - from out of us thence into the
                        outer world (or into the
                        inner world), do we then ourselves author this
                        Good: love engendered
                        free moral grace.
                        
                      
But how
                        does Christ do this?
                        Is this Good offered to us in this Second
                        Sacrament as if it was a
                        thing, passed by hand from one to another?
                        
                      
No.
                        Christ as holy breath
                        breathes upon the slumbering burning embers of
                        our own good nature,
                        just as we breath upon a tiny fire in order to
                        increase its power. He
                        sacrifices His Being into this breath, which
                        gives Life to the tiny
                        ember-like fire of our moral heart. The holy
                        breath becomes within the
                        soul of each human being who asks, seeks and
                        knocks - a gift of Living
                        Warmth that enlivens our own free fire of moral
                        will.
                        
                      
The
                        Narrow Gate opens both
                        ways, making possible thereby the intimate
                        dialog and conversation of
                        moral deeds and thoughts that is woven between
                        the i-AM, the Thou and
                        the Christ (wherever two or more are
                        gathered...), which intimate
                        conversation leads ultimately to the
                        consecration - the character
                        development - of the soul.
                        
                      
In this
                        way our thinking can
                        now behold the Meaning of Earth Existence in the
                        Age of the
                        Consciousness Soul: A macro-cosmic Rite, a
                        Second Ethereal Eucharist,
                        in which we give birth out of ourselves in the
                        most intimate way
                        possible, knowledge of the Good, not as mere
                        thought, but as Life
                        filled moral will, breathed into greater power
                        by the sacrifice of the
                        true ethereal substance of Christ’s Being in the
                        form of holy
                        breath.  
                        
                      
The
                        outer world is but a
                        seeming, and what is brought by the Culture of
                        Media mere pictures of
                        the Stage Setting for the World Temple that is
                        home to our biographies.
                        When we think away this outer seeming - this
                        logos formed and maya
                        based sense world, and concentrate only on the
                        Idea of the moral grace
                        (Life filled holy breath) we receive and then
                        enact out of the wind
                        warmed fire of individual moral will - as
                        individual law givers, as the
                        fulfillment of the law and the prophets - we
                        create this Meaning of
                        Earth Existence. Every act of moral grace, given
                        greater Life within in
                        the deepest intimacy of our life of soul, is an
                        ethereal communion with
                        Christ, even though we may only experience it as
                        what to us is a mere
                        thought of what is the Good at some moment of
                        need in the biography.
                        
                      
Christ
                        gives us this Gift, by
                        Grace, freely out of Love, and with no need that
                        we see Him as its
                        Author. We hunger inwardly to know what the
                        right thing to do is, and
                        when this hungering is authentic, we receive
                        Christ’s Holy Breath. This
                        does not come so much as a thought-picture of
                        the Good in response to
                        our questing spirit, but rather as the contentless
                        breathing
                        substance
                        of Christ’s Being. We are touched (inspired) by
                        Love, and at this touch
                        we shape that Breath into the thought that we
                        then know. The nature of
                        its application and form in which we incarnate
                        this thought is entirely
                        our own. We shape the thought completely out of
                        our own freedom - our
                        own moral fire of will, for only we can apply it
                        accurately in the
                        individual circumstances of our lives.
                        
                      
As the
                        Age of the
                        Consciousness Soul unfolds accompanied by this
                        Second Eucharist, the
                        Social World of human relationships begins to
                        light and warm from
                        within. For each free act of moral grace rests
                        upon this Gift of
                        Christ’s Being to us - an ethereal substance
                        received in the communion
                        within the Temple of the own Soul, freely given
                        in Love whenever we
                        genuinely: ask, seek and knock during our search
                        for the Good. Our
                        participation in this Rite, this trial by Fire
                        leavened by Holy Breath,
                        leads us to the co-creation of new light and new
                        warmth - the delicate
                        budding and growing point of co-participated
                        moral deeds out of which
                        the New Jerusalem is slowly being born.
                        
                      
This
                        co-creation is entirely
                        inward, a slowly dawning Sun within the macro
                        Invisible World of
                        Spirit. Moreover, we do it collectively (as
                        humanity). While each of us
                        contributes our part, it is our collective
                        conscious celebration of the
                        Second Ethereal Eucharist (creating the Good)
                        that begins the
                        transubstantiation of the collective (presently
                        materialized and
                        fallen) thought-world of humanity into the New
                        Jerusalem.
                        
                      
Thought
                        is real, and it is as
                        equally real as is matter. The Original
                        Eucharist transforms the
                        already divinely given now-dying substance of
                        earthly matter into
                        Life-filled Spirit through our ritual invitation
                        of the active Grace of
                        the Divine Mystery; and, our participation in
                        the Second Ethereal
                        Eucharist transforms dead thought into living
                        ethereal Substance,
                        through the mystery of our individual spirit’s
                        active and embryonic
                        grace, that becomes united into the collective
                        co-creation of humanity.
                        
                      
In the
                        Invisible World of
                        Spirit, we co-participate, out of the own moral
                        fire of will, in the
                        Dawn of the New Sun that is to become the New
                        Jerusalem.
                        
                      
Now that we know of the True Second
                        Coming, of the
                        meaning of the baptism by Fire and by Holy
                        Breath, and the true meaning
                        of the anti-Christ spirit, we can turn our
                        thinking more directly and
                        concretely to our public life, and its shared
                        trials in the social
                        realm of the social-political existence of
                        humanity, and the mystery
                        there of Render
                        unto Caesar the things that are Caesar’s and
                        unto God the things that
                        are Gods.
                        
                      
At the time that Christ taught,
                        people were less
                        intellectually sophisticated in some ways and
                        naturally wiser in
                        others.    The human impulse that
                        was to produce natural
                        science had not yet been born.  Yet, it was
                        also a time that stood
                        at a very important cross-roads.   We
                        were in danger, not so
                        much from Beings of Evil as the End Times folk
                        obsess about, but from
                        ourselves.  
                        
                      
We were ignorant and impulsive.
                         The Divine Mystery
                        knew what was to come, as we began to shed this
                        ignorance and start to
                        learn to master the world of the Creation.
                         Yet, we were also
                        deeply loved, and above all this love valued our
                        freedom.  We
                        don’t raise children to be copies of ourselves
                        (unless we are flawed
                        and don’t love them), but to be themselves.
                         So on the cusp of
                        humanity’s journey, from out of its spiritual
                        childhood toward its
                        spiritual adulthood, the God came to live like
                        us, to die like us, and
                        to give Himself to us in the form of what
                        teachings we might then
                        appreciate and find helpful as we grew and
                        matured.
                        
                      
Being God, the future was (in a
                        way) an open book, so we
                        were given a lot which was to prepare us for
                        what was to come.
                          Our psychological nature and our
                        moral nature and our flaws
                        were obvious to Divine insight.   Deep
                        guidance was offered
                        and it was left to us to do with this, out of
                        our own freedom, whatever
                        we would choose to do.  It was assumed we
                        would make errors of
                        judgment.  Read once more the final words
                        of the Sermon on the
                        Mount: "Therefore
                        everyone who hears these words of mine and puts
                        them into practice is
                        like a wise man who built his house on the rock.
                        The rain came down,
                        the streams rose, and the winds blew and beat
                        against that house; yet
                        it did not fall, because it had its foundation
                        on the rock. But
                        everyone who hears these words of mine and does
                        not put them into
                        practice is like a foolish man who built his
                        house on sand. The rain
                        came down, the streams rose, and the winds blew
                        and beat against that
                        house, and it fell with a great crash."
                         Matthew 7: 24-27
                        
                      
Out of our freedom and maturation,
                        among many things, we
                        have produced various kinds of versions of
                        social order, or what some
                        call: the
                        State.  This is
                        what Christ referred to
                        when he said: Render
                        unto
                        Caesar
                        the
                        things that are Caesars.
                         He was not referring to a person, but to a
                        common social
                        necessity - for community life requires shared
                        work and some degree of
                        order.  Here Christ is pointing out to us
                        that what this shared
                        order becomes, depends upon what we give to it,
                        or render it.  The
                        State
                        -
                        our
                        shared social order - is a human creation.
                        
                      
Some will assert otherwise, and even insist it must be otherwise. If we listen carefully to these, however, we will hear that what they really assert is that the State be what they think it should be, and they claim in support of their view that this is what God wants. We are fools to believe them, for what human being can know the mind of God, ever.
We can know parts of the mind of
                        God, however.  We
                        gain some of this knowledge the better we
                        understand the Creation
                        itself.  We gain other parts by better
                        appreciation of ourselves -
                        for we too are a part of the Creation.
                         Yet, our freedom grants us
                        our own sphere of creativity, and this in it
                        broadest sense is what we
                        do that provides social order.  We do this
                        in two ways.
                        
                      
The first way we do this is by self
                        discipline.  We
                        rule ourselves first.  I act in the outer
                        world and I act there
                        upon others.  I also act in my own gateway
                        to the inner world - in
                        my own soul.  There I create thoughts,
                        meaning and understanding
                        (knowledge in all its forms).  There too I
                        can be free.
                        
                      
The second way we provide social
                        order is through
                        cooperation - or not.  We either work
                        together or we do not.
                         This includes any one-to-one relationship,
                        all family situations,
                        and work situations, as well as larger more
                        complex social forms, such
                        as large local communities, and Nation States.
                         We participate in
                        all these simultaneously and in complicated and
                        differentiated ways.
                        
                      
Christ gave us teachings entirely
                        directed towards
                        self-rule.  There is no better advice than
                        these teachings for the
                        purpose of self-rule - not anywhere else in the
                        world.  This is
                        because of the Divine Love that is at the root
                        of these teachings.
                        
                      
Now don’t get confused thinking I
                        am putting the
                        so-called Christian Religion as superior to all
                        other religions.
                         Christ never suggested that.
                          For example, He said: I am
                        the Way, the Truth and
                        the Life.
                          He did not say I am the
                        best way, or a certain belief, or a specific
                        kind of life.  He
                        also said: In my
                        Father’s House are many mansions.  If we
                        practice His teachings, we will see directly
                        with our own mind that
                        such statements are meant to be inclusive, not
                        exclusive.  There
                        is a Christian
                        Religion because human beings created it. God
                        did not create it.
                        
                      
If we follow a Way (in one of the included mansions or religions in the Father’s House), and if we follow the Truth (as against parochial institutional religious dogmas and doctrines), we will come to true Life. That is: His Being encompasses, and is, all Ways, all Truth and all Life. He never urged us to judge other Ways and other Truths, but rather He asks us to not judge at all. Where conflict arises among people following different Paths and religious doctrines - that is a human problem created by the absence of self-rule.
To appreciate more this mystery:
                        ... I have an
                        acquaintance of deep and penetrating spiritual
                        experience, and she
                        relates that due to certain attitudes of the
                        Greeks and the Hebrews, at
                        the time of Christ’s Incarnation, neither group
                        (as Paul almost noted)
                        could fully bring to life. in the family and the
                        community, the social
                        teachings of Christ.  As a consequence,
                        these were deflected into
                        the future a bit, and arrived as an aspect of
                        the coming into existence
                        of the religion of Islam.  But because
                        Western culture lives so
                        lost in the beam in the mind’s eye, it sees only
                        the most flawed and
                        degenerate aspects of that religious impulse.
                         The true social
                        life of members of the Islamic faith is
                        invisible, in part because it
                        is consciously protected (hidden).
                        
                      
Would that those who think of
                        themselves as Christians
                        could be more open minded and inclusive, the
                        seeming clash of
                        civilizations could take an entirely different
                        course, for both the
                        Muslim world and the Christian world have much
                        to teach to each other.
                        
                      
The idea of Christ, as taught in
                        most so-called Christian
                        institutional religious systems, is not the
                        Truth, as should be obvious
                        by the exclusive nature of those systems.
                         We are here striving to
                        come to a real idea of Christ, through
                        participation and practice in
                        the teachings He has given us.  We follow
                        and build our house on
                        rock and then we will learn how to truly see.
                         This is why these
                        collections of videos and writings are all made
                        in relationship to the
                        Coming Metamorphosis of Christianity - this new
                        Christianity will be
                        completely unlike the former.
                        
                      
But this problem is a digression
                        from the core question: What
                        can the above do to help
                        us appreciate what is going on in our present as
                        regards our public
                        life?
                        
                      
Everywhere in public life we see
                        its domination by the
                        anti-Christ spirit.  This takes the form of
                        egotism, boasting,
                        judgmentalism and all kinds of lack of
                        self-rule.  That various
                        so-called Christian sects assert a more
                        righteous point of political
                        view is even more disturbing and destructive of
                        the needed harmony in
                        social existence.   Cooperation for
                        the purposes of a healthy
                        social order is necessarily rooted in the
                        impulse to moral
                        self-rule. 
                        
                        
                      
How often, recently, have we found
                        out that the leaders,
                        of a so-called Christian group that is really a
                        mob - that through
                        self-love throws stones at gay people - these
                        turn out to be gay
                        themselves.  Lost in the beam, in their
                        judgmentalism of moral
                        self-righteousness, individuals are unable to
                        either learn to forgive
                        themselves or others.   As a practice,
                        it is self-forgiveness
                        that is the foundation for all other
                        forgiveness, by the way.
                         Remember, wash out the inside of the cup
                        of the soul-life first.
                        
                      
This then helps us understand the
                        state of the realm of
                        Caesar today, for what is mostly rendered it is
                        nothing less than the anti-Christ
                        spirit.  Our
                        public life burns in a conflagration of beams
                        of judgment - beams of self-righteousness,
                        mostly involved in the
                        self-love of our own egotistical boasting of
                        public virtue.  I’m
                        right,
                        he’s
                        wrong is the basic
                        refrain.
                          Nearly everyone needs to join a 12
                        Step group to deal with
                        that addiction.
                        
                      
In this conflagration our
                        civilization is falling.
                         Western Civilization is failing, and out
                        of its dying there is to
                        appear a new becoming.  The qualitative
                        nature of this new
                        becoming - this new civilization - will depend
                        upon what is rendered
                        it.  If we render unto Caesar, without at
                        the same time rendering
                        unto God, we will create one kind of
                        civilization.
                        
                      
Now the rendering unto Caesar is a
                        mixture - a totality
                        of many actions across a wide spectrum of
                        possible choices.  The
                        social question in part is how does this mixture
                        become a sum - what
                        are to be the dominant influences.
                        
                      
Christian practice is the rendering
                        unto God part of
                        Christ’s teaching of the relationship between
                        the Divine Mystery and
                        the social realm.  When we actually practice,
                      we change. To render
                        unto God is to learn self-rule
                        according to the teachings of Christ.  The
                        teaching of the realm
                        of Caesar and the
                        realm of God reveals a reciprocal relationship.
                         By practice (rendering unto God what is
                        Gods) we become capable
                        of matters of which we were not capable before.
                         As we become - as
                        we develop by our practice - so also increases
                        our ability to render
                        unto Caesar what is Caesars.  Learning to
                        leave aside the beam
                        (rendering unto God) enables us to better render
                        unto Caesar, because
                        we have changed from egotistical
                        self-righteousness into a human being
                        that now can clearly see the mote in the eye of
                        the Thou and are thus
                        better able to help them with their mote
                        (instead of throw stones at
                        them).
                        
                      
The qualitative nature of our
                        shared social-political
                        existence varies according to the degree that
                        those who want to engage
                        in Christian practice actually succeed in
                        carrying out that practice.
                         The less self-righteously and
                        hypocritically so-called Christians
                        judge others, the more the heat of political discourse
                        decreases.  The less heated (hateful) the
                        rhetoric, the more
                        accessible are workable compromises.
                          That so many in public
                        life claim to be believers in Christ, yet at the
                        same time fail at
                        Christian practice, reveals how much hypocrisy
                        still rules the lives of
                        those who boast that they are followers of the
                        law - that is how much
                        the Letters of John still unveil to us the
                        presence of the anti-Christ spirit in our lives.
                        
                      
Of course, as this act of judging
                        is a universally human
                        gesture of the life of the soul, all, including
                        what I call Natural
                        Christians in my essay
                        of the same name, we
                        all can
                        raise the qualitative nature of what is rendered
                        to our shared public
                        social-political life by the same practice.
                          Many do, as we
                        all know.  Would that many of our political
                        leaders would be more
                        willing to act as true Christians than to claim
                        (boast) to be
                        Christian, for the anti-Christ spirit that lives
                        in such hypocrisy
                        harms us all.
                        
                      
So is Barack Obama the AntiChrist?
                         No.  Is he,
                        like most of us however, of the anti-Christ
                        spirit - that is
                        egotistical, judgmental and boastful?  Yes.
                        
                      
Should he be thrown out of office
                        for being just like us?
                         The real questions of political discourse
                        are, as I noted above,
                        exquisitely complicated.  What is
                        fundamentally true is that which
                        Christ observed: What we render - what we give
                        to our shared public
                        life - that is what it will become.  If we
                        are superficially
                        judgmental, egotistical and caustic, then
                        Civilization will continue to
                        burn to the ground.  If we become the
                        change we want in the world
                        by striving for self-rule, and if we  are
                        cooperative, we just
                        might give birth to a Phoenix out of this
                        growing pile of presently
                        active fire, still burning embers and coals, and
                        smoking ash we call
                        the modern social world.
                      
                      
                    
                        
